diff options
| author | Frans Pop <elendil@planet.nl> | 2006-04-29 19:46:52 +0000 |
|---|---|---|
| committer | Frans Pop <elendil@planet.nl> | 2006-04-29 19:46:52 +0000 |
| commit | 38d0077a7ee31c6e72bdb098c494ff0e4a6af8a5 (patch) | |
| tree | 6b652a2117c4d27522cac0632c09f5dd3c0568fb /fi | |
| parent | 675e5edbece0a84afe6745bc10d6868503a8c828 (diff) | |
| download | installation-guide-38d0077a7ee31c6e72bdb098c494ff0e4a6af8a5.zip | |
- Switch Finnish from XML-based to PO-based translation
- Correct placement of changelog entries from Joey
Diffstat (limited to 'fi')
160 files changed, 0 insertions, 18547 deletions
diff --git a/fi/administrivia/administrivia.xml b/fi/administrivia/administrivia.xml deleted file mode 100644 index 611b58af0..000000000 --- a/fi/administrivia/administrivia.xml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,155 +0,0 @@ -<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> -<!-- original version: 29689 untranslated --> - -<appendix id="administrivia"> - <title>Administrivia</title> - - - <sect1 id="about"> - <title>About This Document</title> - -<para> - -This manual was created for Sarge's debian-installer, based on -the Woody installation manual for boot-floppies, which was based -on earlier Debian installation manuals, and on the Progeny -distribution manual which was released under GPL in 2003. - -</para><para> - -This document is written in DocBook XML. Output formats are generated -by various programs using information from the -<classname>docbook-xml</classname> and -<classname>docbook-xsl</classname> packages. - -</para><para> - -In order to increase the maintainability of this document, we use -a number of XML features, such as entities and profiling attributes. -These play a role akin to variables and conditionals in programming -languages. The XML source to this document contains information for -each different architecture — profiling attributes are used to -isolate certain bits of text as architecture-specific. - -<!-- -</para><para> - -Translators can uncomment this paragraph and add an acknowledgement -to the people responsible for the translation of the manual. -Translation teams are advised to just mention the coordinator and maybe -major contributors and thank everybody else in a phrase like "all -translators and reviewers from the translation team for <your language> -at <your l10n mailinglist>". - -(Note: support for this for translations using PO files will be added - soon.) ---> - -</para> - </sect1> - - <sect1 id="contributing"> - <title>Contributing to This Document</title> - -<para> - -If you have problems or suggestions regarding this document, you -should probably submit them as a bug report against the package -<classname>debian-installer-manual</classname>. See the -<classname>reportbug</classname> package or read the online -documentation of the <ulink url="&url-bts;">Debian Bug -Tracking System</ulink>. It would be nice if you could check the -<ulink url="&url-bts;debian-installer-manual">open bugs against -debian-installer-manual</ulink> to see whether your problem has -already been reported. If so, you can supply additional corroboration -or helpful information to -<email><replaceable>XXXX</replaceable>@bugs.debian.org</email>, -where <replaceable>XXXX</replaceable> is the number for the -already-reported bug. - -</para><para> - -Better yet, get a copy of the DocBook source for this document, and -produce patches against it. The DocBook source can be found at the -<ulink url="&url-d-i-websvn;">debian-installer WebSVN</ulink>. If -you're not familiar with DocBook, don't worry: -there is a simple cheatsheet in the manuals directory that will get -you started. It's like html, but oriented towards the meaning of -the text rather than the presentation. Patches submitted to the -debian-boot mailing list (see below) are welcomed. -For instructions on how to check out the sources via SVN, see -<ulink url="&url-d-i-readme;">README</ulink> -from the source root directory. - -</para><para> - -Please do <emphasis>not</emphasis> contact the authors of this -document directly. There is also a discussion list for &d-i;, which -includes discussions of this manual. The mailing list is -<email>debian-boot@lists.debian.org</email>. Instructions for -subscribing to this list can be found at the <ulink -url="&url-debian-lists-subscribe;">Debian Mailing -List Subscription</ulink> page; or you can browse the <ulink -url="&url-debian-list-archives;">Debian Mailing List Archives</ulink> -online. - -</para> - - </sect1> - - <sect1 id="contributors"> - <title>Major Contributions</title> - -<para> - -This document was originally written by Bruce Perens, Sven Rudolph, Igor -Grobman, James Treacy, and Adam Di Carlo. Sebastian Ley wrote the -Installation Howto. -Many, many Debian users and developers contributed to this document. -Particular note must be made of Michael Schmitz (m68k support), Frank -Neumann (original author of the <ulink -url="&url-m68k-old-amiga-install;">Amiga install manual</ulink>), -Arto Astala, Eric Delaunay/Ben Collins (SPARC information), Tapio -Lehtonen, and Stéphane Bortzmeyer for numerous edits and text. -We have to thank Pascal Le Bail for useful information about booting -from USB memory sticks. Miroslav KuÅ™e has documented a lot of the new -functionality in Sarge's debian-installer. - -</para><para> - -Extremely helpful text and information was found in Jim Mintha's HOWTO -for network booting (no URL available), the <ulink -url="&url-debian-faq;">Debian FAQ</ulink>, the <ulink -url="&url-m68k-faq;">Linux/m68k FAQ</ulink>, the <ulink -url="&url-sparc-linux-faq;">Linux for SPARC Processors -FAQ</ulink>, the <ulink -url="&url-alpha-faq;">Linux/Alpha -FAQ</ulink>, amongst others. The maintainers of these freely -available and rich sources of information must be recognized. - -</para><para> - -The section on chrooted installations in this manual -(<xref linkend="linux-upgrade"/>) was derived in part from -documents copyright Karsten M. Self. - -</para><para arch="i386"> - -The section on installations over plip in this manual -(<xref linkend="plip"/>) was based on the -<ulink url="&url-plip-install-howto;">PLIP-Install-HOWTO</ulink> -by Gilles Lamiral. - -</para> - </sect1> - - <sect1 id="trademarks"> - <title>Trademark Acknowledgement</title> -<para> - -All trademarks are property of their respective trademark owners. - -</para> - </sect1> -</appendix> - diff --git a/fi/appendix/chroot-install.xml b/fi/appendix/chroot-install.xml deleted file mode 100644 index cd72a3a88..000000000 --- a/fi/appendix/chroot-install.xml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,460 +0,0 @@ -<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> -<!-- original version: 36758 untranslated --> - - <sect1 id="linux-upgrade"> - <title>Installing &debian; from a Unix/Linux System</title> - -<para> - -This section explains how to install &debian; from an existing -Unix or Linux system, without using the menu-driven installer as -explained in the rest of the manual. This <quote>cross-install</quote> -HOWTO has been requested by users switching to &debian; from -Red Hat, Mandrake, and SUSE. In this section some familiarity with -entering *nix commands and navigating the file system is assumed. In -this section, <prompt>$</prompt> symbolizes a command to be entered in -the user's current system, while <prompt>#</prompt> refers to a -command entered in the Debian chroot. - -</para><para> - -Once you've got the new Debian system configured to your preference, -you can migrate your existing user data (if any) to it, and keep on -rolling. This is therefore a <quote>zero downtime</quote> &debian; -install. It's also a clever way for dealing with hardware that -otherwise doesn't play friendly with various boot or installation -media. - -</para> - - <sect2> - <title>Getting Started</title> -<para> - -With your current *nix partitioning tools, repartition the hard -drive as needed, creating at least one filesystem plus swap. You -need at least 150MB of space available for a console only install, -or at least 300MB if you plan to install X. - -</para><para> - -To create file systems on your partitions. For example, to create an -ext3 file system on partition <filename>/dev/hda6</filename> (that's -our example root partition): - -<informalexample><screen> -# mke2fs -j /dev/hda6 -</screen></informalexample> - -To create an ext2 file system instead, omit <userinput>-j</userinput>. - -</para><para> - -Initialize and activate swap (substitute the partition number for -your intended Debian swap partition): - -<informalexample><screen> -# mkswap /dev/hda5 -# sync; sync; sync -# swapon /dev/hda5 -</screen></informalexample> - -Mount one partition as <filename>/mnt/debinst</filename> (the -installation point, to be the root (<filename>/</filename>) filesystem -on your new system). The mount point name is strictly arbitrary, it is -referenced later below. - -<informalexample><screen> -# mkdir /mnt/debinst -# mount /dev/hda6 /mnt/debinst -</screen></informalexample> - -</para> -<note><para> - -If you want to have parts of the filesystem (e.g. /usr) mounted on -separate partitions, you will need to create and mount these directories -manually before proceding with the next stage. - -</para></note> - </sect2> - - <sect2> - <title>Install <command>debootstrap</command></title> -<para> - -The tool that the Debian installer uses, which is recognized as the -official way to install a Debian base system, is -<command>debootstrap</command>. It uses <command>wget</command> and -<command>ar</command>, but otherwise depends only on -<classname>/bin/sh</classname> and basic Unix/Linux tools<footnote> - -<para> - -These include the GNU core utilities and commands like <command>sed</command>, <command>grep</command>, <command>tar</command> and <command>gzip</command>. - -</para> - -</footnote>. Install <command>wget</command> and -<command>ar</command> if they aren't already on your current system, -then download and install <command>debootstrap</command>. - -</para> - -<!-- The files linked to here are from 2004 and thus currently not usable -<para> - -If you have an rpm-based system, you can use alien to convert the -.deb into .rpm, or download an rpm-ized version at -<ulink url="http://people.debian.org/~blade/install/debootstrap"></ulink> - -</para> ---> - -<para> - -Or, you can use the following procedure to install it -manually. Make a work folder for extracting the .deb into: - -<informalexample><screen> -# mkdir work -# cd work -</screen></informalexample> - -The <command>debootstrap</command> binary is located in the Debian -archive (be sure to select the proper file for your -architecture). Download the <command>debootstrap</command> .deb from -the <ulink url="http://ftp.debian.org/debian/pool/main/d/debootstrap/"> -pool</ulink>, copy the package to the work folder, and extract the -binary files from it. You will need to have root privileges to install -the binaries. - -<informalexample><screen> -# ar -x debootstrap_0.X.X_arch.deb -# cd / -# zcat /full-path-to-work/work/data.tar.gz | tar xv -</screen></informalexample> - -</para><para> - -Note that running <command>debootstrap</command> may require you to have -a minimal version of <classname>glibc</classname> installed (currently -GLIBC_2.3). <command>debootstrap</command> itself is a shell script, but -it calls various utilities that require <classname>glibc</classname>. - -</para> - </sect2> - - <sect2> - <title>Run <command>debootstrap</command></title> -<para> - -<command>debootstrap</command> can download the needed files directly -from the archive when you run it. You can substitute any Debian -archive mirror for <userinput>http.us.debian.org/debian</userinput> in -the command example below, preferably a mirror close to you -network-wise. Mirrors are listed at -<ulink url="http://www.debian.org/misc/README.mirrors"></ulink>. - -</para><para> - -If you have a &releasename; &debian; CD mounted at -<filename>/cdrom</filename>, you could substitute a file URL instead -of the http URL: <userinput>file:/cdrom/debian/</userinput> - -</para><para> - -Substitute one of the following for <replaceable>ARCH</replaceable> -in the <command>debootstrap</command> command: - -<userinput>alpha</userinput>, -<userinput>arm</userinput>, -<userinput>hppa</userinput>, -<userinput>i386</userinput>, -<userinput>ia64</userinput>, -<userinput>m68k</userinput>, -<userinput>mips</userinput>, -<userinput>mipsel</userinput>, -<userinput>powerpc</userinput>, -<userinput>s390</userinput>, or -<userinput>sparc</userinput>. - -<informalexample><screen> -# /usr/sbin/debootstrap --arch ARCH &releasename; \ - /mnt/debinst http://http.us.debian.org/debian -</screen></informalexample> - -</para> - </sect2> - - <sect2> - <title>Configure The Base System</title> -<para> - -Now you've got a real Debian system, though rather lean, on disk. -<command>Chroot</command> into it: - -<informalexample><screen> -# LANG= chroot /mnt/debinst /bin/bash -</screen></informalexample> - -</para> - - <sect3> - <title>Mount Partitions</title> -<para> - -You need to create <filename>/etc/fstab</filename>. - -<informalexample><screen> -# editor /etc/fstab -</screen></informalexample> - -Here is a sample you can modify to suit: - -<informalexample><screen> -# /etc/fstab: static file system information. -# -# file system mount point type options dump pass -/dev/XXX / ext3 defaults 0 1 -/dev/XXX /boot ext3 ro,nosuid,nodev 0 2 - -/dev/XXX none swap sw 0 0 -proc /proc proc defaults 0 0 - -/dev/fd0 /mnt/floppy auto noauto,rw,sync,user,exec 0 0 -/dev/cdrom /mnt/cdrom iso9660 noauto,ro,user,exec 0 0 - -/dev/XXX /tmp ext3 rw,nosuid,nodev 0 2 -/dev/XXX /var ext3 rw,nosuid,nodev 0 2 -/dev/XXX /usr ext3 rw,nodev 0 2 -/dev/XXX /home ext3 rw,nosuid,nodev 0 2 -</screen></informalexample> - -Use <userinput>mount -a</userinput> to mount all the file systems you -have specified in your <filename>/etc/fstab</filename>, or to mount -file systems individually use: - -<informalexample><screen> -# mount /path # e.g.: mount /usr -</screen></informalexample> - -You can mount the proc file system multiple times and to arbitrary -locations, though <filename>/proc</filename> is customary. If you didn't use -<userinput>mount -a</userinput>, be sure to mount proc before continuing: - -<informalexample><screen> -# mount -t proc proc /proc -</screen></informalexample> - -</para><para> - -The command <userinput>ls /proc</userinput> should now show a non-empty -directory. Should this fail, you may be able to mount proc from outside -the chroot: - -<informalexample><screen> -# mount -t proc proc /mnt/debinst/proc -</screen></informalexample> - -</para> - </sect3> - - <sect3> - <title>Configure Keyboard</title> -<para> - -To configure your keyboard: - -<informalexample><screen> -# dpkg-reconfigure console-data -</screen></informalexample> - -</para><para> - -Note that the keyboard cannot be set while in the chroot, but will be -configured for the next reboot. - -</para> - </sect3> - - <sect3> - <title>Configure Networking</title> -<para> - -To configure networking, edit -<filename>/etc/network/interfaces</filename>, -<filename>/etc/resolv.conf</filename>, -<filename>/etc/hostname</filename> and -<filename>/etc/hosts</filename>. - -<informalexample><screen> -# editor /etc/network/interfaces -</screen></informalexample> - -Here are some simple examples from -<filename>/usr/share/doc/ifupdown/examples</filename>: - -<informalexample><screen> -###################################################################### -# /etc/network/interfaces -- configuration file for ifup(8), ifdown(8) -# See the interfaces(5) manpage for information on what options are -# available. -###################################################################### - -# We always want the loopback interface. -# -auto lo -iface lo inet loopback - -# To use dhcp: -# -# auto eth0 -# iface eth0 inet dhcp - -# An example static IP setup: (broadcast and gateway are optional) -# -# auto eth0 -# iface eth0 inet static -# address 192.168.0.42 -# network 192.168.0.0 -# netmask 255.255.255.0 -# broadcast 192.168.0.255 -# gateway 192.168.0.1 -</screen></informalexample> - -Enter your nameserver(s) and search directives in -<filename>/etc/resolv.conf</filename>: - -<informalexample><screen> -# editor /etc/resolv.conf -</screen></informalexample> - -A simple <filename>/etc/resolv.conf</filename>: - -<informalexample><screen> -search hqdom.local\000 -nameserver 10.1.1.36 -nameserver 192.168.9.100 -</screen></informalexample> - -Enter your system's host name (2 to 63 characters): - -<informalexample><screen> -# echo DebianHostName > /etc/hostname -</screen></informalexample> - -If you have multiple network cards, you should arrange the names of -driver modules in the <filename>/etc/modules</filename> file into the -desired order. Then during boot, each card will be associated with the -interface name (eth0, eth1, etc.) that you expect. - -</para> - </sect3> - - <sect3> - <title>Configure Locales</title> -<para> - -To configure your locale settings to use a language other than -English, install the locales support package and configure it: - -<informalexample><screen> -# apt-get install locales -# dpkg-reconfigure locales -</screen></informalexample> - -NOTE: Apt must be configured beforehand by creating a sources.list and -running apt-get update. -Before using locales with character sets other than ASCII or latin1, -please consult the appropriate localization HOWTO. - -</para> - </sect3> - </sect2> - - <sect2> - <title>Install a Kernel</title> -<para> - -If you intend to boot this system, you probably want a Linux kernel -and a boot loader. Identify available pre-packaged kernels with - -<informalexample><screen> -# apt-cache search <phrase condition="classic-kpkg">kernel</phrase><phrase condition="common-kpkg">linux</phrase>-image -</screen></informalexample> - -Then install your choice using its package name. - -<informalexample><screen> -# apt-get install <phrase condition="classic-kpkg">kernel</phrase><phrase condition="common-kpkg">linux</phrase>-image-<replaceable>&kernelversion;-arch-etc</replaceable> -</screen></informalexample> - -</para> - </sect2> - - <sect2> -<title>Set up the Boot Loader</title> -<para> - -To make your &debian; system bootable, set up your boot loader to load -the installed kernel with your new root partition. Note that debootstrap -does not install a boot loader, though you can use apt-get inside your -Debian chroot to do so. - -</para><para arch="i386"> - -Check <userinput>info grub</userinput> or <userinput>man -lilo.conf</userinput> for instructions on setting up the -bootloader. If you are keeping the system you used to install Debian, just -add an entry for the Debian install to your existing grub -<filename>menu.lst</filename> or <filename>lilo.conf</filename>. For -<filename>lilo.conf</filename>, you could also copy it to the new system and -edit it there. After you are done editing, call lilo (remember it will use -<filename>lilo.conf</filename> relative to the system you call it from). - -</para><para arch="i386"> - -Here is a basic <filename>/etc/lilo.conf</filename> as an example: - -<informalexample><screen> -boot=/dev/hda6 -root=/dev/hda6 -install=menu -delay=20 -lba32 -image=/vmlinuz -label=Debian -</screen></informalexample> - -</para><para arch="powerpc"> - -Check <userinput>man yaboot.conf</userinput> for instructions on -setting up the bootloader. If you are keeping the system you used to -install Debian, just add an entry for the Debian install to your -existing <filename>yaboot.conf</filename>. You could also copy it to -the new system and -edit it there. After you are done editing, call ybin (remember it will -use <filename>yaboot.conf</filename> relative to the system you call it from). - -</para><para arch="powerpc"> - -Here is a basic <filename>/etc/yaboot.conf</filename> as an example: - -<informalexample><screen> -boot=/dev/hda2 -device=hd: -partition=6 -root=/dev/hda6 -magicboot=/usr/lib/yaboot/ofboot -timeout=50 -image=/vmlinux -label=Debian -</screen></informalexample> - -On some machines, you may need to use <userinput>ide0:</userinput> -instead of <userinput>hd:</userinput>. - -</para> - </sect2> - </sect1> diff --git a/fi/appendix/files.xml b/fi/appendix/files.xml deleted file mode 100644 index ad7332bf8..000000000 --- a/fi/appendix/files.xml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,298 +0,0 @@ -<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> -<!-- original version: 33887 untranslated --> - - - <sect1 id="linuxdevices"><title>Linux Devices</title> -<para> - -In Linux you have various special files in -<filename>/dev</filename>. These files are called device files. In -the Unix world accessing hardware is different. There you have a -special file which actually runs a driver which in turn accesses the -hardware. The device file is an interface to the actual system -component. Files under <filename>/dev</filename> also behave -differently than ordinary files. Below are the most important device -files listed. - -</para><para> - -<informaltable><tgroup cols="2"><tbody> -<row> - <entry><filename>fd0</filename></entry> - <entry>First Floppy Drive</entry> -</row><row> - <entry><filename>fd1</filename></entry> - <entry>Second Floppy Drive</entry> -</row> -</tbody></tgroup></informaltable> - -<informaltable><tgroup cols="2"><tbody> -<row> - <entry><filename>hda</filename></entry> - <entry>IDE Hard disk / CD-ROM on the first IDE port (Master)</entry> -</row><row> - <entry><filename>hdb</filename></entry> - <entry>IDE Hard disk / CD-ROM on the first IDE port (Slave)</entry> -</row><row> - <entry><filename>hdc</filename></entry> - <entry>IDE Hard disk / CD-ROM on the second IDE port (Master)</entry> -</row><row> - <entry><filename>hdd</filename></entry> - <entry>IDE Hard disk / CD-ROM on the second IDE port (Slave)</entry> -</row><row> - <entry><filename>hda1</filename></entry> - <entry>First partition of the first IDE hard disk</entry> -</row><row> - <entry><filename>hdd15</filename></entry> - <entry>Fifteenth partition of the fourth IDE hard disk</entry> -</row> -</tbody></tgroup></informaltable> - -<informaltable><tgroup cols="2"><tbody> -<row> - <entry><filename>sda</filename></entry> - <entry>SCSI Hard disk with lowest SCSI ID (e.g. 0)</entry> -</row><row> - <entry><filename>sdb</filename></entry> - <entry>SCSI Hard disk with next higher SCSI ID (e.g. 1)</entry> -</row><row> - <entry><filename>sdc</filename></entry> - <entry>SCSI Hard disk with next higher SCSI ID (e.g. 2)</entry> -</row><row> - <entry><filename>sda1</filename></entry> - <entry>First partition of the first SCSI hard disk</entry> -</row><row> - <entry><filename>sdd10</filename></entry> - <entry>Tenth partition of the fourth SCSI hard disk</entry> -</row> -</tbody></tgroup></informaltable> - -<informaltable><tgroup cols="2"><tbody> -<row> - <entry><filename>sr0</filename></entry> - <entry>SCSI CD-ROM with the lowest SCSI ID</entry> -</row><row> - <entry><filename>sr1</filename></entry> - <entry>SCSI CD-ROM with the next higher SCSI ID</entry> -</row> -</tbody></tgroup></informaltable> - -<informaltable><tgroup cols="2"><tbody> -<row> - <entry><filename>ttyS0</filename></entry> - <entry>Serial port 0, COM1 under MS-DOS</entry> -</row><row> - <entry><filename>ttyS1</filename></entry> - <entry>Serial port 1, COM2 under MS-DOS</entry> -</row><row> - <entry><filename>psaux</filename></entry> - <entry>PS/2 mouse device</entry> -</row><row> - <entry><filename>gpmdata</filename></entry> - <entry>Pseudo device, repeater data from GPM (mouse) daemon</entry> -</row> -</tbody></tgroup></informaltable> - -<informaltable><tgroup cols="2"><tbody> -<row> - <entry><filename>cdrom</filename></entry> - <entry>Symbolic link to the CD-ROM drive</entry> -</row><row> - <entry><filename>mouse</filename></entry> - <entry>Symbolic link to the mouse device file</entry> -</row> -</tbody></tgroup></informaltable> - -<informaltable><tgroup cols="2"><tbody> -<row> - <entry><filename>null</filename></entry> - <entry>Everything pointed to this device will disappear</entry> -</row><row> - <entry><filename>zero</filename></entry> - <entry>One can endlessly read zeros out of this device</entry> -</row> -</tbody></tgroup></informaltable> - -</para> - - <sect2> -<title>Setting Up Your Mouse</title> - -<para> - -The mouse can be used in both the Linux console (with gpm) and the X window -environment. The two uses can be made compatible if the gpm repeater is used -to allow the signal to flow to the X server as shown: - -<informalexample><screen> -mouse => /dev/psaux => gpm => /dev/gpmdata -> /dev/mouse => X - /dev/ttyS0 (repeater) (symlink) - /dev/ttyS1 -</screen></informalexample> - -Set the repeater protocol to be raw (in <filename>/etc/gpm.conf</filename>) while -setting X to the original mouse protocol in <filename>/etc/X11/XF86Config</filename> -or <filename>/etc/X11/XF86Config-4</filename>. - -</para><para> - -This approach to use gpm even in X has advantages when the mouse is -unplugged inadvertently. Simply restarting gpm with - -<informalexample><screen> -# /etc/init.d/gpm restart -</screen></informalexample> - -will re-connect the mouse in software without restarting X. - -</para><para> - -If gpm is disabled or not installed with some reason, make sure to set X to -read directly from the mouse device such as /dev/psaux. For details, refer -to the 3-Button Mouse mini-Howto at -<filename>/usr/share/doc/HOWTO/en-txt/mini/3-Button-Mouse.gz</filename>, -<userinput>man gpm</userinput>, -<filename>/usr/share/doc/gpm/FAQ.gz</filename>, and -<ulink url="&url-xorg;current/doc/html/mouse.html">README.mouse</ulink>. - -</para><para arch="powerpc"> - -For PowerPC, in <filename>/etc/X11/XF86Config</filename> or -<filename>/etc/X11/XF86Config-4</filename>, set the mouse device to -<userinput>"/dev/input/mice"</userinput>. - -</para><para arch="powerpc"> - -Modern kernels give you the capability to emulate a three-button mouse -when your mouse only has one button. Just add the following lines to -<filename>/etc/sysctl.conf</filename> file. - -<informalexample><screen> -# 3-button mouse emulation -# turn on emulation -/dev/mac_hid/mouse_button_emulation = 1 -# Send middle mouse button signal with the F11 key -/dev/mac_hid/mouse_button2_keycode = 87 -# Send right mouse button signal with the F12 key -/dev/mac_hid/mouse_button3_keycode = 88 -# For different keys, use showkey to tell you what the code is. -</screen></informalexample> - -</para> - </sect2> - </sect1> - - <sect1 id="tasksel-size-list"> - <title>Disk Space Needed for Tasks</title> - -<!-- Note for d-i and manual maintainers - Sizes of tasks should be determined by running "tasksel new" on a system - that been fully installed without selecting any tasks. By selecting a - task together with the "manual selection" option, aptitude will be started - and show the sizes for the task. After deselecting the packages to be - installed, quit aptitude and repeat for other tasks. - Space requirements need to be determined from tasksel as tasksel will not - install recommended packages while selecting a task from aptitude will. ---> - -<para> - -The base installation for i386 using the default 2.4 kernel, -including all standard packages, requires 573MB of disk space. - -</para><para> - -The following table lists sizes reported by aptitude for the tasks listed -in tasksel. Note that some tasks have overlapping constituents, so the -total installed size for two tasks together may be less than the total -obtained by adding up the numbers. - -</para><para> - -Note that you will need to add the sizes listed in the table to the size -of the base installation when determining the size of partitions. -Most of the size listed as <quote>Installed size</quote> will end up in -<filename>/usr</filename>; the size listed as <quote>Download size</quote> -is (temporarily) required in <filename>/var</filename>. - -</para><para> - -<informaltable><tgroup cols="4"> -<thead> -<row> - <entry>Task</entry> - <entry>Installed size (MB)</entry> - <entry>Download size (MB)</entry> - <entry>Space needed to install (MB)</entry> -</row> -</thead> - -<tbody> -<row> - <entry>Desktop</entry> - <entry>1392</entry> - <entry>460</entry> - <entry>1852</entry> -</row> - -<row> - <entry>Web server</entry> - <entry>36</entry> - <entry>12</entry> - <entry>48</entry> -</row> - -<row> - <entry>Print server</entry> - <entry>168</entry> - <entry>58</entry> - <entry>226</entry> -</row> - -<row> - <entry>DNS server</entry> - <entry>2</entry> - <entry>1</entry> - <entry>3</entry> -</row> - -<row> - <entry>File server</entry> - <entry>47</entry> - <entry>24</entry> - <entry>71</entry> -</row> - -<row> - <entry>Mail server</entry> - <entry>10</entry> - <entry>3</entry> - <entry>13</entry> -</row> - -<row> - <entry>SQL database</entry> - <entry>66</entry> - <entry>21</entry> - <entry>87</entry> -</row> - -</tbody> -</tgroup></informaltable> - -<note><para> - -The <emphasis>Desktop</emphasis> task will install both the Gnome and KDE -desktop environments. - -</para></note> - -</para><para> - -If you install in a language other than English, <command>tasksel</command> -may automatically install a <firstterm>localization task</firstterm>, if one -is available for your language. Space requirements differ per language; -you should allow up to 200MB in total for download and installation. - -</para> - </sect1> diff --git a/fi/appendix/gpl.xml b/fi/appendix/gpl.xml deleted file mode 100644 index ba5782af2..000000000 --- a/fi/appendix/gpl.xml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,512 +0,0 @@ -<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> -<!-- original version: 29618 untranslated --> - -<appendix id="appendix-gpl"><title>GNU General Public License</title> - -<para> - -Version 2, June 1991 - -</para><para> - -Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc. -— -51 Franklin St, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301, USA. -</para><para> - -Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies -of this license document, but changing it is not allowed. - -</para> - - <sect1><title>Preamble</title> -<para> - -The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom -to share and change it. By contrast, the gnu General Public License -is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free -software — to make sure the software is free for all its users. This -General Public License applies to most of the Free Software -Foundation's software and to any other program whose authors commit -to using it. (Some other Free Software Foundation software is covered -by the gnu Library General Public License instead.) You can apply it -to your programs, too. - -</para><para> - -When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not -price. Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you -have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge -for this service if you wish), that you receive source code or can -get it if you want it, that you can change the software or use pieces -of it in new free programs; and that you know you can do these -things. - -</para><para> - -To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid -anyone to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender the -rights. These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for -you if you distribute copies of the software, or if you modify it. - -</para><para> - -For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether -gratis or for a fee, you must give the recipients all the rights that -you have. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the -source code. And you must show them these terms so they know their -rights. - -</para><para> - -We protect your rights with two steps: (1) copyright the software, -and (2) offer you this license which gives you legal permission to -copy, distribute and/or modify the software. - -</para><para> - -Also, for each author's protection and ours, we want to make certain -that everyone understands that there is no warranty for this free -software. If the software is modified by someone else and passed on, -we want its recipients to know that what they have is not the -original, so that any problems introduced by others will not reflect -on the original authors' reputations. - -</para><para> - -Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by software -patents. We wish to avoid the danger that redistributors of a free -program will individually obtain patent licenses, in effect making -the program proprietary. To prevent this, we have made it clear that -any patent must be licensed for everyone's free use or not licensed -at all. - -</para><para> - -The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and -modification follow. - -</para> - </sect1> - - <sect1><title>GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE</title> -<para> - -TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION - -</para> - -<itemizedlist><listitem><para> - -This License applies to any program or other work which contains a -notice placed by the copyright holder saying it may be distributed -under the terms of this General Public License. The "Program", below, -refers to any such program or work, and a "work based on the Program" -means either the Program or any derivative work under copyright law: -that is to say, a work containing the Program or a portion of it, -either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated into another -language. (Hereinafter, translation is included without limitation in -the term "modification".) Each licensee is addressed as "you". - -</para><para> - -Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not -covered by this License; they are outside its scope. The act of -running the Program is not restricted, and the output from the -Program is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on -the Program (independent of having been made by running the Program). -Whether that is true depends on what the Program does. - -</para></listitem> -<listitem><para> - -You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Program's -source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that you -conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate -copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the -notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any -warranty; and give any other recipients of the Program a copy of this -License along with the Program. - -</para><para> - -You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and -you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a -fee. - -</para></listitem> -<listitem><para> - -You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or any portion -of it, thus forming a work based on the Program, and copy and -distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1 -above, provided that you also meet all of these conditions: - -</para><para> - -a) You must cause the modified files to carry prominent notices -stating that you changed the files and the date of any change. - -</para><para> - -b) You must cause any work that you distribute or publish, that in -whole or in part contains or is derived from the Program or any part -thereof, to be licensed as a whole at no charge to all third parties -under the terms of this License. - -</para><para> - -c) If the modified program normally reads commands interactively when -run, you must cause it, when started running for such interactive use -in the most ordinary way, to print or display an announcement -including an appropriate copyright notice and a notice that there is -no warranty (or else, saying that you provide a warranty) and that -users may redistribute the program under these conditions, and -telling the user how to view a copy of this License. (Exception: if -the Program itself is interactive but does not normally print such an -announcement, your work based on the Program is not required to print -an announcement.) - -</para><para> - -These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If -identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Program, -and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in -themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not apply to those -sections when you distribute them as separate works. But when you -distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based -on the Program, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of -this License, whose permissions for other licensees extend to the -entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote -it. - -</para><para> - -Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest -your rights to work written entirely by you; rather, the intent is to -exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or -collective works based on the Program. - -</para><para> - -In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the -Program with the Program (or with a work based on the Program) on a -volume of a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other -work under the scope of this License. - -</para></listitem> -<listitem><para> - -You may copy and distribute the Program (or a work based on it, -under Section 2) in object code or executable form under the terms of -Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you also do one of the -following: - -</para><para> - -a) Accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable -source code, which must be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 -and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange; -or, - -</para><para> - -b) Accompany it with a written offer, valid for at least three years, -to give any third party, for a charge no more than your cost of -physically performing source distribution, a complete -machine-readable copy of the corresponding source code, to be -distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium -customarily used for software interchange; or, - -</para><para> - -c) Accompany it with the information you received as to the offer to -distribute corresponding source code. (This alternative is allowed -only for noncommercial distribution and only if you received the -program in object code or executable form with such an offer, in -accord with Subsection b above.) - -</para><para> - -The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for -making modifications to it. For an executable work, complete source -code means all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any -associated interface definition files, plus the scripts used to -control compilation and installation of the executable. However, as a -special exception, the source code distributed need not include -anything that is normally distributed (in either source or binary -form) with the major components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the -operating system on which the executable runs, unless that component -itself accompanies the executable. - -</para><para> - -If distribution of executable or object code is made by offering -access to copy from a designated place, then offering equivalent -access to copy the source code from the same place counts as -distribution of the source code, even though third parties are not -compelled to copy the source along with the object code. - -</para></listitem> -<listitem><para> - -You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Program -except as expressly provided under this License. Any attempt -otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the Program is -void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this -License. However, parties who have received copies, or rights, from -you under this License will not have their licenses terminated so -long as such parties remain in full compliance. - -</para></listitem> -<listitem><para> - -You are not required to accept this License, since you have not -signed it. However, nothing else grants you permission to modify or -distribute the Program or its derivative works. These actions are -prohibited by law if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by -modifying or distributing the Program (or any work based on the -Program), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so, and -all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying -the Program or works based on it. - -</para></listitem> -<listitem><para> - -Each time you redistribute the Program (or any work based on the -Program), the recipient automatically receives a license from the -original licensor to copy, distribute or modify the Program subject -to these terms and conditions. You may not impose any further -restrictions on the recipients' exercise of the rights granted -herein. You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third -parties to this License. - -</para></listitem> -<listitem><para> - -If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent -infringement or for any other reason (not limited to patent issues), -conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or -otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do -not excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot -distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under -this License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a -consequence you may not distribute the Program at all. For example, -if a patent license would not permit royalty-free redistribution of -the Program by all those who receive copies directly or indirectly -through you, then the only way you could satisfy both it and this -License would be to refrain entirely from distribution of the -Program. - -</para><para> - -If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under -any particular circumstance, the balance of the section is intended -to apply and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other -circumstances. - -</para><para> - -It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any -patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any -such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the -integrity of the free software distribution system, which is -implemented by public license practices. Many people have made -generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed -through that system in reliance on consistent application of that -system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is -willing to distribute software through any other system and a -licensee cannot impose that choice. - -</para><para> - -This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to -be a consequence of the rest of this License. - -</para></listitem> -<listitem><para> - -If the distribution and/or use of the Program is restricted in -certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces, the -original copyright holder who places the Program under this License -may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding -those countries, so that distribution is permitted only in or among -countries not thus excluded. In such case, this License incorporates -the limitation as if written in the body of this License. - -</para></listitem> -<listitem><para> - -The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new -versions of the General Public License from time to time. Such new -versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may -differ in detail to address new problems or concerns. Each version is -given a distinguishing version number. If the Program specifies a -version number of this License which applies to it and "any later -version", you have the option of following the terms and conditions -either of that version or of any later version published by the Free -Software Foundation. If the Program does not specify a version number -of this License, you may choose any version ever published by the -Free Software Foundation. - -</para></listitem> -<listitem><para> - -If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other free -programs whose distribution conditions are different, write to the -author to ask for permission. For software which is copyrighted by -the Free Software Foundation, write to the Free Software Foundation; -we sometimes make exceptions for this. Our decision will be guided by -the two goals of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our -free software and of promoting the sharing and reuse of software -generally. - -</para><para> - -NO WARRANTY - -</para></listitem> -<listitem><para> - -because the program is licensed free of charge, there is no -warranty for the program, to the extent permitted by applicable law. -except when otherwise stated in writing the copyright holders and/or -other parties provide the program "as is" without warranty of any -kind, either expressed or implied, including, but not limited to, the -implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular -purpose. the entire risk as to the quality and performance of the -program is with you. should the program prove defective, you assume -the cost of all necessary servicing, repair or correction. - -</para></listitem> -<listitem><para> - -in no event unless required by applicable law or agreed to in -writing will any copyright holder, or any other party who may modify -and/or redistribute the program as permitted above, be liable to you -for damages, including any general, special, incidental or -consequential damages arising out of the use or inability to use the -program (including but not limited to loss of data or data being -rendered inaccurate or losses sustained by you or third parties or a -failure of the program to operate with any other programs), even if -such holder or other party has been advised of the possibility of -such damages. - -</para></listitem> -</itemizedlist> -<para> - -END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS - -</para> - </sect1> - - <sect1><title>How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs</title> -<para> - -If you develop a new program, and you want it to be of the greatest -possible use to the public, the best way to achieve this is to make -it free software which everyone can redistribute and change under -these terms. - -</para><para> - -To do so, attach the following notices to the program. It is safest -to attach them to the start of each source file to most effectively -convey the exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at least -the "copyright" line and a pointer to where the full notice is found. - -</para><para> - -one line to give the program's name and a brief idea of what it -does. - -</para><para> - -Copyright (C) year name of author - -</para><para> - -This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify -it under the terms of the gnu General Public License as published by -the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or (at -your option) any later version. - -</para><para> - -This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but -without any warranty; without even the implied warranty of -merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose. See the gnu -General Public License for more details. - -</para><para> - -You should have received a copy of the gnu General Public License -along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software -Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, -MA 02110-1301, USA. - -</para><para> - -Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper -mail. - -</para><para> - -If the program is interactive, make it output a short notice like -this when it starts in an interactive mode: - -</para><para> - -Gnomovision version 69, Copyright (C) year name of author - -</para><para> - -Gnomovision comes with absolutely no warranty; for details type `show -w'. - -</para><para> - -This is free software, and you are welcome to redistribute it under -certain conditions; type `show c' for details. - -</para><para> - -The hypothetical commands `show w' and `show c' should show the -appropriate parts of the General Public License. Of course, the -commands you use may be called something other than `show w' and -`show c'; they could even be mouse-clicks or menu items — whatever -suits your program. - -</para><para> - -You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or -your school, if any, to sign a "copyright disclaimer" for the -program, if necessary. Here is a sample; alter the names: - -</para><para> - -Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the -program `Gnomovision' (which makes passes at compilers) written by -James Hacker. - -</para><para> - -signature of Ty Coon, 1 April 1989 - -</para><para> - -Ty Coon, President of Vice - -</para><para> - -This General Public License does not permit incorporating your -program into proprietary programs. If your program is a subroutine -library, you may consider it more useful to permit linking -proprietary applications with the library. If this is what you want -to do, use the gnu Library General Public License instead of this -License. - -</para> - </sect1> -</appendix> diff --git a/fi/appendix/plip.xml b/fi/appendix/plip.xml deleted file mode 100644 index 74913ab34..000000000 --- a/fi/appendix/plip.xml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,194 +0,0 @@ -<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> -<!-- original version: 29687 untranslated --> - - <sect1 id="plip" arch="i386"> - <title>Installing &debian; over Parallel Line IP (PLIP)</title> - -<para> - -This section explains how to install &debian; on a computer without -Ethernet card, but with just a remote gateway computer attached via -a Null-Modem cable (also called Null-Printer cable). The gateway -computer should be connected to a network that has a Debian mirror -on it (e.g. to the Internet). - -</para><para> - -In the example in this appendix we will set up a PLIP connection using -a gateway connected to the Internet over a dial-up connection (ppp0). -We will use IP addresses 192.168.0.1 and 192.168.0.2 for the PLIP -interfaces on the target system and the source system respectively -(these addresses should be unused within your network address space). - -</para><para> - -The PLIP connection set up during the installation will also be available -after the reboot into the installed system (see <xref linkend="boot-new"/>). - -</para><para> - -Before you start, you will need to check the BIOS configuration (IO base -address and IRQ) for the parallel ports of both the source and target -systems. The most common values are <literal>io=0x378</literal>, -<literal>irq=7</literal>. - -</para> - - <sect2> - <title>Requirements</title> - -<itemizedlist> -<listitem><para> - -A target computer, called <emphasis>target</emphasis>, where Debian will be -installed. - -</para></listitem> -<listitem><para> - -System installation media; see <xref linkend="installation-media"/>. - -</para></listitem> -<listitem><para> - -Another computer connected to the Internet, called <emphasis>source</emphasis>, -that will function as the gateway. - -</para></listitem> -<listitem><para> - -A DB-25 Null-Modem cable. See the -<ulink url="&url-plip-install-howto;">PLIP-Install-HOWTO</ulink> for more -information on this cable and instructions how to make your own. - -</para></listitem> -</itemizedlist> - - </sect2> - - <sect2> - <title>Setting up source</title> -<para> - -The following shell script is a simple example of how to configure the -source computer as a gateway to the Internet using ppp0. - -<informalexample><screen> -#!/bin/sh - -# We remove running modules from kernel to avoid conflicts and to -# reconfigure them manually. -modprobe -r lp parport_pc -modprobe parport_pc io=<replaceable>0x378</replaceable> irq=<replaceable>7</replaceable> -modprobe plip - -# Configure the plip interface (plip0 for me, see dmesg | grep plip) -ifconfig <replaceable>plip0 192.168.0.2</replaceable> pointopoint <replaceable>192.168.0.1</replaceable> netmask 255.255.255.255 up - -# Configure gateway -modprobe iptable_nat -iptables -t nat -A POSTROUTING -o <replaceable>ppp0</replaceable> -j MASQUERADE -echo 1 > /proc/sys/net/ipv4/ip_forward -</screen></informalexample> - -</para> - </sect2> - - <sect2> - <title>Installing target</title> -<para> - -Boot the installation media. The installation needs to be run in -expert mode; enter <userinput>expert</userinput> at the boot prompt. -Below are the answers that should be given during various stages of -the installation. - -</para> - -<orderedlist> -<listitem><para> - -<guimenuitem>Load installer components</guimenuitem> - -</para><para> - -Select the <userinput>plip-modules</userinput> option from the list; this -will make the PLIP drivers available to the installation system. - -</para></listitem> -<listitem><para> - -<guimenuitem>Detect network hardware</guimenuitem> - -</para> - - <itemizedlist> - <listitem><para> - -If target <emphasis>does</emphasis> have a network card, a list of driver -modules for detected cards will be shown. If you want to force &d-i; to -use plip instead, you have to deselect all listed driver modules. -Obviously, if target doesn't have a network card, the installer will not -show this list. - - </para></listitem> - <listitem><para> - -Prompt for module parameters: Yes - - </para></listitem> - <listitem><para> - -Because no network card was detected/selected earlier, the installer will -ask you to select a network driver module from a list. -Select the <userinput>plip</userinput> module. - - </para></listitem> - <listitem><para> - -Additional parameters for module parport_pc: -<userinput><replaceable>io=0x378 irq=7</replaceable></userinput> - - </para></listitem> - <listitem><para> - -Additional parameters for module plip: leave empty - - </para></listitem> - </itemizedlist> - -</listitem> -<listitem><para> - -<guimenuitem>Configure the network</guimenuitem> - - <itemizedlist> - <listitem><para> - -Auto-configure network with DHCP: No - - </para></listitem> - <listitem><para> - -IP address: <userinput><replaceable>192.168.0.1</replaceable></userinput> - - </para></listitem> - <listitem><para> - -Point-to-point address: -<userinput><replaceable>192.168.0.2</replaceable></userinput> - - </para></listitem> - <listitem><para> - -Name server addresses: you can enter the same addresses used on -source (see <filename>/etc/resolv.conf</filename>) - - </para></listitem> - </itemizedlist> - -</para></listitem> -</orderedlist> - - </sect2> - </sect1> diff --git a/fi/appendix/preseed.xml b/fi/appendix/preseed.xml deleted file mode 100644 index b64c281f2..000000000 --- a/fi/appendix/preseed.xml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,1119 +0,0 @@ -<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> -<!-- original version: 36758 untranslated --> - -<!-- -Be carefull with the format of this file as it is parsed to generate -the example preconfiguration file. -In that file all text between <informalexample> tags that have the -attribute 'role="example"' set is included, except if a 'condition' -attribute is in force that does not match the specified release or if an -'arch' attribute is in force that does not match the specified architecture. - -Currently only a single variant of the example file is generated (for i386). ---> - -<appendix id="appendix-preseed"> -<title>Automating the installation using preseeding</title> - -<para> - -This appendix explains the intricacies of preseeding answers to questions in -&d-i; to automate your installation. - -</para><para> - -The configuration fragments used in this appendix are also available as an -example preconfiguration file from &urlset-example-preseed;. - -</para> - - <sect1 id="preseed-intro"> - <title>Introduction</title> -<para> - -Preseeding provides a way to set answers to questions asked during the -installation process, without having to manually enter the answers while -the installation is running. This makes it possible to fully automate most -types of installation and even offers some features not available during -normal installations. - -</para> - - <sect2 id="preseed-methods"> - <title>Preseeding methods</title> -<para> - -There are three methods that can be used for preseeding: -<firstterm>initrd</firstterm>, <firstterm>file</firstterm> and -<firstterm>network</firstterm>. Initrd preseeding will work with any -installation method and supports preseeding of more things, but it requires -the most preparation. File and network preseeding each can be used with -different installation methods. With file and network preseeding the first -few installer questions cannot be preseeded because the preconfiguration -file is only loaded after they have been asked. - -</para><para> - -The following table shows which preseeding methods can be used with which -installation methods. - -<informaltable> -<tgroup cols="4"> -<thead> -<row> - <entry>Installation method</entry><entry>initrd</entry> - <entry>file</entry><entry>network</entry> -</row> -</thead> - -<tbody> -<row> - <entry>CD/DVD</entry> - <entry>yes</entry> - <entry>yes</entry> - <entry>no</entry> -</row><row> - <entry>netboot</entry> - <entry>yes</entry> - <entry>no</entry> - <entry>yes</entry> -</row><row> - <entry>hd-media <phrase condition="bootable-usb">(including usb-stick)</phrase></entry> - <entry>yes</entry> - <entry>yes</entry> - <entry>no</entry> -</row><row condition="supports-floppy-boot"> - <entry>floppy based (cd-drivers)</entry> - <entry>yes</entry> - <entry>yes</entry> - <entry>no</entry> -</row><row condition="supports-floppy-boot"> - <entry>floppy based (net-drivers)</entry> - <entry>yes</entry> - <entry>no</entry> - <entry>yes</entry> -</row><row arch="s390"> - <entry>generic/tape</entry> - <entry>yes</entry> - <entry>no</entry> - <entry>yes</entry> -</row> -</tbody> - -</tgroup></informaltable> - -</para><para> - -An important difference between the preseeding methods is the point at which -the preconfiguration file is loaded and processed. For initrd preseeding -this is right at the start of the installation, before the first question is -even asked. For file preseeding this is after the CD or CD image has been -loaded. For network preseeding it is only after the network has been -configured. - -</para><para> - -In practical terms this means for file and network preseeding that the -questions about language, country and keyboard selection will already have -been asked. For network preseeding add to that any questions related to -network configuration. Some other questions that are only displayed -at medium or low priority (like the first hardware detection run) will -also already have been processed. - -</para><para> - -Obviously, any questions that have been processed before the -preconfiguration file is loaded cannot be preseeded. -<xref linkend="preseed-bootparms"/> offers a way to avoid these -questions being asked. - -</para> - </sect2> - - <sect2 id="preseed-limitations"> - <title>Limitations</title> -<para> - -Although most questions used by &d-i; can be preseeded using this method, -there are some notable exceptions. You must (re)partition an entire disk -or use available free space on a disk; it is not possible to use existing -partitions. You currently cannot use preseeding to set up RAID. - -</para> - </sect2> - -<!-- Joeyh feels this is too technical, so leave it out for now - <sect2 id="preseed-debconf"> - <title>Debconf basics</title> -<para> - -Preseeding makes use of the <classname>debconf</classname> framework. This -framework is the preferred mechanism used in Debian to interact with the user -when configuring packages and also forms the heart of &d-i;. -In the <classname>debconf</classname> framework questions or dialogs are -based on <firstterm>templates</firstterm>. There are different types of -templates for different types of questions. The actual questions are -<quote>generated</quote> from templates at runtime; multiple questions can -use the same template. - -</para><para> - -The following types of templates are relevant for preseeding. - -</para> - -<itemizedlist> -<listitem><para> - string: allows the user to type any value -</para></listitem> -<listitem><para> - password: similar to string but the value typed is not displayed -</para></listitem> -<listitem><para> - boolean: for yes/no or true/false type of questions -</para></listitem> -<listitem><para> - select: allows the user to select one option from a list -</para></listitem> -<listitem><para> - multiselect: allows the user to select zero, one or more options from a list -</para></listitem> -<listitem><para> - note: used to display a message -</para></listitem> -</itemizedlist> - -<para> - -In &d-i; templates are stored in a readable file -<filename>/var/cache/debconf/templates.dat</filename>. This file contains all fixed -text and all translations. It can also contain a default value for the -template. The fixed text can include variables that will be replaced at -runtime. - -</para><para> - -Another readable file <filename>/var/cache/debconf/questions.dat</filename> -is used to store the values for variables and the answers given to questions. -A question always refers to the template used to ask it. For obvious -security reasons the values for templates of type <quote>password</quote> -are stored in a separate, non-readable file in the same directory. - -</para> - </sect2> ---> - - <sect2 id="preseed-hooks"> - <title>Running custom commands during the installation</title> -<para> - -A very powerful and flexible option offered by the preconfiguration tools -is the ability to run commands or scripts at certain points in the -installation. See <xref linkend="preseed-shell"/> for details. - -</para> - -<itemizedlist> -<listitem><para> - <userinput>preseed/early_command</userinput>: is run as soon as the - preconfiguration file has been loaded -</para></listitem> -<listitem><para> - <userinput>preseed/late_command</userinput>: is run just before the reboot - at the end of the install, but before the <filename>/target</filename> - filesystem has been unmounted -</para></listitem> -</itemizedlist> - - </sect2> - - <sect2 id="preseed-seenflag"> - <title>Using preseeding to change default values</title> -<para> - -It is possible to use preseeding to change the default answer for a -question, but still have the question asked. To do this the -<firstterm>seen</firstterm> flag must be reset to <quote>false</quote> after -setting the value for a template. - -</para> - -<informalexample><screen> -d-i foo/bar string value -d-i foo/bar seen false -</screen></informalexample> - - </sect2> - </sect1> - - <sect1 id="preseed-using"> - <title>Using preseeding</title> -<para> - -Of course you will first need to create a preconfiguration file and place it in -the location from where you want to use it. Creating the preconfiguration file -is covered later in this appendix. Putting it in the correct location is fairly -straightforward for network preseeding or if you want to read the file off -a floppy or usb-stick. If you want to include the file on a CD or DVD, you -will have to remaster the ISO image. How to get the preconfiguration file -included in the initrd is outside the scope of this document; please consult -the developers documentation for &d-i;. - -</para><para> - -An example preconfiguration file that you can use as basis for your own -preconfiguration file is available from &urlset-example-preseed;. This file is -based on the configuration fragments included in this appendix. - -</para> - - <sect2 id="preseed-loading"> - <title>Loading the preconfiguration file</title> -<para> - -If you are using initrd preseeding, you only have to make sure a file named -<filename>preseed.cfg</filename> is included in the root directory of the -initrd. The installer will automatically check if this file is present and -load it. - -</para><para> - -For the other preseeding methods you need to tell the installer what file -to use when you boot it. This is normally done by passing the kernel a boot -parameter, either manually at boot time or by editing the bootloader -configuration file (e.g. <filename>syslinux.cfg</filename>) and adding the -parameter to the end of the append line(s) for the kernel. - -</para><para> - -If you do specify the preconfiguration file in the bootloader configuration, -you might change the configuration so you don't need to hit enter to boot the -installer. For syslinux this means setting the timeout to <literal>1</literal> -in <filename>syslinux.cfg</filename>. - -</para><para> - -To make sure the installer gets the right preconfiguration file, you can -optionally specify a checksum for the file. Currently this needs to be a -md5sum, and if specified it must match the preconfiguration file or the -installer will refuse to use it. - -</para> - -<informalexample><screen> -Boot parameters to specify: -- if you're netbooting: - preseed/url=http://host/path/to/preseed.cfg - preseed/url/checksum=5da499872becccfeda2c4872f9171c3d - -- if you're booting a remastered CD: - preseed/file=/cdrom/preseed.cfg - preseed/file/checksum=5da499872becccfeda2c4872f9171c3d - -- if you're installing from USB media (put the preconfiguration file in the - toplevel directory of the USB stick): - preseed/file=/hd-media/preseed.cfg - preseed/file/checksum=5da499872becccfeda2c4872f9171c3d -</screen></informalexample> - -<para> - -While you're at it, you may want to add a boot parameter -<userinput>debconf/priority=critical</userinput>. This will avoid most -questions even if the preseeding below misses some. - -</para> - </sect2> - - <sect2 id="preseed-dhcp"> - <title>Using a DHCP server to specify preconfiguration files</title> -<para> - -It's also possible to use DHCP to specify a preconfiguration file to download -from the network. DHCP allows specifying a filename. Normally this is a file -to netboot, but if it appears to be an URL then installation media that -support network preseeding will download the file from the URL and use it as a -preconfiguration file. Here is an example of how to set it up in the dhcpd.conf -for version 3 of the ISC DHCP server (the dhcp3-server Debian package). - -</para> - -<informalexample><screen> -if substring (option vendor-class-identifier, 0, 3) = "d-i" { - filename "http://host/preseed.cfg"; -} -</screen></informalexample> - -<para> - -Note that the above example limits this filename to DHCP clients that identify -themselves as "d-i", so it will not affect regular DHCP clients, but only -the installer. You can also put the text in a stanza for only one particular -host to avoid preseeding all installs on your network. - -</para><para> - -A good way to use the DHCP preseeding is to only preseed values specific to -your network, such as the Debian mirror to use. This way installs on your -network will automatically get a good mirror selected, but the rest of the -installation can be performed interactively. Using DHCP preseeding to fully -automate Debian installs should only be done with care. - -</para> - </sect2> - - <sect2 id="preseed-bootparms"> - <title>Using boot parameters to supplement preseeding</title> -<para> - -Some parts of the installation process cannot be automated using some forms -of preseeding because the questions are asked before the preconfiguration -file is loaded. For example, if the preconfiguration file is downloaded over -the network, the network setup must be done first. One reason to use initrd -preseeding is that it allows preseeding of even these early steps of the -installation process. - -</para><para> - -If a preconfiguration file cannot be used to preseed some steps, the install -can still be fully automated, since you can pass preseed values to the kernel -on the command line. Just pass <userinput>path/to/var=value</userinput> -for any of the preseed variables listed in the examples. - -</para><para> - -A <quote>––</quote> in the boot options has special meaning. -Kernel parameters that appear after it will be copied into the installed -bootloader configuration (if supported by the installer for the -bootloader). Note that the <quote>––</quote> may already be -present in the default boot parameters. - -</para> -<note><para> - -The 2.4 kernel accepts a maximum of 8 command line options and -8 environment options (including any options added by default for the -installer). If these numbers are exceeded, 2.4 kernels will drop any -excess options and 2.6 kernels will panic. For kernel 2.6.9 and later, -you can use 32 command line options and 32 environment options. - -</para></note> -<para> - -For most installations some of the default options in your bootloader -configuration file, like <literal>vga=normal</literal>, may be safely -removed which may allow you to add more options for preseeding. - -</para> -<note><para> - -It may not always be possible to specify values with spaces for boot -parameters, even if you delimit them with quotes. - -</para></note> - </sect2> - </sect1> - - <sect1 id="preseed-creating"> - <title>Creating a preconfiguration file</title> -<para> - -The preconfiguration file is in the format used by the -<command>debconf-set-selections</command> command. The general format of -a line in a preconfiguration file is: - -<informalexample><screen> -<owner> <template name> <template type> <value> -</screen></informalexample> - -</para><para> - -There are a few rules to keep in mind when writing a preconfiguration file. - -</para> - -<itemizedlist> -<listitem><para> - Put only a single space or tab between type and value: any additional - whitespace will be interpreted as belonging to the value. -</para></listitem> -<listitem><para> - A line can be split into multiple lines by appending a backslash - (<quote><literal>\</literal></quote>) as the line continuation character. - A good place to split a line is after the template name; a bad place is - between type and value. -</para></listitem> -<listitem><para> - Most templates need to be preseeded using the values valid in English and - not the translated values. However, there are some templates (for example - in <classname>partman</classname> where the translated values need to be - used. -</para></listitem> -<listitem><para> - Some templates take a code as value instead of the English text that is - shown during installation. -</para></listitem> -</itemizedlist> - -<para> - -The easiest way to create a preconfiguration file is to use the example file -linked in <xref linkend="preseed-contents"/> as basis and work from there. - -</para><para> - -An alternative method is to do a manual installation and then, after -rebooting, use the <command>debconf-get-selections</command> from the -<classname>debconf-utils</classname> package to dump both the debconf -database and the installer's cdebconf database to a single file: - -<informalexample><screen> -$ debconf-get-selections --installer > <replaceable>file</replaceable> -$ debconf-get-selections >> <replaceable>file</replaceable> -</screen></informalexample> - -</para><para> - -However, a file generated in this manner will have some items that should -not be preseeded, and the example file is a better starting place for most -users. - -</para> - -<note><para> - -This method relies on the fact that, at the end of the installation, the -installer's cdebconf database is saved to the installed system in -<filename>/var/log/installer/cdebconf</filename>. However, because the -database may contain sensitive information, by default the files are only -readable by root. - -</para><para> - -The directory <filename>/var/log/installer</filename> and all files in it -will be deleted from your system if you purge the package -<classname>installation-report</classname>. - -</para></note> - -<para> - -To check possible values for templates, you can use <command>nano</command> -to examine the files in <filename>/var/lib/cdebconf</filename> while an -installation is in progress. View <filename>templates.dat</filename> for -the raw templates and <filename>questions.dat</filename> for the current -values and for the values assigned to variables. - -</para><para> - -To check if the format of your preconfiguration file is valid before performing -an install, you can use the command <command>debconf-set-selections -c -<replaceable>preseed.cfg</replaceable></command>. - -</para> - </sect1> - - <sect1 id="preseed-contents"> - <title>Contents of the preconfiguration file</title> -<para> - -The configuration fragments used in this appendix are also available as an -example preconfiguration file from &urlset-example-preseed;. - -</para><para> - -Note that this example is based on an installation for the Intel x86 -architecture. If you are installing a different architecture, some of the -examples (like keyboard selection and bootloader installation) may not be -relevant and will need to be replaced by debconf settings appropriate for -your architecture. - -</para> - - <sect2 id="preseed-l10n"> - <title>Localization</title> -<para> - -Setting localization values will only work if you are using initrd preseeding. -With all other methods the preconfiguration file will only be loaded after -these questions have been asked. - -</para><para> - -The locale can be used to specify both language and country. -To specify the locale as a boot parameter, use -<userinput>debian-installer/locale=<replaceable>en_US</replaceable></userinput>. - -<informalexample role="example"><screen> -# Locale sets language and country. -d-i debian-installer/locale string en_US -</screen></informalexample> - -</para><para> - -Keyboard configuration consists of selecting a keyboard architecture and a -keymap. In most cases the correct keyboard architecture is selected by -default, so there's normally no need to preseed it. The keymap must -be valid for the selected keyboard architecture. - -<informalexample role="example"><screen> -# Keyboard selection. -#d-i console-tools/archs select at -d-i console-keymaps-at/keymap select us -# Example for a different keyboard architecture -#d-i console-keymaps-usb/keymap select mac-usb-us -</screen></informalexample> - -</para><para> - -To skip keyboard configuration, preseed -<classname>console-tools/archs</classname> with -<userinput>skip-config</userinput>. -This will result in the kernel keymap remaining active. - -</para> - -<note><para> - -The changes in the input layer for 2.6 kernels have made the keyboard -architecture virtually obsolete. For 2.6 kernels normally a <quote>PC</quote> -(<userinput>at</userinput>) keymap should be selected. - -</para></note> - </sect2> - - <sect2 id="preseed-network"> - <title>Network configuration</title> -<para> - -Of course, preseeding the network configuration won't work if you're -loading your preconfiguration file from the network. But it's great when -you're booting from CD or USB stick. If you are loading preconfiguration -files from the network, you can pass network config parameters by using -kernel boot parameters. - -</para><para> - -If you need to pick a particular interface when netbooting before loading -a preconfiguration file from the network, use a boot parameter such as -<userinput>netcfg/choose_interface=<replaceable>eth1</replaceable></userinput>. - -</para> - -<informalexample role="example"><screen> -# netcfg will choose an interface that has link if possible. This makes it -# skip displaying a list if there is more than one interface. -d-i netcfg/choose_interface select auto - -# To pick a particular interface instead: -#d-i netcfg/choose_interface select eth1 - -# If you have a slow dhcp server and the installer times out waiting for -# it, this might be useful. -#d-i netcfg/dhcp_timeout string 60 - -# If you prefer to configure the network manually, uncomment this line and -# the static network configuration below. -#d-i netcfg/disable_dhcp boolean true - -# If you want the preconfiguration file to work on systems both with and -# without a dhcp server, uncomment these lines and the static network -# configuration below. -#d-i netcfg/dhcp_failed note -#d-i netcfg/dhcp_options select Configure network manually - -# Static network configuration. -#d-i netcfg/get_nameservers string 192.168.1.1 -#d-i netcfg/get_ipaddress string 192.168.1.42 -#d-i netcfg/get_netmask string 255.255.255.0 -#d-i netcfg/get_gateway string 192.168.1.1 -#d-i netcfg/confirm_static boolean true - -# Any hostname and domain names assigned from dhcp take precedence over -# values set here. However, setting the values still prevents the questions -# from being shown, even if values come from dhcp. -d-i netcfg/get_hostname string unassigned-hostname -d-i netcfg/get_domain string unassigned-domain - -# Disable that annoying WEP key dialog. -d-i netcfg/wireless_wep string -# The wacky dhcp hostname that some ISPs use as a password of sorts. -#d-i netcfg/dhcp_hostname string radish -</screen></informalexample> - - </sect2> - - <sect2 id="preseed-mirror"> - <title>Mirror settings</title> -<para> - -Depending on the installation method you use, a mirror may be used both to -download additional components of the installer, the base system and to -set up the <filename>/etc/apt/sources.list</filename> for the installed -system. - -</para><para> - -The parameter <classname>mirror/suite</classname> determines the suite for -the installed system. - -</para><para> - -The parameter <classname>mirror/udeb/suite</classname> determines the suite -for additional components for the installer. It is only useful to set this -if components are actually downloaded over the network and should match the -suite that was used to build the initrd for the installation method used for -the installation. -By default the value for <classname>mirror/udeb/suite</classname> is the -same as <classname>mirror/suite</classname>. - -</para> - -<informalexample role="example"><screen> -d-i mirror/country string enter information manually -d-i mirror/http/hostname string http.us.debian.org -d-i mirror/http/directory string /debian -d-i mirror/http/proxy string - -# Suite to install. -#d-i mirror/suite string testing -# Suite to use for loading installer components (optional). -#d-i mirror/udeb/suite string testing -</screen></informalexample> - - </sect2> - - <sect2 id="preseed-partman"> - <title>Partitioning</title> -<para> - -Using preseeding to partition the harddisk is very much limited to what is -supported by <classname>partman-auto</classname>. You can choose to either -partition existing free space on a disk or a whole disk. The layout of the -disk can be determined by using a predefined recipe, a custom recipe from -a recipe file or a recipe included in the preconfiguration file. It is -currently not possible to partition multiple disks using preseeding nor to -set up RAID. - -</para> - -<warning><para> - -The identification of disks is dependent on the order in which their drivers -are loaded. If there are multiple disks in the system, make very sure the -correct one will be selected before using preseeding. - -</para></warning> - -<informalexample role="example"><screen> -# If the system has free space you can choose to only partition that space. -# Note: this template must be preseeded with a localized (translated) value. -#d-i partman-auto/init_automatically_partition \ -# select Use the largest continuous free space - -# Alternatively, you can specify a disk to partition. The device name can -# be given in either devfs or traditional non-devfs format. -# For example, to use the first disk devfs knows of: -d-i partman-auto/disk string /dev/discs/disc0/disc - -# You can choose from any of the predefined partitioning recipes. -# Note: this template must be preseeded with a localized (translated) value. -d-i partman-auto/choose_recipe \ - select All files in one partition (recommended for new users) -#d-i partman-auto/choose_recipe \ -# select Separate /home partition -#d-i partman-auto/choose_recipe \ -# select Separate /home, /usr, /var, and /tmp partitions - -# Or provide a recipe of your own... -# The recipe format is documented in the file devel/partman-auto-recipe.txt. -# If you have a way to get a recipe file into the d-i environment, you can -# just point at it. -#d-i partman-auto/expert_recipe_file string /hd-media/recipe - -# If not, you can put an entire recipe the preconfiguration file in one -# (logical) line. This example creates a small /boot partition, suitable -# swap, and uses the rest of the space for the root partition: -#d-i partman-auto/expert_recipe string \ -# boot-root :: \ -# 40 50 100 ext3 \ -# $primary{ } $bootable{ } \ -# method{ format } format{ } \ -# use_filesystem{ } filesystem{ ext3 } \ -# mountpoint{ /boot } \ -# . \ -# 500 10000 1000000000 ext3 \ -# method{ format } format{ } \ -# use_filesystem{ } filesystem{ ext3 } \ -# mountpoint{ / } \ -# . \ -# 64 512 300% linux-swap \ -# method{ swap } format{ } \ -# . - -# This makes partman automatically partition without confirmation. -d-i partman/confirm_write_new_label boolean true -d-i partman/choose_partition \ - select Finish partitioning and write changes to disk -d-i partman/confirm boolean true -</screen></informalexample> - - </sect2> - - <sect2 id="preseed-time"> - <title>Clock and time zone setup</title> - -<informalexample role="example"><screen> -# Controls whether or not the hardware clock is set to UTC. -d-i clock-setup/utc boolean true - -# You may set this to any valid setting for $TZ; see the contents of -# /usr/share/zoneinfo/ for valid values. -d-i time/zone string US/Eastern -</screen></informalexample> - - </sect2> - - <sect2 id="preseed-apt"> - <title>Apt setup</title> -<para> - -Setup of the <filename>/etc/apt/sources.list</filename> and basic configuration -options is fully automated based on your installation method and answers to -earlier questions. You can optionally add other (local) repositories. - -</para> - -<informalexample role="example"><screen> -# You can choose to install non-free and contrib software. -#d-i apt-setup/non-free boolean true -#d-i apt-setup/contrib boolean true -# Uncomment this to avoid adding security sources, or -# add a hostname to use a different server than security.debian.org. -#d-i apt-setup/security_host string - -# Additional repositories, local[0-9] available -#d-i apt-setup/local0/comment string local server -#d-i apt-setup/local0/repository string \ -# deb http://local.server/debian stable main -# URL to the public key of the local repository -#d-i apt-setup/local0/key string http://local.server/key -</screen></informalexample> - - </sect2> - - <sect2 id="preseed-account"> - <title>Account setup</title> -<para> - -The password for the root account and name and password for a first regular -user's account can be preseeded. For the passwords you can use either clear -text values or MD5 <emphasis>hashes</emphasis>. - -</para> -<warning><para> - -Be aware that preseeding passwords is not completely secure as everyone -with access to the preconfiguration file will have the knowledge of these -passwords. Using MD5 hashes is considered slightly better in terms of -security but it might also give a false sense of security as access to a -MD5 hash allows for brute force attacks. - -</para></warning> - -<informalexample role="example"><screen> -# Skip creation of a root account (normal user account will be able to -# use sudo). -#d-i passwd/root-login boolean false -# Alternatively, to skip creation of a normal user account. -#d-i passwd/make-user boolean false - -# Root password, either in clear text -#d-i passwd/root-password password r00tme -#d-i passwd/root-password-again password r00tme -# or encrypted using an MD5 hash. -#d-i passwd/root-password-crypted password [MD5 hash] - -# To create a normal user account. -#d-i passwd/user-fullname string Debian User -#d-i passwd/username string debian -# Normal user's password, either in clear text -#d-i passwd/user-password password insecure -#d-i passwd/user-password-again password insecure -# or encrypted using an MD5 hash. -#d-i passwd/user-password-crypted password [MD5 hash] -</screen></informalexample> - -<para> - -The <classname>passwd/root-password-crypted</classname> and -<classname>passwd/user-password-crypted</classname> variables can also -be preseeded with <quote>!</quote> as their value. In that case, the -corresponding account is disabled. This may be convenient for the root -account, provided of course that an alternative method is setup to allow -administrative activities or root login (for instance by using SSH key -authentication or <command>sudo</command>). - -</para><para> - -An MD5 hash for a password can be generated using the following command. - -<informalexample><screen> -$ echo "r00tme" | mkpasswd -s -H MD5 -</screen></informalexample> - -</para> - </sect2> - - <sect2 id="preseed-base-installer"> - <title>Base system installation</title> -<para> - -There is actually not very much that can be preseeded for this stage of the -installation. The only questions asked concern the installation of the kernel. - -</para> - -<informalexample role="example"><screen> -# Select the initramfs generator used to generate the initrd for 2.6 kernels. -#d-i base-installer/kernel/linux/initramfs-generators string yaird -</screen></informalexample> - - </sect2> - - <sect2 id="preseed-bootloader"> - <title>Boot loader installation</title> - -<informalexample role="example"><screen> -# Grub is the default boot loader (for x86). If you want lilo installed -# instead, uncomment this: -#d-i grub-installer/skip boolean true - -# This is fairly safe to set, it makes grub install automatically to the MBR -# if no other operating system is detected on the machine. -d-i grub-installer/only_debian boolean true - -# This one makes grub-installer install to the MBR if if finds some other OS -# too, which is less safe as it might not be able to boot that other OS. -d-i grub-installer/with_other_os boolean true - -# Alternatively, if you want to install to a location other than the mbr, -# uncomment and edit these lines: -#d-i grub-installer/bootdev string (hd0,0) -#d-i grub-installer/only_debian boolean false -#d-i grub-installer/with_other_os boolean false -</screen></informalexample> - - </sect2> - - <sect2 id="preseed-pkgsel"> - <title>Package selection</title> -<para> - -You can choose to install any combination of tasks that are available. -Available tasks as of this writing include: - -</para> - -<itemizedlist> -<listitem><para> - <userinput>standard</userinput> -</para></listitem> -<listitem><para> - <userinput>desktop</userinput> -</para></listitem> -<listitem><para> - <userinput>gnome-desktop</userinput> -</para></listitem> -<listitem><para> - <userinput>kde-desktop</userinput> -</para></listitem> -<listitem><para> - <userinput>web-server</userinput> -</para></listitem> -<listitem><para> - <userinput>print-server</userinput> -</para></listitem> -<listitem><para> - <userinput>dns-server</userinput> -</para></listitem> -<listitem><para> - <userinput>file-server</userinput> -</para></listitem> -<listitem><para> - <userinput>mail-server</userinput> -</para></listitem> -<listitem><para> - <userinput>sql-database</userinput> -</para></listitem> -<listitem><para> - <userinput>laptop</userinput> -</para></listitem> -</itemizedlist> - -<para> - -You can also choose to install no tasks, and force the installation of a -set of packages in some other way. We recommend always including the -<userinput>standard</userinput> task. - -</para> - -<informalexample role="example"><screen> -tasksel tasksel/first multiselect standard, desktop -#tasksel tasksel/first multiselect standard, web-server -#tasksel tasksel/first multiselect standard, kde-desktop - -# Some versions of the installer can report back on what software you have -# installed, and what software you use. The default is not to report back, -# but sending reports helps the project determine what software is most -# popular and include it on CDs. -#popularity-contest popularity-contest/participate boolean false -</screen></informalexample> - - </sect2> - - <sect2 id="preseed-finish"> - <title>Finishing up the first stage install</title> - -<informalexample role="example"><screen> -# Avoid that last message about the install being complete. -d-i prebaseconfig/reboot_in_progress note - -# This will prevent the installer from ejecting the CD during the reboot, -# which is useful in some situations. -#d-i cdrom-detect/eject boolean false -</screen></informalexample> - - </sect2> - - <sect2 id="preseed-mailer"> - <title>Mailer configuration</title> -<para> - -During a normal install, exim asks only a few questions. Here's how to -avoid even those. More complicated preseeding is possible. - -</para> - -<informalexample role="example"><screen> -exim4-config exim4/dc_eximconfig_configtype \ - select no configuration at this time -exim4-config exim4/no_config boolean true -exim4-config exim4/no_config boolean true -exim4-config exim4/dc_postmaster string -</screen></informalexample> - - </sect2> - - <sect2 id="preseed-X"> - <title>X configuration</title> -<para> - -Preseeding Debian's X config is possible, but you probably need to know -some details about the video hardware of the machine, since Debian's X -configurator does not do fully automatic configuration of everything. - -</para> - -<informalexample role="example"><screen> -# X can detect the right driver for some cards, but if you're preseeding, -# you override whatever it chooses. Still, vesa will work most places. -#xserver-xorg xserver-xorg/config/device/driver select vesa - -# A caveat with mouse autodetection is that if it fails, X will retry it -# over and over. So if it's preseeded to be done, there is a possibility of -# an infinite loop if the mouse is not autodetected. -#xserver-xorg xserver-xorg/autodetect_mouse boolean true - -# Monitor autodetection is recommended. -xserver-xorg xserver-xorg/autodetect_monitor boolean true -# Uncomment if you have an LCD display. -#xserver-xorg xserver-xorg/config/monitor/lcd boolean true -# X has three configuration paths for the monitor. Here's how to preseed -# the "medium" path, which is always available. The "simple" path may not -# be available, and the "advanced" path asks too many questions. -xserver-xorg xserver-xorg/config/monitor/selection-method \ - select medium -xserver-xorg xserver-xorg/config/monitor/mode-list \ - select 1024x768 @ 60 Hz -</screen></informalexample> - - </sect2> - - <sect2 id="preseed-other"> - <title>Preseeding other packages</title> - -<informalexample role="example"><screen> -# Depending on what software you choose to install, or if things go wrong -# during the installation process, it's possible that other questions may -# be asked. You can preseed those too, of course. To get a list of every -# possible question that could be asked during an install, do an -# installation, and then run these commands: -# debconf-get-selections --installer > file -# debconf-get-selections >> file -</screen></informalexample> - - </sect2> - </sect1> - - <sect1 id="preseed-advanced"> - <title>Advanced options</title> - - <sect2 id="preseed-shell"> - <title>Shell commands</title> - -<informalexample role="example"><screen> -# d-i preseeding is inherently not secure. Nothing in the installer checks -# for attempts at buffer overflows or other exploits of the values of a -# preconfiguration file like this one. Only use preconfiguration files from -# trusted locations! To drive that home, and because it's generally useful, -# here's a way to run any shell command you'd like inside the installer, -# automatically. - -# This first command is run as early as possible, just after -# preseeding is read. -#d-i preseed/early_command string anna-install some-udeb - -# This command is run just before the install finishes, but when there is -# still a usable /target directory. You can chroot to /target and use it -# directly, or use the apt-install and in-target commands to easily install -# packages and run commands in the target system. -#d-i preseed/late_command string apt-install zsh; in-target chsh -s /bin/zsh -</screen></informalexample> - - </sect2> - - <sect2 id="preseed-chainload"> - <title>Chainloading preconfiguration files</title> -<para> - -It is possible to include other preconfiguration files from a preconfiguration -file. Any settings in those files will override pre-existing settings from -files loaded earlier. This makes it possible to put, for example, general -networking settings for your location in one file and more specific -settings for certain configurations in other files. - -</para> - -<informalexample><screen> -# More that one file can be listed, separated by spaces; all will be -# loaded. The included files can have preseed/include directives of their -# own as well. Note that if the filenames are relative, they are taken from -# the same directory as the preconfiguration file that includes them. -#d-i preseed/include string x.cfg - -# The installer can optionally verify checksums of preconfiguration files -# before using them. Currently only md5sums are supported, list the md5sums -# in the same order as the list of files to include. -#d-i preseed/include/checksum string 5da499872becccfeda2c4872f9171c3d - -# More flexibly, this runs a shell command and if it outputs the names of -# preconfiguration files, includes those files. -#d-i preseed/include_command \ -# string echo if [ "`hostname`" = bob ]; then echo bob.cfg; fi -</screen></informalexample> - - </sect2> - </sect1> -</appendix> diff --git a/fi/appendix/random-bits.xml b/fi/appendix/random-bits.xml deleted file mode 100644 index 4d3fff8f9..000000000 --- a/fi/appendix/random-bits.xml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,10 +0,0 @@ -<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> -<!-- original version: 33719 untranslated --> - -<appendix id="random-bits"><title>Random Bits</title> - -&files.xml; -&chroot-install.xml; -&plip.xml; - -</appendix> diff --git a/fi/bookinfo.xml b/fi/bookinfo.xml deleted file mode 100644 index 0b7f6ba1e..000000000 --- a/fi/bookinfo.xml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,56 +0,0 @@ -<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> -<!-- original version: 34719 untranslated --> - -<bookinfo id="debian_installation_guide"> -<title>&debian; Installation Guide</title> - -<abstract> -<para> -This document contains installation instructions for the &debian; -&release; system (codename <quote>&releasename;</quote>), -for the &arch-title; (<quote>&architecture;</quote>) -architecture. It also contains pointers to more information and -information on how to make the most of your new Debian system. -</para> - -<para> -<warning condition="not-checked"><para> -This installation guide is based on an earlier manual written for -the old Debian installation system (the <quote>boot-floppies</quote>), and has -been updated to document the new Debian installer. However, for -&architecture;, the manual has not been fully updated and fact checked -for the new installer. There may remain parts of the manual that are -incomplete or outdated or that still document the boot-floppies -installer. A newer version of this manual, possibly better documenting -this architecture, may be found on the Internet at the -<ulink url="&url-d-i;">&d-i; home page</ulink>. You may also be able -to find additional translations there. -</para></warning> - -<note condition="checked"><para> -Although this installation guide for &architecture; is mostly up-to-date, -we plan to make some changes and reorganize parts of the manual after the -official release of &releasename;. A newer version of this manual may be -found on the Internet at the <ulink url="&url-d-i;">&d-i; home page</ulink>. -You may also be able to find additional translations there. -</para></note> -</para> -</abstract> - -<copyright> - <year>2004</year> - <year>2005</year> - <year>2006</year> - <holder>the Debian Installer team</holder> -</copyright> - -<legalnotice> -<para> - -This manual is free software; you may redistribute it and/or modify it -under the terms of the GNU General Public License. Please refer to the -license in <xref linkend="appendix-gpl"/>. - -</para> -</legalnotice> -</bookinfo> diff --git a/fi/boot-installer/alpha.xml b/fi/boot-installer/alpha.xml deleted file mode 100644 index d43770c8b..000000000 --- a/fi/boot-installer/alpha.xml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,441 +0,0 @@ -<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> -<!-- original version: 29334 untranslated --> - - <sect2 arch="alpha" id="alpha-firmware"> - <title>Alpha Console Firmware</title> -<para> - -Console firmware is stored in a flash ROM and started when an Alpha -system is powered up or reset. There are two different console -specifications used on Alpha systems, and hence two classes of console -firmware available: - -</para> - -<itemizedlist> -<listitem><para> - - <emphasis>SRM console</emphasis>, based on the Alpha Console Subsystem - specification, which provides an operating environment for OpenVMS, Tru64 - UNIX, and Linux operating systems. - -</para></listitem> -<listitem><para> - - <emphasis>ARC, AlphaBIOS, or ARCSBIOS console</emphasis>, based on the - Advanced RISC Computing (ARC) specification, which provides an operating - environment for Windows NT. - -</para></listitem> -</itemizedlist> - -<para> - -From the user's perspective, the most important difference between SRM -and ARC is that the choice of console constrains the possible -disk-partitioning scheme for the hard disk which you wish to boot off -of. - -</para><para> - -ARC requires that you use an MS-DOS partition table (as created by -<command>cfdisk</command>) for the boot disk. Therefore MS-DOS partition -tables are the <quote>native</quote> partition format when booting from -ARC. In fact, since AlphaBIOS contains a disk partitioning utility, you may -prefer to partition your disks from the firmware menus before -installing Linux. - -</para><para> - -Conversely, SRM is <emphasis>incompatible</emphasis><footnote> - -<para> -Specifically, the bootsector format required by the Console Subsystem -Specification conflicts with the placement of the DOS partition table. -</para> - -</footnote> with MS-DOS partition tables. Since Tru64 Unix uses the BSD -disklabel format, this is the <quote>native</quote> partition format for -SRM installations. - -</para><para> - -GNU/Linux is the only operating system on Alpha that can be booted from -both console types, but &debian; &release; only supports booting on -SRM-based systems. If you have an Alpha for which no version of SRM is -available, if you will be dual-booting the system with Windows NT, or if -your boot device requires ARC console support for BIOS initialization, -you will not be able to use the &debian; &release; installer. You can -still run &debian; &release; on such systems by using other install -media; for instance, you can install Debian woody with MILO and upgrade. - -</para><para> - -Because <command>MILO</command> is not available for any of the Alpha -systems currently in production (as of February 2000), and because it -is no longer necessary to buy an OpenVMS or Tru64 Unix license to have -SRM firmware on your older Alpha, it is recommended that you use SRM -when possible. - -</para><para> - -The following table summarizes available and supported system -type/console combinations (see <xref linkend="alpha-cpus"/> for the -system type names). The word <quote>ARC</quote> below denotes any of the -ARC-compliant consoles. - -</para><para> - -<informaltable><tgroup cols="2"> -<thead> -<row> - <entry>System Type</entry> - <entry>Console Type Supported</entry> -</row> -</thead> - -<tbody> -<row> - <entry>alcor</entry> - <entry>ARC or SRM</entry> -</row><row> - <entry>avanti</entry> - <entry>ARC or SRM</entry> -</row><row> - <entry>book1</entry> - <entry>SRM only</entry> -</row><row> - <entry>cabriolet</entry> - <entry>ARC or SRM</entry> -</row><row> - <entry>dp264</entry> - <entry>SRM only</entry> -</row><row> - <entry>eb164</entry> - <entry>ARC or SRM</entry> -</row><row> - <entry>eb64p</entry> - <entry>ARC or SRM</entry> -</row><row> - <entry>eb66</entry> - <entry>ARC or SRM</entry> -</row><row> - <entry>eb66p</entry> - <entry>ARC or SRM</entry> -</row><row> - <entry>jensen</entry> - <entry>SRM only</entry> -</row><row> - <entry>lx164</entry> - <entry>ARC or SRM</entry> -</row><row> - <entry>miata</entry> - <entry>ARC or SRM</entry> -</row><row> - <entry>mikasa</entry> - <entry>ARC or SRM</entry> -</row><row> - <entry>mikasa-p</entry> - <entry>SRM only</entry> -</row><row> - <entry>nautilus</entry> - <entry>ARC (see motherboard manual) or SRM</entry> -</row><row> - <entry>noname</entry> - <entry>ARC or SRM</entry> -</row><row> - <entry>noritake</entry> - <entry>SRM only</entry> -</row><row> - <entry>noritake-p</entry> - <entry>SRM only</entry> -</row><row> - <entry>pc164</entry> - <entry>ARC or SRM</entry> -</row><row> - <entry>rawhide</entry> - <entry>SRM only</entry> -</row><row> - <entry>ruffian</entry> - <entry>ARC only</entry> -</row><row> - <entry>sable</entry> - <entry>SRM only</entry> -</row><row> - <entry>sable-g</entry> - <entry>SRM only</entry> -</row><row> - <entry>sx164</entry> - <entry>ARC or SRM</entry> -</row><row> - <entry>takara</entry> - <entry>ARC or SRM</entry> -</row><row> - <entry>xl</entry> - <entry>ARC only</entry> -</row><row> - <entry>xlt</entry> - <entry>ARC only</entry> -</row> - -</tbody> -</tgroup> -</informaltable> - -</para><para> - -Generally, none of these consoles can boot Linux directly, so the -assistance of an intermediary bootloader is required. For the SRM -console, <command>aboot</command>, a small, platform-independent -bootloader, is used. See the (unfortunately outdated) <ulink -url="&url-srm-howto;">SRM HOWTO</ulink> for more information on -<command>aboot</command>. - -</para><para condition="FIXME"> - -The following paragraphs are from the woody install manual, and are -included here for reference; they may be useful to someone at a later -date when Debian supports MILO-based installs again. - -</para><para condition="FIXME"> - -Generally, none of these consoles can boot Linux directly, so the -assistance of an intermediary bootloader is required. There are two -mainstream Linux loaders: <command>MILO</command> and <command>aboot</command>. - -</para><para condition="FIXME"> - -<command>MILO</command> is itself a console, which replaces ARC or SRM in -memory. <command>MILO</command> can be booted from both ARC and SRM and is -the only way to bootstrap Linux from the ARC console. -<command>MILO</command> is platform-specific (a different <command>MILO</command> -is needed for each system type) and exist only for those systems, for -which ARC support is shown in the table above. See also the -(unfortunately outdated) <ulink url="&url-milo-howto;">MILO HOWTO</ulink>. - -</para><para condition="FIXME"> - -<command>aboot</command> is a small, platform-independent bootloader, which -runs from SRM only. See the (also unfortunately outdated) <ulink -url="&url-srm-howto;">SRM HOWTO</ulink> for more information on -<command>aboot</command>. - -</para><para condition="FIXME"> - -Thus, three scenarios are generally possible, depending on the -system's console firmware and whether or not <command>MILO</command> is -available: - -<informalexample><screen> -SRM -> aboot -SRM -> MILO -ARC -> MILO -</screen></informalexample> - -Because <command>MILO</command> is not available for any of the Alpha -systems currently in production (as of February 2000), and because it -is no longer necessary to buy an OpenVMS or Tru64 Unix license to have -SRM firmware on your older Alpha, it is recommended that you use SRM and -<command>aboot</command> on new installations of GNU/Linux, unless you wish -to dual-boot with Windows NT. - -</para><para> - -The majority of AlphaServers and all current server and workstation -products contain both SRM and AlphaBIOS in their firmware. For -<quote>half-flash</quote> machines such as the various evaluation boards, -it is possible to switch from one version to another by reflashing the -firmware. Also, once SRM is installed, it is possible to run -ARC/AlphaBIOS from a floppy disk (using the <command>arc</command> -command). For the reasons mentioned above, we recommend switching to -SRM before installing &debian;. - -</para><para> - -As on other architectures, you should install the newest available -revision of the firmware<footnote> - -<para> -Except on Jensen, where Linux is not supported on firmware versions -newer than 1.7 — see <ulink url="&url-jensen-howto;"></ulink> -for more information. -</para> - -</footnote> before installing &debian;. -For Alpha, firmware updates can be obtained from -<ulink url="&url-alpha-firmware;">Alpha Firmware Updates</ulink>. - -</para> - </sect2> - - - <sect2 arch="alpha"><title>Booting with TFTP</title> -<para> - -In SRM, Ethernet interfaces are named with the <userinput>ewa</userinput> -prefix, and will be listed in the output of the <userinput>show dev</userinput> command, -like this (edited slightly): - -<informalexample><screen> ->>> show dev -ewa0.0.0.9.0 EWA0 08-00-2B-86-98-65 -ewb0.0.0.11.0 EWB0 08-00-2B-86-98-54 -ewc0.0.0.2002.0 EWC0 00-06-2B-01-32-B0 -</screen></informalexample> - -You first need to set the boot protocol: - -<informalexample><screen> ->>> set ewa0_protocol bootp -</screen></informalexample> - -Then check the medium type is correct: - -<informalexample><screen> ->>> set ewa0_mode <replaceable>mode</replaceable> -</screen></informalexample> - -You can get a listing of valid modes with <userinput>>>>set ewa0_mode</userinput>. - -</para><para> - -Then, to boot from the first Ethernet interface, you would type: - -<informalexample><screen> ->>> boot ewa0 -flags "" -</screen></informalexample> - -This will boot using the default kernel parameters as included in the -netboot image. - -</para><para> - -If you wish to use a serial console, you <emphasis>must</emphasis> -pass the <userinput>console=</userinput> parameter to the kernel. -This can be done using the <userinput>-flags</userinput> argument to -the SRM <userinput>boot</userinput> command. The serial ports are -named the same as their corresponding files in -<userinput>/dev</userinput>. Also, when specifying additional kernel -parameters, you must repeat certain default options that are needed by -the &d-i; images. For example, to boot from <userinput>ewa0</userinput> -and use a console on the first serial port, you would type: - -<informalexample><screen> ->>> boot ewa0 -flags "root=/dev/ram ramdisk_size=16384 console=ttyS0" -</screen></informalexample> - -</para> - </sect2> - - <sect2 arch="alpha"><title>Booting from CD-ROM with the SRM Console</title> -<para> - -Type - -<informalexample><screen> ->>> boot xxxx -flags 0 -</screen></informalexample> - -where <replaceable>xxxx</replaceable> is your CD-ROM drive in SRM notation. - -</para> - </sect2> - - <sect2 arch="alpha" condition="FIXME"> - <title>Booting from CD-ROM with the ARC or AlphaBIOS Console</title> -<para> - -To boot a CD-ROM from the ARC console, find your sub-architecture code -name (see <xref linkend="alpha-cpus"/>), then enter -<filename>\milo\linload.exe</filename> as the boot loader and -<filename>\milo\<replaceable>subarch</replaceable></filename> (where -<replaceable>subarch</replaceable> is the proper subarchitecture name) -as the OS Path in the `OS Selection Setup' menu. Ruffians make an -exception: You need to use <filename>\milo\ldmilo.exe</filename> as -boot loader. - -</para> - </sect2> - - - <sect2 arch="alpha" condition="supports-floppy-boot"> - <title>Booting from Floppies with the SRM Console</title> -<para> - -At the SRM prompt (<prompt>>>></prompt>), issue the following -command: - -<informalexample><screen> ->>> boot dva0 -flags 0 -</screen></informalexample> - -possibly replacing <filename>dva0</filename> with the actual device -name. Usually, <filename>dva0</filename> is the floppy; type - -<informalexample><screen> ->>> show dev -</screen></informalexample> - -to see the list of devices (e.g., if you want to boot from a CD). -Note that if you are booting via MILO, <command>-flags</command> argument -is ignored, so you can just type <command>boot dva0</command>. -If everything works OK, you will eventually see the Linux kernel boot. - -</para><para> - -If you want to specify kernel parameters when booting via -<command>aboot</command>, use the following command: - -<informalexample><screen> ->>> boot dva0 -file linux.bin.gz -flags "root=/dev/fd0 load_ramdisk=1 arguments" -</screen></informalexample> - -(typed on one line), substituting, if necessary, the actual SRM boot -device name for <filename>dva0</filename>, the Linux boot device name for -<filename>fd0</filename>, and the desired kernel parameters for -<filename>arguments</filename>. - -</para><para> - -If you want to specify kernel parameters when booting via -<command>MILO</command>, you will have to interrupt bootstrap once you get -into MILO. See <xref linkend="booting-from-milo"/>. -</para> - </sect2> - - - <sect2 arch="alpha" condition="supports-floppy-boot"> - <title>Booting from Floppies with the ARC or AlphaBIOS Console</title> - -<para> - -In the OS Selection menu, set <command>linload.exe</command> as the boot -loader, and <command>milo</command> as the OS Path. Bootstrap using the -newly created entry. - -</para> - </sect2> - - <sect2 arch="alpha" condition="FIXME" id="booting-from-milo"><title>Booting with MILO</title> -<para> - -MILO contained on the bootstrap media is configured to proceed straight -to Linux automatically. Should you wish to intervene, all you need is to -press space during MILO countdown. - -</para><para> - -If you want to specify all the bits explicitly (for example, to supply -additional parameters), you can use a command like this: - -<informalexample><screen> -MILO> boot fd0:linux.bin.gz root=/dev/fd0 load_ramdisk=1 <!-- arguments --> -</screen></informalexample> - -If you are booting from something other than a floppy, substitute -<filename>fd0</filename> in the above example with the appropriate device name -in Linux notation. The <command>help</command> command would give you a brief -MILO command reference. - -</para> - </sect2> diff --git a/fi/boot-installer/arm.xml b/fi/boot-installer/arm.xml deleted file mode 100644 index 5e17ac9ac..000000000 --- a/fi/boot-installer/arm.xml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,219 +0,0 @@ -<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> -<!-- original version: 36639 untranslated --> - - <sect2 arch="arm" id="boot-tftp"><title>Booting from TFTP</title> - -&boot-installer-intro-net.xml; - - <sect3 arch="arm"><title>Booting from TFTP on Netwinder</title> -<para> - -Netwinders have two network interfaces: A 10Mbps NE2000-compatible -card (which is generally referred to as <literal>eth0</literal>) and -a 100Mbps Tulip card. There may be problems loading the image via TFTP -using the 100Mbps card so it is recommended that you use the 10Mbps -interface (the one labeled with <literal>10 Base-T</literal>). - -</para> -<note><para> - -You need NeTTrom 2.2.1 or later to boot the installation system, and -version 2.3.3 is recommended. Unfortunately, firmware files are currently -not available for download because of license issues. If this situation -changes, you may find new images at <ulink url="http//www.netwinder.org/"></ulink>. - -</para></note> -<para> - -When you boot your Netwinder you have to interrupt the boot process during the -countdown. This allows you to set a number of firmware settings needed in -order to boot the installer. First of all, start by loading the default -settings: - -<informalexample><screen> - NeTTrom command-> load-defaults -</screen></informalexample> - -Furthermore, you must configure the network, either with a static address: - -<informalexample><screen> - NeTTrom command-> setenv netconfig_eth0 flash - NeTTrom command-> setenv eth0_ip 192.168.0.10/24 -</screen></informalexample> - -where 24 is the number of set bits in the netmask, or a dynamic address: - -<informalexample><screen> - NeTTrom command-> setenv netconfig_eth0 dhcp -</screen></informalexample> - -You may also need to configure the <userinput>route1</userinput> -settings if the TFTP server is not on the local subnet. - -Following these settings, you have to specify the TFTP server and the -location of the image. You can then store your settings to flash. - -<informalexample><screen> - NeTTrom command-> setenv kerntftpserver 192.168.0.1 - NeTTrom command-> setenv kerntftpfile boot.img - NeTTrom command-> save-all -</screen></informalexample> - -Now you have to tell the firmware that the TFTP image should be booted: - -<informalexample><screen> - NeTTrom command-> setenv kernconfig tftp - NeTTrom command-> setenv rootdev /dev/ram -</screen></informalexample> - -If you use a serial console to install your Netwinder, you need to add the -following setting: - -<informalexample><screen> - NeTTrom command-> setenv cmdappend root=/dev/ram console=ttyS0,115200 -</screen></informalexample> - -Alternatively, for installations using a keyboard and monitor you have to -set: - -<informalexample><screen> - NeTTrom command-> setenv cmdappend root=/dev/ram -</screen></informalexample> - -You can use the <command>printenv</command> command to review your -environment settings. After you have verified that the settings are -correct, you can load the image: - -<informalexample><screen> - NeTTrom command-> boot -</screen></informalexample> - -In case you run into any problems, a <ulink -url="http://www.netwinder.org/howto/Firmware-HOWTO.html">detailed -HOWTO</ulink> is available. - -</para> - </sect3> - - <sect3 arch="arm"><title>Booting from TFTP on CATS</title> -<para> - -On CATS machines, use <command>boot de0:</command> or similar at the -Cyclone prompt. - -</para> - </sect3> - </sect2> - - - <sect2 arch="arm"><title>Booting from CD-ROM</title> - -&boot-installer-intro-cd.xml; - -<para> - -To boot a CD-ROM from the Cyclone console prompt, use the command -<command>boot cd0:cats.bin</command> - -</para> - </sect2> - - - <sect2 arch="arm" id="boot-firmware"><title>Booting from Firmware</title> - -&boot-installer-intro-firmware.xml; - - <sect3 arch="arm" id="boot-firmware-nslu2"><title>Booting the NSLU2</title> -<para> - -There are three ways how to put the installer firmware into flash: - -</para> - - <sect4 arch="arm"><title>Using the NSLU2 web interface</title> -<para> - -Go to the administration section and choose the menu item -<literal>Upgrade</literal>. You can then browse your disk for the -installer image you have previously downloaded. Then press the -<literal>Start Upgrade</literal> button, confirm, wait for a few minutes -and confirm again. The system will then boot straight into the installer. - -</para> - </sect4> - - <sect4 arch="arm"><title>Via the network using Linux/Unix</title> -<para> - -You can use <command>upslug2</command> from any Linux or Unix machine to -upgrade the machine via the network. This software is packaged for -Debian. - -First, you have to put your NSLU2 in upgrade mode: - -<orderedlist> -<listitem><para> - -Disconnect any disks and/or devices from the USB ports. - -</para></listitem> -<listitem><para> - -Power off the NSLU2 - -</para></listitem> -<listitem><para> - -Press and hold the reset button (accessible through the small hole on the -back just above the power input). - -</para></listitem> -<listitem><para> - -Press and release the power button to power on the NSLU2. - -</para></listitem> -<listitem><para> - -Wait for 10 seconds watching the ready/status LED. After 10 seconds it -will change from amber to red. Immediately release the reset button. - -</para></listitem> -<listitem><para> - -The NSLU2 ready/status LED will flash alternately red/green (there is a 1 -second delay before the first green). The NSLU2 is now in upgrade mode. - -</para></listitem> -</orderedlist> - -See the <ulink -url="http://www.nslu2-linux.org/wiki/OpenSlug/UsingTheBinary">NSLU2-Linux -pages</ulink> if you have problems with this. - -Once your NSLU2 is in upgrade mode, you can flash the new image: - -<informalexample><screen> -sudo upslug2 -i di-nslu2.bin -</screen></informalexample> - -Note that the tool also shows the MAC address of your NSLU2, which may come -in handy to configure your DHCP server. After the whole image has been -written and verified, the system will automatically reboot. Make sure you -connect your USB disk again now, otherwise the installer won't be able to -find it. - -</para> - </sect4> - - <sect4 arch="arm"><title>Via the network using Windows</title> -<para> - -There is <ulink -url="http://www.everbesthk.com/8-download/sercomm/firmware/all_router_utility.zip">a -tool</ulink> for Windows to upgrade the firmware via the network. - -</para> - </sect4> - </sect3> - </sect2> diff --git a/fi/boot-installer/boot-installer.xml b/fi/boot-installer/boot-installer.xml deleted file mode 100644 index 0a5a08799..000000000 --- a/fi/boot-installer/boot-installer.xml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,32 +0,0 @@ -<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> -<!-- original version: 35310 untranslated --> - -<chapter id="boot-installer"><title>Booting the Installation System</title> - -<!-- Include only archs that are documented to avoid build-errors --> -<!-- The arch="..." condition can be deleted when al archs are present --> - <sect1 arch="alpha;arm;i386;ia64;m68k;mips;mipsel;s390;powerpc;sparc"> - <title>Booting the Installer on &arch-title;</title> - -<!-- This info is so architecture dependent, that I have turned the --> -<!-- structure inside out for this chapter. Each arch has a document. --> -<!-- Note: archs hppa and mipsel are currently missing --> - -&boot-installer-alpha.xml; -&boot-installer-arm.xml; -<!-- &boot-installer-hppa.xml; --> -&boot-installer-i386.xml; -&boot-installer-ia64.xml; -&boot-installer-m68k.xml; -&boot-installer-mips.xml; -&boot-installer-mipsel.xml; -&boot-installer-s390.xml; -&boot-installer-powerpc.xml; -&boot-installer-sparc.xml; - - </sect1> - -&boot-installer-parameters.xml; -&boot-installer-trouble.xml; - -</chapter> diff --git a/fi/boot-installer/hppa.xml b/fi/boot-installer/hppa.xml deleted file mode 100644 index 619d3eaf1..000000000 --- a/fi/boot-installer/hppa.xml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,12 +0,0 @@ -<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> -<!-- original version: 24701 untranslated --> - - <sect2 arch="hppa"> - <title></title> -<para> - -<!-- Placeholder document; please write and include in - boot-installer.xml and build/templates/docstruct.ent --> - -</para> - </sect2> diff --git a/fi/boot-installer/i386.xml b/fi/boot-installer/i386.xml deleted file mode 100644 index 24560c444..000000000 --- a/fi/boot-installer/i386.xml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,367 +0,0 @@ -<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> -<!-- original version: 36744 untranslated --> - - <sect2 arch="i386"><title>Booting from a CD-ROM</title> - -&boot-installer-intro-cd.xml; - -<!-- We'll comment the following section until we know exact layout --> -<!-- -CD #1 of official Debian CD-ROM sets for &arch-title; will present a -<prompt>boot:</prompt> prompt on most hardware. Press -<keycap>F4</keycap> to see the list of kernel options available -from which to boot. Just type your chosen flavor name (idepci, -vanilla, compact, bf24) at the <prompt>boot:</prompt> prompt -followed by &enterkey;. - -</para><para> - -If your hardware doesn't support booting of multiple images, put one -of the other CDs in the drive. It appears that most SCSI CD-ROM drives -do not support <command>isolinux</command> multiple image booting, so users -with SCSI CD-ROMs should try either CD2 (vanilla) or CD3 (compact), -or CD5 (bf2.4). - -</para><para> - -CD's 2 through 5 will each boot a -different ``flavor'' depending on which CD-ROM is -inserted. See <xref linkend="kernel-choice"/> for a discussion of the -different flavors. Here's how the flavors are laid out on the -different CD-ROMs: - -<variablelist> -<varlistentry> -<term>CD 1</term><listitem><para> - -Allows a selection of kernel images to boot from (the idepci flavor is -the default if no selection is made). - -</para></listitem></varlistentry> -<varlistentry> -<term>CD 2</term><listitem><para> - -Boots the <quote>vanilla</quote> flavor. - -</para></listitem></varlistentry> -<varlistentry> -<term>CD 3</term><listitem><para> - -Boots the <quote>compact</quote> flavor. - -</para></listitem></varlistentry> -<varlistentry> -<term>CD 4</term><listitem><para> - -Boots the <quote>idepci</quote> flavor. - -</para></listitem></varlistentry> -<varlistentry> -<term>CD 5</term><listitem><para> - -Boots the <quote>bf2.4</quote> flavor. - -</para></listitem></varlistentry> - - </variablelist> - -</para><para> - ---> - - </sect2> - -<!-- FIXME the documented procedure does not exactly work, commented out - until fixes - - <sect2 arch="i386" id="install-from-dos"> - <title>Booting from a DOS partition</title> - -&boot-installer-intro-hd.xml; - -<para> - -Boot into DOS (not Windows) without any drivers being loaded. To do -this, you have to press <keycap>F8</keycap> at exactly the right -moment (and optionally select the <quote>safe mode command prompt only</quote> -option). Enter the subdirectory for the flavor you chose, e.g., - -<informalexample><screen> -cd c:\install -</screen></informalexample>. - -Next, execute <command>install.bat</command>. -The kernel will load and launch the installer system. - -</para><para> - -Please note, there is currently a loadlin problem (#142421) which -precludes <filename>install.bat</filename> from being used with the -bf2.4 flavor. The symptom of the problem is an -<computeroutput>invalid compressed format</computeroutput> error. - -</para> - </sect2> - -END FIXME --> - - <sect2 arch="i386" id="boot-initrd"> - <title>Booting from Linux Using <command>LILO</command> or - <command>GRUB</command></title> - -<para> -To boot the installer from hard disk, you must first download -and place the needed files as described in <xref linkend="boot-drive-files"/>. -</para> - -<para> -If you intend to use the hard drive only for booting and then -download everything over the network, you should download the -<filename>netboot/debian-installer/i386/initrd.gz</filename> file and its -corresponding kernel. This will allow you to repartition the hard disk -from which you boot the installer, although you should do so with care. -</para> - -<para> -Alternatively, if you intend to keep an existing partition on the hard -drive unchanged during the install, you can download the -<filename>hd-media/initrd.gz</filename> file and its kernel, as well as -copy a CD iso to the drive (make sure the file is named ending in -<literal>.iso</literal>). The installer can then boot from the drive -and install from the CD image, without needing the network. -</para> - -<para> -For <command>LILO</command>, you will need to configure two -essential things in <filename>/etc/lilo.conf</filename>: -<itemizedlist> -<listitem><para> - -to load the <filename>initrd.gz</filename> installer at boot time; - -</para></listitem> -<listitem><para> - -have the <filename>vmlinuz</filename> kernel use a RAM disk as -its root partition. - -</para></listitem> -</itemizedlist> - -Here is a <filename>/etc/lilo.conf</filename> example: - -</para><para> - -<informalexample><screen> -image=/boot/newinstall/vmlinuz - label=newinstall - initrd=/boot/newinstall/initrd.gz - root=/dev/ram0 - append="ramdisk_size=12000" -</screen></informalexample> - -For more details, refer to the -<citerefentry><refentrytitle>initrd</refentrytitle> -<manvolnum>4</manvolnum></citerefentry> and -<citerefentry><refentrytitle>lilo.conf</refentrytitle> -<manvolnum>5</manvolnum></citerefentry> man pages. Now run -<userinput>lilo</userinput> and reboot. - -</para><para> - -The procedure for <command>GRUB</command> is quite similar. Locate your -<filename>menu.lst</filename> in the <filename>/boot/grub/</filename> -directory (sometimes in the <filename>/boot/boot/grub/</filename>), -add the following lines: - -<informalexample><screen> -title New Install -kernel (hd0,0)/boot/newinstall/vmlinuz root=/dev/ram0 ramdisk_size=12000 -initrd (hd0,0)/boot/newinstall/initrd.gz -</screen></informalexample> - -and reboot. - -</para><para> - -Note that the value of the <userinput>ramdisk_size</userinput> may need to be -adjusted for the size of the initrd image. -From here on, there should be no difference between <command>GRUB</command> -or <command>LILO</command>. - -</para> - </sect2> - - <sect2 arch="i386" condition="bootable-usb" id="usb-boot"> - <title>Booting from USB Memory Stick</title> -<para> - -Let's assume you have prepared everything from <xref -linkend="boot-dev-select"/> and <xref linkend="boot-usb-files"/>. Now -just plug your USB stick into some free USB connector and reboot the -computer. The system should boot up, and you should be presented with -the <prompt>boot:</prompt> prompt. Here you can enter optional boot -arguments, or just hit &enterkey;. - -</para> - </sect2> - - <sect2 arch="i386" condition="supports-floppy-boot" id="floppy-boot"> - <title>Booting from Floppies</title> -<para> - -You will have already downloaded the floppy images you needed and -created floppies from the images in <xref linkend="create-floppy"/>. -<!-- missing-doc FIXME If you need to, you can also modify the boot floppy; see -<xref linkend="rescue-replace-kernel"/>. --> - -</para><para> - -To boot from the installer boot floppy, place it in the primary floppy -drive, shut down the system as you normally would, then turn it back -on. - -</para><para> - -For installing from an LS-120 drive (ATAPI version) with a set of -floppies, you need to specify the virtual location for the floppy -device. This is done with the <emphasis>root=</emphasis> boot -argument, giving the device that the ide-floppy driver maps the device -to. For example, if your LS-120 drive is connected as the first IDE -device (master) on the second cable, you enter -<userinput>linux root=/dev/hdc</userinput> at the boot prompt. -Installation from LS-120 is only supported by 2.4 and later kernels. - -</para><para> - -Note that on some machines, <keycombo><keycap>Control</keycap> -<keycap>Alt</keycap> <keycap>Delete</keycap></keycombo> does not -properly reset the machine, so a <quote>hard</quote> reboot is recommended. If -you are installing from an existing operating system (e.g., from a DOS -box) you don't have a choice. Otherwise, please do a hard reboot when -booting. - -</para><para> - -The floppy disk will be accessed, and you should then see a screen -that introduces the boot floppy and ends with the <prompt>boot:</prompt> -prompt. - -</para><para> - -Once you press &enterkey;, you should see the message -<computeroutput>Loading...</computeroutput>, followed by -<computeroutput>Uncompressing Linux...</computeroutput>, and -then a screenfull or so of information about the hardware in your -system. More information on this phase of the boot process can be -found below in <xref linkend="kernel-msgs"/>. - -</para><para> - -After booting from the boot floppy, the root floppy is -requested. Insert the root floppy and press &enterkey;, and the -contents are loaded into memory. The installer program -<command>debian-installer</command> is automatically launched. - -</para> - </sect2> - - <sect2 arch="i386" id="boot-tftp"><title>Booting with TFTP</title> - -&boot-installer-intro-net.xml; - -<para> - -There are various ways to do a TFTP boot on i386. - -</para> - - <sect3><title>NIC or Motherboard that support PXE</title> -<para> - -It could be that your Network Interface Card or Motherboard provides -PXE boot functionality. -This is a <trademark class="trade">Intel</trademark> re-implementation -of TFTP boot. If so you may be able to configure your BIOS to boot from the -network. - -</para> - </sect3> - - <sect3><title>NIC with Network BootROM</title> -<para> - -It could be that your Network Interface Card provides -TFTP boot functionality. - -</para><para condition="FIXME"> - -Let us (<email>&email-debian-boot-list;</email>) know how did you manage it. -Please refer to this document. - -</para> - </sect3> - - <sect3><title>Etherboot</title> -<para> - -The <ulink url="http://www.etherboot.org">etherboot project</ulink> -provides bootdiskettes and even bootroms that do a TFTPboot. - -</para> - </sect3> - </sect2> - - <sect2 arch="i386"><title>The Boot Prompt</title> -<para> - -When the installer boots, you should be presented with a friendly graphical -screen showing the Debian logo and the boot prompt: - -<informalexample><screen> -Press F1 for help, or ENTER to boot: -</screen></informalexample> - -At the boot prompt -you can either just press &enterkey; to boot the installer with -default options or enter a specific boot method and, optionally, boot -parameters. - -</para><para> - -Information on available boot methods and on boot parameters which might -be useful can be found by pressing <keycap>F2</keycap> through -<keycap>F8</keycap>. If you add any parameters to -the boot command line, be sure to type the boot method (the default is -<userinput>linux</userinput>) and a space before the first parameter (e.g., -<userinput>linux debconf/priority=medium</userinput>). - -<note><para> - -If you are installing the system via a remote management device that -provides a text interface to the VGA console, you may not be able to -see the initial graphical splash screen upon booting the installer; -you may even not see the boot prompt. Examples of these devices include -the text console of Compaq's <quote>integrated Lights Out</quote> (iLO) -and HP's <quote>Integrated Remote Assistant</quote> (IRA). -You can blindly press F1<footnote> - -<para> - -In some cases these devices will require special escape sequences to -enact this keypress, for example the IRA uses <keycombo> <keycap>Ctrl</keycap> -<keycap>F</keycap> </keycombo>, <keycap>1</keycap>. - -</para> - -</footnote> to bypass this screen and view the help text. Once you are -past the splash screen and at the help text your keystrokes will be echoed -at the prompt as expected. To prevent the installer from using the -framebuffer for the rest of the installation, you will also want to add -<userinput>debian-installer/framebuffer=false</userinput> to the boot prompt, -as described in the help text. - -</para></note> -</para> - - </sect2> diff --git a/fi/boot-installer/ia64.xml b/fi/boot-installer/ia64.xml deleted file mode 100644 index 9afc8b61e..000000000 --- a/fi/boot-installer/ia64.xml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,464 +0,0 @@ -<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> -<!-- original version: 28672 untranslated --> - - <sect2 arch="ia64"><title>Booting from a CD-ROM</title> - -&boot-installer-intro-cd.xml; - - <note> - <title>CD Contents</title> - -<para> - -There are three basic variations of Debian Install CDs. -The <emphasis>Business Card</emphasis> CD has a minimal installation -that will fit on the small form factor CD media. -It requires a network connection in order to install the rest of the -base installation and make a usable system. -The <emphasis>Network Install</emphasis> CD has all of the packages -for a base install but requires a network connection to a Debian -mirror site in order to install the -extra packages one would want for a complete system . -The set of Debian CDs can install a complete system from the wide -range of packages without needing access to the network. -</para> - </note> - -<para> - -The IA-64 architecture uses the next generation Extensible Firmware Interface -(EFI) from Intel. -Unlike the traditional x86 BIOS which knows little about the boot -device other than the partition table and Master Boot Record (MBR), -EFI can read and write files from FAT16 or FAT32 formatted disk -partitions. -This simplifies the often arcane process of starting a system. -The system boot loader and the EFI firmware that supports it have -a full filesystem to store the files necessary for booting the -machine. -This means that the system disk on an IA-64 system has an additional -disk partition dedicated to EFI instead of the simple MBR or boot -block on more conventional systems. - -</para><para> - -The Debian Installer CD contains a small EFI partition where the -<command>ELILO</command> bootloader, its configuration file, the installer's -kernel, and initial filesystem (initrd) are located. -The running system also contains an EFI partition where the necessary -files for booting the system reside. -These files are readable from the EFI Shell as described below. - -</para><para> - -Most of the details of how <command>ELILO</command> actually loads and -starts a system are transparent to the system installer. -However, the installer must set up an EFI partition prior to installing -the base system. Otherwise, the installation of <command>ELILO</command> -will fail, rendering the system un-bootable. -The EFI partition is allocated and formatted in the partitioning step -of the installation prior to loading any packages on the system disk. -The partitioning task also verifies that a suitable EFI partition is -present before allowing the installation to proceed. - -</para><para> - -The EFI Boot Manager is presented as the last step of the firmware -initialization. -It displays a menu list from which the user can select -an option. -Depending on the model of system and what other software has been -loaded on the system, this menu may be different from one system -to another. -There should be at least two menu items displayed, -<command>Boot Option Maintenance Menu</command> and -<command>EFI Shell (Built-in)</command>. -Using the first option is preferred, however, if that -option is not available or the CD for some reason does not -boot with it, use the second option. - -</para> - - <warning> - <title>IMPORTANT</title> -<para> -The EFI Boot Manager will select a default boot action, typically -the first menu choice, within a pre-set number of seconds. -This is indicated by a countdown at the bottom of the screen. -Once the timer expires and the systems starts the default action, -you may have to reboot the machine in order to continue the installation. -If the default action is the EFI Shell, you can return to the Boot Manager -by running <command>exit</command> at the shell prompt. -</para> - </warning> - - <sect3 arch="ia64" id="bootable-cd"> - <title>Option 1: Booting from the Boot Option Maintenance Menu</title> -<para> - -</para> - -<itemizedlist> - -<listitem><para> -Insert the CD in the DVD/CD drive and reboot the machine. -The firmware will display the EFI Boot Manager page and menu after -it completes its system initialization. -</para></listitem> - -<listitem><para> -Select <command>Boot Maintenance Menu</command> from the menu -with the arrow keys and press <command>ENTER</command>. -This will display a new menu. -</para></listitem> - -<listitem><para> -Select <command>Boot From a File</command> from the menu -with the arrow keys and press <command>ENTER</command>. -This will display a list of devices probed by the firmware. -You should see two menu lines containing either the label -<command>Debian Inst [Acpi ...</command> or -<command>Removable Media Boot</command>. -If you examine the rest of the menu line, you will notice that -the device and controller information should be the same. -</para></listitem> - -<listitem><para> -You can choose either of the entries that refer to the CD/DVD -drive. -Select your choice with the arrow keys and press <command>ENTER</command>. -If you choose <command>Removable Media Boot</command> the machine -will immediately start the boot load sequence. -If you choose <command>Debian Inst [Acpi ...</command> instead, it -will display a directory listing of the bootable portion of the -CD, requiring you to proceed to the next (additional) step. -</para></listitem> - -<listitem><para> -You will only need this step if you chose -<command>Debian Inst [Acpi ...</command>. -The directory listing will also show -<command>[Treat like Removable Media Boot]</command> on the next to -the last line. -Select this line with the arrow keys and press <command>ENTER</command>. -This will start the boot load sequence. -</para></listitem> - -</itemizedlist> - -<para> - -These steps start the Debian boot loader which will display a -menu page for you to select a boot kernel and options. -Proceed to selecting the boot kernel and options. - -</para> - </sect3> - - <sect3 arch="ia64" id="boot-with-efi"> - <title>Option 2: Booting from the EFI Shell</title> -<para> - -If, for some reason, option 1 is not successful, reboot the machine -and when the EFI Boot Manager screen appears there should be -one option called <command>EFI Shell [Built-in]</command>. -Boot the Debian Installer CD with the following steps: - -</para> - -<itemizedlist> - -<listitem><para> -Insert the CD in the DVD/CD drive and reboot the machine. -The firmware will display the EFI Boot Manager page and menu after -it completes system initialization. -</para></listitem> - -<listitem><para> -Select <command>EFI Shell</command> from the menu with the arrow keys -and press <command>ENTER</command>. -The EFI Shell will scan all of the bootable devices and display -them to the console before displaying its command prompt. -The recognized bootable partitions on devices will show a device name of -<filename>fs<replaceable>n</replaceable>:</filename>. -All other recognized partitions will be named -<filename>blk<replaceable>n</replaceable>:</filename>. -If you inserted the CD just before entering the shell, this may -take a few extra seconds as it initializes the CD drive. -</para> -</listitem> - -<listitem><para> -Examine the output from the shell looking for the CDROM drive. -It is most likely the <filename>fs0:</filename> device although -other devices with bootable partitions will also show up as -<filename>fs<replaceable>n</replaceable></filename>. -</para></listitem> - -<listitem><para> -Enter <command>fs<replaceable>n</replaceable>:</command> and press -<command>ENTER</command> to select that -device where <replaceable>n</replaceable> is the partition number for the -CDROM. The shell will now display the partition number as its prompt. -</para></listitem> - -<listitem><para> -Enter <command>elilo</command> and press <command>ENTER</command>. -This will start the boot load sequence. -</para></listitem> - -</itemizedlist> - -<para> - -As with option 1, these steps start the Debian boot loader which will -display a menu page for you to select a boot kernel and options. -You can also enter the shorter -<command>fs<replaceable>n</replaceable>:elilo</command> command at -the shell prompt. -Proceed to selecting the boot kernel and options. - -</para> - - </sect3> - - <sect3 arch="ia64" id="serial-console"> - <title>Installing using a Serial Console</title> - -<para> - -You may choose to perform an install using a monitor and keyboard -or using a serial connection. To use a monitor/keyboard setup, -select an option containing the string [VGA console]. To install -over a serial connection, choose an option containing the string -[<replaceable>BAUD</replaceable> baud serial console], where -<replaceable>BAUD</replaceable> is the speed of your serial console. -Menu items for the most typical baud rate settings on the ttyS0 -device are preconfigured. - -</para><para> - -In most circumstances, you will want the installer to use the same -baud rate as your connection to the EFI console. If you aren't -sure what this setting is, you can obtain it using the command -<command>baud</command> at the EFI shell. - -</para><para> - -If there is not an option available that is configured for the serial -device or baud rate you would like to use, you may override the console setting -for one of the existing menu options. For example, to use a -57600 baud console over the ttyS1 device, enter -<command>console=ttyS1,57600n8</command> into -the <classname>Boot:</classname> text window. - -</para> - -<note><para> -Most IA-64 boxes ship with a default console setting of 9600 baud. -This setting is rather slow, and the normal installation process -will take a significant time to draw each screen. You should consider -either increasing the baud rate used for performing the installation, -or performing a Text Mode installation. See the <classname>Params</classname> -help menu for instructions on starting the installer in Text Mode. -</para></note> - -<warning><para> -If you select the wrong console type, you -will be able to select the kernel and enter parameters but both -the display and your input will go dead as soon as the kernel starts, -requiring you to reboot before you can begin the installation. -</para></warning> - </sect3> - - <sect3 arch="ia64" id="kernel-option-menu"> - <title>Selecting the Boot Kernel and Options</title> - -<para> - -The boot loader will display a form with a menu list and a text -window with a <classname>Boot:</classname> prompt. -The arrow keys select an item from the menu and any text typed -at the keyboard will appear in the text window. -There are also help screens which can be displayed by pressing -the appropriate function key. -The <classname>General</classname> help screen explains the menu -choices and the <classname>Params</classname> screen explains -the common command line options. - -</para><para> - -Consult the <classname>General</classname> help screen for the -description of the kernels and install modes most appropriate -for your installation. -You should also consult <xref linkend="boot-parms"/> below for any additional -parameters that you may want to set in the <classname>Boot:</classname> -text window. -The kernel version you choose selects the kernel version that will be -used for both the installation process and the installed system. -If you encounter kernel problems with the installation, you may also -have those same problems with the system you install. -The following two steps will select and start the install: - -</para> - -<itemizedlist> - -<listitem><para> -Select the kernel version and installation mode most -appropriate to your needs with the arrow keys. -</para></listitem> - -<listitem><para> -Enter any boot parameters by typing at the keyboard. -The text will be displayed directly in the text window. -This is where kernel parameters (such as serial console -settings) are specified. -</para></listitem> - -<listitem><para> -Press <command>ENTER</command>. This will load and start the -kernel. -The kernel will display its usual initialization messages followed -by the first screen of the Debian Installer. -</para></listitem> - -</itemizedlist> - -<para> - -Proceed to the next chapter to continue the installation where you will -set up the language locale, network, and disk partitions. - -</para> - </sect3> - </sect2> - - <sect2 arch="ia64" id="boot-tftp"><title>Booting with TFTP</title> - -<para> -Booting an IA64 system from the network is similar to a CD boot. -The only difference is how the installation kernel is loaded. -The EFI Boot Manager can load and start programs from a server on -the network. -Once the installation kernel is loaded and starts, the system install -will proceed thru the same steps as the CD install with the exception -that the packages of the base install will be loaded from the network -rather than the CD drive. - -</para> - -&boot-installer-intro-net.xml; - -<para> - -Network booting an ia64 system requires two architecture-specific actions. -On the boot server, DHCP and TFTP must be configured to deliver -<command>elilo</command>. -On the client a new boot option must be defined in the EFI boot manager -to enable loading over a network. - -</para> - - <sect3 arch="ia64" id="boot-tftp-server"> - <title>Configuring the Server</title> -<para> - -A suitable TFTP entry for network booting an ia64 system looks something -like this: - -<informalexample><screen> -host mcmuffin { - hardware ethernet 00:30:6e:1e:0e:83; - fixed-address 10.0.0.21; - filename "debian-installer/ia64/elilo.efi"; -} -</screen></informalexample> - -Note that the goal is to get <command>elilo.efi</command> running on -the client. - -</para><para> - -Extract the <filename>netboot.tar.gz</filename> file into the directory used -as the root for your tftp server. Typical tftp root directories include -<filename>/var/lib/tftp</filename> and <filename>/tftpboot</filename>. -This will create a <filename>debian-installer</filename> directory -tree containing the boot files for an IA-64 system. - -</para><para> - -<informalexample><screen> -# cd /var/lib/tftp -# tar xvfz /home/user/netboot.tar.gz -./ -./debian-installer/ -./debian-installer/ia64/ -[...] -</screen></informalexample> - -The <filename>netboot.tar.gz</filename> contains an -<filename>elilo.conf</filename> file that should work for most configurations. -However, should you need to make changes to this file, you can find it in the -<filename>debian-installer/ia64/</filename> directory. - -It is possible to have different config files for different clients by naming -them using the client's IP address in hex with the suffix -<filename>.conf</filename> instead of <filename>elilo.conf</filename>. -See documentation provided in the <classname>elilo</classname> package -for details. - -</para> - </sect3> - - <sect3 arch="ia64" id="boot-tftp-client"> - <title>Configuring the Client</title> -<para> - -To configure the client to support TFTP booting, start by booting to -EFI and entering the <guimenu>Boot Option Maintenance Menu</guimenu>. - -<itemizedlist> -<listitem><para> - -Add a boot option. - -</para></listitem> -<listitem><para> - -You should see one or more lines with the text -<guimenuitem>Load File [Acpi()/.../Mac()]</guimenuitem>. If more -than one of these entries exist, choose the one containing the -MAC address of the interface from which you'll be booting. -Use the arrow keys to highlight your choice, then press enter. - -</para></listitem> -<listitem><para> - -Name the entry <userinput>Netboot</userinput> or something similar, -save, and exit back to the boot options menu. - -</para></listitem> -</itemizedlist> - -You should see the new boot option you just created, and selecting it -should initiate a DHCP query, leading to a TFTP load of -<filename>elilo.efi</filename> from the server. - -</para><para> - -The boot loader will display its prompt after it has downloaded and -processed its configuration file. -At this point, the installation proceeds with the same steps as a -CD install. Select a boot option as in above and when the kernel -has completed installing itself from the network, it will start the -Debian Installer. - -</para><para> - -Proceed to the next chapter to continue the installation where -you will set up the language locale, network, and the disk partitions. - -</para> - </sect3> - </sect2> diff --git a/fi/boot-installer/intro-cd.xml b/fi/boot-installer/intro-cd.xml deleted file mode 100644 index 8a3e1b20a..000000000 --- a/fi/boot-installer/intro-cd.xml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,35 +0,0 @@ -<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> -<!-- original version: 28997 untranslated --> - -<para> - -The easiest route for most people will be to use a set of Debian CDs. -If you have a CD set, and if your machine supports booting directly off -the CD, great! Simply -<phrase arch="i386"> -configure your system for booting off a CD as described in -<xref linkend="boot-dev-select"/>, -</phrase> -insert your CD, reboot, and proceed to the next chapter. - -</para><para> - -Note that certain CD drives may require special drivers, and thus be -inaccessible in the early installation stages. If it turns out the -standard way of booting off a CD doesn't work for your hardware, -revisit this chapter and read about alternate kernels and installation -methods which may work for you. - -</para><para> - -Even if you cannot boot from CD-ROM, you can probably install the -Debian system components and any packages you want from CD-ROM. -Simply boot using a different media, such as floppies. When it's -time to install the operating system, base system, and any additional -packages, point the installation system at the CD-ROM drive. - -</para><para> - -If you have problems booting, see <xref linkend="boot-troubleshooting"/>. - -</para> diff --git a/fi/boot-installer/intro-firmware.xml b/fi/boot-installer/intro-firmware.xml deleted file mode 100644 index fe869608e..000000000 --- a/fi/boot-installer/intro-firmware.xml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,18 +0,0 @@ -<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> -<!-- original version: 35309 untranslated --> - -<para> - -There is an increasing number of consumer devices that directly boot from a -flash chip on the device. The installer can be written to flash so it will -automatically start when you reboot your machines. - -</para><note><para> - -In many cases, changing the firmware of an embedded device voids your -warranty. Sometimes you are also not able to recover your device if there -are problems during the flashing process. Therefore, please take care and -follow the steps precisely. - -</para></note> - diff --git a/fi/boot-installer/intro-hd.xml b/fi/boot-installer/intro-hd.xml deleted file mode 100644 index 569a87fb0..000000000 --- a/fi/boot-installer/intro-hd.xml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,16 +0,0 @@ -<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> -<!-- original version: 28672 untranslated --> - -<para> - -Booting from an existing operating system is often a convenient -option; for some systems it is the only supported method of -installation. - -</para><para> - -To boot the installer from hard disk, you will have already completed -downloading and placing the needed files in -<xref linkend="boot-drive-files"/>. - -</para> diff --git a/fi/boot-installer/intro-net.xml b/fi/boot-installer/intro-net.xml deleted file mode 100644 index 79189195c..000000000 --- a/fi/boot-installer/intro-net.xml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,19 +0,0 @@ -<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> -<!-- original version: 11648 untranslated --> - -<para> - -Booting from the network requires that you have a network -connection and a TFTP network boot server (DHCP, RARP, or BOOTP). - -</para><para arch="hppa"> - -Older systems such as the 715 might require the use of an RBOOT server -instead of a BOOTP server. - -</para><para> - -The installation method to support network booting is described in <xref -linkend="install-tftp"/>. - -</para>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/fi/boot-installer/m68k.xml b/fi/boot-installer/m68k.xml deleted file mode 100644 index 83fcced23..000000000 --- a/fi/boot-installer/m68k.xml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,361 +0,0 @@ -<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> -<!-- original version: 33725 untranslated --> - - <sect2 arch="m68k"><title>Choosing an Installation Method</title> - -<para> - -Some &arch-title; subarchs have the option of booting using either a -2.4.x or 2.2.x linux kernel. When such a choice exists, try the 2.4.x -linux kernel. The installer should also require less memory when using -a 2.4.x linux kernel as 2.2.x support requires a fixed-sized ramdisk -and 2.4.x uses tmpfs. - -</para><para> - -If you are using a 2.2.x linux kernel, then you need to use the &ramdisksize; -kernel parameter. - -</para><para> - -Make sure <userinput>root=/dev/ram</userinput> is one of your kernel -parameters. - -</para><para> - -If you're having trouble, check -<ulink url="&url-m68k-cts-faq;">cts's &arch-title; debian-installer FAQ</ulink>. - -</para> - -<itemizedlist> - <listitem><para><xref linkend="m68k-boot-amiga"/></para></listitem> - <listitem><para><xref linkend="m68k-boot-atari"/></para></listitem> - <listitem><para><xref linkend="m68k-boot-bvme6000"/></para></listitem> - <listitem><para><xref linkend="m68k-boot-mac"/></para></listitem> - <listitem><para><xref linkend="m68k-boot-mvme"/></para></listitem> - <listitem><para><xref linkend="m68k-boot-q40"/></para></listitem> -</itemizedlist> - - - <sect3 id="m68k-boot-amiga"><title>Amiga</title> -<para> - -The only method of installation available to amiga is the hard drive -(see <xref linkend="m68k-boot-hd"/>). -<emphasis>In other words the cdrom is not bootable.</emphasis> - -</para><para> - -Amiga does not currently work with bogl, so if -you are seeing bogl errors, you need to include the kernel parameter -<userinput>debian-installer/framebuffer=false</userinput>. - -</para> - </sect3> - - <sect3 id="m68k-boot-atari"><title>Atari</title> -<para> - -The installer for atari may be started from either the hard -drive (see <xref linkend="m68k-boot-hd"/>) or from floppies -(see <xref linkend="boot-from-floppies"/>). -<emphasis>In other words the cdrom is not bootable.</emphasis> - -</para><para> - -Atari does not currently work with bogl, so if -you are seeing bogl errors, you need to include the kernel parameter -<userinput>debian-installer/framebuffer=false</userinput>. - -</para> - </sect3> - - <sect3 id="m68k-boot-bvme6000"><title>BVME6000</title> -<para> - -The installer for BVME6000 may be started from a cdrom -(see <xref linkend="m68k-boot-cdrom"/>), floppies -(see <xref linkend="boot-from-floppies"/>), or the net -(see <xref linkend="boot-tftp"/>). - -</para> - </sect3> - - <sect3 id="m68k-boot-mac"><title>Macintosh</title> -<para> - -The only method of installation available to mac is from -the hard drive (see <xref linkend="m68k-boot-hd"/>). -<emphasis>In other words the cdrom is not bootable.</emphasis> -Macs do not have a working 2.4.x kernel. - -</para><para> - -If your hardware uses a 53c9x-based scsi bus, then you may need to -include the kernel parameter <userinput>mac53c9x=1,0</userinput>. -Hardware with two such scsi buses, such as the Quadra 950, will need -<userinput>mac53c9x=2,0</userinput> instead. Alternatively, the -parameter can be specified as <userinput>mac53c9x=-1,0</userinput> -which will leave autodetection on, but which will disable SCSI -disconnects. Note that specifying this parameter is only necessary -if you have more than one hard disk; otherwise, the system will run -faster if you do not specify it. - -</para> - </sect3> - - <sect3 id="m68k-boot-mvme"><title>MVME147 and MVME16x</title> -<para> - -The installer for MVME147 and MVME16x may be started from -either floppies (see <xref linkend="boot-from-floppies"/>) -or the net (see <xref linkend="boot-tftp"/>). -<emphasis>In other words the cdrom is not bootable.</emphasis> - -</para> - </sect3> - - <sect3 id="m68k-boot-q40"><title>Q40/Q60</title> -<para> - -The only method of installation available to Q40/Q60 is -from the hard drive (see <xref linkend="m68k-boot-hd"/>). -<emphasis>In other words the cdrom is not bootable.</emphasis> - -</para> - </sect3> - - </sect2> - - <sect2 arch="m68k" id="m68k-boot-hd"><title>Booting from a Hard Disk</title> - -&boot-installer-intro-hd.xml; - -<para> - -At least six different ramdisks may be used to boot from the hard -drive, three different types each with and without support for a -2.2.x linux kernel (see -<ulink url="&disturl;/main/installer-&architecture;/current/images/MANIFEST">MANIFEST</ulink> -for details). - -</para><para> - -The three different types of ramdisks are <filename>cdrom</filename>, -<filename>hd-media</filename>, and <filename>nativehd</filename>. These -ramdisks differ only in their source for installation packages. -The <filename>cdrom</filename> ramdisk uses a cdrom to get -debian-installer packages. The <filename>hd-media</filename> ramdisk -uses an iso image file of a cdrom currently residing on a hard disk. -Finally, the <filename>nativehd</filename> ramdisk uses the net to -install packages. - -</para> - -<itemizedlist> - <listitem><para><xref linkend="m68k-boothd-amiga"/></para></listitem> - <listitem><para><xref linkend="m68k-boothd-atari"/></para></listitem> - <listitem><para><xref linkend="m68k-boothd-mac"/></para></listitem> - <listitem><para><xref linkend="m68k-boothd-q40"/></para></listitem> -</itemizedlist> - - - <sect3 id="m68k-boothd-amiga"><title>Booting from AmigaOS</title> -<para> - -In the <command>Workbench</command>, start the Linux installation -process by double-clicking on the <guiicon>StartInstall</guiicon> icon -in the <filename>debian</filename> directory. - -</para><para> - -You may have to press the &enterkey; key twice after the Amiga -installer program has output some debugging information into a window. -After this, the screen will go grey, there will be a few seconds' -delay. Next, a black screen with white text should come up, displaying -all kinds of kernel debugging information. These messages may scroll -by too fast for you to read, but that's OK. After a couple of -seconds, the installation program should start automatically, so you -can continue down at <xref linkend="d-i-intro"/>. - -</para> - </sect3> - - - <sect3 id="m68k-boothd-atari"><title>Booting from Atari TOS</title> -<para> - -At the GEM desktop, start the Linux installation process by -double-clicking on the <guiicon>bootstra.prg</guiicon> icon in the -<filename>debian</filename> directory and clicking -<guibutton>Ok</guibutton> at the program options dialog box. - -</para><para> - -You may have to press the &enterkey; key after the Atari -bootstrap program has output some debugging information into a -window. After this, the screen will go grey, there will be a few -seconds' delay. Next, a black screen with white text should come up, -displaying all kinds of kernel debugging information. These messages -may scroll by too fast for you to read, but that's OK. After a couple -of seconds, the installation program should start automatically, so -you can continue below at <xref linkend="d-i-intro"/>. - -</para> - </sect3> - - - <sect3 id="m68k-boothd-mac"><title>Booting from MacOS</title> -<para> - -You must retain the original Mac system and -boot from it. It is <emphasis>essential</emphasis> that, when booting -MacOS in preparation for booting the Penguin linux loader, you -hold the <keycap>shift</keycap> key down to prevent extensions from -loading. If you don't use MacOS except for loading linux, you can -accomplish the same thing by removing all extensions and control -panels from the Mac's System Folder. Otherwise extensions may be left -running and cause random problems with the running linux kernel. - -</para><para> - -Macs require the <command>Penguin</command> -bootloader. If you do not have the tools to handle -a <command>Stuffit</command> archive, &penguin19.hfs; is an -hfs disk image with <command>Penguin</command> unpacked. -<xref linkend="create-floppy"/> describes how to copy this -image to a floppy. - -</para><para> - -At the MacOS desktop, start the Linux installation process by -double-clicking on the <guiicon>Penguin Prefs</guiicon> icon in -the <filename>Penguin</filename> directory. The -<command>Penguin</command> booter will start up. Go to the -<guimenuitem>Settings</guimenuitem> item in the -<guimenu>File</guimenu> menu, click the -<guilabel>Kernel</guilabel> tab. Select the kernel -(<filename>vmlinuz</filename>) and ramdisk -(<filename>initrd.gz</filename>) images in the -<filename>install</filename> directory by clicking on the corresponding -buttons in the upper right corner, and navigating the file select -dialogs to locate the files. - -</para><para> - -To set the boot parameters in Penguin, choose <guimenu>File</guimenu> -> -<guimenuitem>Settings...</guimenuitem>, then switch to the -<guilabel>Options</guilabel> tab. Boot parameters may be typed in to -the text entry area. If you will always want to use these settings, -select <guimenu>File</guimenu> -> <guimenuitem>Save Settings as -Default</guimenuitem>. - -</para><para> - -Close the <guilabel>Settings</guilabel> -dialog, save the settings and start the bootstrap using the -<guimenuitem>Boot Now</guimenuitem> item in the -<guimenu>File</guimenu> menu. - -</para><para> - -The <command>Penguin</command> booter will output some debugging -information into a window. After this, the screen will go grey, there -will be a few seconds' delay. Next, a black screen with white text -should come up, displaying all kinds of kernel debugging -information. These messages may scroll by too fast for you to read, -but that's OK. After a couple of seconds, the installation program -should start automatically, so you can continue below at -<xref linkend="d-i-intro"/>. - -</para> - - </sect3> - - <sect3 id="m68k-boothd-q40"><title>Booting from Q40/Q60</title> - -<para> - -FIXME - -</para><para> - -The installation program should start automatically, so you can -continue below at <xref linkend="d-i-intro"/>. - -</para> - - </sect3> - </sect2> - - - <sect2 arch="m68k" id="m68k-boot-cdrom"><title>Booting from a CD-ROM</title> -<para> - -Currently, the only &arch-title; subarchitecture that -supports CD-ROM booting is the BVME6000. - -</para> - -&boot-installer-intro-cd.xml; - - </sect2> - - - <sect2 arch="m68k" id="boot-tftp"><title>Booting with TFTP</title> - -&boot-installer-intro-net.xml; - -<para> - -After booting the VMEbus systems you will be presented with the LILO -<prompt>Boot:</prompt> prompt. At that prompt enter one of the -following to boot Linux and begin installation proper of the Debian -software using vt102 terminal emulation: - -<!-- Because the &enterkey; definition uses <keycap>, --> -<!-- we use <screen> instead of <userinput> in this list --> - -<itemizedlist> -<listitem><para> - -type <screen>i6000 &enterkey;</screen> to install a BVME4000/6000 - -</para></listitem> -<listitem><para> - -type <screen>i162 &enterkey;</screen> to install an MVME162 - -</para></listitem> -<listitem><para> - -type <screen>i167 &enterkey;</screen> to install an MVME166/167 - -</para></listitem> - </itemizedlist> - -</para><para> - -You may additionally append the string -<screen>TERM=vt100</screen> to use vt100 terminal emulation, -e.g., <screen>i6000 TERM=vt100 &enterkey;</screen>. - -</para> - </sect2> - - - <sect2 arch="m68k" id="boot-from-floppies"> - <title>Booting from Floppies</title> -<para> - -For most &arch-title; architectures, booting from a local filesystem is the -recommended method. - -</para><para> - -Booting from the boot floppy is supported only for Atari and VME -(with a SCSI floppy drive on VME) at this time. - -</para> - </sect2> diff --git a/fi/boot-installer/mips.xml b/fi/boot-installer/mips.xml deleted file mode 100644 index f628be2c9..000000000 --- a/fi/boot-installer/mips.xml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,100 +0,0 @@ -<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> -<!-- original version: 35613 untranslated --> - - - <sect2 arch="mips" id="boot-tftp"><title>Booting with TFTP</title> - - <sect3> - <title>SGI TFTP Booting</title> -<para> - -After entering the command monitor use - -<informalexample><screen> -bootp(): -</screen></informalexample> - -on SGI machines to boot linux and to begin installation of the Debian -Software. In order to make this -work you may have to unset the <envar>netaddr</envar> environment -variable. Type - -<informalexample><screen> -unsetenv netaddr -</screen></informalexample> - -in the command monitor to do this. - -</para> - </sect3> - - <sect3> - <title>Broadcom BCM91250A and BCM91480B TFTP Booting</title> -<para> - -On the Broadcom BCM91250A and BCM91480B evaluation boards, you have to load the SiByl boot -loader via TFTP which will then load and start the Debian installer. In -most cases, you will first obtain an IP address via DHCP but it is also -possible to configure a static address. In order to use DHCP, you can -enter the following command on the CFE prompt: - -<informalexample><screen> -ifconfig eth0 -auto -</screen></informalexample> - -Once you have obtained an IP address, you can load SiByl with the following -command: - -<informalexample><screen> -boot 192.168.1.1:/boot/sibyl -</screen></informalexample> - -You need to substitute the IP address listed in this example with either -the name or the IP address of your TFTP server. Once you issue this -command, the installer will be loaded automatically. - -</para> -</sect3> - </sect2> - - <sect2 arch="mips"><title>Boot Parameters</title> - - <sect3> - <title>SGI TFTP Booting</title> -<para> - -On SGI machines you can append boot parameters to the -<command>bootp():</command> command in the command monitor. - -</para><para> - -Following the <command>bootp():</command> command you can give the -path and name of the file to boot if you did not give an explicit name -via your bootp/dhcp server. Example: - -<informalexample><screen> -bootp():/boot/tftpboot.img -</screen></informalexample> - -Further kernel parameters can be passed via <command>append</command>: - -<informalexample><screen> -bootp(): append="root=/dev/sda1" -</screen></informalexample> - -</para> - </sect3> - - <sect3> - <title>Broadcom BCM91250A and BCM91480B TFTP Booting</title> -<para> - -You cannot pass any boot parameters directly from the CFE prompt. Instead, -you have to edit the <filename>/boot/sibyl.conf</filename> file on the TFTP -server and add your parameters to the <replaceable>extra_args</replaceable> -variable. - -</para> - </sect3> - - </sect2> diff --git a/fi/boot-installer/mipsel.xml b/fi/boot-installer/mipsel.xml deleted file mode 100644 index 69245e3fd..000000000 --- a/fi/boot-installer/mipsel.xml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,96 +0,0 @@ -<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> -<!-- original version: 35612 untranslated --> - - <sect2 arch="mipsel" id="boot-tftp"><title>Booting with TFTP</title> - - <sect3> - <title>Cobalt TFTP Booting</title> -<para> - -Strictly speaking, Cobalt does not use TFTP but NFS to boot. You need to -install an NFS server and put the installer files in -<filename>/nfsroot</filename>. When you boot your Cobalt, you have to -press the left and the right cursor buttons at the same time and the -machine will boot via the network from NFS. It will then display several -options on the display. There are the following two installation methods: - -<itemizedlist> -<listitem><para> - -Via SSH (default): In this case, the installer will configure the network -via DHCP and start an SSH server. It will then display a random password -and other login information (such as the IP address) on the Cobalt LCD. -When you connect to the machine with an SSH client you can start with -the installation. - -</para></listitem> -<listitem><para> - -Via serial console: Using a null modem cable, you can connect to the serial -port of your Cobalt machine (using 115200 bps) and perform the installation -this way. This option is not available on Qube 2700 (Qube1) machines since -they have no serial port. - -</para></listitem> -</itemizedlist> - -</para> - </sect3> - - <sect3> -<!-- Note to translators: this is the same section as in mips.xml --> - <title>Broadcom BCM91250A and BCM91480B TFTP Booting</title> -<para> - -On the Broadcom BCM91250A and BCM91480B evaluation boards, you have to load the SiByl boot -loader via TFTP which will then load and start the Debian installer. In -most cases, you will first obtain an IP address via DHCP but it is also -possible to configure a static address. In order to use DHCP, you can -enter the following command on the CFE prompt: - -<informalexample><screen> -ifconfig eth0 -auto -</screen></informalexample> - -Once you have obtained an IP address, you can load SiByl with the following -command: - -<informalexample><screen> -boot 192.168.1.1:/boot/sibyl -</screen></informalexample> - -You need to substitute the IP address listed in this example with either -the name or the IP address of your TFTP server. Once you issue this -command, the installer will be loaded automatically. - -</para> -</sect3> - </sect2> - - <sect2 arch="mipsel"><title>Boot Parameters</title> - - <sect3> - <title>Cobalt TFTP Booting</title> -<para> - -You cannot pass any boot parameters directly. Instead, you have to edit -the <filename>/nfsroot/default.colo</filename> file on the NFS server and -add your parameters to the <replaceable>args</replaceable> variable. - -</para> - </sect3> - - <sect3> -<!-- Note to translators: this is the same section as in mips.xml --> - <title>Broadcom BCM91250A and BCM91480B TFTP Booting</title> -<para> - -You cannot pass any boot parameters directly from the CFE prompt. Instead, -you have to edit the <filename>/boot/sibyl.conf</filename> file on the TFTP -server and add your parameters to the <replaceable>extra_args</replaceable> -variable. - -</para> - </sect3> - - </sect2> diff --git a/fi/boot-installer/parameters.xml b/fi/boot-installer/parameters.xml deleted file mode 100644 index 630a7e645..000000000 --- a/fi/boot-installer/parameters.xml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,350 +0,0 @@ -<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> -<!-- original version: 36744 untranslated --> - - <sect1 id="boot-parms"><title>Boot Parameters</title> -<para> - -Boot parameters are Linux kernel parameters which are generally used -to make sure that peripherals are dealt with properly. For the most -part, the kernel can auto-detect information about your peripherals. -However, in some cases you'll have to help the kernel a bit. - -</para><para> - -If this is the first time you're booting the system, try the default -boot parameters (i.e., don't try setting parameters) and see if it works -correctly. It probably will. If not, you can reboot later and look for -any special parameters that inform the system about your hardware. - -</para><para> - -Information on many boot parameters can be found in the -<ulink url="http://www.tldp.org/HOWTO/BootPrompt-HOWTO.html"> Linux -BootPrompt HOWTO</ulink>, including tips for obscure hardware. This -section contains only a sketch of the most salient parameters. Some -common gotchas are included below in -<xref linkend="boot-troubleshooting"/>. - -</para><para> - -When the kernel boots, a message - -<informalexample><screen> -Memory:<replaceable>avail</replaceable>k/<replaceable>total</replaceable>k available -</screen></informalexample> - -should be emitted early in the process. -<replaceable>total</replaceable> should match the total amount of RAM, -in kilobytes. If this doesn't match the actual amount of RAM you have -installed, you need to use the -<userinput>mem=<replaceable>ram</replaceable></userinput> parameter, -where <replaceable>ram</replaceable> is set to the amount of memory, -suffixed with <quote>k</quote> for kilobytes, or <quote>m</quote> for -megabytes. For example, both <userinput>mem=65536k</userinput> and -<userinput>mem=64m</userinput> mean 64MB of RAM. - -</para><para condition="supports-serial-console"> - -If you are booting with a serial console, generally the kernel will -autodetect -this<phrase arch="mipsel"> (although not on DECstations)</phrase>. -If you have a videocard (framebuffer) and a keyboard also attached to -the computer which you wish to boot via serial console, you may have -to pass the -<userinput>console=<replaceable>device</replaceable></userinput> -argument to the kernel, where <replaceable>device</replaceable> is -your serial device, which is usually something like -<filename>ttyS0</filename>. - -</para><para arch="sparc"> - -For &arch-title; the serial devices are <filename>ttya</filename> or -<filename>ttyb</filename>. -Alternatively, set the <envar>input-device</envar> and -<envar>output-device</envar> OpenPROM variables to -<filename>ttya</filename>. - -</para> - - - <sect2 id="installer-args"><title>Debian Installer Parameters</title> -<para> - -The installation system recognizes a few additional boot parameters<footnote> - -<para> - -Note that the kernel accepts a maximum of 8 command line options and -8 environment options (including any options added by default for the -installer). If these numbers are exceeded, 2.4 kernels will drop any -excess options and 2.6 kernels will panic. With kernel 2.6.9 or newer, -you can use 32 command line options and 32 environment options. - -</para> - -</footnote> which may be useful. - -</para> - -<variablelist> -<varlistentry> -<term>debconf/priority</term> -<listitem><para> - -This parameter sets the lowest priority of messages to be displayed. - -</para><para> - -The default installation uses <userinput>debconf/priority=high</userinput>. -This means that both high and critical priority messages are shown, but medium -and low priority messages are skipped. -If problems are encountered, the installer adjusts the priority as needed. - -</para><para> - -If you add <userinput>debconf/priority=medium</userinput> as boot parameter, you -will be shown the installation menu and gain more control over the installation. -When <userinput>debconf/priority=low</userinput> is used, all messages are shown -(this is equivalent to the <emphasis>expert</emphasis> boot method). -With <userinput>debconf/priority=critical</userinput>, the installation system -will display only critical messages and try to do the right thing without fuss. - -</para></listitem> -</varlistentry> - - -<varlistentry> -<term>DEBIAN_FRONTEND</term> -<listitem><para> - -This boot parameter controls the type of user interface used for the -installer. The current possible parameter settings are: - -<itemizedlist> -<listitem> -<para><userinput>DEBIAN_FRONTEND=noninteractive</userinput></para> -</listitem><listitem> -<para><userinput>DEBIAN_FRONTEND=text</userinput></para> -</listitem><listitem> -<para><userinput>DEBIAN_FRONTEND=newt</userinput></para> -</listitem><listitem> -<para><userinput>DEBIAN_FRONTEND=slang</userinput></para> -</listitem><listitem> -<para><userinput>DEBIAN_FRONTEND=ncurses</userinput></para> -</listitem><listitem> -<para><userinput>DEBIAN_FRONTEND=bogl</userinput></para> -</listitem><listitem> -<para><userinput>DEBIAN_FRONTEND=gtk</userinput></para> -</listitem><listitem> -<para><userinput>DEBIAN_FRONTEND=corba</userinput></para> -</listitem> -</itemizedlist> - -The default front end is <userinput>DEBIAN_FRONTEND=newt</userinput>. -<userinput>DEBIAN_FRONTEND=text</userinput> may be preferable for -serial console installs. Generally only the -<userinput>newt</userinput> frontend is available on default install -media, so this is not very useful right now. - -</para></listitem> -</varlistentry> - - -<varlistentry> -<term>BOOT_DEBUG</term> -<listitem><para> - -Setting this boot parameter to 2 will cause the installer's boot process -to be verbosely logged. Setting it to 3 makes debug shells -available at strategic points in the boot process. (Exit the shells to -continue the boot process.) - -<variablelist> -<varlistentry> -<term><userinput>BOOT_DEBUG=0</userinput></term> -<listitem><para>This is the default.</para></listitem> -</varlistentry> - -<varlistentry> -<term><userinput>BOOT_DEBUG=1</userinput></term> -<listitem><para>More verbose than usual.</para></listitem> -</varlistentry> - -<varlistentry> -<term><userinput>BOOT_DEBUG=2</userinput></term> -<listitem><para>Lots of debugging information.</para></listitem> -</varlistentry> - -<varlistentry> -<term><userinput>BOOT_DEBUG=3</userinput></term> -<listitem><para> - -Shells are run at various points in the boot process to allow detailed -debugging. Exit the shell to continue the boot. - -</para></listitem> -</varlistentry> -</variablelist> - -</para></listitem> -</varlistentry> - - -<varlistentry> -<term>INSTALL_MEDIA_DEV</term> -<listitem><para> - -The value of the parameter is the path to the device to load the -Debian installer from. For example, -<userinput>INSTALL_MEDIA_DEV=/dev/floppy/0</userinput> - -</para><para> - -The boot floppy, which normally scans all floppies it can to find the -root floppy, can be overridden by this parameter to only look at the -one device. - -</para></listitem> -</varlistentry> - -<varlistentry> -<term>debian-installer/framebuffer</term> -<listitem><para> - -Some architectures use the kernel framebuffer to offer installation in -a number of languages. If framebuffer causes a problem on your system -you can disable the feature by the parameter -<userinput>debian-installer/framebuffer=false</userinput>. Problem -symptoms are error messages about bterm or bogl, a blank screen, or -a freeze within a few minutes after starting the install. - -</para><para arch="i386"> - -The <userinput>video=vga16:off</userinput> argument may also be used -to disable the framebuffer. Such problems have been reported on a Dell -Inspiron with Mobile Radeon card. - -</para><para arch="m68k"> - -Such problems have been reported on the Amiga 1200 and SE/30. - -</para><para arch="hppa"> - -Such problems have been reported on hppa. - -</para><note arch="sparc"><para> - -Because of display problems on some systems, framebuffer support is -<emphasis>disabled by default</emphasis> for &arch-title;. This can result -in ugly display on systems that do properly support the framebuffer, like -those with ATI graphical cards. -If you see display problems in the installer, you can try booting with -parameter <userinput>debian-installer/framebuffer=true</userinput>. - -</para></note></listitem> -</varlistentry> - -<varlistentry> -<term>debian-installer/probe/usb</term> -<listitem><para> - -Set to <userinput>false</userinput> to prevent probing for USB on -boot, if that causes problems. - -</para></listitem> -</varlistentry> - -<varlistentry> -<term>netcfg/disable_dhcp</term> -<listitem><para> - -By default, the &d-i; automatically probes for network configuration -via DHCP. If the probe succeeds, you won't have a chance to review and -change the obtained settings. You can get to the manual network setup -only in case the DHCP probe fails. - -</para><para> - -If you have a DHCP server on your local network, but want to avoid it -because e.g. it gives wrong answers, you can use the parameter -<userinput>netcfg/disable_dhcp=true</userinput> to prevent configuring -the network with DHCP and to enter the information manually. - -</para></listitem> -</varlistentry> - -<varlistentry> -<term>hw-detect/start_pcmcia</term> -<listitem><para> - -Set to <userinput>false</userinput> to prevent starting PCMCIA -services, if that causes problems. Some laptops are well known for -this misbehavior. - -</para></listitem> -</varlistentry> - -<varlistentry> -<term>preseed/url</term> -<listitem><para> - -Specify the url to a preconfiguration file to download and use in -automating the install. See <xref linkend="automatic-install"/>. - -</para></listitem> -</varlistentry> - -<varlistentry> -<term>preseed/file</term> -<listitem><para> - -Specify the path to a preconfiguration file to load to -automating the install. See <xref linkend="automatic-install"/>. - -</para></listitem> -</varlistentry> - -<varlistentry> -<term>cdrom-detect/eject</term> -<listitem><para> - -By default, before rebooting, &d-i; automatically ejects the optical -media used during the installation. This can be unnecessary if the system -does not automatically boot off the CD. In some cases it may even be -undesirable, for example if the optical drive cannot reinsert the media -itself and the user is not there to do it manually. Many slot loading, -slim-line, and caddy style drives cannot reload media automatically. - -</para><para> - -Set to <userinput>false</userinput> to disable automatic ejection, and -be aware that you may need to ensure that the system does not -automatically boot from the optical drive after the initial -installation. - -</para></listitem> -</varlistentry> - -<varlistentry> -<term>ramdisk_size</term> -<listitem><para> - -If you are using a 2.2.x kernel, you may need to set &ramdisksize;. - -</para></listitem> -</varlistentry> - -<varlistentry> -<term>rescue/enable</term> -<listitem><para> - -Set to <userinput>true</userinput> to enter rescue mode rather than -performing a normal installation. See <xref linkend="rescue"/>. - -</para></listitem> -</varlistentry> - -</variablelist> - </sect2> - </sect1> - diff --git a/fi/boot-installer/powerpc.xml b/fi/boot-installer/powerpc.xml deleted file mode 100644 index 24aa8dfe9..000000000 --- a/fi/boot-installer/powerpc.xml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,247 +0,0 @@ -<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> -<!-- original version: 33886 untranslated --> - - <sect2 arch="powerpc" id="boot-cd"><title>Booting from a CD-ROM</title> - -&boot-installer-intro-cd.xml; - -<para> - -Currently, the only &arch-title; subarchitectures that support CD-ROM -booting are PReP and New World PowerMacs. On PowerMacs, hold the -<keycap>c</keycap> key, or else the combination of -<keycap>Command</keycap>, <keycap>Option</keycap>, -<keycap>Shift</keycap>, and <keycap>Delete</keycap> -keys together while booting to boot from the CD-ROM. - -</para><para> - -OldWorld PowerMacs will not boot a Debian CD, because OldWorld -computers relied on a Mac OS ROM CD boot driver to be present on the CD, -and a free-software version of this driver is not available. All -OldWorld systems have floppy drives, so use the floppy drive to launch -the installer, and then point the installer to the CD for the needed -files. - -</para><para> - -If your system doesn't boot directly from CD-ROM, you can still use -the CD-ROM to install the system. On NewWorlds, you can also use an -OpenFirmware command to boot from the CD-ROM manually. Follow the -instructions in <xref linkend="boot-newworld"/> for booting from -the hard disk, except use the path to <command>yaboot</command> on the -CD at the OF prompt, such as - -<informalexample><screen> -0 > boot cd:,\install\yaboot -</screen></informalexample> - -</para> - </sect2> - - <sect2 arch="powerpc" id="install-drive"> - <title>Booting from Hard Disk</title> - -&boot-installer-intro-hd.xml; - - <sect3><title>Booting CHRP from OpenFirmware</title> - -<para> - - <emphasis>Not yet written.</emphasis> - -</para> - </sect3> - - <sect3><title>Booting OldWorld PowerMacs from MacOS</title> -<para> - -If you set up BootX in <xref linkend="files-oldworld"/>, you can -use it to boot into the installation system. Double click the -<guiicon>BootX</guiicon> application icon. Click on the -<guibutton>Options</guibutton> button and select <guilabel>Use -Specified RAM Disk</guilabel>. This will give you the -chance to select the <filename>ramdisk.image.gz</filename> file. You -may need to select the <guilabel>No Video Driver</guilabel> checkbox, -depending on your hardware. Then click the -<guibutton>Linux</guibutton> button to shut down MacOS and launch the -installer. - -</para> - </sect3> - - - <sect3 id="boot-newworld"> - <title>Booting NewWorld Macs from OpenFirmware</title> -<para> - -You will have already placed the <filename>vmlinux</filename>, -<filename>initrd.gz</filename>, <filename>yaboot</filename>, and -<filename>yaboot.conf</filename> files at the root level of your HFS -partition in <xref linkend="files-newworld"/>. -Restart the computer, and immediately (during the chime) hold down the -<keycap>Option</keycap>, <keycap>Command (cloverleaf/Apple)</keycap>, -<keycap>o</keycap>, and <keycap>f</keycap> keys all together. After -a few seconds you will be presented with the Open Firmware prompt. -At the prompt, type - -<informalexample><screen> -0 > boot hd:<replaceable>x</replaceable>,yaboot -</screen></informalexample> - -replacing <replaceable>x</replaceable> with the partition number of -the HFS partition where the -kernel and yaboot files were placed, followed by a &enterkey;. On some -machines, you may need to use <userinput>ide0:</userinput> instead of -<userinput>hd:</userinput>. In a few more seconds you will see a -yaboot prompt - -<informalexample><screen> -boot: -</screen></informalexample> - -At yaboot's <prompt>boot:</prompt> prompt, type either -<userinput>install</userinput> or <userinput>install video=ofonly</userinput> -followed by a &enterkey;. The -<userinput>video=ofonly</userinput> argument is for maximum -compatibility; you can try it if <userinput>install</userinput> -doesn't work. The Debian installation program should start. - -</para> - </sect3> - </sect2> - - <sect2 arch="powerpc" condition="bootable-usb" id="usb-boot"> - <title>Booting from USB memory stick</title> -<para> - -Currently, NewWorld PowerMac systems are known to support USB booting. - -</para> - -<para> - -Make sure you have prepared everything from <xref -linkend="boot-usb-files"/>. To boot a Macintosh system from a USB stick, -you will need to use the Open Firmware prompt, since Open Firmware does -not search USB storage devices by default. -<!-- TODO: although it could be made to; watch this space --> -To get to the prompt, hold down -<keycombo><keycap>Command</keycap> <keycap>Option</keycap> -<keycap>o</keycap> <keycap>f</keycap></keycombo> all together while -booting (see <xref linkend="invoking-openfirmware"/>). - -</para><para> - -You will need to work out where the USB storage device appears in the -device tree, since at the moment <command>ofpath</command> cannot work -that out automatically. Type <userinput>dev / ls</userinput> and -<userinput>devalias</userinput> at the Open Firmware prompt to get a -list of all known devices and device aliases. On the author's system -with various types of USB stick, paths such as -<filename>usb0/disk</filename>, <filename>usb0/hub/disk</filename>, -<filename>/pci@f2000000/usb@1b,1/disk@1</filename>, and -<filename>/pci@f2000000/usb@1b,1/hub@1/disk@1</filename> work. - -</para><para> - -Having worked out the device path, use a command like this to boot the -installer: - -<informalexample><screen> -boot <replaceable>usb0/disk</replaceable>:<replaceable>2</replaceable>,\\:tbxi -</screen></informalexample> - -The <replaceable>2</replaceable> matches the Apple_HFS or -Apple_Bootstrap partition onto which you copied the boot image earlier, -and the <userinput>,\\:tbxi</userinput> part instructs Open Firmware to -boot from the file with an HFS file type of "tbxi" (i.e. -<command>yaboot</command>) in the directory previously blessed with -<command>hattrib -b</command>. - -</para><para> - -The system should now boot up, and you should be presented with the -<prompt>boot:</prompt> prompt. Here you can enter optional boot -arguments, or just hit &enterkey;. - -</para><warning><para> - -This boot method is new, and may be difficult to get to work on some -NewWorld systems. If you have problems, please file an installation -report, as explained in <xref linkend="submit-bug"/>. - -</para></warning> - </sect2> - - <sect2 arch="powerpc" id="boot-tftp"><title>Booting with TFTP</title> - -&boot-installer-intro-net.xml; - -<para> - -Currently, PReP and New World PowerMac systems support netbooting. - -</para><para> - -On machines with Open Firmware, such as NewWorld Power Macs, enter the -boot monitor (see <xref linkend="invoking-openfirmware"/>) and -use the command <command>boot enet:0</command>. PReP and CHRP boxes -may have different ways of addressing the network. On a PReP machine, -you should try -<userinput>boot <replaceable>server_ipaddr</replaceable>,<replaceable>file</replaceable>,<replaceable>client_ipaddr</replaceable></userinput>. - -</para> - </sect2> - - - <sect2 arch="powerpc" condition="supports-floppy-boot"> - <title>Booting from Floppies</title> -<para> - -Booting from floppies is supported for &arch-title;, although it is -generally only applicable for OldWorld systems. NewWorld systems are -not equipped with floppy drives, and attached USB floppy drives are -not supported for booting. - -</para><para> - -You will have already downloaded the floppy images you needed and -created floppies from the images in <xref linkend="create-floppy"/>. - -</para><para> - -To boot from the <filename>boot-floppy-hfs.img</filename> floppy, -place it in floppy drive after shutting the system down, and before -pressing the power-on button. - -</para><note><para> -For those not familiar with Macintosh -floppy operations: a floppy placed in the machine prior to boot will -be the first priority for the system to boot from. A floppy without a -valid boot system will be ejected, and the machine will then check for -bootable hard disk partitions. - -</para></note><para> - -After booting, the <filename>root.bin</filename> floppy is -requested. Insert the root floppy and press &enterkey;. The installer -program is automatically launched after the root system has been -loaded into memory. - -</para> - </sect2> - - - <sect2 arch="powerpc"><title>PowerPC Boot Parameters</title> -<para> - -Many older Apple monitors used a 640x480 67Hz mode. If your video -appears skewed on an older Apple monitor, try appending the boot -argument <userinput>video=atyfb:vmode:6</userinput> , which will -select that mode for most Mach64 and Rage video hardware. For Rage 128 -hardware, this changes to -<userinput>video=aty128fb:vmode:6</userinput> . - -</para> - </sect2> diff --git a/fi/boot-installer/s390.xml b/fi/boot-installer/s390.xml deleted file mode 100644 index 1413f795c..000000000 --- a/fi/boot-installer/s390.xml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,30 +0,0 @@ -<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> -<!-- original version: 28672 untranslated --> - - <sect2 arch="s390"><title>s390 Limitations</title> -<para> - -In order to run the installation system a working network setup and -ssh session is needed on S/390. - -</para><para> - -The booting process starts with a network setup that prompts you for -several network parameters. If the setup is successful, you will login -to the system by starting a ssh session which will launch the -standard installation system. - -</para> - </sect2> - - - <sect2 arch="s390"><title>s390 Boot Parameters</title> -<para> - -On S/390 you can append boot parameters in the parm file. This file can -either be in ASCII or EBCDIC format. Please read -<ulink url="&url-s390-devices;">Device Drivers and Installation Commands</ulink> -for more information about S/390-specific boot parameters. - -</para> - </sect2> diff --git a/fi/boot-installer/sparc.xml b/fi/boot-installer/sparc.xml deleted file mode 100644 index 81cad25e7..000000000 --- a/fi/boot-installer/sparc.xml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,89 +0,0 @@ -<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> -<!-- original version: 28997 untranslated --> - - <sect2 arch="sparc" id="boot-tftp"><title>Booting with TFTP</title> - -&boot-installer-intro-net.xml; - -<para> - -On machines with OpenBoot, simply enter the boot monitor on the -machine which is being installed (see -<xref linkend="invoking-openboot"/>). -Use the command <userinput>boot net</userinput> to boot from a TFTP -and RARP server, or try <userinput>boot net:bootp</userinput> or -<userinput>boot net:dhcp</userinput> to boot from a TFTP and BOOTP -or DHCP server. Some older OpenBoot revisions require using -the device name, such as <userinput>boot le()</userinput>; these -probably don't support BOOTP nor DHCP. - -</para> - </sect2> - - - <sect2 arch="sparc"><title>Booting from a CD-ROM</title> - -&boot-installer-intro-cd.xml; - -<para> - -Most OpenBoot versions support the <userinput>boot cdrom</userinput> -command which is simply an alias to boot from the SCSI device on ID 6 -(or the secondary master for IDE based systems). You may have to use -the actual device name for older OpenBoot versions that don't support -this special command. Note that some problems have been reported on Sun4m -(e.g., Sparc 10s and Sparc 20s) systems booting from CD-ROM. - -</para> - </sect2> - - - <sect2 arch="sparc" condition="supports-floppy-boot"> - <title>Booting from Floppies</title> -<para> - -To boot from floppy on a Sparc, use - -<informalexample><screen> -Stop-A -> OpenBoot: "boot floppy" -</screen></informalexample> - -Be warned that the newer Sun4u (ultra) architecture does not support -floppy booting. A typical error message is <computeroutput>Bad magic -number in disk label - Can't open disk label package</computeroutput>. -Furthermore, a number of Sun4c models (such as the IPX) do not support -the compressed images found on the disks, so also are not supported. - -</para><para> - -Several Sparcs (e.g. Ultra 10) have an OBP bug that prevents them from -booting (instead of not supporting booting at all). The appropriate -OBP update can be downloaded as product ID 106121 from -<ulink url="http://sunsolve.sun.com"></ulink>. - -</para><para> - -If you are booting from the floppy, and you see messages such as - -<informalexample><screen> -Fatal error: Cannot read partition -Illegal or malformed device name -</screen></informalexample> - -then it is possible that floppy booting is simply not supported on -your machine. - -</para> - </sect2> - - <sect2 arch="sparc"><title>IDPROM Messages</title> -<para> - -If you cannot boot because you get messages about a problem with -<quote>IDPROM</quote>, then it's possible that your NVRAM battery, which -holds configuration information for you firmware, has run out. See the -<ulink url="&url-sun-nvram-faq;">Sun NVRAM FAQ</ulink> for more -information. - -</para> - </sect2> diff --git a/fi/boot-installer/trouble.xml b/fi/boot-installer/trouble.xml deleted file mode 100644 index 6413f4833..000000000 --- a/fi/boot-installer/trouble.xml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,284 +0,0 @@ -<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> -<!-- original version: 33725 untranslated --> - - <sect1 id="boot-troubleshooting"> - <title>Troubleshooting the Installation Process</title> -<para> -</para> - - <sect2 condition="supports-floppy-boot" id="unreliable-floppies"> - <title>Floppy Disk Reliability</title> - -<para> - -The biggest problem for people using floppy disks to install Debian -seems to be floppy disk reliability. - -</para><para> - -The boot floppy is the floppy with the worst problems, because it -is read by the hardware directly, before Linux boots. Often, the -hardware doesn't read as reliably as the Linux floppy disk driver, and -may just stop without printing an error message if it reads incorrect -data. There can also be failures in the Driver Floppies most of which -indicate themselves with a flood of messages about disk I/O errors. - -</para><para> - -If you are having the installation stall at a particular floppy, the -first thing you should do is re-download the floppy disk image and -write it to a <emphasis>different</emphasis> floppy. Simply -reformatting the old -floppy may not be sufficient, even if it appears that the floppy was -reformatted and written with no errors. It is sometimes useful to try -writing the floppy on a different system. - -</para><para> - -One user reports he had to write the images to floppy -<emphasis>three</emphasis> times before one worked, and then -everything was fine with the third floppy. - -</para><para> - -Other users have reported that simply rebooting a few times with the -same floppy in the floppy drive can lead to a successful boot. This is -all due to buggy hardware or firmware floppy drivers. - -</para> - </sect2> - - <sect2><title>Boot Configuration</title> - -<para> - -If you have problems and the kernel hangs during the boot process, -doesn't recognize peripherals you actually have, or drives are not -recognized properly, the first thing to check is the boot parameters, -as discussed in <xref linkend="boot-parms"/>. - -</para><para> - -If you are booting with your own kernel instead of the one supplied -with the installer, be sure that <userinput>CONFIG_DEVFS</userinput> is set in -your kernel. The installer requires -<userinput>CONFIG_DEVFS</userinput>. - -</para><para> - -Often, problems can be solved by removing add-ons and peripherals, and -then trying booting again. <phrase arch="i386">Internal modems, sound -cards, and Plug-n-Play devices can be especially problematic.</phrase> - -</para><para> - -If you have a large amount of memory installed in your machine, more -than 512M, and the installer hangs when booting the kernel, you may -need to include a boot argument to limit the amount of memory the -kernel sees, such as <userinput>mem=512m</userinput>. - -</para> - </sect2> - - <sect2 arch="i386" id="i386-boot-problems"> - <title>Common &arch-title; Installation Problems</title> -<para> - -There are some common installation problems that can be solved or avoided by -passing certain boot parameters to the installer. - -</para><para> - -Some systems have floppies with <quote>inverted DCLs</quote>. If you receive -errors reading from the floppy, even when you know the floppy is good, -try the parameter <userinput>floppy=thinkpad</userinput>. - -</para><para> - -On some systems, such as the IBM PS/1 or ValuePoint (which have ST-506 -disk drivers), the IDE drive may not be properly recognized. Again, -try it first without the parameters and see if the IDE drive is -recognized properly. If not, determine your drive geometry -(cylinders, heads, and sectors), and use the parameter -<userinput>hd=<replaceable>cylinders</replaceable>,<replaceable>heads</replaceable>,<replaceable>sectors</replaceable></userinput>. - -</para><para> - -If you have a very old machine, and the kernel hangs after saying -<computeroutput>Checking 'hlt' instruction...</computeroutput>, then -you should try the <userinput>no-hlt</userinput> boot argument, which -disables this test. - -</para><para> - -If your screen begins to show a weird picture while the kernel boots, -eg. pure white, pure black or colored pixel garbage, your system may -contain a problematic video card which does not switch to the -framebuffer mode properly. Then you can use the boot parameter -<userinput>debian-installer/framebuffer=false</userinput> or -<userinput>video=vga16:off</userinput> to disable the framebuffer -console. Only the English -language will be available during the installation due to limited -console features. See <xref linkend="boot-parms"/> for details. - -</para> - - <sect3> - <title>System Freeze During the PCMCIA Configuration Phase</title> -<para> - -Some laptop models produced by Dell are known to crash when PCMCIA device -detection tries to access some hardware addresses. Other laptops may display -similar problems. If you experience such a problem and you don't need PCMCIA -support during the installation, you can disable PCMCIA using the -<userinput>hw-detect/start_pcmcia=false</userinput> boot parameter. You can -then configure PCMCIA after the installation is completed and exclude the -resource range causing the problems. - -</para><para> - -Alternatively, you can boot the installer in expert mode. You will -then be asked to enter the resource range options your hardware -needs. For example, if you have one of the Dell laptops mentioned -above, you should enter <userinput>exclude port -0x800-0x8ff</userinput> here. There is also a list of some common -resource range options in the <ulink -url="http://pcmcia-cs.sourceforge.net/ftp/doc/PCMCIA-HOWTO-1.html#ss1.12">System -resource settings section of the PCMCIA HOWTO</ulink>. Note that you -have to omit the commas, if any, when you enter this value in the -installer. - -</para> - </sect3> - - <sect3> - <title>System Freeze while Loading the USB Modules</title> -<para> - -The kernel normally tries to install USB modules and the USB keyboard driver -in order to support some non-standard USB keyboards. However, there are some -broken USB systems where the driver hangs on loading. A possible workaround -may be disabling the USB controller in your mainboard BIOS setup. Another option -is passing the <userinput>debian-installer/probe/usb=false</userinput> parameter -at the boot prompt, which will prevent the modules from being loaded. - -</para> - </sect3> - </sect2> - - <sect2 id="kernel-msgs"> - <title>Interpreting the Kernel Startup Messages</title> - -<para> - -During the boot sequence, you may see many messages in the form -<computeroutput>can't find <replaceable>something</replaceable> -</computeroutput>, or <computeroutput> -<replaceable>something</replaceable> not present</computeroutput>, -<computeroutput>can't initialize <replaceable>something</replaceable> -</computeroutput>, or even <computeroutput>this driver release depends -on <replaceable>something</replaceable> </computeroutput>. -Most of these messages are harmless. You -see them because the kernel for the installation system is built to -run on computers with many different peripheral devices. Obviously, no -one computer will have every possible peripheral device, so the -operating system may emit a few complaints while it looks for -peripherals you don't own. You may also see the system pause for a -while. This happens when it is waiting for a device to respond, and -that device is not present on your system. If you find the time it -takes to boot the system unacceptably long, you can create a -custom kernel later (see <xref linkend="kernel-baking"/>). - -</para> - </sect2> - - - <sect2 id="problem-report"> - <title>Bug Reporter</title> -<para> - -If you get through the initial boot phase but cannot complete the -install, the bug reporter menu choice may be helpful. -It lets you store system error logs and configuration information from the -installer to a floppy, or download them in a web browser. - -This information may provide clues as to what went wrong and how to -fix it. If you are submitting a bug report you may want to attach -this information to the bug report. - -</para><para> - -Other pertinent installation messages may be found in -<filename>/var/log/</filename> during the -installation, and <filename>/var/log/installer/</filename> -after the computer has been booted into the installed system. - -</para> - </sect2> - - <sect2 id="submit-bug"> - <title>Submitting Installation Reports</title> -<para> - -If you still have problems, please submit an installation report. We also -encourage installation reports to be sent even if the installation is -successful, so that we can get as much information as possible on the largest -number of hardware configurations. - -</para><para> - -If you have a working Debian system, the easiest way to send an installation -report is to install the installation-report and reportbug packages -(<command>apt-get install installation-report reportbug</command>) and run -the command <command>reportbug installation-report</command>. - -</para><para> - -Please use this template when filling out -installation reports, and file the report as a bug report against the -<classname>installation-reports</classname> pseudo package, by sending it to -<email>submit@bugs.debian.org</email>. - -<informalexample><screen> -Package: installation-reports - -Boot method: <How did you boot the installer? CD? floppy? network?> -Image version: <Fill in date and from where you got the image> -Date: <Date and time of the install> - -Machine: <Description of machine (eg, IBM Thinkpad R32)> -Processor: -Memory: -Partitions: <df -Tl will do; the raw partition table is preferred> - -Output of lspci and lspci -n: - -Base System Installation Checklist: -[O] = OK, [E] = Error (please elaborate below), [ ] = didn't try it - -Initial boot worked: [ ] -Configure network HW: [ ] -Config network: [ ] -Detect CD: [ ] -Load installer modules: [ ] -Detect hard drives: [ ] -Partition hard drives: [ ] -Create file systems: [ ] -Mount partitions: [ ] -Install base system: [ ] -Install boot loader: [ ] -Reboot: [ ] - -Comments/Problems: - -<Description of the install, in prose, and any thoughts, comments - and ideas you had during the initial install.> -</screen></informalexample> - -In the bug report, describe what the problem is, including the last -visible kernel messages in the event of a kernel hang. Describe the -steps that you did which brought the system into the problem state. - -</para> - </sect2> - </sect1> diff --git a/fi/boot-new/boot-new.xml b/fi/boot-new/boot-new.xml deleted file mode 100644 index e5c7d5f9d..000000000 --- a/fi/boot-new/boot-new.xml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,256 +0,0 @@ -<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> -<!-- original version: 33725 untranslated --> - -<chapter id="boot-new"> - <title>Booting Into Your New Debian System</title> - - <sect1 id="base-boot"><title>The Moment of Truth</title> -<para> - -Your system's first boot on its own power is what electrical engineers -call the <quote>smoke test</quote>. - -</para><para> - -If you are booting directly into Debian, and the system doesn't start -up, either use your original installation boot media, or insert the -custom boot floppy if you have one, and reset your system. This way, -you will probably need to add some boot arguments like -<userinput>root=<replaceable>root</replaceable></userinput>, where -<replaceable>root</replaceable> is your root partition, such as -<filename>/dev/sda1</filename>. -Alternatively, see <xref linkend="rescue"/> for instructions on using -the installer's built-in rescue mode. - -</para> - - <sect2 arch="m68k"><title>BVME 6000 Booting</title> -<para> - -If you have just performed a diskless install on a BVM or Motorola -VMEbus machine: once the system has loaded the -<command>tftplilo</command> program from the TFTP server, from the -<prompt>LILO Boot:</prompt> prompt enter one of: - -<itemizedlist> -<listitem><para> - -<userinput>b6000</userinput> followed by &enterkey; -to boot a BVME 4000/6000 - -</para></listitem><listitem><para> - -<userinput>b162</userinput> followed by &enterkey; -to boot an MVME162 - -</para></listitem><listitem><para> - -<userinput>b167</userinput> followed by &enterkey; -to boot an MVME166/167 - -</para></listitem> -</itemizedlist> - -</para> - - </sect2> - - <sect2 arch="m68k"><title>Macintosh Booting</title> - -<para> - -Go to the directory containing the installation files and start up the -<command>Penguin</command> booter, holding down the -<keycap>command</keycap> key. Go to the -<userinput>Settings</userinput> dialogue (<keycombo> -<keycap>command</keycap> <keycap>T</keycap> </keycombo>), and locate -the kernel options line which should look like -<userinput>root=/dev/ram video=font:VGA8x16</userinput> or similar. - -</para><para> - -You need to change the entry to -<userinput>root=/dev/<replaceable>yyyy</replaceable></userinput>. -Replace the <replaceable>yyyy</replaceable> with the Linux name of the -partition onto which you installed the system -(e.g. <filename>/dev/sda1</filename>); you wrote this down earlier. -The <userinput>video=font:VGA8x8</userinput> is recommended especially -for users with tiny screens. The kernel would pick a prettier (6x11) -font but the console driver for this font can hang the machine, so -using 8x16 or 8x8 is safer at this stage. You can change this at any -time. - -</para><para> - -If you don't want to start GNU/Linux immediately each time you start, -uncheck the <userinput>Auto Boot</userinput> option. Save your -settings in the <filename>Prefs</filename> file using the -<userinput>Save Settings As Default</userinput> option. - -</para><para> - -Now select <userinput>Boot Now</userinput> (<keycombo> -<keycap>command</keycap> <keycap>B</keycap> </keycombo>) to start your -freshly installed GNU/Linux instead of the RAMdisk installer system. - -</para><para> - -Debian should boot, and you should see the same messages as -when you first booted the installation system, followed by some new -messages. - -</para> - </sect2> - - - <sect2 arch="powerpc"><title>OldWorld PowerMacs</title> -<para> - -If the machine fails to boot after completing the installation, and -stops with a <prompt>boot:</prompt> prompt, try typing -<userinput>Linux</userinput> followed by &enterkey;. (The default boot -configuration in <filename>quik.conf</filename> is labeled Linux). The -labels defined in <filename>quik.conf</filename> will be displayed if -you press the <keycap>Tab</keycap> key at the <prompt>boot:</prompt> -prompt. You can also try booting back into the installer, and editing -the <filename>/target/etc/quik.conf</filename> placed there by the -<guimenuitem>Install Quik on a Hard Disk</guimenuitem> step. Clues -for dealing with <command>quik</command> are available at -<ulink url="&url-powerpc-quik-faq;"></ulink>. - -</para><para> - -To boot back into MacOS without resetting the nvram, type -<userinput>bye</userinput> at the OpenFirmware prompt (assuming MacOS -has not been removed from the machine). To obtain an OpenFirmware -prompt, hold down the <keycombo> <keycap>command</keycap> -<keycap>option</keycap> <keycap>o</keycap> <keycap>f</keycap> -</keycombo> keys while cold booting the machine. If you need to reset -the OpenFirmware nvram changes to the MacOS default in order to boot -back to MacOS, hold down the <keycombo> <keycap>command</keycap> -<keycap>option</keycap> <keycap>p</keycap> <keycap>r</keycap> -</keycombo> keys while cold booting the machine. - -</para><para> - -If you use <command>BootX</command> to boot into the installed system, -just select your desired kernel in the <filename>Linux -Kernels</filename> folder, un-choose the ramdisk option, and add -a root device corresponding to your installation; -e.g. <userinput>/dev/hda8</userinput>. - -</para> - </sect2> - - - <sect2 arch="powerpc"><title>NewWorld PowerMacs</title> -<para> - -On G4 machines and iBooks, you can hold down the -<keycap>option</keycap> key and get a graphical screen with a button -for each bootable OS, &debian; will be a button with a small penguin -icon. - -</para><para> - -If you kept MacOS and at some point it changes the OpenFirmware -<envar>boot-device</envar> variable you should reset OpenFirmware to -its default configuration. To do this hold down the <keycombo> -<keycap>command</keycap> <keycap>option</keycap> <keycap>p</keycap> -<keycap>r</keycap> </keycombo> keys while cold booting the machine. - -</para><para> - -The labels defined in <filename>yaboot.conf</filename> will be -displayed if you press the <keycap>Tab</keycap> key at the -<prompt>boot:</prompt> prompt. - -</para><para> - -Resetting OpenFirmware on G3 or G4 hardware will cause it to boot -&debian; by default (if you correctly partitioned and placed the -Apple_Bootstrap partition first). If you have &debian; on a SCSI disk -and MacOS on an IDE disk this may not work and you will have to enter -OpenFirmware and set the <envar>boot-device</envar> variable, -<command>ybin</command> normally does this automatically. - -</para><para> - -After you boot &debian; for the first time you can add any additional -options you desire (such as dual boot options) to -<filename>/etc/yaboot.conf</filename> and run <command>ybin</command> -to update your boot partition with the changed configuration. Please -read the <ulink url="&url-powerpc-yaboot-faq;">yaboot HOWTO</ulink> -for more information. - -</para> - </sect2> - </sect1> - - <sect1 id="login"> - <title>Log In</title> - -<para> - -Once your system boots, you'll be presented with the login -prompt. Log in using the personal login and password you -selected during the installation process. Your system is now ready to use. - -</para><para> - -If you are a new user, you may want to explore the documentation which -is already installed on your system as you start to use it. There are -currently several documentation systems, work is proceeding on -integrating the different types of documentation. Here are a few -starting points. - -</para><para> - -Documentation accompanying programs you have installed is in -<filename>/usr/share/doc/</filename>, under a subdirectory named after -the program. For example, the APT User's Guide for using -<command>apt</command> to install other programs on your system, is -located in -<filename>/usr/share/doc/apt/guide.html/index.html</filename>. - -</para><para> - - -In addition, there are some special folders within the -<filename>/usr/share/doc/</filename> hierarchy. Linux HOWTOs are -installed in <emphasis>.gz</emphasis> format, in -<filename>/usr/share/doc/HOWTO/en-txt/</filename>. After installing -<command>dhelp</command> you will find a browse-able index of -documentation in <filename>/usr/share/doc/HTML/index.html</filename>. - -</para><para> - -One easy way to view these documents is to <userinput>cd -/usr/share/doc/</userinput>, and type <userinput>lynx</userinput> -followed by a space and a dot (the dot stands for the current -directory). - -</para><para> - -You can also type <userinput>info -<replaceable>command</replaceable></userinput> or <userinput>man -<replaceable>command</replaceable></userinput> to see documentation on -most commands available at the command prompt. Typing -<userinput>help</userinput> will display help on shell commands. And -typing a command followed by <userinput>--help</userinput> will -usually display a short summary of the command's usage. If a command's -results scroll past the top of the screen, type <userinput>| -more</userinput> after the command to cause the results to pause -before scrolling past the top of the screen. To see a list of all -commands available which begin with a certain letter, type the letter -and then two tabs. - -</para><para> - -For a more complete introduction to Debian and GNU/Linux, see -<filename>/usr/share/doc/debian-guide/html/noframes/index.html</filename>. - -</para> - - </sect1> -</chapter> diff --git a/fi/hardware/hardware-supported.xml b/fi/hardware/hardware-supported.xml deleted file mode 100644 index d05839f16..000000000 --- a/fi/hardware/hardware-supported.xml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,351 +0,0 @@ -<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> -<!-- original version: 36733 untranslated --> - - <sect1 id="hardware-supported"> - <title>Supported Hardware</title> - -<para> - -Debian does not impose hardware requirements beyond the requirements -of the Linux kernel and the GNU tool-sets. Therefore, any -architecture or platform to which the Linux kernel, libc, -<command>gcc</command>, etc. have been ported, and for which a Debian -port exists, can run Debian. Please refer to the Ports pages at -<ulink url="&url-ports;"></ulink> for -more details on &arch-title; architecture systems which have been -tested with Debian. - -</para><para> - -Rather than attempting to describe all the different hardware -configurations which are supported for &arch-title;, this section -contains general information and pointers to where additional -information can be found. - -</para> - - <sect2><title>Supported Architectures</title> - -<para> - -Debian &release; supports eleven major architectures and several -variations of each architecture known as <quote>flavors</quote>. - -</para><para> - -<informaltable> -<tgroup cols="4"> -<thead> -<row> - <entry>Architecture</entry><entry>Debian Designation</entry> - <entry>Subarchitecture</entry><entry>Flavor</entry> -</row> -</thead> - -<tbody> -<row> - <entry morerows="2">Intel x86-based</entry> - <entry morerows="2">i386</entry> - <entry morerows="2"></entry> - <entry>vanilla</entry> -</row><row> - <entry>speakup</entry> -</row><row> - <entry>linux26</entry> -</row> - -<row> - <entry morerows="5">Motorola 680x0</entry> - <entry morerows="5">m68k</entry> - <entry>Atari</entry> - <entry>atari</entry> -</row><row> - <entry>Amiga</entry> - <entry>amiga</entry> -</row><row> - <entry>68k Macintosh</entry> - <entry>mac</entry> -</row><row> - <entry morerows="2">VME</entry> - <entry>bvme6000</entry> -</row><row> - <entry>mvme147</entry> -</row><row> - <entry>mvme16x</entry> -</row> - -<row> - <entry>DEC Alpha</entry> - <entry>alpha</entry> - <entry></entry> - <entry></entry> -</row> - -<row> - <entry morerows="1">Sun SPARC</entry> - <entry morerows="1">sparc</entry> - <entry morerows="1"></entry> - <entry>sun4cdm</entry> -</row><row> - <entry>sun4u</entry> -</row> - -<row> - <entry morerows="2">ARM and StrongARM</entry> - <entry morerows="2">arm</entry> - <entry>Netwinder and CATS</entry> - <entry>netwinder</entry> -</row><row> - <entry>Linksys NSLU2</entry> - <entry>nslu2</entry> -</row><row> - <entry>RiscPC and Riscstation</entry> - <entry>riscpc</entry> -</row> - -<row> - <entry morerows="3">IBM/Motorola PowerPC</entry> - <entry morerows="3">powerpc</entry> - <entry>CHRP</entry> - <entry>chrp</entry> -</row><row> - <entry>PowerMac</entry> - <entry>pmac</entry> -</row><row> - <entry>PReP</entry> - <entry>prep</entry> -</row><row> - <entry>APUS</entry> - <entry>apus</entry> -</row> - -<row> - <entry morerows="1">HP PA-RISC</entry> - <entry morerows="1">hppa</entry> - <entry>PA-RISC 1.1</entry> - <entry>32</entry> -</row><row> - <entry>PA-RISC 2.0</entry> - <entry>64</entry> -</row> - -<row> - <entry>Intel ia64-based</entry> - <entry>ia64</entry> - <entry></entry> - <entry></entry> -</row> - -<row> - <entry morerows="4">MIPS (big endian)</entry> - <entry morerows="4">mips</entry> - <entry morerows="1">SGI IP22 (Indy/Indigo 2)</entry> - <entry>r4k-ip22</entry> -</row><row> - <entry>r5k-ip22</entry> -</row><row> - <entry>SGI IP32 (O2)</entry> - <entry>r5k-ip32</entry> -</row><row> - <entry>Broadcom BCM91250A (SWARM)</entry> - <entry>sb1-bcm91250a</entry> -</row><row> - <entry>Broadcom BCM91480B (BigSur)</entry> - <entry>sb1a-bcm91480b</entry> -</row> - -<row> - <entry morerows="4">MIPS (little endian)</entry> - <entry morerows="4">mipsel</entry> - <entry>Cobalt</entry> - <entry>cobalt</entry> -</row><row> - <entry morerows="1">DECstation</entry> - <entry>r4k-kn04</entry> -</row><row> - <entry>r3k-kn02</entry> -</row><row> - <entry>Broadcom BCM91250A (SWARM)</entry> - <entry>sb1-bcm91250a</entry> -</row><row> - <entry>Broadcom BCM91480B (BigSur)</entry> - <entry>sb1a-bcm91480b</entry> -</row> - -<row> - <entry morerows="1">IBM S/390</entry> - <entry morerows="1">s390</entry> - <entry>IPL from VM-reader and DASD</entry> - <entry>generic</entry> -</row><row> - <entry>IPL from tape</entry> - <entry>tape</entry> -</row> - -</tbody></tgroup></informaltable> - -</para><para> - -This document covers installation for the -<emphasis>&arch-title;</emphasis> architecture. If you are looking -for information on any of the other Debian-supported architectures -take a look at the -<ulink url="http://www.debian.org/ports/">Debian-Ports</ulink> pages. - -</para><para condition="new-arch"> - -This is the first official release of &debian; for the &arch-title; -architecture. We feel that it has proven itself sufficiently to be -released. However, because it has not had the exposure (and hence -testing by users) that some other architectures have had, you may -encounter a few bugs. Use our -<ulink url="&url-bts;">Bug Tracking System</ulink> to report any -problems; make sure to mention the fact that the bug is on the -&arch-title; platform. It can be necessary to use the -<ulink url="&url-list-subscribe;">debian-&arch-listname; mailing list</ulink> -as well. - -</para> - - </sect2> - -<!-- supported cpu docs --> -&supported-alpha.xml; -&supported-arm.xml; -&supported-hppa.xml; -&supported-i386.xml; -&supported-ia64.xml; <!-- FIXME: currently missing --> -&supported-m68k.xml; -&supported-mips.xml; -&supported-mipsel.xml; -&supported-powerpc.xml; -&supported-s390.xml; -&supported-sparc.xml; - - <sect2 id="gfx" arch="not-s390"><title>Graphics Card</title> - -<para arch="i386"> - -You should be using a VGA-compatible display interface for the console -terminal. Nearly every modern display card is compatible with -VGA. Ancient standards such CGA, MDA, or HGA should also work, -assuming you do not require X11 support. Note that X11 is not used -during the installation process described in this document. - -</para><para> - -Debian's support for graphical interfaces is determined by the -underlying support found in X.Org's X11 system. Most AGP, PCI and -PCIe video cards work under X.Org. Details on supported graphics -buses, cards, monitors, and pointing devices can be found at -<ulink url="&url-xorg;"></ulink>. Debian &release; ships -with X.Org version &x11ver;. - -</para><para arch="mips"> - -<!-- FIXME: mention explicit graphics chips and not system names --> -The X.Org X11 window system is only supported on the SGI Indy and the O2. The -Broadcom BCM91250A and BCM91480B evaluation boards have standard 3.3v PCI -slots and support VGA emulation or Linux framebuffer on a selected range -of graphics cards. A <ulink url="&url-bcm91250a-hardware;">compatibility -listing</ulink> for Broadcom evaluation boards is available. - -</para><para arch="mipsel"> - -The X.Org X11 window system is supported on some DECstation models. The -Broadcom BCM91250A and BCM91480B evaluation boards have standard 3.3v PCI -slots and support VGA emulation or Linux framebuffer on a selected range -of graphics cards. A <ulink url="&url-bcm91250a-hardware;">compatibility -listing</ulink> for Broadcom evaluation boards is available. - -</para> - - </sect2> - - <sect2 arch="i386" id="laptops"><title>Laptops</title> -<para> - -Laptops are also supported. Laptops are often specialized or contain -proprietary hardware. To see if your particular laptop works well -with GNU/Linux, see the -<ulink url="&url-x86-laptop;">Linux Laptop pages</ulink> - -</para> - </sect2> - - - <sect2 condition="defaults-smp"> -<title>Multiple Processors</title> - -<para> - -Multi-processor support — also called <quote>symmetric multi-processing</quote> -or SMP — is available for this architecture. The standard Debian -&release; kernel image was compiled with SMP support. This should not -prevent installation, since the SMP kernel should boot on non-SMP systems; -the kernel will simply cause a bit more overhead. - -</para><para> - -In order to optimize the kernel for single CPU systems, you'll have to -replace the standard Debian kernel. You can find a discussion of how -to do this in <xref linkend="kernel-baking"/>. At this time -(kernel version &kernelversion;) the way you disable SMP is to deselect -<quote>&smp-config-option;</quote> in the <quote>&smp-config-section;</quote> -section of the kernel config. - -</para> - - </sect2> - - - <sect2 condition="supports-smp"> - <title>Multiple Processors</title> -<para> - -Multi-processor support — also called <quote>symmetric -multi-processing</quote> or SMP — is available for this architecture. -However, the standard Debian &release; kernel image does not support -SMP. This should not prevent installation, since the standard, -non-SMP kernel should boot on SMP systems; the kernel will simply use -the first CPU. - -</para><para> - -In order to take advantage of multiple processors, you'll have to -replace the standard Debian kernel. You can find a discussion of how -to do this in <xref linkend="kernel-baking"/>. At this time -(kernel version &kernelversion;) the way you enable SMP is to select -<quote>&smp-config-option;</quote> in the <quote>&smp-config-section;</quote> -section of the kernel config. - -</para> - </sect2> - - <sect2 condition="supports-smp-sometimes"> - <title>Multiple Processors</title> -<para> - -Multi-processor support — also called <quote>symmetric -multi-processing</quote> or SMP — is available for this architecture, -and is supported by a precompiled Debian kernel image. Depending on your -install media, this SMP-capable kernel may or may not be installed by -default. This should not prevent installation, since the standard, -non-SMP kernel should boot on SMP systems; the kernel will simply use -the first CPU. - -</para><para> - -In order to take advantage of multiple processors, you should check to see -if a kernel package that supports SMP is installed, and if not, choose an -appropriate kernel package. - -You can also build your own customized kernel to support SMP. You can find -a discussion of how to do this in <xref linkend="kernel-baking"/>. At this -time (kernel version &kernelversion;) the way you enable SMP is to select -<quote>&smp-config-option;</quote> in the <quote>&smp-config-section;</quote> -section of the kernel config. - -</para> - </sect2> - </sect1> diff --git a/fi/hardware/hardware.xml b/fi/hardware/hardware.xml deleted file mode 100644 index 166cb9ab1..000000000 --- a/fi/hardware/hardware.xml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,21 +0,0 @@ -<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> -<!-- original version: 11648 untranslated --> - -<chapter id="hardware-req"> - <title>System Requirements</title> - -<para> - -This section contains information about what hardware you need to get -started with Debian. You will also find links to further information -about hardware supported by GNU and Linux. - -</para> - -&hardware-supported.xml; -&installation-media.xml; -&supported-peripherals.xml; -&memory-disk-requirements.xml; -&network-cards.xml; - -</chapter> diff --git a/fi/hardware/installation-media.xml b/fi/hardware/installation-media.xml deleted file mode 100644 index 34a6e015f..000000000 --- a/fi/hardware/installation-media.xml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,313 +0,0 @@ -<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> -<!-- original version: 36732 untranslated --> - - <sect1 id="installation-media"> - <title>Installation Media</title> - -<para> - -This section will help you determine which different media types you can use to -install Debian. For example, if you have a floppy disk drive on your machine, -it can be used to install Debian. There is a whole chapter devoted media, -<xref linkend="install-methods"/>, which lists the advantages and -disadvantages of each media type. You may want to refer back to this page once -you reach that section. - -</para> - - <sect2 condition="supports-floppy-boot"><title>Floppies</title> -<para> - -In some cases, you'll have to do your first boot from floppy disks. -Generally, all you will need is a -high-density (1440 kilobytes) 3.5 inch floppy drive. - -</para><para arch="powerpc"> - -For CHRP, floppy support is currently broken. - -</para> - </sect2> - - <sect2><title>CD-ROM/DVD-ROM</title> - -<note><para> - -Whenever you see <quote>CD-ROM</quote> in this manual, it applies to both -CD-ROMs and DVD-ROMs, because both technologies are really -the same from the operating system's point of view, except for some very -old nonstandard CD-ROM drives which are neither SCSI nor IDE/ATAPI. - -</para></note><para> - -CD-ROM based installation is supported for some architectures. -On machines which support bootable CD-ROMs, you should be able to do a -completely -<phrase arch="not-s390">floppy-less</phrase> -<phrase arch="s390">tape-less</phrase> -installation. Even if your system doesn't -support booting from a CD-ROM, you can use the CD-ROM in conjunction -with the other techniques to install your system, once you've booted -up by other means; see <xref linkend="boot-installer"/>. - -</para><para arch="i386"> - -Both SCSI and IDE/ATAPI CD-ROMs are supported. In addition, all -non-standard CD interfaces supported by Linux are supported by the -boot disks (such as Mitsumi and Matsushita drives). However, these -models might require special boot parameters or other massaging to get -them to work, and booting off these non-standard interfaces is -unlikely. The <ulink url="&url-cd-howto;">Linux CD-ROM HOWTO</ulink> -contains in-depth information on using CD-ROMs with Linux. - -</para><para arch="i386"> - -USB CD-ROM drives are also supported, as are FireWire devices that -are supported by the ohci1394 and sbp2 drivers. - -</para><para arch="alpha"> - -Both SCSI and IDE/ATAPI CD-ROMs are supported on &arch-title;, as long -as the controller is supported by the SRM console. This rules out many -add-on controller cards, but most integrated IDE and SCSI chips and -controller cards that were provided by the manufacturer can be expected -to work. To find out whether your device is supported from the SRM -console, see the <ulink url="&url-srm-howto;">SRM HOWTO</ulink>. - -</para><para arch="arm"> - -IDE/ATAPI CD-ROMs are supported on all ARM machines. -On RiscPCs, SCSI CD-ROMs are also supported. - -</para><para arch="mips"> - -On SGI machines, booting from CD-ROM requires a SCSI CD-ROM drive -capable of working with a logical blocksize of 512 bytes. Many of the -SCSI CD-ROM drives sold on the PC market do not have this -capability. If your CD-ROM drive has a jumper labeled -<quote>Unix/PC</quote> or <quote>512/2048</quote>, place it in the -<quote>Unix</quote> or <quote>512</quote> position. -To start the install, simply choose the <quote>System installation</quote> -entry in the firmware. The Broadcom BCM91250A supports standard IDE devices, -including CD-ROM drives, but CD images for this platform are currently not -provided because the firmware doesn't recognize CD drives. In order to -install Debian on an Broadcom BCM91480B evaluation board, you need an PCI -IDE, SATA or SCSI card. - -</para><para arch="mipsel"> - -On DECstations, booting from CD-ROM requires a SCSI CD-ROM drive -capable of working with a logical blocksize of 512 bytes. Many of the -SCSI CD-ROM drives sold on the PC market do not have this capability. -If your CD-ROM drive has a jumper labeled <quote>Unix/PC</quote> or -<quote>512/2048</quote>, place it in the <quote>Unix</quote> or -<quote>512</quote> position. - -</para><para arch="mipsel"> - -CD 1 contains the installer for the r3k-kn02 subarchitecture -(the R3000-based DECstations 5000/1xx and 5000/240 as well as -the R3000-based Personal DECstation models), CD 2 the -installer for the r4k-kn04 subarchitecture (the R4x00-based -DECstations 5000/150 and 5000/260 as well as the Personal DECstation -5000/50). - -</para><para arch="mipsel"> - -To boot from CD, issue the command <userinput>boot -<replaceable>#</replaceable>/rz<replaceable>id</replaceable></userinput> -on the firmware prompt, where <replaceable>#</replaceable> is the -number of the TurboChannel device from which to boot (3 on most -DECstations) and <replaceable>id</replaceable> is the SCSI ID of the -CD-ROM drive. If you need to pass additional parameters, they can -optionally be appended with the following syntax: - -</para><para arch="mipsel"> - -<userinput>boot -<replaceable>#</replaceable>/rz<replaceable>id</replaceable> -param1=value1 param2=value2 ...</userinput> - -</para> - </sect2> - - <sect2><title>Hard Disk</title> - -<para> - -Booting the installation system directly from a hard disk is another option -for many architectures. This will require some other operating system -to load the installer onto the hard disk. - -</para><para arch="m68k"> - -In fact, installation from your local disk is the preferred -installation technique for most &architecture; machines. - -</para><para arch="sparc"> - -Although the &arch-title; does not allow booting from SunOS -(Solaris), you can install from a SunOS partition (UFS slices). - -</para> - </sect2> - - <sect2 condition="bootable-usb"><title>USB Memory Stick</title> - -<para> - -Many Debian boxes need their floppy and/or CD-ROM drives only for -setting up the system and for rescue purposes. If you operate some -servers, you will probably already have thought about omitting those -drives and using an USB memory stick for installing and (when -necessary) for recovering the system. This is also useful for small -systems which have no room for unnecessary drives. - -</para> - </sect2> - - <sect2><title>Network</title> - -<para condition="supports-tftp"> - -You can also <emphasis>boot</emphasis> your system over the network. -<phrase arch="mips">This is the preferred installation technique for -Mips.</phrase> - -</para><para condition="supports-nfsroot"> - -Diskless installation, using network booting from a local area network -and NFS-mounting of all local filesystems, is another option. - -</para><para> - -After the operating system kernel is installed, you can install the -rest of your system via any sort of network connection (including -PPP after installation of the base system), via FTP or HTTP. - -</para> - </sect2> - - <sect2><title>Un*x or GNU system</title> - -<para> - -If you are running another Unix-like system, you could use it to install -&debian; without using the &d-i; described in the rest of the -manual. This kind of install may be useful for users with otherwise -unsupported hardware or on hosts which can't afford downtime. If you -are interested in this technique, skip to the <xref -linkend="linux-upgrade"/>. - -</para> - </sect2> - - <sect2><title>Supported Storage Systems</title> - -<para> - -The Debian boot disks contain a kernel which is built to maximize the -number of systems it runs on. Unfortunately, this makes for a larger -kernel, which includes many drivers that won't be used for your -machine (see <xref linkend="kernel-baking"/> to learn how to -build your own kernel). Support for the widest possible range of -devices is desirable in general, to ensure that Debian can be -installed on the widest array of hardware. - -</para><para arch="i386"> - -Generally, the Debian installation system includes support for floppies, -IDE drives, IDE floppies, parallel port IDE devices, SCSI controllers and -drives, USB, and FireWire. The supported file systems include FAT, -Win-32 FAT extensions (VFAT) and NTFS. - -</para><para arch="i386"> - -Disk interfaces that emulate the <quote>AT</quote> hard disk interface -— often called MFM, RLL, IDE, or ATA — are supported. Very old -8–bit hard disk controllers used in the IBM XT computer are supported -only as a module. SCSI disk controllers from many different manufacturers -are supported. See the -<ulink url="&url-hardware-howto;">Linux Hardware Compatibility HOWTO</ulink> -for more details. - -</para><para arch="m68k"> - -Pretty much all storage systems supported by the Linux kernel are -supported by the Debian installation system. Note that the current -Linux kernel does not support floppies on the Macintosh at all, and -the Debian installation system doesn't support floppies for Amigas. -Also supported on the Atari is the Macintosh HFS system, and AFFS as a -module. Macs support the Atari (FAT) file system. Amigas support the -FAT file system, and HFS as a module. - -</para><para arch="sparc"> - -Any storage system supported by the Linux kernel is also supported by -the boot system. The following SCSI drivers are supported in the default -kernel: - -<itemizedlist> -<listitem><para> - -Sparc ESP - -</para></listitem> -<listitem><para> - -PTI Qlogic,ISP - -</para></listitem> -<listitem><para> - -Adaptec AIC7xxx - -</para></listitem> -<listitem><para> - -NCR and Symbios 53C8XX - -</para></listitem> -</itemizedlist> - -IDE systems (such as the UltraSPARC 5) are also supported. See -<ulink url="&url-sparc-linux-faq;">Linux for SPARC Processors FAQ</ulink> -for more information on SPARC hardware supported by the Linux kernel. - -</para><para arch="alpha"> - -Any storage system supported by the Linux kernel is also supported by -the boot system. This includes both SCSI and IDE disks. Note, however, -that on many systems, the SRM console is unable to boot from IDE drives, -and the Jensen is unable to boot from floppies. (see -<ulink url="&url-jensen-howto;"></ulink> -for more information on booting the Jensen) - -</para><para arch="powerpc"> - -Any storage system supported by the Linux kernel is also supported by -the boot system. Note that the current Linux kernel does not support -floppies on CHRP systems at all. - -</para><para arch="hppa"> - -Any storage system supported by the Linux kernel is also supported by -the boot system. Note that the current Linux kernel does not support -the floppy drive. - -</para><para arch="mips"> - -Any storage system supported by the Linux kernel is also supported by -the boot system. - -</para><para arch="s390"> - -Any storage system supported by the Linux kernel is also supported by -the boot system. This means that FBA and ECKD DASDs are supported with -the old Linux disk layout (ldl) and the new common S/390 disk layout (cdl). - -</para> - - </sect2> - - </sect1> diff --git a/fi/hardware/memory-disk-requirements.xml b/fi/hardware/memory-disk-requirements.xml deleted file mode 100644 index e048007b8..000000000 --- a/fi/hardware/memory-disk-requirements.xml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,47 +0,0 @@ -<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> -<!-- original version: 28672 untranslated --> - - <sect1 id="memory-disk-requirements"> - <title>Memory and Disk Space Requirements</title> - -<para> - -You must have at least &minimum-memory; of memory and &minimum-fs-size; of hard disk -space. For a minimal console-based system (all standard packages), -250MB is required. If you want to install a reasonable amount of -software, including the X Window System, and some development programs -and libraries, you'll need at least 400MB. For a more or less complete -desktop system, you'll need a few gigabytes. - -</para><para arch="m68k"> - -On the Amiga the size of FastRAM is relevant towards the total memory -requirements. Also, using Zorro cards with 16-bit RAM is not -supported; you'll need 32-bit RAM. The <command>amiboot</command> -program can be used to disable 16-bit RAM; see the -<ulink url="&url-m68k-faq;">Linux/m68k FAQ</ulink>. Recent kernels should -disable 16-bit RAM automatically. - -</para><para arch="m68k"> - -On the Atari, both ST-RAM and Fast RAM (TT-RAM) are used by Linux. -Many users have reported problems running the kernel itself in Fast -RAM, so the Atari bootstrap will place the kernel in ST-RAM. The -minimum requirement for ST-RAM is 2 MB. You will need an additional -12 MB or more of TT-RAM. - -</para><para arch="m68k"> - -On the Macintosh, care should be taken on machines with RAM-based -video (RBV). The RAM segment at physical address 0 is used as screen -memory, making the default load position for the kernel unavailable. -The alternate RAM segment used for kernel and RAMdisk must be at least -4 MB. - -</para><para arch="m68k"> - -<emphasis condition="FIXME">FIXME: is this still true?</emphasis> - -</para> - - </sect1> diff --git a/fi/hardware/network-cards.xml b/fi/hardware/network-cards.xml deleted file mode 100644 index deb384f58..000000000 --- a/fi/hardware/network-cards.xml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,214 +0,0 @@ -<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> -<!-- original version: 36732 untranslated --> - - <sect1 id="network-cards"> - <title>Network Connectivity Hardware</title> - -<para arch="i386"> - -<!-- last updated for kernel-image_2.0.36-2 --> - -Most PCI and many older ISA network cards are supported. -Some network interface cards are not supported by most Debian -installation disks, such as AX.25 cards and protocols; -NI16510 EtherBlaster cards; Schneider & Koch G16 cards; -and the Zenith Z-Note built-in network card. Microchannel (MCA) network -cards are not supported by the standard installation system, but see -<ulink url="&url-linux-mca;">Linux on MCA</ulink> for some (old) -instructions. -FDDI networks are also not supported by the installation disks, both -cards and protocols. - -<!-- missing-doc FIXME You can create a custom kernel which supports an -otherwise unsupported card and then substitute in the installer (see -<xref linkend="rescue-replace-kernel"/>). --> - -</para><para arch="i386"> - -As for ISDN, the D-channel protocol for the (old) German 1TR6 is not -supported; Spellcaster BRI ISDN boards are also not supported by the -&d-i;. - -</para> - -<para arch="m68k"> - -Any network interface card (NIC) supported by the Linux kernel should -also be supported by the boot disks. You may need to load your -network driver as a module. Again, see -<ulink url="&url-m68k-faq;"></ulink> for complete details. - -</para> - -<para arch="sparc"> - -The following network interface cards (NICs) are supported from the bootable -kernel directly: - -<itemizedlist> - <listitem><para> - -Sun LANCE - - -</para></listitem> - <listitem><para> - -Sun Happy Meal - - -</para></listitem> -</itemizedlist> - -</para><para arch="sparc"> - -The following network interface cards are supported as modules. They -can be enabled once the drivers are installed during the setup. -However, due to the magic of OpenPROM, you still should be able to -boot from these devices: - -<itemizedlist> - <listitem><para> - -Sun BigMAC - - -</para></listitem> - <listitem><para> - -Sun QuadEthernet - -</para></listitem> - <listitem><para> - -MyriCOM Gigabit Ethernet - -</para></listitem> -</itemizedlist> - -</para><para arch="alpha"> - -Any network interface card (NIC) supported by the Linux kernel should -also be supported by the boot disks. You may need to load your -network driver as a module. - -</para><para arch="powerpc"> - -Any network interface card (NIC) supported by the Linux kernel should -also be supported by the boot disks. You may need to load your -network driver as a module. - -</para><para arch="hppa"> - -Any network interface card (NIC) supported by the Linux kernel should -also be supported by the boot disks. You may need to load your -network driver as a module. - -</para><para arch="ia64"> - -Any network interface card (NIC) supported by the Linux kernel should -also be supported by the boot disks. You may need to load your -network driver as a module. - -</para><para arch="mips"> - -Any network interface card (NIC) supported by the Linux kernel should -also be supported by the boot disks. You may need to load your -network driver as a module. - -</para><para arch="mipsel"> - -Due to kernel limitations only the onboard network interfaces on -DECstations are supported, TurboChannel option network cards currently -do not work. - -</para><para arch="s390"> - -Any network interface card (NIC) supported by the Linux kernel is -also be supported by the boot disks. All network drivers are compiled -as modules so you need to load one first during the initial network -setup. The list of supported network devices is: - -<itemizedlist> - <listitem><para> - -Channel to Channel (CTC) and ESCON connection (real or emulated) - -</para></listitem> - <listitem><para> - -OSA-2 Token Ring/Ethernet and OSA-Express Fast Ethernet (non-QDIO) - -</para></listitem> -<listitem><para> - -Inter-User Communication Vehicle (IUCV) — available for VM guests only - -</para></listitem> -<listitem><para> - -OSA-Express in QDIO mode, HiperSockets and Guest-LANs - -</para></listitem> -</itemizedlist> - -</para> - -<para arch="arm"> - -The following network interface cards are supported directly by the -boot disks on Netwinder and CATS machines: - -<itemizedlist> - <listitem><para> - - PCI-based NE2000 - - -</para></listitem> - <listitem><para> - - DECchip Tulip - -</para></listitem> -</itemizedlist> - -</para><para arch="arm"> - -The following network interface cards are supported directly by the -boot disks on RiscPCs: - -<itemizedlist> - <listitem><para> - - Ether1 - -</para></listitem> - <listitem><para> - - Ether3 - -</para></listitem> - <listitem><para> - - EtherH - -</para></listitem> -</itemizedlist> - -</para><para arch="arm"> - -If your card is mentioned in the lists above, the complete installation -can be carried out from the network with no need for CD-ROMs or floppy -disks. - -</para><para arch="arm"> - -Any other network interface card (NIC) supported by the Linux kernel -should also be supported by the boot disks. You may need to load your -network driver as a module; this means that you will have to install -the operating system kernel and modules using some other media. - -</para> - - </sect1> diff --git a/fi/hardware/supported-peripherals.xml b/fi/hardware/supported-peripherals.xml deleted file mode 100644 index 43512b498..000000000 --- a/fi/hardware/supported-peripherals.xml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,189 +0,0 @@ -<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> -<!-- original version: 36732 untranslated --> - - <sect1 id="supported-peripherals"> - <title>Peripherals and Other Hardware</title> -<para arch="not-s390"> - -Linux supports a large variety of hardware devices such as mice, -printers, scanners, PCMCIA and USB devices. However, most of these -devices are not required while installing the system. - -</para><para arch="i386"> - -USB hardware generally works fine, only some -USB keyboards may require additional configuration -(see <xref linkend="usb-keyboard-config"/>). - -</para><para arch="i386"> - -Again, see the -<ulink url="&url-hardware-howto;">Linux Hardware Compatibility HOWTO</ulink> -to determine whether your specific hardware is supported by Linux. - -</para><para arch="s390"> - -Package installations from XPRAM and tape are not supported by this -system. All packages that you want to install need to be available on a -DASD or over the network using NFS, HTTP or FTP. - -</para><para arch="mips"> - -The Broadcom BCM91250A evaluation board offers standard 3.3v 32 bit and 64 -bit PCI slots as well as USB connectors. The Broadcom BCM91480B evaluation -board features four 64 bit PCI slots. - -</para><para arch="mipsel"> - -The Broadcom BCM91250A evaluation board offers standard 3.3v 32 bit and 64 -bit PCI slots as well as USB connectors. The Broadcom BCM91480B evaluation -board features four 64 bit PCI slots. The Cobalt RaQ has no support for -additional devices but the Qube has one PCI slot. - -</para> -</sect1> - - <sect1 arch="not-s390"><title>Purchasing Hardware Specifically for GNU/Linux</title> - -<para> - -There are several vendors, who ship systems with Debian or other -distributions of GNU/Linux -<ulink url="&url-pre-installed;">pre-installed</ulink>. You might pay more -for the privilege, but it does buy a level of peace of mind, since you can -be sure that the hardware is well-supported by GNU/Linux. - -</para><para arch="m68k"> - -Unfortunately, it's quite rare to find any vendor shipping -new &arch-title; machines at all. - -</para><para arch="i386"> - -If you do have to buy a machine with Windows bundled, carefully read -the software license that comes with Windows; you may be able to -reject the license and obtain a rebate from your vendor. Searching -the Internet for <quote>windows refund</quote> may get you some useful -information to help with that. - -</para><para> - -Whether or not you are purchasing a system with Linux bundled, or even -a used system, it is still important to check that your hardware is -supported by the Linux kernel. Check if your hardware is listed in -the references found above. Let your salesperson (if any) know that -you're shopping for a Linux system. Support Linux-friendly hardware -vendors. - -</para> - - <sect2><title>Avoid Proprietary or Closed Hardware</title> -<para> - -Some hardware manufacturers simply won't tell us how to write drivers -for their hardware. Others won't allow us access to the documentation -without a non-disclosure agreement that would prevent us from -releasing the Linux source code. - -</para><para arch="m68k"> - -Another example is the proprietary hardware in the older -Macintosh line. In fact, no specifications or documentation have ever -been released for any Macintosh hardware, most notably the ADB -controller (used by the mouse and keyboard), the floppy controller, -and all acceleration and CLUT manipulation of the video hardware -(though we do now support CLUT manipulation on nearly all internal -video chips). In a nutshell, this explains why the Macintosh Linux -port lags behind other Linux ports. - -</para><para> - -Since we haven't been granted access to the documentation on these -devices, they simply won't work under Linux. You can help by asking -the manufacturers of such hardware to release the documentation. If -enough people ask, they will realize that the free software community -is an important market. - -</para> -</sect2> - - - <sect2 arch="i386"><title>Windows-specific Hardware</title> -<para> - -A disturbing trend is the proliferation of Windows-specific modems and -printers. In some cases these are specially designed to be operated by -the Microsoft Windows operating system and bear the legend <quote>WinModem</quote> -or <quote>Made especially for Windows-based computers</quote>. This -is generally done by removing the embedded processors of the hardware -and shifting the work they do over to a Windows driver that is run by -your computer's main CPU. This strategy makes the hardware less -expensive, but the savings are often <emphasis>not</emphasis> passed on to the -user and this hardware may even be more expensive than equivalent -devices that retain their embedded intelligence. - -</para><para> - -You should avoid Windows-specific hardware for two reasons. The first -is that the manufacturers do not generally make the resources -available to write a Linux driver. Generally, the hardware and -software interface to the device is proprietary, and documentation is -not available without a non-disclosure agreement, if it is available -at all. This precludes its being used for free software, since free -software writers disclose the source code of their programs. The -second reason is that when devices like these have had their embedded -processors removed, the operating system must perform the work of the -embedded processors, often at <emphasis>real-time</emphasis> priority, -and thus the CPU is not available to run your programs while it is -driving these devices. Since the typical Windows user does not -multi-process as intensively as a Linux user, the manufacturers hope -that the Windows user simply won't notice the burden this hardware -places on their CPU. However, any multi-processing operating system, -even Windows 2000 or XP, suffers from degraded performance when -peripheral manufacturers skimp on the embedded processing power of -their hardware. - -</para><para> - -You can help improve this situation by encouraging these manufacturers -to release the documentation and other resources necessary for us to -program their hardware, but the best strategy is simply to avoid this -sort of hardware until it is listed as working in the -<ulink url="&url-hardware-howto;">Linux Hardware Compatibility HOWTO</ulink>. - -</para> -</sect2> - - - <sect2 id="Parity-RAM"> - <title>Fake or <quote>Virtual</quote> Parity RAM</title> -<para> - -If you ask for Parity RAM in a computer store, you'll probably get -<emphasis>virtual parity</emphasis> memory modules instead of -<emphasis>true parity</emphasis> ones. Virtual parity SIMMs can often -(but not always) be distinguished because they only have one more chip -than an equivalent non-parity SIMM, and that one extra chip is smaller -than all the others. Virtual-parity SIMMs work exactly like non-parity -memory. They can't tell you when you have a single-bit RAM error the -way true-parity SIMMs do in a motherboard that implements -parity. Don't ever pay more for a virtual-parity SIMM than a -non-parity one. Do expect to pay a little more for true-parity SIMMs, -because you are actually buying one extra bit of memory for every 8 -bits. - -</para><para> - -If you want complete information on &arch-title; RAM issues, and what -is the best RAM to buy, see the -<ulink url="&url-pc-hw-faq;">PC Hardware FAQ</ulink>. - -</para><para arch="alpha"> - -Most, if not all, Alpha systems require true-parity RAM. - -</para> - - </sect2> - - </sect1> diff --git a/fi/hardware/supported/alpha.xml b/fi/hardware/supported/alpha.xml deleted file mode 100644 index 02e0ad4be..000000000 --- a/fi/hardware/supported/alpha.xml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,457 +0,0 @@ -<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> -<!-- original version: 28997 untranslated --> - - - <sect2 arch="alpha" id="alpha-cpus"><title>CPU, Main Boards, and Video Support</title> -<para> - -Complete information regarding supported DEC Alphas can be found at -<ulink url="&url-alpha-howto;">Linux Alpha HOWTO</ulink>. The -purpose of this section is to describe the systems supported -by the boot disks. - -</para><para> - -Alpha machines are subdivided into different system types because there -are a number of generations of motherboard and supporting chipsets. -Different systems (<quote>sub-architectures</quote>) often have radically -different engineering and capabilities. Therefore, the process of -installing and, more to the point, booting, can vary from system to system. - -</para><para> - -The following table lists the system types supported by the Debian -installation system. The table also indicates the <emphasis>code -name</emphasis> for these system types. You'll need to know this code -name when you actually begin the installation process: - -</para> - -<informaltable> -<tgroup cols="4"> -<colspec colname="c1"/> -<colspec colname="c2"/> -<colspec colname="c3"/> -<colspec colname="c4"/> -<thead> -<row> - <entry namest="c1" nameend="c2">Hardware Type</entry> - <entry>Aliases</entry><entry>MILO image</entry> -</row> -</thead> - -<tbody> -<row> - <entry morerows="3">ALCOR</entry> - <entry>AlphaStation 500 5/266.300</entry> - <entry>Maverick</entry> - <entry>alcor</entry> -</row><row> - <entry>AlphaStation 500 5/333...500</entry> - <entry>Bret</entry> - <entry>alcor</entry> -</row><row> - <entry>AlphaStation 600/266...300</entry> - <entry>Alcor</entry> - <entry>alcor</entry> -</row><row> - <entry>AlphaStation 600/300...433</entry> - <entry>XLT</entry> - <entry>xlt</entry> -</row> - -<row> - <entry>BOOK1</entry> - <entry>AlphaBook1 (laptop)</entry> - <entry>Alphabook1/Burns</entry> - <entry>book1</entry> -</row> - -<row> - <entry morerows="7">AVANTI</entry> - <entry>AlphaStation 200 4/100...166</entry> - <entry>Mustang</entry> - <entry>avanti</entry> -</row><row> - <entry>AlphaStation 200 4/233</entry> - <entry>Mustang+</entry> - <entry>avanti</entry> -</row><row> - <entry>AlphaStation 205 4/133...333</entry> - <entry>LX3</entry> - <entry>avanti</entry> -</row><row> - <entry>AlphaStation 250 4/300</entry> - <entry>M3+</entry> - <entry>avanti</entry> -</row><row> - <entry>AlphaStation 255 4/133...333</entry> - <entry>LX3+</entry> - <entry>avanti</entry> -</row><row> - <entry>AlphaStation 300 4/266</entry> - <entry>Melmac</entry> - <entry>avanti</entry> -</row><row> - <entry>AlphaStation 400 4/166</entry> - <entry>Chinet</entry> - <entry>avanti</entry> -</row><row> - <entry>AlphaStation 400 4/233...300</entry> - <entry>Avanti</entry> - <entry>avanti</entry> -</row> - -<row> - <entry morerows="3">EB164</entry> - <entry>AlphaPC164</entry> - <entry>PC164</entry> - <entry>pc164</entry> -</row><row> - <entry>AlphaPC164-LX</entry> - <entry>LX164</entry> - <entry>lx164</entry> -</row><row> - <entry>AlphaPC164-SX</entry> - <entry>SX164</entry> - <entry>sx164</entry> -</row><row> - <entry>EB164</entry> - <entry>EB164</entry> - <entry>eb164</entry> -</row> - -<row> - <entry morerows="2">EB64+</entry> - <entry>AlphaPC64</entry> - <entry>Cabriolet</entry> - <entry>cabriolet</entry> -</row><row> - <entry>AlphaPCI64</entry> - <entry>Cabriolet</entry> - <entry>cabriolet</entry> -</row><row> - <entry>EB64+</entry> - <entry>EB64+</entry> - <entry>eb64p</entry> -</row> - -<row> - <entry morerows="1">EB66</entry> - <entry>EB66</entry> - <entry>EB66</entry> - <entry>eb66</entry> -</row><row> - <entry>EB66+</entry> - <entry>EB66+</entry> - <entry>eb66p</entry> -</row> - -<row> - <entry morerows="2">JENSEN</entry> - <entry>DEC 2000 Model 300(S)</entry> - <entry>Jensen</entry> - <entry>N/A</entry> -</row><row> - <entry>DEC 2000 Model 500</entry> - <entry>Culzen</entry> - <entry>N/A</entry> -</row><row> - <entry>DECpc 150</entry> - <entry>Jensen</entry> - <entry>N/A</entry> -</row> - -<row> - <entry morerows="7">MIATA</entry> - <entry>Personal WorkStation 433a</entry> - <entry>Miata</entry> - <entry>miata</entry> -</row><row> - <entry>Personal WorkStation 433au</entry> - <entry>Miata</entry> - <entry>miata</entry> -</row><row> - <entry>Personal WorkStation 466au</entry> - <entry>Miata</entry> - <entry>miata</entry> -</row><row> - <entry>Personal WorkStation 500a</entry> - <entry>Miata</entry> - <entry>miata</entry> -</row><row> - <entry>Personal WorkStation 500au</entry> - <entry>Miata</entry> - <entry>miata</entry> -</row><row> - <entry>Personal WorkStation 550au</entry> - <entry>Miata</entry> - <entry>miata</entry> -</row><row> - <entry>Personal WorkStation 600a</entry> - <entry>Miata</entry> - <entry>miata</entry> -</row><row> - <entry>Personal WorkStation 600au</entry> - <entry>Miata</entry> - <entry>miata</entry> -</row> - -<row> - <entry morerows="3">MIKASA</entry> - <entry>AlphaServer 1000 4/200</entry> - <entry>Mikasa</entry> - <entry>mikasa</entry> -</row><row> - <entry>AlphaServer 1000 4/233..266</entry> - <entry>Mikasa+</entry> - <entry>mikasa</entry> -</row><row> - <entry>AlphaServer 1000 5/300</entry> - <entry>Mikasa-Pinnacle</entry> - <entry>mikasa</entry> -</row><row> - <entry>AlphaServer 1000 5/300</entry> - <entry>Mikasa-Primo</entry> - <entry>mikasa</entry> -</row> - -<row> - <entry morerows="1">NAUTILUS</entry> - <entry>UP1000</entry> - <entry>Nautilus</entry> - <entry>N/A</entry> -</row><row> - <entry>UP1100</entry> - <entry>Galaxy-Train/Nautilus Jr.</entry> - <entry>N/A</entry> -</row> - -<row> - <entry morerows="1">NONAME</entry> - <entry>AXPpci33</entry> - <entry>Noname</entry> - <entry>noname</entry> -</row><row> - <entry>UDB</entry> - <entry>Multia</entry> - <entry>noname</entry> -</row> - -<row> - <entry morerows="6">NORITAKE</entry> - <entry>AlphaServer 1000A 4/233...266</entry> - <entry>Noritake</entry> - <entry>N/A</entry> -</row><row> - <entry>AlphaServer 1000A 5/300</entry> - <entry>Noritake-Pinnacle</entry> - <entry>N/A</entry> -</row><row> - <entry>AlphaServer 1000A 5/333...500</entry> - <entry>Noritake-Primo</entry> - <entry>N/A</entry> -</row><row> - <entry>AlphaServer 800 5/333...500</entry> - <entry>Corelle</entry> - <entry>N/A</entry> -</row><row> - <entry>AlphaStation 600 A</entry> - <entry>Alcor-Primo</entry> - <entry>N/A</entry> -</row><row> - <entry>Digital Server 3300</entry> - <entry>Corelle</entry> - <entry>N/A</entry> -</row><row> - <entry>Digital Server 3300R</entry> - <entry>Corelle</entry> - <entry>N/A</entry> -</row> - -<row> - <entry>PLATFORM 2000</entry> - <entry>P2K</entry> - <entry>P2K</entry> - <entry>p2k</entry> -</row> - -<row> - <entry morerows="4">RAWHIDE</entry> - <entry>AlphaServer 1200 5/xxx</entry> - <entry>Tincup/DaVinci</entry> - <entry>N/A</entry> -</row><row> - <entry>AlphaServer 4000 5/xxx</entry> - <entry>Wrangler/Durango</entry> - <entry>N/A</entry> -</row><row> - <entry>AlphaServer 4100 5/xxx</entry> - <entry>Dodge</entry> - <entry>N/A</entry> -</row><row> - <entry>Digital Server 5300</entry> - <entry>Tincup/DaVinci</entry> - <entry>N/A</entry> -</row><row> - <entry>Digital Server 7300</entry> - <entry>Dodge</entry> - <entry>N/A</entry> -</row> - -<row> - <entry morerows="5">RUFFIAN</entry> - <entry>DeskStation AlphaPC164-UX</entry> - <entry>Ruffian</entry> - <entry>ruffian</entry> -</row><row> - <entry>DeskStation RPL164-2</entry> - <entry>Ruffian</entry> - <entry>ruffian</entry> -</row><row> - <entry>DeskStation RPL164-4</entry> - <entry>Ruffian</entry> - <entry>ruffian</entry> -</row><row> - <entry>DeskStation RPX164-2</entry> - <entry>Ruffian</entry> - <entry>ruffian</entry> -</row><row> - <entry>DeskStation RPX164-4</entry> - <entry>Ruffian</entry> - <entry>ruffian</entry> -</row><row> - <entry>Samsung AlphaPC164-BX</entry> - <entry>Ruffian</entry> - <entry>ruffian</entry> -</row> - -<row> - <entry morerows="3">SABLE</entry> - <entry>AlphaServer 2000 4/xxx</entry> - <entry>Demi-Sable</entry> - <entry>N/A</entry> -</row><row> - <entry>AlphaServer 2000 5/xxx</entry> - <entry>Demi-Gamma-Sable</entry> - <entry>N/A</entry> -</row><row> - <entry>AlphaServer 2100 4/xxx</entry> - <entry>Sable</entry> - <entry>N/A</entry> -</row><row> - <entry>AlphaServer 2100 5/xxx</entry> - <entry>Gamma-Sable</entry> - <entry>N/A</entry> -</row> - -<row> - <entry>TAKARA</entry> - <entry>21164 PICMG SBC</entry> - <entry>Takara</entry> - <entry>takara</entry> -</row> - -<row> - <entry morerows="3">TITAN</entry> - <entry>AlphaServer DS15</entry> - <entry>HyperBrick2</entry> - <entry>N/A</entry> -</row><row> - <entry>AlphaServer DS25</entry> - <entry>Granite</entry> - <entry>N/A</entry> -</row><row> - <entry>AlphaServer ES45</entry> - <entry>Privateer</entry> - <entry>N/A</entry> -</row><row> - <entry>UNKNOWN</entry> - <entry>Yukon</entry> - <entry>N/A</entry> -</row> - -<row> - <entry morerows="12">TSUNAMI</entry> - <entry>AlphaServer DS10</entry> - <entry>Webbrick</entry> - <entry>N/A</entry> -</row><row> - <entry>AlphaServer DS10L</entry> - <entry>Slate</entry> - <entry>N/A</entry> -</row><row> - <entry>AlphaServer DS20</entry> - <entry>Catamaran/Goldrush</entry> - <entry>N/A</entry> -</row><row> - <entry>AlphaServer DS20E</entry> - <entry>Goldrack</entry> - <entry>N/A</entry> -</row><row> - <entry>AlphaServer DS20L</entry> - <entry>Shark</entry> - <entry>N/A</entry> -</row><row> - <entry>AlphaServer ES40</entry> - <entry>Clipper</entry> - <entry>N/A</entry> -</row><row> - <entry>DP264</entry> - <entry>DP264</entry> - <entry>N/A</entry> -</row><row> - <entry>SMARTengine 21264 PCI/ISA SBC</entry> - <entry>Eiger</entry> - <entry>N/A</entry> -</row><row> - <entry>UNKNOWN</entry> - <entry>Warhol</entry> - <entry>N/A</entry> -</row><row> - <entry>UNKNOWN</entry> - <entry>Windjammer</entry> - <entry>N/A</entry> -</row><row> - <entry>UP2000</entry> - <entry>Swordfish</entry> - <entry>N/A</entry> -</row><row> - <entry>XP1000</entry> - <entry>Monet/Brisbane</entry> - <entry>N/A</entry> -</row><row> - <entry>XP900</entry> - <entry>Webbrick</entry> - <entry>N/A</entry> -</row> - -<row> - <entry morerows="1">WILDFIRE</entry> - <entry>AlphaServer GS160</entry> - <entry>Wildfire</entry> - <entry>N/A</entry> -</row><row> - <entry>AlphaServer GS320</entry> - <entry>Wildfire</entry> - <entry>N/A</entry> -</row> - -<row> - <entry>XL</entry> - <entry>XL-233...266</entry> - <entry>XL</entry> - <entry>xl</entry> -</row> - -</tbody></tgroup></informaltable> - -<para> - -It is believed that Debian &releasename; supports installing on all -alpha sub-architectures with the exception of the ARC-only Ruffian and -XL sub-architectures and the Titan subarchitecture, which requires a -change to the kernel compile options. - -</para> - </sect2> diff --git a/fi/hardware/supported/arm.xml b/fi/hardware/supported/arm.xml deleted file mode 100644 index e15f41c20..000000000 --- a/fi/hardware/supported/arm.xml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,87 +0,0 @@ -<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> -<!-- original version: 35328 untranslated --> - - - <sect2 arch="arm"><title>CPU, Main Boards, and Video Support</title> - -<para> - -Each distinct ARM architecture requires its own kernel. Because of -this the standard Debian distribution only supports installation on -a number of the most common systems. The Debian userland however may be used by <emphasis>any</emphasis> ARM CPU including xscale. - -</para> - -<para> - -Most ARM CPUs may be run in either endian mode (big or little). However, -the majority of current system implementation uses little-endian mode. -Debian currently only supports little-endian ARM systems. - -</para> - -<para> - -The supported systems are: - -<variablelist> - -<varlistentry> -<term>Netwinder</term> -<listitem><para> - -This is actually the name for the group of machines -based upon the StrongARM 110 CPU and Intel 21285 Northbridge (also known -as Footbridge). It -comprises of machines like: Netwinder (possibly one of the most common ARM -boxes), CATS (also known as the EB110ATX), EBSA 285 and Compaq -personal server (cps, aka skiff). - -</para></listitem> -</varlistentry> - -<varlistentry> -<term>NSLU2</term> -<listitem><para> - -The Linksys NSLU2 (Network Storage Link for USB 2.0 Disk Drives) is a small -device which allows you to easily provide storage via the network. It -comes with an Ethernet connection and two USB ports to which hard drives -can be connected. - -</para></listitem> -</varlistentry> - -<varlistentry> -<term>RiscPC</term> -<listitem><para> - -This machine is the oldest supported hardware: it was released -in 1994. It has RISC OS in ROM, Linux can be booted from that OS using -linloader. The RiscPC has a modular CPU card and typically has a 30MHz -610, 40MHz 710 or 233MHz Strongarm 110 CPU fitted. The mainboard has -integrated IDE, SVGA video, parallel port, single serial port, PS/2 -keyboard and proprietary mouse port. The proprietary module expansion -bus allows for up to eight expansion cards to be fitted depending on -configuration, several of these modules have Linux drivers. - -</para></listitem> -</varlistentry> - -<varlistentry> -<term>Riscstation</term> -<listitem><para> - -This is an inexpensive 56MHz 7500FE based machine with -integrated video, IDE, PS/2 keyboard and mouse and two serial -ports. Its lack of processing power was made up for by its price. It -may be found in two configurations one with RISC OS and one with a -simple bootloader. - -</para></listitem> -</varlistentry> - -</variablelist> - -</para> - </sect2> diff --git a/fi/hardware/supported/hppa.xml b/fi/hardware/supported/hppa.xml deleted file mode 100644 index 6f3c8c8ee..000000000 --- a/fi/hardware/supported/hppa.xml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,17 +0,0 @@ -<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> -<!-- original version: 11648 untranslated --> - - - <sect2 arch="hppa"><title>CPU, Main Boards, and Video Support</title> -<para> - -The are two major support <emphasis>&architecture;</emphasis> flavors: -PA-RISC 1.1 and PA-RISC 2.0. The PA-RISC 1.1 architecture is targeted -at 32-bit processors whereas the 2.0 architecture is targeted to -the 64-bit processors. Some systems are able to run either kernel. -In both cases, the userland is 32-bit. There is the possibility of -a 64-bit userland in the future. - -</para> - </sect2> - diff --git a/fi/hardware/supported/i386.xml b/fi/hardware/supported/i386.xml deleted file mode 100644 index 725a5169b..000000000 --- a/fi/hardware/supported/i386.xml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,37 +0,0 @@ -<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> -<!-- original version: 11648 untranslated --> - - - <sect2 arch="i386"><title>CPU, Main Boards, and Video Support</title> -<para> - -Complete information concerning supported peripherals can be found at -<ulink url="&url-hardware-howto;">Linux Hardware Compatibility HOWTO</ulink>. -This section merely outlines the basics. - -</para> - - <sect3><title>CPU</title> -<para> - -Nearly all x86-based processors are supported; this includes AMD and -VIA (former Cyrix) processors as well. Also the new processors like -Athlon XP and Intel P4 Xeon are supported. However, Linux will -<emphasis>not</emphasis> run on 286 or earlier processors. - -</para> - </sect3> - - <sect3 id="bus"><title>I/O Bus</title> -<para> - -The system bus is the part of the motherboard which allows the CPU to -communicate with peripherals such as storage devices. Your computer -must use the ISA, EISA, PCI, the Microchannel Architecture (MCA, used -in IBM's PS/2 line), or VESA Local Bus (VLB, sometimes called the VL -bus). - -</para> - </sect3> - </sect2> - diff --git a/fi/hardware/supported/ia64.xml b/fi/hardware/supported/ia64.xml deleted file mode 100644 index 0dabd4a41..000000000 --- a/fi/hardware/supported/ia64.xml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,3 +0,0 @@ -<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> -<!-- original version: 11648 untranslated --> - diff --git a/fi/hardware/supported/m68k.xml b/fi/hardware/supported/m68k.xml deleted file mode 100644 index 036cff146..000000000 --- a/fi/hardware/supported/m68k.xml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,39 +0,0 @@ -<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> -<!-- original version: 36732 untranslated --> - - <sect2 arch="m68k"><title>CPU, Main Boards, and Video Support</title> -<para> - -Complete information concerning supported M68000 based -(<emphasis>&architecture;</emphasis>) systems can be found at the -<ulink url="&url-m68k-faq;">Linux/m68k FAQ</ulink>. This section merely -outlines the basics. - -</para><para> - -The &architecture; port of Linux runs on any 680x0 with a PMMU (Paged -Memory Management Unit) and a FPU (floating-point unit). This -includes the 68020 with an external 68851 PMMU, the 68030, and better, -and excludes the <quote>EC</quote> line of 680x0 processors. See the -<ulink url="&url-m68k-faq;">Linux/m68k FAQ</ulink> for complete details. - -</para><para> - -There are four major supported -<emphasis>&architecture;</emphasis> flavors: Amiga, Atari, Macintosh -and VME machines. Amiga and Atari were the first two systems to which -Linux was ported; in keeping, they are also the two most -well-supported Debian ports. The Macintosh line is supported -incompletely, both by Debian and by the Linux kernel; see -<ulink url="&url-m68k-mac;">Linux m68k for Macintosh</ulink> for project -status and supported hardware. The BVM and Motorola single board -VMEbus computers are the most recent addition to the list of machines -supported by Debian. Ports to other &architecture; architectures, -such as the Sun3 architecture and NeXT black box, are underway but not -yet supported by Debian. - -</para> - </sect2> - - - diff --git a/fi/hardware/supported/mips.xml b/fi/hardware/supported/mips.xml deleted file mode 100644 index f07639933..000000000 --- a/fi/hardware/supported/mips.xml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,66 +0,0 @@ -<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> -<!-- original version: 35613 untranslated --> - - - <sect2 arch="mips"><title>CPU, Main Boards, and Video Support</title> -<para> - -Debian on &arch-title; supports the following platforms: - -<itemizedlist> -<listitem><para> - -SGI IP22: this platform includes the SGI machines Indy, Indigo 2 and -Challenge S. Since these machines are very similar, whenever this document -refers to the SGI Indy, the Indigo 2 and Challenge S are meant as well. - -</para></listitem> -<listitem><para> - -SGI IP32: this platform is generally known as SGI O2. - -</para></listitem> -<listitem><para> - -Broadcom BCM91250A (SWARM): this is an ATX form factor evaluation board -from Broadcom based on the dual-core SB1 1250 CPU. - -</para></listitem> -<listitem><para> - -Broadcom BCM91480B (BigSur): this is an ATX form factor evaluation board -from Broadcom based on the quad-core SB1A 1480 CPU. - -</para></listitem> -</itemizedlist> - -Complete information regarding supported mips/mipsel machines can be found -at the <ulink url="&url-linux-mips;">Linux-MIPS homepage</ulink>. In the -following, only the systems supported by the Debian installer will be -covered. If you are looking for support for other subarchitectures, please -contact the <ulink url="&url-list-subscribe;"> -debian-&arch-listname; mailing list</ulink>. - -</para> - - <sect3><title>CPU</title> -<para> - -On SGI IP22, SGI Indy, Indigo 2 and Challenge S with R4000, R4400, R4600 and R5000 -processors are supported by the Debian installation system on big endian -MIPS. On SGI IP32, currently only systems based on the R5000 are supported. -The Broadcom BCM91250A evaluation board comes with an SB1 1250 chip with -two cores which are supported in SMP mode by this installer. Similarly, -the BCM91480B evaluation board contains an SB1A 1480 chip with four cores -which are supported in SMP mode. - -</para><para> - -Some MIPS machines can be operated in both big and little endian mode. For -little endian MIPS, please read the documentation for the mipsel -architecture. - -</para> - </sect3> - </sect2> - diff --git a/fi/hardware/supported/mipsel.xml b/fi/hardware/supported/mipsel.xml deleted file mode 100644 index b5c9dec91..000000000 --- a/fi/hardware/supported/mipsel.xml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,159 +0,0 @@ -<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> -<!-- original version: 36732 untranslated --> - - - <sect2 arch="mipsel"><title>CPU, Main Boards, and Video Support</title> -<para> - -Debian on &arch-title; supports the following platforms: - -<itemizedlist> -<listitem><para> - -DECstation: various models of the DECstation are supported. - -</para></listitem> -<listitem><para> - -Cobalt Microserver: only MIPS based Cobalt machines are covered here. This -includes the Cobalt Qube 2700 (Qube1), RaQ, Qube2 and RaQ2, and the Gateway -Microserver. - -</para></listitem> -<listitem><para> - -Broadcom BCM91250A (SWARM): this is an ATX form factor evaluation board -from Broadcom based on the dual-core SB1 1250 CPU. - -</para></listitem> -<listitem><para> - -Broadcom BCM91480B (BigSur): this is an ATX form factor evaluation board -from Broadcom based on the quad-core SB1A 1480 CPU. - -</para></listitem> -</itemizedlist> - -Complete information regarding supported mips/mipsel machines can be found -at the <ulink url="&url-linux-mips;">Linux-MIPS homepage</ulink>. In the -following, only the systems supported by the Debian installer will be -covered. If you are looking for support for other subarchitectures, please -contact the <ulink url="&url-list-subscribe;"> -debian-&arch-listname; mailing list</ulink>. - -</para> - - <sect3><title>CPU/Machine types</title> - -<para> - -Currently only DECstations with R3000 and R4000/R4400 CPUs are -supported by the Debian installation system on little endian MIPS. -The Debian installation system works on the following machines: - -</para><para> - -<informaltable> -<tgroup cols="4"> -<thead> -<row> - <entry>System Type</entry><entry>CPU</entry><entry>Code-name</entry> - <entry>Debian subarchitecture</entry> -</row> -</thead> - -<tbody> -<row> - <entry>DECstation 5000/1xx</entry> - <entry>R3000</entry> - <entry>3MIN</entry> - <entry>r3k-kn02</entry> -</row><row> - <entry>DECstation 5000/150</entry> - <entry>R4000</entry> - <entry>3MIN</entry> - <entry>r4k-kn04</entry> -</row><row> - <entry>DECstation 5000/200</entry> - <entry>R3000</entry> - <entry>3MAX</entry> - <entry>r3k-kn02</entry> -</row><row> - <entry>DECstation 5000/240</entry> - <entry>R3000</entry> - <entry>3MAX+</entry> - <entry>r3k-kn02</entry> -</row><row> - <entry>DECstation 5000/260</entry> - <entry>R4400</entry> - <entry>3MAX+</entry> - <entry>r4k-kn04</entry> -</row><row> - <entry>Personal DECstation 5000/xx</entry> - <entry>R3000</entry> - <entry>Maxine</entry> - <entry>r3k-kn02</entry> -</row><row> - <entry>Personal DECstation 5000/50</entry> - <entry>R4000</entry> - <entry>Maxine</entry> - <entry>r4k-kn04</entry> -</row> -</tbody></tgroup></informaltable> - -</para><para> - -All Cobalt machines are supported. In the past, only machines with a -serial console were supported (that is, all machines except for the Qube -2700, aka Qube1). However, installations are now also possible through -SSH. - -</para><para> - -The Broadcom BCM91250A evaluation board comes with an SB1 1250 chip with -two cores which are supported in SMP mode by this installer. Similarly, -the BCM91480B evaluation board contains an SB1A 1480 chip with four cores -which are supported in SMP mode. - -</para> - </sect3> - - <sect3><title>Supported console options</title> -<para> - -A serial console is available on all supported DECstations (9600 bps, -8N1). To use the serial console, you have to boot the installer image -with the <literal>console=ttyS</literal><replaceable>x</replaceable> kernel -parameter (with <replaceable>x</replaceable> being the number -of the serial port you have your terminal connected to — usually -<literal>2</literal>, but <literal>0</literal> for the Personal DECstations). -On 3MIN and 3MAX+ (DECstation 5000/1xx, 5000/240 and 5000/260) a local console -is available with the PMAG-BA and the PMAGB-B graphics options. - -</para><para> - -If you have a Linux system to use as serial terminal, an easy way -is to run <command>cu</command><footnote> - -<para> -In Woody this command was part of the <classname>uucp</classname> package, -but in later releases it is available as a separate package. -</para> - -</footnote> on it. Example: - -<informalexample><screen> -$ cu -l /dev/ttyS1 -s 9600 -</screen></informalexample> - -where the option <literal>-l</literal> (line) sets the serial port to use -and <literal>-s</literal> (speed) sets the speed for the connection (9600 -bits per second). - -</para><para> - -Both Cobalt and Broadcom BCM91250A/BCM91480B use 115200 bps. - -</para> - </sect3> - </sect2> diff --git a/fi/hardware/supported/powerpc.xml b/fi/hardware/supported/powerpc.xml deleted file mode 100644 index fbc4b2f8b..000000000 --- a/fi/hardware/supported/powerpc.xml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,381 +0,0 @@ -<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> -<!-- original version: 30269 untranslated --> - - - <sect2 arch="powerpc"><title>CPU, Main Boards, and Video Support</title> -<para> - -There are four major supported <emphasis>&architecture;</emphasis> -subarchitectures: PMac (Power-Macintosh), PReP, APUS (Amiga Power-UP -System), and CHRP machines. Each subarchitecture has its own boot -methods. In addition, there are four different kernel flavours, -supporting different CPU variants. - -</para><para> - -Ports to other <emphasis>&architecture;</emphasis> architectures, such -as the Be-Box and MBX architecture, are underway but not yet supported -by Debian. We may have a 64-bit port in the future. - -</para> - - <sect3><title>Kernel Flavours</title> - -<para> - -There are four flavours of the powerpc kernel in Debian, based on the -CPU type: - -<variablelist> -<varlistentry> -<term>powerpc</term> -<listitem><para> - -Most systems use this kernel flavour, which supports the PowerPC 601, -603, 604, 740, 750, and 7400 processors. All Apple Power Macintosh -systems up to and including the G4 use one of these processors. - -</para></listitem> -</varlistentry> - -<varlistentry> -<term>power3</term> -<listitem><para> - -The POWER3 processor is used in older IBM 64-bit server systems: known -models include the IntelliStation POWER Model 265, the pSeries 610 and -640, and the RS/6000 7044-170, 7043-260, and 7044-270. - -</para></listitem> -</varlistentry> - -<varlistentry> -<term>power4</term> -<listitem><para> - -The POWER4 processor is used in more recent IBM 64-bit server systems: -known models include the pSeries 615, 630, 650, 655, 670, and 690. - -</para><para> - -The Apple G5 is also based on the POWER4 architecture, and uses this -kernel flavour. - -</para></listitem> -</varlistentry> - -<varlistentry> -<term>apus</term> -<listitem><para> - -This kernel flavour supports the Amiga Power-UP System. - -</para></listitem> -</varlistentry> -</variablelist> - -</para> - - </sect3> - - <sect3><title>Power Macintosh (pmac) subarchitecture</title> - -<para> - -Apple (and briefly a few other manufacturers — Power Computing, for -example) makes a series of Macintosh computers based on the PowerPC -processor. For purposes of architecture support, they are categorized -as NuBus, OldWorld PCI, and NewWorld. - -</para><para> - -Macintosh computers using the 680x0 series of processors are not in -the PowerPC family but are instead m68k machines. Those models start -with <quote>Mac II</quote> or have a 3-digit model number such as Centris 650 -or Quadra 950. Apple's pre-iMac PowerPC model numbers have four digits. - -</para><para> - -NuBus systems are not currently supported by debian/powerpc. The -monolithic Linux/PPC kernel architecture does not have support for -these machines; instead, one must use the MkLinux Mach microkernel, -which Debian does not yet support. These include the following: - -<itemizedlist> -<listitem><para> - -Power Macintosh 6100, 7100, 8100 - -</para></listitem> -<listitem><para> - -Performa 5200, 6200, 6300 - -</para></listitem> -<listitem><para> - -Powerbook 1400, 2300, and 5300 - -</para></listitem> -<listitem><para> - -Workgroup Server 6150, 8150, 9150 - -</para></listitem> -</itemizedlist> - -A linux kernel for these machines and limited support is available at -<ulink url="http://nubus-pmac.sourceforge.net/"></ulink> - -</para><para> - -OldWorld systems are most Power Macintoshes with a floppy drive and a -PCI bus. Most 603, 603e, 604, and 604e based Power Macintoshes are -OldWorld machines. The beige colored G3 systems are also OldWorld. - -</para><para> - -The so called NewWorld PowerMacs are any PowerMacs in translucent -colored plastic cases. That includes all iMacs, iBooks, G4 systems, -blue colored G3 systems, and most PowerBooks manufactured in and after -1999. The NewWorld PowerMacs are also known for using the <quote>ROM in -RAM</quote> system for MacOS, and were manufactured from mid-1998 onwards. - -</para><para> - -Specifications for Apple hardware are available at -<ulink url="http://www.info.apple.com/support/applespec.html">AppleSpec</ulink>, -and, for older hardware, -<ulink url="http://www.info.apple.com/support/applespec.legacy/index.html">AppleSpec Legacy</ulink>. - -</para><para> - -<informaltable> -<tgroup cols="3"> -<colspec colname="c1"/> -<colspec colname="c2"/> -<colspec colname="c3"/> -<thead> -<row> - <entry namest="c1" nameend="c2">Model Name/Number</entry> - <entry>Generation</entry> -</row> -</thead> - -<tbody> -<row> - <entry morerows="22">Apple</entry> - <entry>iMac Bondi Blue, 5 Flavors, Slot Loading</entry> - <entry>NewWorld</entry> -</row><row> - <entry>iMac Summer 2000, Early 2001</entry> - <entry>NewWorld</entry> -</row><row> - <entry>iMac G5</entry> - <entry>NewWorld</entry> -</row><row> - <entry>iBook, iBook SE, iBook Dual USB</entry> - <entry>NewWorld</entry> -</row><row> - <entry>iBook2</entry> - <entry>NewWorld</entry> -</row><row> - <entry>iBook G4</entry> - <entry>NewWorld</entry> -</row><row> - <entry>Power Macintosh Blue and White (B&W) G3</entry> - <entry>NewWorld</entry> -</row><row> - <entry>Power Macintosh G4 PCI, AGP, Cube</entry> - <entry>NewWorld</entry> -</row><row> - <entry>Power Macintosh G4 Gigabit Ethernet</entry> - <entry>NewWorld</entry> -</row><row> - <entry>Power Macintosh G4 Digital Audio, Quicksilver</entry> - <entry>NewWorld</entry> -</row><row> - <entry>Power Macintosh G5</entry> - <entry>NewWorld</entry> -</row><row> - <entry>PowerBook G3 FireWire Pismo (2000)</entry> - <entry>NewWorld</entry> -</row><row> - <entry>PowerBook G3 Lombard (1999)</entry> - <entry>NewWorld</entry> -</row><row> - <entry>PowerBook G4 Titanium</entry> - <entry>NewWorld</entry> -</row><row> - <entry>PowerBook G4 Aluminum</entry> - <entry>NewWorld</entry> -</row><row> - <entry>Xserve G5</entry> - <entry>NewWorld</entry> -</row><row> - <entry>Performa 4400, 54xx, 5500</entry> - <entry>OldWorld</entry> -</row><row> - <entry>Performa 6360, 6400, 6500</entry> - <entry>OldWorld</entry> -</row><row> - <entry>Power Macintosh 4400, 5400</entry> - <entry>OldWorld</entry> -</row><row> - <entry>Power Macintosh 7200, 7300, 7500, 7600</entry> - <entry>OldWorld</entry> -</row><row> - <entry>Power Macintosh 8200, 8500, 8600</entry> - <entry>OldWorld</entry> -</row><row> - <entry>Power Macintosh 9500, 9600</entry> - <entry>OldWorld</entry> -</row><row> - <entry>Power Macintosh (Beige) G3 Minitower</entry> - <entry>OldWorld</entry> -</row><row> - <entry>Power Macintosh (Beige) Desktop, All-in-One</entry> - <entry>OldWorld</entry> -</row><row> - <entry>PowerBook 2400, 3400, 3500</entry> - <entry>OldWorld</entry> -</row><row> - <entry>PowerBook G3 Wallstreet (1998)</entry> - <entry>OldWorld</entry> -</row><row> - <entry>Twentieth Anniversary Macintosh</entry> - <entry>OldWorld</entry> -</row><row> - <entry>Workgroup Server 7250, 7350, 8550, 9650, G3</entry> - <entry>OldWorld</entry> -</row> - -<row> - <entry morerows="1">Power Computing</entry> - <entry>PowerBase, PowerTower / Pro, PowerWave</entry> - <entry>OldWorld</entry> -</row><row> - <entry>PowerCenter / Pro, PowerCurve</entry> - <entry>OldWorld</entry> -</row> - -<row> - <entry>UMAX</entry> - <entry>C500, C600, J700, S900</entry> - <entry>OldWorld</entry> -</row> - -<row> - <entry>APS</entry> - <entry>APS Tech M*Power 604e/2000</entry> - <entry>OldWorld</entry> -</row> - -<row> - <entry>Motorola</entry> - <entry>Starmax 3000, 4000, 5000, 5500</entry> - <entry>OldWorld</entry> -</row> -</tbody></tgroup></informaltable> - -</para> - - </sect3> - - <sect3><title>PReP subarchitecture</title> - -<para> - -<informaltable> -<tgroup cols="2"> -<colspec colname="c1"/> -<colspec colname="c2"/> -<thead> -<row> - <entry namest="c1" nameend="c2">Model Name/Number</entry> -</row> -</thead> - -<tbody> -<row> - <entry morerows="4">Motorola</entry> - <entry>Firepower, PowerStack Series E, PowerStack II</entry> -</row><row> - <entry>MPC 7xx, 8xx</entry> -</row><row> - <entry>MTX, MTX+</entry> -</row><row> - <entry>MVME2300(SC)/24xx/26xx/27xx/36xx/46xx</entry> -</row><row> - <entry>MCP(N)750</entry> -</row> - -<row> - <entry morerows="3">IBM RS/6000</entry> - <entry>40P, 43P</entry> -</row><row> - <entry>Power 830/850/860 (6070, 6050)</entry> -</row><row> - <entry>6030, 7025, 7043</entry> -</row><row> - <entry>p640</entry> -</row> -</tbody></tgroup></informaltable> - -</para> - - </sect3> - - <sect3><title>CHRP subarchitecture</title> - -<para> - -<informaltable> -<tgroup cols="2"> -<colspec colname="c1"/> -<colspec colname="c2"/> -<thead> -<row> - <entry namest="c1" nameend="c2">Model Name/Number</entry> -</row> -</thead> - -<tbody> -<row> - <entry>IBM RS/6000</entry> - <entry>B50, 43P-150, 44P</entry> -</row> -<row> - <entry>Genesi</entry> - <entry>Pegasos I, Pegasos II</entry> -</row> -</tbody></tgroup></informaltable> - -</para> - - </sect3> - - <sect3><title>APUS subarchitecture</title> - -<para> - -<informaltable> -<tgroup cols="2"> -<colspec colname="c1"/> -<colspec colname="c2"/> -<thead> -<row> - <entry namest="c1" nameend="c2">Model Name/Number</entry> -</row> -</thead> - -<tbody> -<row> - <entry>Amiga Power-UP Systems (APUS)</entry> - <entry>A1200, A3000, A4000</entry> -</row> -</tbody></tgroup></informaltable> - -</para> - </sect3> - </sect2> diff --git a/fi/hardware/supported/s390.xml b/fi/hardware/supported/s390.xml deleted file mode 100644 index edda7217d..000000000 --- a/fi/hardware/supported/s390.xml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,21 +0,0 @@ -<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> -<!-- original version: 28672 untranslated --> - - - <sect2 arch="s390"><title>S/390 and zSeries machine types</title> -<para> - -Complete information regarding supported S/390 and zSeries machines can -be found in IBM's Redbook -<ulink url="http://www.redbooks.ibm.com/pubs/pdfs/redbooks/sg246264.pdf"> -Linux for IBM eServer zSeries and S/390: Distributions</ulink> in -chapter 2.1 or at the -<ulink url="http://oss.software.ibm.com/developerworks/opensource/linux390/documentation-2.4.shtml">technical details web page</ulink> at -<ulink url="http://oss.software.ibm.com/developerworks/opensource/linux390/index.shtml">developerWorks</ulink>. -In short, G5, Multiprise 3000, G6 and all zSeries are fully supported; -Multiprise 2000, G3 and G4 machines are supported with IEEE floating -point emulation and thus degraded performance. - -</para> - </sect2> - diff --git a/fi/hardware/supported/sparc.xml b/fi/hardware/supported/sparc.xml deleted file mode 100644 index d00c6b252..000000000 --- a/fi/hardware/supported/sparc.xml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,82 +0,0 @@ -<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> -<!-- original version: 28997 untranslated --> - - - <sect2 arch="sparc" id="sparc-cpus"><title>CPU, Main Boards, and Video Support</title> -<para> - -Currently the <emphasis>&architecture;</emphasis> port supports -several types of Sparc systems. The most common identifiers for Sparc -systems are sun4, sun4c, sun4m, sun4d and sun4u. Currently we do not -support very old sun4 hardware. However, the other systems are -supported. Sun4d has been tested the least of these, so expect -possible problems with regard to the kernel stability. Sun4c and -Sun4m, the most common of the older Sparc hardware, includes such -systems as SparcStation 1, 1+, IPC, IPX and the SparcStation LX, 5, -10, and 20, respectively. The UltraSPARC class systems fall under the -sun4u identifier, and are supported using the sun4u set of install -images. Some systems that fall under these supported identifiers are -known to not be supported. Known unsupported systems are the AP1000 -multicomputer and the Tadpole Sparcbook 1. See the -<ulink url="&url-sparc-linux-faq;">Linux for SPARCProcessors FAQ</ulink> -for complete information. - -</para> - - <sect3><title>Memory Configuration</title> -<para> - -Some older Sun workstations, notably the Sun IPX and Sun IPC have -memory banks located at fixed locations in physical memory. Thus if -the banks are not filled gaps will exist in the physical memory space. -The Linux installation requires a contiguous memory block into which -to load the kernel and the initial RAMdisk. If this is not available a -<quote>Data Access Exception</quote> will result. - -</para><para> - -Thus you must configure the memory so that the lowest memory block is -contiguous for at least 8Mb. In the IPX and IPC cited above, memory banks -are mapped in at 16Mb boundaries. In effect this means that you must have -a sufficiently large SIMM in bank zero to hold the kernel and RAMdisk. -In this case 4Mb is <emphasis>not</emphasis> sufficient. - -</para><para> - -Example: -In a Sun IPX you have a 16Mb SIMM and a 4Mb SIMM. There are four -SIMM banks (0,1,2,3). [Bank zero is that furthest away from the SBUS -connectors]. You must therefore install the 16Mb SIMM in bank 0; it is -then recommended to install the 4Mb SIMM in bank 2. - -</para> - </sect3> - - <sect3><title>Graphics Configuration</title> -<para> - -Especially in the case of older Sun workstations, it is very common -for there to be an onboard framebuffer which has been superseded (for -example the bwtwo on a sun IPC), and an SBUS card containing a later -probably accelerated buffer is then plugged in to an SBUS slot. -Under Solaris/SunOS this causes no problems because both cards are -initialized. - -</para><para> - -However with Linux this can cause a problem, in that the boot PROM -monitor may display its output on this additional card; however the -linux kernel boot messages may then be directed to the original on -board framebuffer, leaving <emphasis>no</emphasis> error messages on -the screen, with the machine apparently stuck loading the RAMdisk. - -</para><para> - -To avoid this problem, connect the monitor (if required) to the video -card in the lowest numbered SBUS slot (on motherboard card counts -as below external slots). Alternatively it is possible to use a serial -console. - -</para> - </sect3> - </sect2> diff --git a/fi/howto/.installation-howto.xml-2004-10-07 b/fi/howto/.installation-howto.xml-2004-10-07 deleted file mode 100644 index 7a177fb14..000000000 --- a/fi/howto/.installation-howto.xml-2004-10-07 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,541 +0,0 @@ -<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> -<!-- original version: 22078 untranslated --> - -<appendix id="installation-howto"> -<title>Asennus-Howto</title> - -<para> - -Tämä ohje kuvaa &debian; version &releasename; asennuksen -arkkitehtuurille &arch-title; (<quote>&architecture;</quote>) uudella -asentimella &d-i;. Asennuksen pikainen läpikäynti antanee riittävästi -tietoa useimpiin asennuksiin. Kun lisätieto voi olla hyödyllistä, -annetaan viite englanninkieliseen <link -linkend="debian_installation_guide">&debian; Installation -Guide</link>-käsikirjaan. - -This document describes how to install &debian; &releasename; for -the &arch-title; (<quote>&architecture;</quote>) with the -new &d-i;. It is a quick walkthrough of the installation process -which should contain all the information you will need for most installs. -When more information can be useful, we will link to more detailed -explanations in the <link linkend="debian_installation_guide">&debian; -Installation Guide</link>. - -</para> - - <sect1 id="howto-preliminaries"> - <title>Valmistelevat toimet</title> -<para> - -<phrase condition="unofficial-build"> -Debianin asennin on yhä testausvaiheessa. -</phrase> - -Jos löydät vikoja asennuksen aikana, ole hyvä ja tutustu lukuun <xref -linkend="submit-bug" /> josta löydät ohjeen vioista -ilmoittamiseen. Mikäli kysymyksiisi ei löydy vastausta tästä ohjeesta, -kysy sähköpostilistalla debian-boot (&email-debian-boot-list;) tai -irkissä (kanava #debian-boot IRC-verkossa freenode). - -If you encounter bugs during your install, please refer to -<xref linkend="submit-bug" /> for instructions -on how to report them. If you have questions which cannot be -answered by this document, please direct them to the debian-boot -mailing list (&email-debian-boot-list;) or ask on irc (#debian-boot -on the freenode network). - -</para> - </sect1> - - <sect1 id="howto-getting-images"> - <title>Asentimen käynnistys</title> -<para> - -<phrase condition="unofficial-build"> -CD-otokset löytyvät <ulink url="&url-d-i;">&d-i;</ulink>:in -seittisivustosta. -</phrase> -Debian-cd -työryhmä tarjoaa asenninta käyttävät CD-otokset <ulink -url="&url-debian-cd;">Debianin CD-sivulla</ulink>. -Lisää tietoa romppujen hankinnasta löytyy kohdasta <xref -linkend="official-cdrom" />. - -<phrase condition="unofficial-build"> -For some quick links to CD images, check out the <ulink url="&url-d-i;"> -&d-i; home page</ulink>. -</phrase> -The debian-cd team provides builds of CD images using &d-i; on the -<ulink url="&url-debian-cd;">Debian CD page</ulink>. -For more information on where to get CDs, see <xref linkend="official-cdrom" />. - -</para><para> - -Jotkut asennustavat vaativat muita kuin romppuotoksia. -<phrase condition="unofficial-build"> -<ulink url="&url-d-i;">&d-i; -seittisivusto</ulink> sisältää muiden -otosten osoitteet. -</phrase> -<xref linkend="where-files" /> selvittää miten otokset löytyvät -Debianin peilikopioista. - -Some installation methods require other images than CD images. -<phrase condition="unofficial-build"> -The <ulink url="&url-d-i;">&d-i; home page</ulink> has links to -other images. -</phrase> -<xref linkend="where-files" /> explains how to find images on Debian -mirrors. - -</para><para> - -Seuraavat aliluvut kertovat yksityiskohtaisemmin mitä otosta olisi -missäkin asennustavassa käytettävä. - -The subsections below will give the details about which images you should -get for each possible means of installation. - -</para> - - <sect2 id="howto-getting-images-cdrom"> - <title>Romppu</title> - -<para> - -Netinst romppuotoksia on kaksi, näillä voi asentaa version -&releasename; käyttäen asenninta &d-i;. Nämä otokset on tarkoitettu -käynnistymään rompulta ja noutamaan lisää asennuspaketteja -verkosta. Ne ovat verkkoasennusta varten, tästä nimi -"netinst". Otokset eroavat siten, että täydessä verkkoasennusrompussa -on mukana peruspaketit, jotka on käyntikorttirompun eli "businesscard -CD" kanssa noudettava netistä. Ilman verkkoyhteyttä voi asentaa -viralliselta rompulta. Virallisten romppujen ensimmäinen romppu -riittää asennukseen. - -There are two different netinst CD images which can be used to install -&releasename; with the &d-i;. These images are intended to boot from CD -and install additional packages over a network, hence the name 'netinst'. -The difference between the two images is that on the full netinst image -the base packages are included, whereas you have to download these from -the web if you are using the business card image. If you'd rather, you can -get a full size CD image which will not need the network to install. You -only need the first CD of the set. - -</para><para> - -Nouda mieluisa romppuotos ja kirjoita se romppuaihiolle. -<phrase arch="i386">Käynnistettäessä rompulta voi olla tarpeen muuttaa -BIOS:n asetuksia, kuten neuvotaan luvussa <xref linkend="bios-setup" />. -</phrase> -<phrase arch="powerpc"> -PowerMac käynnistyy rompulta painettaessa näppäintä <keycap>c</keycap> -koneen käynnistyessä. Luvussa <xref linkend="boot-cd" /> on muita -tapoja käynnistää rompulta. -</phrase> - - -Download whichever type you prefer and burn it to a CD. -<phrase arch="i386">To boot the CD, you may need to change your BIOS -configuration, as explained in <xref linkend="bios-setup" />.</phrase> -<phrase arch="powerpc"> -To boot a PowerMac from CD, press the <keycap>c</keycap> key while booting. See -<xref linkend="boot-cd" /> for other ways to boot from CD. -</phrase> - -</para> - </sect2> - - <sect2 condition="supports-floppy-boot" id="howto-getting-images-floppy"> - <title>Levyke</title> -<para> - -Jos käynnistys rompulta ei ole mahdollista, voidaan noudaa -levykeotokset Debianin asentamiseksi. Tarvitaan -<filename>floppy/boot.img</filename>, -<filename>floppy/root.img</filename> ja mahdollisesti yksi -ajurilevykkeistä. - -If you can't boot from CD, you can download floppy images to install -Debian. You need the <filename>floppy/boot.img</filename>, the -<filename>floppy/root.img</filename> and possibly one of the driver disks. - -</para><para> - -Käynnistyslevyke on se johon kirjoitettiin -<filename>boot.img</filename>. Tämä levyke kehoittaa käynnistettäessä -asettamaan toisen levykkeen asemaan — käytä sitä jolle -kirjoitettiin <filename>root.img</filename>. - -The boot floppy is the one with <filename>boot.img</filename> on it. -This floppy, when booted, will prompt you to insert a second floppy — -use the one with <filename>root.img</filename> on it. - -</para><para> - -Jos on tarkoitus asentaa verkosta, tarvitaan useimmiten -<filename>floppy/net-drivers.img</filename>, jossa on lisää ajureita -useille Ethernet-korteille ja tuki PCMCIA:lle. - -If you're planning to install over the network, you will usually need -the <filename>floppy/net-drivers.img</filename>, which contains additional -drivers for many ethernet cards, and support for PCMCIA. - -</para><para> - -Jos käytössä on romppuasema, mutta siltä ei voi käynnistää konetta, -käynnistetään levykkeiltä ja käytetään otosta -<filename>floppy/cd-drivers.img</filename> ajurilevykkeenä jotta -asennusta voidaan jatkaa rompulta. - -If you have a CD, but cannot boot from it, then boot from floppies and use -<filename>floppy/cd-drivers.img</filename> on a driver disk to complete the -install using the CD. - -</para><para> - -Levykkeet ovat hyvin epäluotettavia taltioita, kannattaa varautua -toimimattomiin levykkeisiin (katso <xref linkend="unreliable-floppies" -/>). Jokainen noutamasi <filename>.img</filename>-otos kirjoitetaan -omalle levykkeelleen; komennolla dd laitteelle /dev/fd0 tai muulla -tavoin (katso tarkemmin luvusta <xref linkend="create-floppy" -/>). Levykkeitä on useampi kuin yksi, ne on hyvä merkitä -tunnisteella. - -Floppy disks are one of the least reliable media around, so be prepared for -lots of bad disks (see <xref linkend="unreliable-floppies" />). Each -<filename>.img</filename> file you downloaded goes on a single floppy; -you can use the dd command to write it to /dev/fd0 or some other means -(see <xref linkend="create-floppy" /> for details). -Since you'll have more than one floppy, it's a good idea to label them. - -</para> - </sect2> - - <sect2 condition="bootable-usb" id="howto-getting-images-usb"> - <title>USB-muisti</title> -<para> - -Asennus on mahdollista myös irroitettavalta -USB-muistilaitteelta. Esimerkiksi USB-avaimenperä on kätevä -asennustaltio Debianille, sen voi ottaa mukaansa kaikkialle. - -It's also possible to install from removable USB storage devices. For -example a USB keychain can make a handy Debian install media that you -can take with you anywhere. - -</para><para> - -Helpoin tapa valmistella USB-muisti on noutaa -<filename>hd-media/boot.img.gz</filename>, ja purkaa siitä gunzipillä -128Mt otos. Tämä otos kirjoitetaan sellaisenaan vähintään 128Mt -kokoiselle USB-muistille. Tämä tietenkin tuhoaa USB-muistin entisen -sisällön. Sitten USB-muisti liitetään, siinä on nyt -FAT-tiedostojärjestelmä. Seuraavaksi noudetaan Debianin verkkoasennus -romppuotos ja kopioidaan otos USB-muistille; tiedostonimellä ei ole -väliä kunhan sen loppuosa on ".iso". - -The easiest way to prepare your USB memory stick is to download -<filename>hd-media/boot.img.gz</filename>, and use gunzip to extract the 128 MB -image from that file. Write this image directly to your memory stick, which -must be at least 128 mb in size. Of course this will destroy anything already -on the memory stick. Then mount the memory stick, which will now have a FAT -filesystem on it. Next, download a Debian netinst CD image, and copy that file -to the memory stick; any filename is ok as long as it ends in ".iso". - -</para><para> - -On muita joustavampia tapoja valmistella USB-muisti debian-asentimen -käyttöön. Pienempienkin muistien käyttö on mahdollista. Lisätietoja -löytyy luvusta <xref linkend="boot-usb-files" />. - -There are other, more flexible ways to set up a memory stick to use the -debian-installer, and it's possible to get it to work with smaller memory -sticks. For details, see <xref linkend="boot-usb-files" />. - -</para><para arch="i386"> - -Jotkut BIOSit osaavat käynnistää USB-muistilta, jotkut -eivät. BIOS-asetukset on ehkä tehtävä käynnistymään laitteelta -"removable drive" tai "USB-ZIP" jotta USB-muistilta voidaan -käynnistää. Jos käynnistys USB-muistilta ei onnistu, voidaan -käynnistää levykkeltä ja käyttää USB-muistia asennuksen -loppuosaan. Hyödyllisiä vinkkejä ja tarkempia yksityiskohtia löytyy -luvusta <xref linkend="usb-boot" />. - -Some BIOSes can boot USB storage directly, and some cannot. You may need to -configure your BIOS to boot from a "removable drive" or even a "USB-ZIP" to -get it to boot from the USB device. If it doesn't, you can boot from one -floppy and use the USB stick for the rest of the install. For helpful hints -and details, see <xref linkend="usb-boot" />. - -</para> - </sect2> - - <sect2 id="howto-getting-images-netboot"> - <title>Verkkokäynnistys</title> -<para> - -&d-i; on mahdollista käynnistää kokonaan verkosta. Erilaiset -verkkokäynnistystavat riippuvat arkkitehtuurista ja -verkkokäynnistyksen asetuksista. Hakemiston -<filename>netboot/</filename> tiedostoja voidaan käyttää &d-i;:in -verkkokäynnistykseen. - -It's also possible to boot &d-i; completely from the net. The -various methods to netboot depend on your architecture and netboot setup. -The files in <filename>netboot/</filename> can be used to netboot &d-i;. - -</para><para arch="i386"> - -Helpoin tapa lienee PXE-verkkokäynnistys. Pura tiedosto -<filename>netboot/pxeboot.tar.gz</filename> hakemistoon -<filename>/var/lib/tftpboot</filename> tai muuhun tftp-palvelimen -käyttämään hakemistoon. Tee DHCP-palvelimen asetukset antamaan -tiedostonimi <filename>/pxelinux.0</filename> asiakaskoneille, ja -pienellä tuurilla kaikki toimii. Yksityiskohtaisemmat ohjeet löytyvät -luvusta <xref linkend="install-tftp" />. - -The easiest thing to set up is probably PXE netbooting. Untar the -file <filename>netboot/pxeboot.tar.gz</filename> into -<filename>/var/lib/tftpboot</filename> or -wherever is appropriate for your tftp server. Set up your DHCP server to pass -filename <filename>/pxelinux.0</filename> to clients, and it with luck -everything will just work. -For detailed instructions, see <xref linkend="install-tftp" /> - -</para> - </sect2> - - <sect2 id="howto-getting-images-hard-disk"> - <title>Käynnistys kiintolevyltä</title> -<para> - -Asennin on mahdollista käynnistää käyttämättä irrotettavia -muistilaitteita koneen kiintolevyltä, jossa voi olla joku muu -käyttöjärjestelmä. Nouda <filename>hd-media/initrd.gz</filename>, -<filename>hd-media/vmlinuz</filename> ja Debian romppuotos kiintolevyn -juurihakemistoon. Varmistu romppuotoksen tiedostonimen päättyvän -".iso". Nyt pitää vain käynnistää linux initrd:llä. -<phrase arch="i386"> -Luku <xref linkend="boot-initrd" /> selvittää yhden tavan. -</phrase> - -It's possible to boot the installer using no removable media, but just an -existing hard disk, which can have a different OS on it. Download -<filename>hd-media/initrd.gz</filename>, <filename>hd-media/vmlinuz</filename>, -and a Debian CD image to the top-level directory of the hard disk. Make sure -that the CD image has a filename ending in ".iso". Now it's just a matter of -booting linux with the initrd. -<phrase arch="i386"> -<xref linkend="boot-initrd" /> explains one way to do it. -</phrase> - -</para> - </sect2> - </sect1> - - <sect1 id="howto-installation"> -<title>Asennus</title> -<para> - -Kun asennin käynnistyy näkyy asentimen aloituskuva. Käynnistys -tapahtuu näppäilemällä &enterkey;. Ohjeista selviää muut -käynnistystavat (katso luku <xref linkend="boot-parms" />). -<phrase arch="i386"> -Ytimen version 2.6 saa kirjoittamalla <userinput>linux26</userinput> -<prompt>boot:</prompt> -kehoitteeseen. -<footnote><para> - -Ytimen versio 2.6 on käytettävissä useimmissa käynnistystavoissa, -mutta ei käynnistettäessä levykkeeltä. - -</para></footnote> -</phrase> - -Once the installer starts, you will be greeted with an initial screen. Press -&enterkey; to boot, or read the instructions for other boot -methods and parameters (see <xref linkend="boot-parms" />). -<phrase arch="i386"> -If you want a 2.6 kernel, type <userinput>linux26</userinput> at the -<prompt>boot:</prompt> prompt. -<footnote><para> - -The 2.6 kernel is available for most boot methods, but not when booting from -a floppy. - -</para></footnote> -</phrase> - -</para><para> - -Hetken päästä valitaan käytettävä kieli. Nuolinäppäimillä siirrytään -kielen kohdalle ja jatketaan näppäilemällä &enterkey;. Seuraavaksi -valitaan maa niiden joukosta joissa valittua kieltä puhutaan. Jos -haluttu maa ei ole lyhyessä listassa, käytettävissä on myös maailman -kaikkien maiden lista. - -After a while you will be asked to select your language. Use the arrow keys -to pick a language and press &enterkey; to continue. Next you'll be asked to -select your country, with the choices including countries where your -language is spoken. If it's not on the short list, a list of all the -countries in the world is available. - -</para><para> - -Asennin ehkä kysyy vahvistusta käytettävälle -näppäinasettelulle. Käytä oletusarvoa paitsi jos tiedät paremman -vaihtoehdon. - -You may be asked to confirm your keyboard layout. Choose the default unless -you know better. - -</para><para> - -Nyt voit huilata sillä välin kun Debianin asennin tunnistaa -laitteistoa ja lataa loput osansa rompulta, levykkeeltä, USB-muistilta -jne. - -Now sit back while debian-installer detects some of your hardware, and -loads the rest of itself from CD, floppy, USB, etc. - -</para><para> - -Seuraavaksi asennin tunnistaa verkkolaitteita ja yrittää tehdä -verkkoasetukset DHCP:llä. Jos verkkoyhteyttä ei ole tai jos DHCP:tä ei -ole, verkkoasetukset voi tehdä itse. - -Next the installer will try to detect your network hardware and set up -networking by DHCP. If you are not on a network or do not have DHCP, you -will be given the opportunity to configure the network manually. - -</para><para> - -Nyt tehdään levyosiot. Ensin on mahdollista tehdä levyosiot -automaattisesti käyttäen koko levyä tai levyn vapaata tilaa. Tätä -suositellaan uusille käyttäjille tai kiireisille asentajille. Jos et -halua automaattista osioiden tekoa, valikosta löytyy mahdollisuus -tehdä osiot itse. - -Now it is time to partition your disks. First you will be given the -opportunity to automatically partition either an entire drive, or free -space on a drive. This is recommended for new users or anyone in a hurry, -but if you do not want to autopartition, choose manual from the menu. - -</para><para> - -Seuraavassa ruudussa näkyy osiotaulu, miten osiot alustetaan ja -liitoskohdat. Osiota muokataan tai poistetaan valitsemalla se. Jos -osiot tehtiin automaattisesti, valikossa on "Lopeta osioiden teko" -joka valitsemalla otetaan tehdyt osiot käyttöön. Muista varata ainakin -yksi osio sivutustilaksi ja liittää yksi osio juuriosioksi -<filename>/</filename>. Lisätietoja <xref -linkend="partitioning" />. - -On the next screen you will see your partition table, how the partitions -will be formatted, and where they will be mounted. Select a partition to -modify or delete it. If you did automatic partitioning, you should just be -able to choose "Finished partitioning" from the menu to use what it set up. -Remember to assign at least one partition for swap space and to mount a -partition on <filename>/</filename>. <xref linkend="partitioning" /> has more information -about partitioning. - -</para><para> - -Nyt &d-i; alustaa osiot ja aloittaa peruskokoonpanon asennuksen. Tämä -saattaa viedä tovin. Sen jälkeen asennetaan ydin. - -Now &d-i; formats your partitions and starts to install the base system, -which can take a while. That is followed by installing a kernel. - -</para><para> - -Viimeinen vaihe on alkukäynnistysohjelman asentaminen. Jos asennin -havaitsee muita käyttöjärjestelmiä tietokoneella, niistä ilmoitetaan -ja lisätään käynnistysvalikkoon. -<phrase arch="i386">Oletusarvona GRUB asennetaan ensimmäisen -kiintolevyn pääkäynnistyslohkoon, joka yleensä on hyvä valinta. Tämä -valinta voidaan ohittaa ja tehdä asennus muualle. -</phrase> - -The last step is to install a boot loader. If the installer detects -other operating systems on your computer, it will add them to the boot menu -and let you know. -<phrase arch="i386">By default GRUB will be installed to the master boot -record of the first harddrive, which is generally a good choice. You'll be -given the opportunity to override that choice and install it elsewhere. -</phrase> - -</para><para> - -&d-i; ilmoittaa nyt asennuksen päättyneen. Poista romppu tai muu -käynnistyksessä käytetty taltio ja käynnistä kone näppäilemällä -&enterkey;. Käynnistyä pitäisi asennuksen toinen vaihe, jota kuvataan -luvusta <xref linkend="boot-new" />. - -&d-i; will now tell you that the installation has -finished. Remove the cdrom or other boot media and hit &enterkey; -to reboot your machine. It should boot up into the next stage of the install -process, which is explained in <xref linkend="boot-new" />. - -</para><para> - -Lisätietoja asennuksesta löytyy luvusta <xref linkend="d-i-intro" />. - -If you need more information on the install process, see -<xref linkend="d-i-intro" />. - -</para> - </sect1> - - <sect1 id="howto-installation-report"> - <title>Lähetä asennusraportti</title> -<para> - -Jos &d-i; asensi onnistuneesti, pyytäisimme käyttämään vähän aikaasi -asennusraportin lähettämiseen. Raportin pohja on tiedostossa -<filename>install-report.template</filename> hakemistossa -<filename>/root</filename> juuri asennetussa järjestelmässä. Täytä -raportti ja lähetä se vikailmoitukseksi paketille -<classname>installation-reports</classname>, kuten neuvotaan luvussa -<xref linkend="submit-bug" />. - -If you successfully managed an installation with &d-i;, -please take time to provide us with a report. There is a template -named <filename>install-report.template</filename> in the -<filename>/root</filename> directory of a freshly -installed system. Please fill it out and file it as a bug against the -package <classname>installation-reports</classname>, as explained in -<xref linkend="submit-bug" />. - -</para><para> - -Jos asennus ei edennyt peruskokoonpanon asetuksien tekoon asti tai -ilmeni muuta vikaa, on luultavasti löytynyt vika asentimesta. Jotta -asenninta saataisiin paranneltua on meidän tiedettävä -vioista. Pyytäisimme hieman aikaasi raportin lähettämiseen. Voit -käyttää asennusraporttia vikailmoituksiin. Jos asennus ei onnistunut -lainkaan, raportin pohja on saatavilla luvussa <xref -linkend="problem-report" />. - -If you did not reach base-config or ran into other trouble, you -probably found a bug in debian-installer. To improve the installer it -is necessary that we know about them, so please take the time to -report them. You can use an installation report to report problems; -if the install completely fails, see <xref linkend="problem-report" />. - -</para> - </sect1> - - <sect1 id="howto-installation-finally"> - <title>Ja lopuksi..</title> -<para> - -Toivomme Debianin asennuksen sujuvan mukavasti ja Debianin olevan -hyödyllinen. Kannattaa lukea <xref linkend="post-install" />. - -We hope that your Debian installation is pleasant and that you find Debian -useful. You might want to read <xref linkend="post-install" />. - -</para> - </sect1> -</appendix> diff --git a/fi/howto/.installation-howto.xml-original b/fi/howto/.installation-howto.xml-original deleted file mode 100644 index eef15eba7..000000000 --- a/fi/howto/.installation-howto.xml-original +++ /dev/null @@ -1,325 +0,0 @@ -<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> -<!-- original version: 22078 untranslated --> - -<appendix id="installation-howto"> -<title>Installation Howto</title> - -<para> - -This document describes how to install &debian; &releasename; for -the &arch-title; (<quote>&architecture;</quote>) with the -new &d-i;. It is a quick walkthrough of the installation process -which should contain all the information you will need for most installs. -When more information can be useful, we will link to more detailed -explanations in the <link linkend="debian_installation_guide">&debian; -Installation Guide</link>. - -</para> - - <sect1 id="howto-preliminaries"> - <title>Preliminaries</title> -<para> - -<phrase condition="unofficial-build"> -The debian-installer is still in a beta state. -</phrase> -If you encounter bugs during your install, please refer to -<xref linkend="submit-bug" /> for instructions -on how to report them. If you have questions which cannot be -answered by this document, please direct them to the debian-boot -mailing list (&email-debian-boot-list;) or ask on irc (#debian-boot -on the freenode network). - -</para> - </sect1> - - <sect1 id="howto-getting-images"> - <title>Booting the installer</title> -<para> - -<phrase condition="unofficial-build"> -For some quick links to CD images, check out the <ulink url="&url-d-i;"> -&d-i; home page</ulink>. -</phrase> -The debian-cd team provides builds of CD images using &d-i; on the -<ulink url="&url-debian-cd;">Debian CD page</ulink>. -For more information on where to get CDs, see <xref linkend="official-cdrom" />. - -</para><para> - -Some installation methods require other images than CD images. -<phrase condition="unofficial-build"> -The <ulink url="&url-d-i;">&d-i; home page</ulink> has links to -other images. -</phrase> -<xref linkend="where-files" /> explains how to find images on Debian -mirrors. - -</para><para> - -The subsections below will give the details about which images you should -get for each possible means of installation. - -</para> - - <sect2 id="howto-getting-images-cdrom"> - <title>CDROM</title> - -<para> - -There are two different netinst CD images which can be used to install -&releasename; with the &d-i;. These images are intended to boot from CD -and install additional packages over a network, hence the name 'netinst'. -The difference between the two images is that on the full netinst image -the base packages are included, whereas you have to download these from -the web if you are using the business card image. If you'd rather, you can -get a full size CD image which will not need the network to install. You -only need the first CD of the set. - -</para><para> - -Download whichever type you prefer and burn it to a CD. -<phrase arch="i386">To boot the CD, you may need to change your BIOS -configuration, as explained in <xref linkend="bios-setup" />.</phrase> -<phrase arch="powerpc"> -To boot a PowerMac from CD, press the <keycap>c</keycap> key while booting. See -<xref linkend="boot-cd" /> for other ways to boot from CD. -</phrase> - -</para> - </sect2> - - <sect2 condition="supports-floppy-boot" id="howto-getting-images-floppy"> - <title>floppy</title> -<para> - -If you can't boot from CD, you can download floppy images to install -Debian. You need the <filename>floppy/boot.img</filename>, the -<filename>floppy/root.img</filename> and possibly one of the driver disks. - -</para><para> - -The boot floppy is the one with <filename>boot.img</filename> on it. -This floppy, when booted, will prompt you to insert a second floppy — -use the one with <filename>root.img</filename> on it. - -</para><para> - -If you're planning to install over the network, you will usually need -the <filename>floppy/net-drivers.img</filename>, which contains additional -drivers for many ethernet cards, and support for PCMCIA. - -</para><para> - -If you have a CD, but cannot boot from it, then boot from floppies and use -<filename>floppy/cd-drivers.img</filename> on a driver disk to complete the -install using the CD. - -</para><para> - -Floppy disks are one of the least reliable media around, so be prepared for -lots of bad disks (see <xref linkend="unreliable-floppies" />). Each -<filename>.img</filename> file you downloaded goes on a single floppy; -you can use the dd command to write it to /dev/fd0 or some other means -(see <xref linkend="create-floppy" /> for details). -Since you'll have more than one floppy, it's a good idea to label them. - -</para> - </sect2> - - <sect2 condition="bootable-usb" id="howto-getting-images-usb"> - <title>USB memory stick</title> -<para> - -It's also possible to install from removable USB storage devices. For -example a USB keychain can make a handy Debian install media that you -can take with you anywhere. - -</para><para> - -The easiest way to prepare your USB memory stick is to download -<filename>hd-media/boot.img.gz</filename>, and use gunzip to extract the 128 MB -image from that file. Write this image directly to your memory stick, which -must be at least 128 mb in size. Of course this will destroy anything already -on the memory stick. Then mount the memory stick, which will now have a FAT -filesystem on it. Next, download a Debian netinst CD image, and copy that file -to the memory stick; any filename is ok as long as it ends in ".iso". - -</para><para> - -There are other, more flexible ways to set up a memory stick to use the -debian-installer, and it's possible to get it to work with smaller memory -sticks. For details, see <xref linkend="boot-usb-files" />. - -</para><para arch="i386"> - -Some BIOSes can boot USB storage directly, and some cannot. You may need to -configure your BIOS to boot from a "removable drive" or even a "USB-ZIP" to -get it to boot from the USB device. If it doesn't, you can boot from one -floppy and use the USB stick for the rest of the install. For helpful hints -and details, see <xref linkend="usb-boot" />. - -</para> - </sect2> - - <sect2 id="howto-getting-images-netboot"> - <title>Booting from network</title> -<para> - -It's also possible to boot &d-i; completely from the net. The -various methods to netboot depend on your architecture and netboot setup. -The files in <filename>netboot/</filename> can be used to netboot &d-i;. - -</para><para arch="i386"> - -The easiest thing to set up is probably PXE netbooting. Untar the -file <filename>netboot/pxeboot.tar.gz</filename> into -<filename>/var/lib/tftpboot</filename> or -wherever is appropriate for your tftp server. Set up your DHCP server to pass -filename <filename>/pxelinux.0</filename> to clients, and it with luck -everything will just work. -For detailed instructions, see <xref linkend="install-tftp" /> - -</para> - </sect2> - - <sect2 id="howto-getting-images-hard-disk"> - <title>Booting from hard disk</title> -<para> - -It's possible to boot the installer using no removable media, but just an -existing hard disk, which can have a different OS on it. Download -<filename>hd-media/initrd.gz</filename>, <filename>hd-media/vmlinuz</filename>, -and a Debian CD image to the top-level directory of the hard disk. Make sure -that the CD image has a filename ending in ".iso". Now it's just a matter of -booting linux with the initrd. -<phrase arch="i386"> -<xref linkend="boot-initrd" /> explains one way to do it. -</phrase> - -</para> - </sect2> - </sect1> - - <sect1 id="howto-installation"> -<title>Installation</title> -<para> - -Once the installer starts, you will be greeted with an initial screen. Press -&enterkey; to boot, or read the instructions for other boot -methods and parameters (see <xref linkend="boot-parms" />). -<phrase arch="i386"> -If you want a 2.6 kernel, type <userinput>linux26</userinput> at the -<prompt>boot:</prompt> prompt. -<footnote><para> - -The 2.6 kernel is available for most boot methods, but not when booting from -a floppy. - -</para></footnote> -</phrase> - -</para><para> - -After a while you will be asked to select your language. Use the arrow keys -to pick a language and press &enterkey; to continue. Next you'll be asked to -select your country, with the choices including countries where your -language is spoken. If it's not on the short list, a list of all the -countries in the world is available. - -</para><para> - -You may be asked to confirm your keyboard layout. Choose the default unless -you know better. - -</para><para> - -Now sit back while debian-installer detects some of your hardware, and -loads the rest of itself from CD, floppy, USB, etc. - -</para><para> - -Next the installer will try to detect your network hardware and set up -networking by DHCP. If you are not on a network or do not have DHCP, you -will be given the opportunity to configure the network manually. - -</para><para> - -Now it is time to partition your disks. First you will be given the -opportunity to automatically partition either an entire drive, or free -space on a drive. This is recommended for new users or anyone in a hurry, -but if you do not want to autopartition, choose manual from the menu. - -</para><para> - -On the next screen you will see your partition table, how the partitions -will be formatted, and where they will be mounted. Select a partition to -modify or delete it. If you did automatic partitioning, you should just be -able to choose "Finished partitioning" from the menu to use what it set up. -Remember to assign at least one partition for swap space and to mount a -partition on <filename>/</filename>. <xref linkend="partitioning" /> has more information -about partitioning. - -</para><para> - -Now &d-i; formats your partitions and starts to install the base system, -which can take a while. That is followed by installing a kernel. - -</para><para> - -The last step is to install a boot loader. If the installer detects -other operating systems on your computer, it will add them to the boot menu -and let you know. -<phrase arch="i386">By default GRUB will be installed to the master boot -record of the first harddrive, which is generally a good choice. You'll be -given the opportunity to override that choice and install it elsewhere. -</phrase> - -</para><para> - -&d-i; will now tell you that the installation has -finished. Remove the cdrom or other boot media and hit &enterkey; -to reboot your machine. It should boot up into the next stage of the install -process, which is explained in <xref linkend="boot-new" />. - -</para><para> - -If you need more information on the install process, see -<xref linkend="d-i-intro" />. - -</para> - </sect1> - - <sect1 id="howto-installation-report"> - <title>Send us an installation report</title> -<para> - -If you successfully managed an installation with &d-i;, -please take time to provide us with a report. There is a template -named <filename>install-report.template</filename> in the -<filename>/root</filename> directory of a freshly -installed system. Please fill it out and file it as a bug against the -package <classname>installation-reports</classname>, as explained in -<xref linkend="submit-bug" />. - -</para><para> - -If you did not reach base-config or ran into other trouble, you -probably found a bug in debian-installer. To improve the installer it -is necessary that we know about them, so please take the time to -report them. You can use an installation report to report problems; -if the install completely fails, see <xref linkend="problem-report" />. - -</para> - </sect1> - - <sect1 id="howto-installation-finally"> - <title>And finally..</title> -<para> - -We hope that your Debian installation is pleasant and that you find Debian -useful. You might want to read <xref linkend="post-install" />. - -</para> - </sect1> -</appendix> diff --git a/fi/howto/installation-howto.xml b/fi/howto/installation-howto.xml deleted file mode 100644 index dc55e04d6..000000000 --- a/fi/howto/installation-howto.xml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,355 +0,0 @@ -<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> -<!-- original version: 36744 --> - -<appendix id="installation-howto"> -<title>Asennus-Howto</title> - -<para> - -Tämä ohje kuvaa &debian; version &releasename; asennuksen -arkkitehtuurille &arch-title; (<quote>&architecture;</quote>) uudella -asentimella &d-i;. Asennuksen pikainen läpikäynti antanee riittävästi -tietoa useimpiin asennuksiin. Kun lisätieto voi olla hyödyllistä, -annetaan viite englanninkieliseen <link -linkend="debian_installation_guide">&debian; Installation -Guide</link>-käsikirjaan. - -</para> - - <sect1 id="howto-preliminaries"> - <title>Valmistelevat toimet</title> -<para> - -<phrase condition="unofficial-build"> -Debianin asennin on yhä testausvaiheessa. -</phrase> - -Jos löydät vikoja asennuksen aikana, ole hyvä ja tutustu lukuun <xref -linkend="submit-bug" /> josta löydät ohjeen vioista -ilmoittamiseen. Mikäli kysymyksiisi ei löydy vastausta tästä ohjeesta, -kysy sähköpostilistalla debian-boot (&email-debian-boot-list;) tai -irkissä (kanava #debian-boot IRC-verkossa freenode). - -</para> - </sect1> - - <sect1 id="howto-getting-images"> - <title>Asentimen käynnistys</title> -<para> - -<phrase condition="unofficial-build"> -CD-otokset löytyvät <ulink url="&url-d-i;">&d-i;</ulink>:in -seittisivustosta. -</phrase> -Debian-cd -työryhmä tarjoaa asenninta käyttävät CD-otokset <ulink -url="&url-debian-cd;">Debianin CD-sivulla</ulink>. -Lisää tietoa romppujen hankinnasta löytyy kohdasta <xref -linkend="official-cdrom" />. - -</para><para> - -Jotkut asennustavat vaativat muita kuin romppuotoksia. -<phrase condition="unofficial-build"> -<ulink url="&url-d-i;">&d-i; -seittisivusto</ulink> sisältää muiden -otosten osoitteet. -</phrase> -<xref linkend="where-files" /> selvittää miten otokset löytyvät -Debianin peilikopioista. - -</para><para> - -Seuraavat aliluvut kertovat yksityiskohtaisemmin mitä otosta olisi -missäkin asennustavassa käytettävä. - -</para> - - <sect2 id="howto-getting-images-cdrom"> - <title>Romppu</title> - -<para> - -Netinst romppuotoksia on kaksi, näillä voi asentaa version -&releasename; käyttäen asenninta &d-i;. Nämä otokset on tarkoitettu -käynnistymään rompulta ja noutamaan lisää asennuspaketteja -verkosta. Ne ovat verkkoasennusta varten, tästä nimi -"netinst". Otokset eroavat siten, että täydessä verkkoasennusrompussa -on mukana peruspaketit, jotka on käyntikorttirompun eli "businesscard -CD" kanssa noudettava netistä. Ilman verkkoyhteyttä voi asentaa -viralliselta rompulta. Virallisten romppujen ensimmäinen romppu -riittää asennukseen. - -</para><para> - -Nouda mieluisa romppuotos ja kirjoita se romppuaihiolle. -<phrase arch="i386">Käynnistettäessä rompulta voi olla tarpeen muuttaa -BIOS:n asetuksia, kuten neuvotaan luvussa <xref linkend="bios-setup" />. -</phrase> -<phrase arch="powerpc"> -PowerMac käynnistyy rompulta painettaessa näppäintä <keycap>c</keycap> -koneen käynnistyessä. Luvussa <xref linkend="boot-cd" /> on muita -tapoja käynnistää rompulta. -</phrase> - -</para> - </sect2> - - <sect2 condition="supports-floppy-boot" id="howto-getting-images-floppy"> - <title>Levyke</title> -<para> - -Jos käynnistys rompulta ei ole mahdollista, voidaan noudaa -levykeotokset Debianin asentamiseksi. Tarvitaan -<filename>floppy/boot.img</filename>, -<filename>floppy/root.img</filename> ja mahdollisesti yksi -ajurilevykkeistä. - -</para><para> - -Käynnistyslevyke on se johon kirjoitettiin -<filename>boot.img</filename>. Tämä levyke kehoittaa käynnistettäessä -asettamaan toisen levykkeen asemaan — käytä sitä jolle -kirjoitettiin <filename>root.img</filename>. - -</para><para> - -Jos on tarkoitus asentaa verkosta, tarvitaan useimmiten -<filename>floppy/net-drivers.img</filename>, jossa on lisää ajureita -useille Ethernet-korteille ja tuki PCMCIA:lle. - -</para><para> - -Jos käytössä on romppuasema, mutta siltä ei voi käynnistää konetta, -käynnistetään levykkeiltä ja käytetään otosta -<filename>floppy/cd-drivers.img</filename> ajurilevykkeenä jotta -asennusta voidaan jatkaa rompulta. - -</para><para> - -Levykkeet ovat hyvin epäluotettavia taltioita, kannattaa varautua -toimimattomiin levykkeisiin (katso <xref linkend="unreliable-floppies" -/>). Jokainen noutamasi <filename>.img</filename>-otos kirjoitetaan -omalle levykkeelleen; komennolla dd laitteelle /dev/fd0 tai muulla -tavoin (katso tarkemmin luvusta <xref linkend="create-floppy" -/>). Levykkeitä on useampi kuin yksi, ne on hyvä merkitä -tunnisteella. - -</para> - </sect2> - - <sect2 condition="bootable-usb" id="howto-getting-images-usb"> - <title>USB-muisti</title> -<para> - -Asennus on mahdollista myös irrotettavalta -USB-muistilaitteelta. Esimerkiksi USB-avaimenperä on kätevä -asennustaltio Debianille, sen voi ottaa mukaansa kaikkialle. - -</para><para> - -Helpoin tapa valmistella USB-muisti on noutaa -<filename>hd-media/boot.img.gz</filename>, ja purkaa siitä gunzipillä -128Mt otos. Tämä otos kirjoitetaan sellaisenaan vähintään 128Mt -kokoiselle USB-muistille. Tämä tietenkin tuhoaa USB-muistin entisen -sisällön. Sitten USB-muisti liitetään, siinä on nyt -FAT-tiedostojärjestelmä. Seuraavaksi noudetaan Debianin verkkoasennus -romppuotos ja kopioidaan otos USB-muistille; tiedostonimellä ei ole -väliä kunhan sen loppuosa on <literal>.iso</literal>. - -</para><para> - -On muita joustavampia tapoja valmistella USB-muisti debian-asentimen -käyttöön. Pienempienkin muistien käyttö on mahdollista. Lisätietoja -löytyy luvusta <xref linkend="boot-usb-files" />. - -</para><para arch="i386"> - -Jotkut BIOSit osaavat käynnistää USB-muistilta, jotkut -eivät. BIOS-asetukset on ehkä tehtävä käynnistymään laitteelta -<quote>removable drive</quote> tai <quote>USB-ZIP</quote> jotta -USB-muistilta voidaan käynnistää. Jos käynnistys USB-muistilta ei -onnistu, voidaan käynnistää levykkeeltä ja käyttää USB-muistia -asennuksen loppuosaan. Hyödyllisiä vinkkejä ja tarkempia yksityiskohtia -löytyy luvusta <xref linkend="usb-boot" />. - -</para><para arch="powerpc"> - -Macintosh-järjestelmien käynnistäminen USB-muistilaitteelta edellyttää -Open Firmwaren käytön osaamista. Luvusta <xref linkend="usb-boot" /> -löytyy ohjeita. - -</para> - </sect2> - - <sect2 id="howto-getting-images-netboot"> - <title>Verkkokäynnistys</title> -<para> - -&d-i; on mahdollista käynnistää kokonaan verkosta. Erilaiset -verkkokäynnistystavat riippuvat arkkitehtuurista ja -verkkokäynnistyksen asetuksista. Hakemiston -<filename>netboot/</filename> tiedostoja voidaan käyttää &d-i;:in -verkkokäynnistykseen. - -</para><para arch="i386"> - -Helpoin tapa lienee PXE-verkkokäynnistys. Pura tiedosto -<filename>netboot/pxeboot.tar.gz</filename> hakemistoon -<filename>/var/lib/tftpboot</filename> tai muuhun tftp-palvelimen -käyttämään hakemistoon. Tee DHCP-palvelimen asetukset antamaan -tiedostonimi <filename>/pxelinux.0</filename> asiakaskoneille, ja -pienellä tuurilla kaikki toimii. Yksityiskohtaisemmat ohjeet löytyvät -luvusta <xref linkend="install-tftp" />. - -</para> - </sect2> - - <sect2 id="howto-getting-images-hard-disk"> - <title>Käynnistys kiintolevyltä</title> -<para> - -Asennin on mahdollista käynnistää käyttämättä irrotettavia -muistilaitteita koneen kiintolevyltä, jossa voi olla joku muu -käyttöjärjestelmä. Nouda <filename>hd-media/initrd.gz</filename>, -<filename>hd-media/vmlinuz</filename> ja Debian romppuotos kiintolevyn -juurihakemistoon. Varmistu romppuotoksen tiedostonimen päättyvän -<literal>.iso</literal>. Nyt pitää vain käynnistää linux initrd:llä. -<phrase arch="i386"> -Luku <xref linkend="boot-initrd" /> selvittää yhden tavan. -</phrase> - -</para> - </sect2> - </sect1> - - <sect1 id="howto-installation"> -<title>Asennus</title> -<para> - -Kun asennin käynnistyy näkyy asentimen aloituskuva. Käynnistys -tapahtuu näppäilemällä &enterkey;. Ohjeista selviävät muut -käynnistystavat (katso luku <xref linkend="boot-parms" />). -<phrase arch="i386"> -Ytimen version 2.4 saa kirjoittamalla <userinput>install24</userinput> -<prompt>boot:</prompt> -kehoitteeseen. -<footnote><para> - -Ytimen versio 2.6 on oletuksena useimmissa käynnistystavoissa, mutta ei -ole käytettävissä käynnistettäessä levykkeeltä. - -</para></footnote> -</phrase> - -</para><para> - -Hetken päästä valitaan käytettävä kieli. Nuolinäppäimillä siirrytään -kielen kohdalle ja jatketaan näppäilemällä &enterkey;. Seuraavaksi -valitaan maa niiden joukosta joissa valittua kieltä puhutaan. Jos -haluttu maa ei ole lyhyessä listassa, käytettävissä on myös maailman -kaikkien maiden lista. - -</para><para> - -Asennin ehkä kysyy vahvistusta käytettävälle -näppäinasettelulle. Käytä oletusarvoa paitsi jos tiedät paremman -vaihtoehdon. - -</para><para> - -Nyt voit huilata sillä välin kun Debianin asennin tunnistaa -laitteistoa ja lataa loput osansa rompulta, levykkeeltä, USB-muistilta -jne. - -</para><para> - -Seuraavaksi asennin tunnistaa verkkolaitteita ja yrittää tehdä -verkkoasetukset DHCP:llä. Jos verkkoyhteyttä ei ole tai jos DHCP:tä ei -ole, verkkoasetukset voi tehdä itse. - -</para><para> - -Nyt tehdään levyosiot. Ensin on mahdollista tehdä levyosiot -automaattisesti käyttäen koko levyä tai levyn vapaata tilaa. Tätä -suositellaan uusille käyttäjille tai kiireisille asentajille. Jos et -halua automaattista osioiden tekoa, valikosta löytyy mahdollisuus -tehdä osiot itse. - -</para><para arch="i386"> - -Mikäli levyllä on ennestään DOS- tai Windows-osioita jotka halutaan -säilyttää on syytä olla tarkkana jos osiot tehdään -automaattisesti. Tehtäessä osiot itse voidaan asentimella tehdä tilaa -Debianin asentamiseen muuttamalla levyllä olevien FAT- tai -NTFS-osioiden kokoa: valitaan osio ja määritetään sen uusi koko. - -</para><para> - -Seuraavassa ruudussa näkyy osiotaulu, miten osiot alustetaan ja -liitoskohdat. Osiota muokataan tai poistetaan valitsemalla se. Jos -osiot tehtiin automaattisesti, valikossa on <guimenuitem>Lopeta osioiden -teko</guimenuitem> joka valitsemalla otetaan tehdyt osiot käyttöön. -Muista varata ainakin yksi osio sivutustilaksi ja liittää yksi osio -juuriosioksi <filename>/</filename>. Lisätietoja <xref -linkend="partitioning" />. - -</para><para> - -Nyt &d-i; alustaa osiot ja aloittaa peruskokoonpanon asennuksen. Tämä -saattaa viedä tovin. Sen jälkeen asennetaan ydin. - -</para><para> - -Viimeinen vaihe on alkukäynnistysohjelman asentaminen. Jos asennin -havaitsee muita käyttöjärjestelmiä tietokoneella, niistä ilmoitetaan -ja lisätään käynnistysvalikkoon. -<phrase arch="i386">Oletusarvona GRUB asennetaan ensimmäisen -kiintolevyn pääkäynnistyslohkoon, joka yleensä on hyvä valinta. Tämä -valinta voidaan ohittaa ja tehdä asennus muualle. -</phrase> - -</para><para> - -&d-i; ilmoittaa nyt asennuksen päättyneen. Poista romppu tai muu -käynnistyksessä käytetty taltio ja käynnistä kone näppäilemällä -&enterkey;. Käynnistyä pitäisi asennuksen toinen vaihe, jota kuvataan -luvusta <xref linkend="boot-new" />. - -</para><para> - -Lisätietoja asennuksesta löytyy luvusta <xref linkend="d-i-intro" />. - -</para> - </sect1> - - <sect1 id="howto-installation-report"> - <title>Lähetä asennusraportti</title> -<para> - -Jos &d-i; asensi onnistuneesti, pyytäisimme käyttämään vähän aikaasi -asennusraportin lähettämiseen. -Yksinkertaisin tapa on asentaa paketti reportbug (<command>apt-get -install reportbug</command>), ja suorittaa komento -<command>reportbug installation-report</command>. - -</para><para> - -Jos asennus ei edennyt loppuun asti, on asentimessa luultavasti -vika. Jotta asenninta saataisin paranneltua on meidän tiedettävä -vioista. Pyytäisimme hieman aikaasi raportin lähettämiseen. Voit -käyttää asennusraporttia vikailmoituksiin. Jos asennus ei onnistunut -lainkaan, raportin pohja on saatavilla luvussa <xref -linkend="problem-report" />. - - -</para> - </sect1> - - <sect1 id="howto-installation-finally"> - <title>Ja lopuksi..</title> -<para> - -Toivomme Debianin asennuksen sujuvan mukavasti ja Debianin olevan -hyödyllinen. Kannattaa lukea <xref linkend="post-install" />. - -</para> - </sect1> -</appendix> diff --git a/fi/install-methods/automatic-install.xml b/fi/install-methods/automatic-install.xml deleted file mode 100644 index 9410b23fe..000000000 --- a/fi/install-methods/automatic-install.xml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,34 +0,0 @@ -<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> -<!-- original version: 33725 untranslated --> - - <sect1 id="automatic-install"> - <title>Automatic Installation</title> -<para> - -For installing on multiple computers it's possible to do fully -automatic installations. Debian packages intended for this include -<classname>fai</classname> (which uses an install server), -<classname>replicator</classname>, -<classname>systemimager</classname>, -<classname>autoinstall</classname>, and -the Debian Installer itself. - -</para> - - <sect2 id="preseed"> - <title>Automatic Installation Using the Debian Installer</title> -<para> - -The Debian Installer supports automating installs via preconfiguration -files. A preconfiguration file can be loaded from the network or from -removable media, and used to fill in answers to questions asked during the -installation process. - -</para><para> - -Full documentation on preseeding including a working example that you can -edit is in <xref linkend="appendix-preseed"/>. - -</para> - </sect2> - </sect1> diff --git a/fi/install-methods/boot-drive-files.xml b/fi/install-methods/boot-drive-files.xml deleted file mode 100644 index e80cf406a..000000000 --- a/fi/install-methods/boot-drive-files.xml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,176 +0,0 @@ -<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> -<!-- original version: 28997 untranslated --> - - <sect1 condition="bootable-disk" id="boot-drive-files"> - <title>Preparing Files for Hard Disk Booting</title> -<para> - -The installer may be booted using boot files placed on an -existing hard drive partition, either launched from another operating -system or by invoking a boot loader directly from the BIOS. - -</para><para> - -A full, <quote>pure network</quote> installation can be achieved using this -technique. This avoids all hassles of removable media, like finding -and burning CD images or struggling with too numerous and -unreliable floppy disks. - -</para><para arch="i386"> - -The installer cannot boot from files on an NTFS file system. - -</para><para arch="powerpc"> - -The installer cannot boot from files on an HFS+ file system. MacOS -System 8.1 and above may use HFS+ file systems; NewWorld PowerMacs all -use HFS+. To determine whether your existing file system is HFS+, -select <userinput>Get Info</userinput> for the volume in question. HFS -file systems appear as <userinput>Mac OS Standard</userinput>, while -HFS+ file systems say <userinput>Mac OS Extended</userinput>. You must -have an HFS partition in order to exchange files between MacOS and -Linux, in particular the installation files you download. - -</para><para arch="powerpc"> - -Different programs are used for hard disk installation system booting, -depending on whether the system is a <quote>NewWorld</quote> or an -<quote>OldWorld</quote> model. - -</para> - - <sect2 arch="i386" id="files-lilo"> - <title>Hard disk installer booting using <command>LILO</command> or - <command>GRUB</command></title> -<para> - -This section explains how to add to or even replace an existing linux -installation using either <command>LILO</command> or -<command>GRUB</command>. - -</para><para> - -At boot time, both bootloaders support loading in memory not -only the kernel, but also a disk image. This RAM disk can be used as -the root file-system by the kernel. - -</para><para> - -Copy the following files from the Debian archives to a -convenient location on your hard drive, for instance to -<filename>/boot/newinstall/</filename>. - -<itemizedlist> -<listitem><para> - -<filename>vmlinuz</filename> (kernel binary) - -</para></listitem> -<listitem><para> - -<filename>initrd.gz</filename> (ramdisk image) - -</para></listitem> -</itemizedlist> - -</para><para> - -Finally, to configure the bootloader proceed to -<xref linkend="boot-initrd"/>. - -</para> - </sect2> - - - <sect2 arch="powerpc" id="files-oldworld"> - <title>Hard Disk Installer Booting for OldWorld Macs</title> -<para> - -The <filename>boot-floppy-hfs</filename> floppy uses -<application>miBoot</application> to launch Linux installation, but -<application>miBoot</application> cannot easily be used for hard disk -booting. <application>BootX</application>, launched from MacOS, -supports booting from files placed on the hard -disk. <application>BootX</application> can also be used to dual-boot -MacOS and Linux after your Debian installation is complete. For the -Performa 6360, it appears that <command>quik</command> cannot make the -hard disk bootable. So <application>BootX</application> is required -on that model. - -</para><para> - -Download and unstuff the <application>BootX</application> -distribution, available from <ulink url="&url-powerpc-bootx;"></ulink>, -or in the -<filename>dists/woody/main/disks-powerpc/current/powermac</filename> -directory on Debian http/ftp mirrors and official Debian CDs. Use -<application>Stuffit Expander</application> to extract it from its -archive. Within the package, there is an empty folder called -<filename>Linux Kernels</filename>. Download -<filename>linux.bin</filename> and -<filename>ramdisk.image.gz</filename> from the -<filename>disks-powerpc/current/powermac</filename> folder, and place -them in the <filename>Linux Kernels</filename> folder. Then place the -<filename>Linux Kernels</filename> folder in the active System Folder. - -</para> - </sect2> - - <sect2 arch="powerpc" id="files-newworld"> - <title>Hard Disk Installer Booting for NewWorld Macs</title> -<para> - -NewWorld PowerMacs support booting from a network or an ISO9660 -CD-ROM, as well as loading ELF binaries directly from the hard -disk. These machines will boot Linux directly via -<command>yaboot</command>, which supports loading a kernel and RAMdisk -directly from an ext2 partition, as well as dual-booting with -MacOS. Hard disk booting of the installer is particularly appropriate -for newer machines without floppy drives. <command>BootX</command> is -not supported and must not be used on NewWorld PowerMacs. - -</para><para> - -<emphasis>Copy</emphasis> (not move) the following four files which -you downloaded earlier from the Debian archives, onto the root level -of your hard drive (this can be accomplished by -<keycap>option</keycap>-dragging each file to the hard drive icon). - -<itemizedlist> -<listitem><para> - -<filename>vmlinux</filename> - -</para></listitem> -<listitem><para> - -<filename>initrd.gz</filename> - -</para></listitem> -<listitem><para> - -<filename>yaboot</filename> - -</para></listitem> -<listitem><para> - -<filename>yaboot.conf</filename> - -</para></listitem> -</itemizedlist> - -</para><para> - -Make a note of the partition number of the MacOS partition where you -place these files. If you have the MacOS <command>pdisk</command> -program, you can use the L command to check for the partition -number. You will need this partition number for the command you type -at the Open Firmware prompt when you boot the installer. - -</para><para> - -To boot the installer, proceed to <xref linkend="boot-newworld"/>. - -</para> - </sect2> - </sect1> diff --git a/fi/install-methods/boot-usb-files.xml b/fi/install-methods/boot-usb-files.xml deleted file mode 100644 index 1ac9adbba..000000000 --- a/fi/install-methods/boot-usb-files.xml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,126 +0,0 @@ -<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> -<!-- original version: 32124 untranslated --> - - <sect1 condition="bootable-usb" id="boot-usb-files"> - <title>Preparing Files for USB Memory Stick Booting</title> - -<para> - -For preparing the USB stick you will need a system where GNU/Linux is -already running and where USB is supported. You should ensure that the -usb-storage kernel module is loaded (<userinput>modprobe -usb-storage</userinput>) and try to find out which SCSI device the USB -stick has been mapped to (in this example -<filename>/dev/sda</filename> is used). To write to your stick, you -will probably have to turn off its write protection switch. - -</para><para> - -Note, that the USB stick should be at least 128 MB in size (smaller -setups are possible if you follow <xref linkend="usb-copy-flexible"/>). - -</para> - - <sect2 id="usb-copy-easy"> - <title>Copying the files — the easy way</title> -<para arch="i386"> - -There is an all-in-one file <filename>hd-media/boot.img.gz</filename> -which contains all the installer files (including the kernel) as well -as <command>SYSLINUX</command> and its configuration file. You only -have to extract it directly to your USB stick: - -<informalexample><screen> -# zcat boot.img.gz > /dev/<replaceable>sda</replaceable> -</screen></informalexample> - -</para><para arch="powerpc"> - -There is an all-in-one file <filename>hd-media/boot.img.gz</filename> -which contains all the installer files (including the kernel) as well -as <command>yaboot</command> and its configuration file. Create a -partition of type "Apple_Bootstrap" on your USB stick using -<command>mac-fdisk</command>'s <userinput>C</userinput> command and -extract the image directly to that: - -<informalexample><screen> -# zcat boot.img.gz > /dev/<replaceable>sda2</replaceable> -</screen></informalexample> - -</para> -<warning><para> - -Using this method will destroy anything already on the device. Make sure -that you use the correct device name for your USB stick. - -</para></warning> -<para> - -After that, mount the USB memory stick (<userinput>mount -<replaceable arch="i386">/dev/sda</replaceable> -<replaceable arch="powerpc">/dev/sda2</replaceable> -/mnt</userinput>), which will now have -<phrase arch="i386">a FAT filesystem</phrase> -<phrase arch="powerpc">an HFS filesystem</phrase> -on it, and copy a Debian netinst or businesscard ISO image to it. -Please note that the file name must end in <filename>.iso</filename>. -Unmount the stick (<userinput>umount /mnt</userinput>) and you are done. - -</para> - </sect2> - - <sect2 id="usb-copy-flexible"> - <title>Copying the files — the flexible way</title> -<para> - -If you like more flexibility or just want to know what's going on, you -should use the following method to put the files on your stick. - -</para> - -&usb-setup-i386.xml; -&usb-setup-powerpc.xml; - - <sect3> - <title>Adding an ISO image</title> -<para> - -Now you should put any Debian ISO image (businesscard, netinst or even -a full one) onto your stick (if it fits). The file name of such an -image must end in <filename>.iso</filename>. - -</para><para> - -If you want to install over the network, without using an ISO image, -you will of course skip the previous step. Moreover you will have to -use the initial ramdisk from the <filename>netboot</filename> -directory instead of the one from <filename>hd-media</filename>, -because <filename>hd-media/initrd.gz</filename> does not have network -support. - -</para><para> - -When you are done, unmount the USB memory stick (<userinput>umount -/mnt</userinput>) and activate its write protection switch. - -</para> - </sect3> - - <!-- TODO: doesn't this section belong later? --> - <sect3 arch="i386"> - <title>Booting the USB stick</title> -<warning><para> - -If your system refuses to boot from the memory stick, the stick may -contain an invalid master boot record (MBR). To fix this, use the -<command>install-mbr</command> command from the package -<classname>mbr</classname>: - -<informalexample><screen> -# install-mbr /dev/<replaceable>sda</replaceable> -</screen></informalexample> - -</para></warning> - </sect3> - </sect2> - </sect1> diff --git a/fi/install-methods/create-floppy.xml b/fi/install-methods/create-floppy.xml deleted file mode 100644 index fbef8b01b..000000000 --- a/fi/install-methods/create-floppy.xml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,108 +0,0 @@ -<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> -<!-- original version: 28672 untranslated --> - - <sect1 condition="supports-floppy-boot" id="create-floppy"> - <title>Creating Floppies from Disk Images</title> -<para> - -Bootable floppy disks are generally used as a last resort to boot the -installer on hardware that cannot boot from CD or by other means. - -</para><para arch="powerpc"> - -Floppy disk booting reportedly fails on Mac USB floppy drives. - -</para><para arch="m68k"> - -Floppy disk booting is not supported on Amigas or -68k Macs. - -</para><para> - -Disk images are files containing the complete contents of a floppy -disk in <emphasis>raw</emphasis> form. Disk images, such as -<filename>boot.img</filename>, cannot simply be copied to floppy -drives. A special program is used to write the image files to floppy -disk in <emphasis>raw</emphasis> mode. This is required because these -images are raw representations of the disk; it is required to do a -<emphasis>sector copy</emphasis> of the data from the file onto the -floppy. - -</para><para> - -There are different techniques for creating floppies from disk images, -which depend on your platform. This section describes how to create -floppies from disk images on different platforms. - -</para><para> - -No matter which method you use to create your floppies, you should -remember to flip the write-protect tab on the floppies once you have -written them, to ensure they are not damaged unintentionally. - -</para> - - <sect2><title>Writing Disk Images From a Linux or Unix System</title> -<para> - -To write the floppy disk image files to the floppy disks, you will -probably need root access to the system. Place a good, blank floppy -in the floppy drive. Next, use the command - -<informalexample><screen> -$ dd if=<replaceable>filename</replaceable> of=/dev/fd0 bs=1024 conv=sync ; sync -</screen></informalexample> - -where <replaceable>filename</replaceable> is one of the floppy disk image -files (see <xref linkend="downloading-files"/> for what -<replaceable>filename</replaceable> should be). -<filename>/dev/fd0</filename> is a commonly used name of the floppy -disk device, it may be different on your workstation -<phrase arch="sparc">(on Solaris, it is -<filename>/dev/fd/0</filename>)</phrase>. -The command may return to the -prompt before Unix has finished writing the floppy disk, so look for -the disk-in-use light on the floppy drive and be sure that the light -is out and the disk has stopped revolving before you remove it from -the drive. On some systems, you'll have to run a command to eject the -floppy from the drive -<phrase arch="sparc">(on Solaris, use <command>eject</command>, see -the manual page)</phrase>. - -</para><para> - -Some systems attempt to automatically mount a floppy disk when you -place it in the drive. You might have to disable this feature before -the workstation will allow you to write a floppy in <emphasis>raw -mode</emphasis>. Unfortunately, how to accomplish this will vary -based on your operating system. -<phrase arch="sparc"> -On Solaris, you can work around -volume management to get raw access to the floppy. First, make sure -that the floppy is auto-mounted (using <command>volcheck</command> or -the equivalent command in the file manager). Then use a -<command>dd</command> command of the form given above, just replace -<filename>/dev/fd0</filename> with -<filename>/vol/rdsk/<replaceable>floppy_name</replaceable></filename>, -where <replaceable>floppy_name</replaceable> is the name the floppy -disk was given when it was formatted (unnamed floppies default to the -name <filename>unnamed_floppy</filename>). On other systems, ask your -system administrator. -</phrase> - -</para><para arch="powerpc"> - -If writing a floppy on powerpc Linux, you will need to eject it. The -<command>eject</command> program handles this nicely; you might need -to install it. - -</para> - - </sect2> - -&floppy-i386.xml; <!-- can be used for other arches --> -&floppy-m68k.xml; -&floppy-powerpc.xml; - - </sect1> - diff --git a/fi/install-methods/download/alpha.xml b/fi/install-methods/download/alpha.xml deleted file mode 100644 index ff0250415..000000000 --- a/fi/install-methods/download/alpha.xml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,36 +0,0 @@ -<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> -<!-- original version: 28997 untranslated --> - - - <sect3 arch="alpha"><title>Alpha Installation Files</title> -<para> - -If you choose to boot from ARC console firmware using -<command>MILO</command>, you will also need to prepare a disk -containing <command>MILO</command> and <command>LINLOAD.EXE</command> -from the provided disk images. See <xref linkend="alpha-firmware"/> -for more information on Alpha -firmware and boot loaders. The floppy images can be found in the -<filename>MILO</filename> directory as -<filename>milo_<replaceable>subarchitecture</replaceable>.bin</filename>. - -</para><para> - -Unfortunately, these <command>MILO</command> images could not be -tested and might not work for all subarchitectures. If you find it -doesn't work for you, try copying the appropriate -<command>MILO</command> binary onto the floppy -(<ulink url="&disturlftp;main/disks-alpha/current/MILO/"></ulink>). -Note that those <command>MILO</command>s don't support ext2 <quote>sparse -superblocks</quote>, so you can't use them to load kernels from newly -generated ext2 file systems. As a workaround, you can put your kernel -onto the FAT partition next to the <command>MILO</command>. - -</para><para> - -<command>MILO</command> binaries are platform-specific. See -<xref linkend="alpha-cpus"/> to determine the appropriate -<command>MILO</command> image for your Alpha platform. - -</para> - </sect3> diff --git a/fi/install-methods/download/arm.xml b/fi/install-methods/download/arm.xml deleted file mode 100644 index d5c5b1014..000000000 --- a/fi/install-methods/download/arm.xml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,48 +0,0 @@ -<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> -<!-- original version: 35372 untranslated --> - - - <sect3 arch="arm" id="riscpc-install-files"> - <title>RiscPC Installation Files</title> -<para> - -The RiscPC installer is booted initially from RISC OS. All the -necessary files are provided in one Zip archive, &rpc-install-kit;. -Download this file onto the RISC OS machine, copy the -<filename>linloader.!Boot</filename> components into place, and run -<filename>!dInstall</filename>. - -</para> - </sect3> - - <sect3 arch="arm" id="netwinder-install-files"> - <title>Netwinder Installation Files</title> -<para> - -The easiest way to boot a Netwinder is over the network, using the -supplied TFTP image &netwinder-boot-img;. - -</para> - </sect3> - - <sect3 arch="arm" id="cats-install-files"> - <title>CATS Installation Files</title> -<para> - -CATS can be booted either via the network or from CD-ROM. The kernel and -initrd can be obtained from &cats-boot-img;. - -</para> - </sect3> - - <sect3 arch="arm" id="nslu2-install-files"> - <title>NSLU2 Installation Files</title> -<para> - -A firmware image is provided for the Linksys NSLU2 which will automatically -boot <classname>debian-installer</classname>. This firmware image can be -obtained from &nslu2-firmware-img;. - -</para> - </sect3> - diff --git a/fi/install-methods/download/m68k.xml b/fi/install-methods/download/m68k.xml deleted file mode 100644 index 409e6a459..000000000 --- a/fi/install-methods/download/m68k.xml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,23 +0,0 @@ -<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> -<!-- original version: 28672 untranslated --> - - - <sect3 arch="m68k" id="kernel-22"> - <title>Choosing a Kernel</title> - -<para> - -Some m68k subarchs have a choice of kernels to install. In general we -recommend trying the most recent version first. If your subarch or -machine needs to use a 2.2.x kernel, make sure you choose one of the -images that supports 2.2.x kernels (see the <ulink -url="&disturl;/main/installer-&architecture;/current/images/MANIFEST">MANIFEST</ulink>). - -</para> -<para> - -All of the m68k images for use with 2.2.x kernels, require the kernel -parameter &ramdisksize;. - -</para> - </sect3> diff --git a/fi/install-methods/download/powerpc.xml b/fi/install-methods/download/powerpc.xml deleted file mode 100644 index d1dd228f9..000000000 --- a/fi/install-methods/download/powerpc.xml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,28 +0,0 @@ -<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> -<!-- original version: 28672 untranslated --> - -<!-- commented out as it seems out of date and the links are broken - - <sect3 arch="powerpc" id="newworld-install-files"> - <title>NewWorld MacOS Installation Files </title> -<para> - -For floppy-less installation on NewWorld Macs, it may be most -convenient to obtain all the necessary files packaged into one Stuffit -archive from -<ulink url="&url-powerpc-of;"></ulink> (separate instructions are -included in the archive). Otherwise, obtain the normal installation -files listed above. Retrieve the files to an HFS (not HFS+) partition -on your system. You will also need the <filename>yaboot</filename> and -<filename>yaboot.conf</filename> files from the -<ulink url="&downloadable-file;new-powermac/">new-powermac</ulink> or -<ulink url="&downloadable-file;powermac/">powermac</ulink> archive folder. -However, the newest G4 PowerMacs, and those that work without MacOS 9, -need the newest version of <command>yaboot</command>; the one in the -archive will not work. Obtain the newest version from -<ulink url="http://penguinppc.org/projects/yaboot/"></ulink>. - -</para> - </sect3> - ---> diff --git a/fi/install-methods/downloading-files.xml b/fi/install-methods/downloading-files.xml deleted file mode 100644 index 0fb20e181..000000000 --- a/fi/install-methods/downloading-files.xml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,37 +0,0 @@ -<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> -<!-- original version: 25148 untranslated --> - - <sect1 id="downloading-files"> - <title>Downloading Files from Debian Mirrors</title> - -<para> - -To find the nearest (and thus probably the fastest) mirror, see the -<ulink url="&url-debian-mirrors;">list of Debian mirrors</ulink>. - -</para><para> - -When downloading files from a Debian mirror, be sure to download the -files in <emphasis>binary</emphasis> mode, not text or automatic -mode. - -</para> - - <sect2 id="where-files"> - <title>Where to Find Installation Images</title> - -<para> -The installation images are located on each Debian mirror in the directory -<ulink url="&url-debian-installer;/images">debian/dists/&releasename;/main/installer-&architecture;/current/images/</ulink> -— the <ulink url="&url-debian-installer;/images/MANIFEST">MANIFEST</ulink> -lists each image and its purpose. -</para> - -&download-alpha.xml; -&download-arm.xml; -&download-powerpc.xml; -&download-m68k.xml; - - </sect2> - - </sect1> diff --git a/fi/install-methods/floppy/i386.xml b/fi/install-methods/floppy/i386.xml deleted file mode 100644 index 00a80a4df..000000000 --- a/fi/install-methods/floppy/i386.xml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,35 +0,0 @@ -<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> -<!-- original version: 28672 untranslated --> - - -<!-- This is not set off for i386 only, because many people will have --> -<!-- access to a PC in order to make a floppy for other arches. --> - - <sect2><title>Writing Disk Images From DOS, Windows, or OS/2</title> - -<para> - -If you have access to an i386 machine, you can use one of the -following programs to copy images to floppies. - -</para><para> - -The <command>rawrite1</command> and <command>rawrite2</command> programs -can be used under MS-DOS. To use these programs, first make sure that you -are booted into DOS. Trying to use these programs from within a DOS box in -Windows, or double-clicking on these programs from the Windows Explorer is -<emphasis>not</emphasis> expected to work. - -</para><para> - -The <command>rwwrtwin</command> program runs on Windows 95, NT, 98, 2000, -ME, XP and probably later versions. To use it you will need to unpack -diskio.dll in the same directory. - -</para><para> - -These tools can be found on the Official Debian CD-ROMs under the -<filename>/tools</filename> directory. - -</para> - </sect2> diff --git a/fi/install-methods/floppy/m68k.xml b/fi/install-methods/floppy/m68k.xml deleted file mode 100644 index 839eefcea..000000000 --- a/fi/install-methods/floppy/m68k.xml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,29 +0,0 @@ -<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> -<!-- original version: 18672 untranslated --> - - - <sect2 arch="m68k"><title>Writing Disk Images on Atari Systems</title> -<para> - -You'll find the &rawwrite.ttp; program in the same directory as the -floppy disk images. Start the program by double clicking on the -program icon, and type in the name of the floppy image file you want -written to the floppy at the TOS program command line dialog box. - -</para> - - </sect2> - - <sect2 arch="m68k"><title>Writing Disk Images on Macintosh Systems</title> -<para> - -There is no MacOS application to write images to floppy disks -(and there would be no point in doing this as you can't use these -floppies to boot the installation system or install kernel and modules -from on Macintosh). However, these files are needed for the -installation of the operating system and modules, later in the -process. - -</para> - - </sect2> diff --git a/fi/install-methods/floppy/powerpc.xml b/fi/install-methods/floppy/powerpc.xml deleted file mode 100644 index 6c05a2e49..000000000 --- a/fi/install-methods/floppy/powerpc.xml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,122 +0,0 @@ -<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> -<!-- original version: 28997 untranslated --> - - - <sect2 arch="powerpc"><title>Writing Disk Images From MacOS</title> -<para> - -An AppleScript, <application>Make Debian Floppy</application>, is -available for burning floppies from the provided disk image files. It -can be downloaded from -<ulink url="ftp://ftp2.sourceforge.net/pub/sourceforge/d/de/debian-imac/MakeDebianFloppy.sit"></ulink>. To -use it, just unstuff it on your desktop, and then drag any floppy -image file to it. You must have Applescript installed and enabled in -your extensions manager. Disk Copy will ask you to confirm that you -wish to erase the floppy and proceed to write the file image to it. - -</para><para> - -You can also use the MacOS utility <command>Disk Copy</command> -directly, or the freeware utility <command>suntar</command>. The -<filename>root.bin</filename> file is an example of a floppy -image. Use one of the following methods to create a floppy from the -floppy image with these utilities. - -</para> - - <sect3> - <title>Writing Disk Images with <command>Disk Copy</command></title> -<para> - -If you are creating the floppy image from files which were originally -on the official &debian; CD, then the Type and Creator are already set -correctly. The following <command>Creator-Changer</command> steps are -only necessary if you downloaded the image files from a Debian mirror. - -</para> -<orderedlist> -<listitem><para> - -Obtain -<ulink url="&url-powerpc-creator-changer;">Creator-Changer</ulink> -and use it to open the <filename>root.bin</filename> file. - -</para></listitem> -<listitem><para> - -Change the Creator to <userinput>ddsk</userinput> (Disk Copy), and the -Type to <userinput>DDim</userinput> (binary floppy image). The case is -sensitive for these fields. - -</para></listitem> -<listitem><para> - -<emphasis>Important:</emphasis> In the Finder, use <userinput>Get -Info</userinput> to display the Finder information about the floppy -image, and <quote>X</quote> the <userinput>File Locked</userinput> check box so -that MacOS will be unable to remove the boot blocks if the image is -accidentally mounted. - -</para></listitem> - <listitem><para> - -Obtain <command>Disk Copy</command>; if you have a MacOS system or CD it -will very likely be there already, otherwise try -<ulink url="&url-powerpc-diskcopy;"></ulink>. - -</para></listitem> -<listitem><para> - -Run <command>Disk Copy</command>, and select <menuchoice> -<guimenu>Utilities</guimenu> <guimenuitem>Make a Floppy</guimenuitem> -</menuchoice>, then select the -<emphasis>locked</emphasis> image file from the resulting dialog. It -will ask you to insert a floppy, then ask if you really want to erase -it. When done it should eject the floppy. - -</para></listitem> -</orderedlist> - - </sect3> - - <sect3> - <title>Writing Disk Images with <command>suntar</command></title> -<para> - -<orderedlist> -<listitem><para> - -Obtain <command>suntar</command> from <ulink url="&url-powerpc-suntar;"> -</ulink>. Start the <command>suntar</command> program and select -<quote>Overwrite Sectors...</quote> from the <userinput>Special</userinput> -menu. - -</para></listitem> -<listitem><para> - -Insert the floppy disk as requested, then hit &enterkey; (start at -sector 0). - -</para></listitem> -<listitem><para> - -Select the <filename>root.bin</filename> file in the file-opening dialog. - -</para></listitem> -<listitem><para> - -After the floppy has been created successfully, select <menuchoice> -<guimenu>File</guimenu> <guimenuitem>Eject</guimenuitem> </menuchoice>. -If there are any errors writing the floppy, simply toss that floppy and -try another. - -</para></listitem> -</orderedlist> - -Before using the floppy you created, <emphasis>set the write protect -tab</emphasis>! Otherwise if you accidentally mount it in MacOS, -MacOS will helpfully ruin it. - -</para> - </sect3> - </sect2> diff --git a/fi/install-methods/install-methods.xml b/fi/install-methods/install-methods.xml deleted file mode 100644 index 0956b911b..000000000 --- a/fi/install-methods/install-methods.xml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,16 +0,0 @@ -<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> -<!-- original version: 11648 untranslated --> - -<chapter id="install-methods"> - <title>Obtaining System Installation Media</title> - -&official-cdrom.xml; -&downloading-files.xml; -&ipl-tape.xml; -&create-floppy.xml; -&boot-usb-files.xml; -&boot-drive-files.xml; -&install-tftp.xml; -&automatic-install.xml; - -</chapter> diff --git a/fi/install-methods/install-tftp.xml b/fi/install-methods/install-tftp.xml deleted file mode 100644 index 5f4291999..000000000 --- a/fi/install-methods/install-tftp.xml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,430 +0,0 @@ -<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> -<!-- original version: 35613 untranslated --> - - <sect1 condition="supports-tftp" id="install-tftp"> - <title>Preparing Files for TFTP Net Booting</title> -<para> - -If your machine is connected to a local area network, you may be able -to boot it over the network from another machine, using TFTP. If you -intend to boot the installation system from another machine, the -boot files will need to be placed in specific locations on that machine, -and the machine configured to support booting of your specific machine. - -</para><para> - -You need to setup a TFTP server, and for many machines, a BOOTP server -<phrase condition="supports-rarp">, or RARP server</phrase> -<phrase condition="supports-dhcp">, or DHCP server</phrase>. - -</para><para> - -<phrase condition="supports-rarp">The Reverse Address Resolution Protocol (RARP) is -one way to tell your client what IP address to use for itself. Another -way is to use the BOOTP protocol. </phrase> - -<phrase condition="supports-bootp">BOOTP is an IP protocol that -informs a computer of its IP address and where on the network to obtain -a boot image. </phrase> - -<phrase arch="m68k"> Yet another alternative exists on VMEbus -systems: the IP address can be manually configured in boot ROM. </phrase> - -<phrase condition="supports-dhcp">The DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration -Protocol) is a more flexible, backwards-compatible extension of BOOTP. -Some systems can only be configured via DHCP. </phrase> - -</para><para arch="powerpc"> - -For PowerPC, if you have a NewWorld Power Macintosh machine, it is a -good idea to use DHCP instead of BOOTP. Some of the latest machines -are unable to boot using BOOTP. - -</para><para arch="alpha"> - -Unlike the Open Firmware found on Sparc and PowerPC machines, the SRM -console will <emphasis>not</emphasis> use RARP to obtain its IP -address, and therefore you must use BOOTP for net booting your -Alpha<footnote> - -<para> -Alpha systems can also be net-booted using the DECNet MOP (Maintenance -Operations Protocol), but this is not covered here. Presumably, your -local OpenVMS operator will be happy to assist you should you have -some burning need to use MOP to boot Linux on your Alpha. -</para> - -</footnote>. You can also enter the IP configuration for network -interfaces directly in the SRM console. - -</para><para arch="hppa"> - -Some older HPPA machines (e.g. 715/75) use RBOOTD rather than BOOTP. -There is an <classname>rbootd</classname> package available in Debian. - -</para><para> - -The Trivial File Transfer Protocol (TFTP) is used to serve the boot -image to the client. Theoretically, any server, on any platform, -which implements these protocols, may be used. In the examples in -this section, we shall provide commands for SunOS 4.x, SunOS 5.x -(a.k.a. Solaris), and GNU/Linux. - -<note arch="i386"><para> - -To use the Pre-boot Execution Environment (PXE) method of TFTP -booting, you will need a TFTP server with <userinput>tsize</userinput> -support. On a &debian; server, the <classname>atftpd</classname> and -<classname>tftpd-hpa</classname> packages qualify; we recommend -<classname>tftpd-hpa</classname>. - -</para></note> - -</para> - -&tftp-rarp.xml; -&tftp-bootp.xml; -&tftp-dhcp.xml; - - <sect2 id="tftpd"> - <title>Enabling the TFTP Server</title> -<para> - -To get the TFTP server ready to go, you should first make sure that -<command>tftpd</command> is enabled. This is usually enabled by having -something like the following line in <filename>/etc/inetd.conf</filename>: - -<informalexample><screen> -tftp dgram udp wait nobody /usr/sbin/tcpd in.tftpd /tftpboot -</screen></informalexample> - -Debian packages will in general set this up correctly by default when they -are installed. - -</para><para> - -Look in that file and remember the directory which is used as the -argument of <command>in.tftpd</command>; you'll need that below. The -<userinput>-l</userinput> argument enables some versions of -<command>in.tftpd</command> to log all requests to the system logs; -this is useful for diagnosing boot errors. If you've had to change -<filename>/etc/inetd.conf</filename>, you'll have to notify the -running <command>inetd</command> process that the file has changed. -On a Debian machine, run <userinput>/etc/init.d/inetd -reload</userinput>; on other machines, -find out the process ID for <command>inetd</command>, and run -<userinput>kill -HUP <replaceable>inetd-pid</replaceable></userinput>. - -</para><para arch="mips"> - -If you intend to install Debian on an SGI machine and your TFTP server is a -GNU/Linux box running Linux 2.4, you'll need to set the following on your -server: - -<informalexample><screen> -# echo 1 > /proc/sys/net/ipv4/ip_no_pmtu_disc -</screen></informalexample> - -to turn off Path MTU discovery, otherwise the SGI's PROM can't -download the kernel. Furthermore, make sure TFTP packets are sent from -a source port no greater than 32767, or the download will stall after -the first packet. Again, it's Linux 2.4.X tripping this bug in the -PROM, and you can avoid it by setting - -<informalexample><screen> -# echo "2048 32767" > /proc/sys/net/ipv4/ip_local_port_range -</screen></informalexample> - -to adjust the range of source ports the Linux TFTP server uses. - -</para> - </sect2> - - <sect2 id="tftp-images"> - <title>Move TFTP Images Into Place</title> -<para> - -Next, place the TFTP boot image you need, as found in -<xref linkend="where-files"/>, in the <command>tftpd</command> -boot image directory. Generally, this directory will be -<filename>/tftpboot</filename>. You'll have to make a link from that -file to the file which <command>tftpd</command> will use for booting a -particular client. Unfortunately, the file name is determined by the -TFTP client, and there are no strong standards. - -</para><para arch="powerpc"> - -On NewWorld Power Macintosh machines, you will need to set up the -<command>yaboot</command> boot loader as the TFTP boot image. -<command>Yaboot</command> will then retrieve the kernel and RAMdisk -images via TFTP itself. For net booting, use the -<filename>yaboot-netboot.conf</filename>. Just rename this to -<filename>yaboot.conf</filename> in the TFTP directory. - -</para><para arch="i386"> - -For PXE booting, everything you should need is set up in the -<filename>netboot/netboot.tar.gz</filename> tarball. Simply extract this -tarball into the <command>tftpd</command> boot image directory. Make sure -your dhcp server is configured to pass <filename>/pxelinux.0</filename> -to <command>tftpd</command> as the filename to boot. - -</para><para arch="ia64"> - -For PXE booting, everything you should need is set up in the -<filename>netboot/netboot.tar.gz</filename> tarball. Simply extract this -tarball into the <command>tftpd</command> boot image directory. Make sure -your dhcp server is configured to pass -<filename>/debian-installer/ia64/elilo.efi</filename> -to <command>tftpd</command> as the filename to boot. - -</para> - - <sect3 arch="mipsel"> - <title>DECstation TFTP Images</title> -<para> - -For DECstations, there are tftpimage files for each subarchitecture, -which contain both kernel and installer in one file. The naming -convention is <replaceable>subarchitecture</replaceable>/netboot-boot.img. -Copy the tftpimage file you would like to use to -<userinput>/tftpboot/tftpboot.img</userinput> if you work with the -example BOOTP/DHCP setups described above. - -</para><para> - -The DECstation firmware boots by TFTP with the command <userinput>boot -<replaceable>#</replaceable>/tftp</userinput>, where -<replaceable>#</replaceable> is the number of the TurboChannel device -from which to boot. On most DECstations this is <quote>3</quote>. If the -BOOTP/DHCP server does not supply the filename or you need to pass -additional parameters, they can optionally be appended with the -following syntax: - -</para><para> - -<userinput>boot #/tftp/filename param1=value1 param2=value2 ...</userinput> - -</para><para> - -Several DECstation firmware revisions show a problem with regard to -net booting: the transfer starts, but after some time it stops with -an <computeroutput>a.out err</computeroutput>. This can have several reasons: - -<orderedlist> -<listitem><para> - -The firmware does not respond to ARP requests during a TFTP -transfer. This leads to an ARP timeout and the transfer stops. The -solution is to add the MAC address of the Ethernet card in the -DECstation statically to the ARP table of the TFTP server. This is -done by running <userinput>arp -s -<replaceable>IP-address</replaceable> -<replaceable>MAC-address</replaceable></userinput> as root on the -machine acting as TFTP server. The MAC-address of the DECstation can -be read out by entering <command>cnfg</command> at the DECstation -firmware prompt. - -</para></listitem> -<listitem><para> - -The firmware has a size limit on the files that can be booted -by TFTP. - -</para></listitem> -</orderedlist> - -There are also firmware revisions that cannot boot via TFTP at all. An -overview about the different firmware revisions can be found at the -NetBSD web pages: -<ulink url="http://www.netbsd.org/Ports/pmax/board-list.html#proms"></ulink>. - -</para> - </sect3> - - <sect3 arch="alpha"> - <title>Alpha TFTP Booting</title> -<para> -On Alpha, you must specify the filename (as a relative path to the -boot image directory) using the <userinput>-file</userinput> argument -to the SRM <userinput>boot</userinput> command, or by setting the -<userinput>BOOT_FILE</userinput> environment variable. Alternatively, -the filename can be given via BOOTP (in ISC <command>dhcpd</command>, -use the <userinput>filename</userinput> directive). Unlike Open -Firmware, there is <emphasis>no default filename</emphasis> on SRM, so -you <emphasis>must</emphasis> specify a filename by either one of -these methods. - -</para> - </sect3> - - <sect3 arch="sparc"> - <title>SPARC TFTP Booting</title> -<para> - -SPARC architectures for instance use the subarchitecture names, such -as <quote>SUN4M</quote> or <quote>SUN4C</quote>; in some cases, the -architecture is left blank, so the file the client looks for is just -<filename>client-ip-in-hex</filename>. Thus, if your system -subarchitecture is a SUN4C, and its IP is 192.168.1.3, the filename -would be <filename>C0A80103.SUN4C</filename>. An easy way to determine -this is to enter the following command in a shell (assuming the -machine's intended IP is 10.0.0.4). - -<informalexample><screen> -$ printf '%.2x%.2x%.2x%.2x\n' 10 0 0 4 -</screen></informalexample> - -This will spit out the IP in hexadecimal; to get to the correct -filename, you will need to change all letters to uppercase and -if necessary append the subarchitecture name. - -</para><para> - -You can also force some sparc systems to look for a specific file name -by adding it to the end of the OpenPROM boot command, such as -<userinput>boot net my-sparc.image</userinput>. This must still reside -in the directory that the TFTP server looks in. - -</para> - </sect3> - - <sect3 arch="m68k"> - <title>BVM/Motorola TFTP Booting</title> -<para> - -For BVM and Motorola VMEbus systems copy the files -&bvme6000-tftp-files; to <filename>/tftpboot/</filename>. - -</para><para> - -Next, configure your boot ROMs or BOOTP server to initially load the -<filename>tftplilo.bvme</filename> or -<filename>tftplilo.mvme</filename> files from the TFTP server. Refer -to the <filename>tftplilo.txt</filename> file for your subarchitecture -for additional system-specific configuration information. - -</para> - </sect3> - - <sect3 arch="mips"> - <title>SGI TFTP Booting</title> -<para> - -On SGI machines you can rely on the <command>bootpd</command> to supply -the name of the TFTP file. It is given either as the -<userinput>bf=</userinput> in <filename>/etc/bootptab</filename> or as -the <userinput>filename=</userinput> option in -<filename>/etc/dhcpd.conf</filename>. - -</para> - </sect3> - - <sect3 arch="mips"> - <title>Broadcom BCM91250A and BCM91480B TFTP Booting</title> -<para> - -You don't have to configure DHCP in a special way because you'll pass the -full path of the file to the loaded to CFE. - -</para> - </sect3> - - </sect2> - -<!-- FIXME: commented out since it seems too old to be usable and a current - way is not known - - <sect2 id="tftp-low-memory"> - <title>TFTP Installation for Low-Memory Systems</title> -<para> - -On some systems, the standard installation RAMdisk, combined with the -memory requirements of the TFTP boot image, cannot fit in memory. In -this case, you can still install using TFTP, you'll just have to go -through the additional step of NFS mounting your root directory over -the network as well. This type of setup is also appropriate for -diskless or dataless clients. - -</para><para> - -First, follow all the steps above in <xref linkend="install-tftp"/>. - -<orderedlist> -<listitem><para> - -Copy the Linux kernel image on your TFTP server using the -<userinput>a.out</userinput> image for the architecture you are -booting. - -</para></listitem> -<listitem><para> - -Untar the root archive on your NFS server (can be the same system as -your TFTP server): - -<informalexample><screen> -# cd /tftpboot -# tar xvzf root.tar.gz -</screen></informalexample> - -Be sure to use the GNU <command>tar</command> (other tar programs, like the -SunOS one, badly handle devices as plain files). - -</para></listitem> -<listitem><para> - -Export your <filename>/tftpboot/debian-sparc-root</filename> directory -with root access to your client. E.g., add the following line to -<filename>/etc/exports</filename> (GNU/Linux syntax, should be similar -for SunOS): - -<informalexample><screen> -/tftpboot/debian-sparc-root <replaceable>client</replaceable>(rw,no_root_squash) -</screen></informalexample> - -NOTE: <replaceable>client</replaceable> is the host name or IP address recognized -by the server for the system you are booting. - -</para></listitem> -<listitem><para> - -Create a symbolic link from your client IP address in dotted notation -to <filename>debian-sparc-root</filename> in the -<filename>/tftpboot</filename> directory. For example, if the client -IP address is 192.168.1.3, do - -<informalexample><screen> -# ln -s debian-sparc-root 192.168.1.3 -</screen></informalexample> - -</para></listitem> -</orderedlist> - -</para> - - </sect2> - - <sect2 condition="supports-nfsroot"> - <title>Installing with TFTP and NFS Root</title> -<para> - -Installing with TFTP and NFS Root is similar to -<xref linkend="tftp-low-memory"/> because you don't want to -load the RAMdisk anymore but boot from the newly created NFS-root file -system. You then need to replace the symlink to the tftpboot image by -a symlink to the kernel image (for example, -<filename>linux-a.out</filename>). - -</para><para> - -RARP/TFTP requires all daemons to be running on the same server (the -workstation is sending a TFTP request back to the server that replied -to its previous RARP request). - -</para> - - - </sect2> -END FIXME --> - </sect1> diff --git a/fi/install-methods/ipl-tape.xml b/fi/install-methods/ipl-tape.xml deleted file mode 100644 index 246d831b8..000000000 --- a/fi/install-methods/ipl-tape.xml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,24 +0,0 @@ -<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> -<!-- original version: 28672 untranslated --> - - <sect1 arch="s390" id="ipl-tape"> - <title>Creating an IPL tape</title> - -<para> - -If you can't boot (IPL) from the CD-ROM and you are not using VM -you need to create an IPL tape first. This is described in section -3.4.3 in the -<ulink url="http://www.redbooks.ibm.com/pubs/pdfs/redbooks/sg246264.pdf"> -Linux for IBM eServer zSeries and S/390: Distributions</ulink> -Redbook. The files you -need to write to the tape are (in this order): -<filename>kernel.debian</filename>, -<filename>parmfile.debian</filename> and -<filename>initrd.debian</filename>. The files can be downloaded -from the <filename>tape</filename> sub-directory, see -<xref linkend="where-files"/>, - -</para> - </sect1> - diff --git a/fi/install-methods/official-cdrom.xml b/fi/install-methods/official-cdrom.xml deleted file mode 100644 index a4269fed7..000000000 --- a/fi/install-methods/official-cdrom.xml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,69 +0,0 @@ -<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> -<!-- original version: 28672 untranslated --> - - <sect1 id="official-cdrom"> - <title>Official &debian; CD-ROM Sets</title> -<para> - -By far the easiest way to install &debian; is from an Official -Debian CD-ROM Set. You can buy a set from a vendor (see the -<ulink url="&url-debian-cd-vendors;">CD vendors page</ulink>). -You may also download the CD-ROM images from a Debian mirror and make -your own set, if you have a fast network connection and a CD burner -(see the <ulink url="&url-debian-cd;">Debian CD page</ulink> for -detailed instructions). If you have a Debian CD set and CDs are -bootable on your machine, you can skip right to -<xref linkend="boot-installer"/>; much effort has been expended to ensure -the files most people need are there on the CD. Although a full set of -binary packages requires several CDs, it is unlikely you will need -packages on the third CD and above. You may also consider using the -DVD version, which saves a lot of space on your shelf and you avoid -the CD shuffling marathon. - -</para><para> - -If your machine doesn't support CD booting, but you do have a CD set, -you can use an alternative strategy such as - -<phrase condition="supports-floppy-boot">floppy disk,</phrase> - -<phrase arch="s390">tape, emulated tape,</phrase> - -<phrase condition="bootable-disk">hard disk,</phrase> - -<phrase condition="bootable-usb">usb stick,</phrase> - -<phrase condition="supports-tftp">net boot,</phrase> - -or manually loading the kernel from the CD to initially boot the -system installer. The files you need for booting by another means are -also on the CD; the Debian network archive and CD folder organization -are identical. So when archive file paths are given below for -particular files you need for booting, look for those files in the -same directories and subdirectories on your CD. - -</para><para> - -Once the installer is booted, it will be able to obtain all the other -files it needs from the CD. - -</para><para> - -If you don't have a CD set, then you will need to download the -installer system files and place them on the - -<phrase arch="s390">installation tape</phrase> - -<phrase condition="supports-floppy-boot">floppy disk or</phrase> - -<phrase condition="bootable-disk">hard disk or</phrase> - -<phrase condition="bootable-usb">usb stick or</phrase> - -<phrase condition="supports-tftp">a connected computer</phrase> - -so they can be used to boot the installer. - -</para> - - </sect1> diff --git a/fi/install-methods/tftp/bootp.xml b/fi/install-methods/tftp/bootp.xml deleted file mode 100644 index 51c33ed7f..000000000 --- a/fi/install-methods/tftp/bootp.xml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,72 +0,0 @@ -<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> -<!-- original version: 35613 untranslated --> - - - <sect2 condition="supports-bootp" id="tftp-bootp"> - <title>Setting up BOOTP server</title> -<para> - -There are two BOOTP servers available for GNU/Linux, the CMU -<command>bootpd</command> and the other is actually a DHCP server, ISC -<command>dhcpd</command>, which are contained in the -<classname>bootp</classname> and <classname>dhcp</classname> packages -in &debian;. - -</para><para> - -To use CMU <command>bootpd</command>, you must first uncomment (or -add) the relevant line in <filename>/etc/inetd.conf</filename>. On -&debian;, you can run <userinput>update-inetd --enable -bootps</userinput>, then <userinput>/etc/init.d/inetd -reload</userinput> to do so. Elsewhere, the line in question should -look like: - -<informalexample><screen> -bootps dgram udp wait root /usr/sbin/bootpd bootpd -i -t 120 -</screen></informalexample> - -Now, you must create an <filename>/etc/bootptab</filename> file. This -has the same sort of familiar and cryptic format as the good old BSD -<filename>printcap</filename>, <filename>termcap</filename>, and -<filename>disktab</filename> files. See the -<filename>bootptab</filename> manual page for more information. For -CMU <command>bootpd</command>, you will need to know the hardware -(MAC) address of the client. Here is an example -<filename>/etc/bootptab</filename>: - -<informalexample><screen> -client:\ - hd=/tftpboot:\ - bf=tftpboot.img:\ - ip=192.168.1.90:\ - sm=255.255.255.0:\ - sa=192.168.1.1:\ - ha=0123456789AB: -</screen></informalexample> - -You will need to change at least the <quote>ha</quote> option, which -specifies the hardware address of the client. The <quote>bf</quote> -option specifies the file a client should retrieve via TFTP; see -<xref linkend="tftp-images"/> for more details. - -<phrase arch="mips"> -On SGI machines you can just enter the command monitor and type -<userinput>printenv</userinput>. The value of the -<userinput>eaddr</userinput> variable is the machine's MAC address. -</phrase> - -</para><para> - -By contrast, setting up BOOTP with ISC <command>dhcpd</command> is -really easy, because it treats BOOTP clients as a moderately special -case of DHCP clients. Some architectures require a complex -configuration for booting clients via BOOTP. If yours is one of -those, read the section <xref linkend="dhcpd"/>. Otherwise, you -will probably be able to get away with simply adding the -<userinput>allow bootp</userinput> directive to the configuration -block for the subnet containing the client, and restart -<command>dhcpd</command> with <userinput>/etc/init.d/dhcpd -restart</userinput>. - -</para> - </sect2> diff --git a/fi/install-methods/tftp/dhcp.xml b/fi/install-methods/tftp/dhcp.xml deleted file mode 100644 index f51eb2622..000000000 --- a/fi/install-methods/tftp/dhcp.xml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,97 +0,0 @@ -<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> -<!-- original version: 29400 untranslated --> - - <sect2 condition="supports-dhcp" id="dhcpd"> - <title>Setting up a DHCP server</title> -<para> - -One free software DHCP server is ISC <command>dhcpd</command>. -In &debian;, this is available in the <classname>dhcp</classname> package. -Here is a sample configuration file for it (usually -<filename>/etc/dhcpd.conf</filename>): - -<informalexample><screen> -option domain-name "example.com"; -option domain-name-servers ns1.example.com; -option subnet-mask 255.255.255.0; -default-lease-time 600; -max-lease-time 7200; -server-name "servername"; - -subnet 192.168.1.0 netmask 255.255.255.0 { - range 192.168.1.200 192.168.1.253; - option routers 192.168.1.1; -} - -host clientname { - filename "/tftpboot/tftpboot.img"; - server-name "servername"; - next-server servername; - hardware ethernet 01:23:45:67:89:AB; - fixed-address 192.168.1.90; -} -</screen></informalexample> - -Note: the new (and preferred) <classname>dhcp3</classname> package uses -<filename>/etc/dhcp3/dhcpd.conf</filename>. - -</para><para> - -In this example, there is one server -<replaceable>servername</replaceable> which performs all of the work -of DHCP server, TFTP server, and network gateway. You will almost -certainly need to change the domain-name options, as well as the -server name and client hardware address. The -<replaceable>filename</replaceable> option should be the name of the -file which will be retrieved via TFTP. - -</para><para> - -After you have edited the <command>dhcpd</command> configuration file, -restart it with <userinput>/etc/init.d/dhcpd restart</userinput>. - -</para> - - <sect3 arch="i386"> - <title>Enabling PXE Booting in the DHCP configuration</title> -<para> -Here is another example for a <filename>dhcp.conf</filename> using the -Pre-boot Execution Environment (PXE) method of TFTP. - -<informalexample><screen> -option domain-name "example.com"; - -default-lease-time 600; -max-lease-time 7200; - -allow booting; -allow bootp; - -# The next paragraph needs to be modified to fit your case -subnet 192.168.1.0 netmask 255.255.255.0 { - range 192.168.1.200 192.168.1.253; - option broadcast-address 192.168.1.255; -# the gateway address which can be different -# (access to the internet for instance) - option routers 192.168.1.1; -# indicate the dns you want to use - option domain-name-servers 192.168.1.3; -} - -group { - next-server 192.168.1.3; - host tftpclient { -# tftp client hardware address - hardware ethernet 00:10:DC:27:6C:15; - filename "/tftpboot/pxelinux.0"; - } -} -</screen></informalexample> - -Note that for PXE booting, the client filename <filename>pxelinux.0</filename> -is a boot loader, not a kernel image (see <xref linkend="tftp-images"/> -below). - -</para> - </sect3> - </sect2> diff --git a/fi/install-methods/tftp/rarp.xml b/fi/install-methods/tftp/rarp.xml deleted file mode 100644 index c6fd184d4..000000000 --- a/fi/install-methods/tftp/rarp.xml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,64 +0,0 @@ -<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> -<!-- original version: 28997 untranslated --> - - - <sect2 condition="supports-rarp" id="tftp-rarp"> - <title>Setting up RARP server</title> -<para> - -To setup RARP, you need to know the Ethernet address (a.k.a. the MAC address) -of the client computers to be installed. -If you don't know this information, you can - -<phrase arch="sparc"> pick it off the initial OpenPROM boot messages, use the -OpenBoot <userinput>.enet-addr</userinput> command, or </phrase> - -boot into <quote>Rescue</quote> mode (e.g., from the rescue floppy) and use the -command <userinput>/sbin/ifconfig eth0</userinput>. - -</para><para> - -On a RARP server system using a Linux 2.2.x kernel, -you need to populate the kernel's RARP table. -To do this, run the following commands: - -<informalexample><screen> -# <userinput>/sbin/rarp -s -<replaceable>client-hostname</replaceable> -<replaceable>client-enet-addr</replaceable></userinput> - -# <userinput>/usr/sbin/arp -s -<replaceable>client-ip</replaceable> -<replaceable>client-enet-addr</replaceable></userinput> -</screen></informalexample> - -If you get - -<informalexample><screen> -SIOCSRARP: Invalid argument -</screen></informalexample> - -you probably need to load the RARP kernel module or else recompile the -kernel to support RARP. Try <userinput>modprobe rarp</userinput> and -then try the <command>rarp</command> command again. - -</para><para> - -On a RARP server system using a Linux 2.4.x kernel, -there is no RARP module, and -you should instead use the <command>rarpd</command> program. The -procedure is similar to that used under SunOS in the following -paragraph. - -</para><para> - -Under SunOS, you need to ensure that the Ethernet hardware address for -the client is listed in the <quote>ethers</quote> database (either in the -<filename>/etc/ethers</filename> file, or via NIS/NIS+) and in the -<quote>hosts</quote> database. Then you need to start the RARP daemon. -In SunOS 4, issue the command (as root): -<userinput>/usr/etc/rarpd -a</userinput>; in SunOS 5, use -<userinput>/usr/sbin/rarpd -a</userinput>. - -</para> - </sect2> diff --git a/fi/install-methods/usb-setup/i386.xml b/fi/install-methods/usb-setup/i386.xml deleted file mode 100644 index 220f69dae..000000000 --- a/fi/install-methods/usb-setup/i386.xml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,97 +0,0 @@ -<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> -<!-- original version: 33725 untranslated --> - - <sect3 arch="i386"> - <title>USB stick partitioning on &arch-title;</title> -<para> - -We will show how to setup the memory stick to use the first partition, -instead of the entire device. - -</para><note><para> - -Since most USB sticks come pre-configured with a single FAT16 -partition, you probably won't have to repartition or reformat the -stick. If you have to do that anyway, use <command>cfdisk</command> -or any other partitioning tool for creating a FAT16 partition and then -create the filesystem using: - -<informalexample><screen> -# mkdosfs /dev/<replaceable>sda1</replaceable> -</screen></informalexample> - -Take care that you use the correct device name for your USB stick. The -<command>mkdosfs</command> command is contained in the -<classname>dosfstools</classname> Debian package. - -</para></note><para> - -In order to start the kernel after booting from the USB stick, we will -put a boot loader on the stick. Although any boot loader -(e.g. <command>LILO</command>) should work, it's convenient to use -<command>SYSLINUX</command>, since it uses a FAT16 partition and can -be reconfigured by just editing a text file. Any operating system -which supports the FAT file system can be used to make changes to the -configuration of the boot loader. - -</para><para> - -To put <command>SYSLINUX</command> on the FAT16 partition on your USB -stick, install the <classname>syslinux</classname> and -<classname>mtools</classname> packages on your system, and do: - -<informalexample><screen> -# syslinux /dev/<replaceable>sda1</replaceable> -</screen></informalexample> - -Again, take care that you use the correct device name. The partition -must not be mounted when starting <command>SYSLINUX</command>. This -procedure writes a boot sector to the partition and creates the file -<filename>ldlinux.sys</filename> which contains the boot loader code. - -</para><para> - -Mount the partition (<userinput>mount /dev/sda1 /mnt</userinput>) and -copy the following files from the Debian archives to the stick: - -<itemizedlist> -<listitem><para> - -<filename>vmlinuz</filename> (kernel binary) - -</para></listitem> -<listitem><para> - -<filename>initrd.gz</filename> (initial ramdisk image) - -</para></listitem> -<listitem><para> - -<filename>syslinux.cfg</filename> (SYSLINUX configuration file) - -</para></listitem> -<listitem><para> - -Optional kernel modules - -</para></listitem> -</itemizedlist> - -If you want to rename the files, please note that -<command>SYSLINUX</command> can only process DOS (8.3) file names. - -</para><para> - -The <filename>syslinux.cfg</filename> configuration file should -contain the following two lines: - -<informalexample><screen> -default vmlinuz -append initrd=initrd.gz ramdisk_size=12000 root=/dev/ram rw -</screen></informalexample> - -Please note that the <userinput>ramdisk_size</userinput> parameter -may need to be increased, depending on the image you are booting. - -</para> - </sect3> diff --git a/fi/install-methods/usb-setup/powerpc.xml b/fi/install-methods/usb-setup/powerpc.xml deleted file mode 100644 index fc64d7eb6..000000000 --- a/fi/install-methods/usb-setup/powerpc.xml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,110 +0,0 @@ -<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> -<!-- original version: 33725 untranslated --> - - <sect3 arch="powerpc"> - <title>USB stick partitioning on &arch-title;</title> -<para> - -Most USB sticks do not come pre-configured in such a way that Open -Firmware can boot from them, so you will need to repartition the stick. -On Mac systems, run <userinput>mac-fdisk /dev/sda</userinput>, -initialise a new partition map using the <userinput>i</userinput> -command, and create a new partition of type Apple_Bootstrap using the -<userinput>C</userinput> command. (Note that the first "partition" will -always be the partition map itself.) Then type - -<informalexample><screen> -$ hformat /dev/<replaceable>sda2</replaceable> -</screen></informalexample> - -Take care that you use the correct device name for your USB stick. The -<command>hformat</command> command is contained in the -<classname>hfsutils</classname> Debian package. - -</para><para> - -In order to start the kernel after booting from the USB stick, we will -put a boot loader on the stick. The <command>yaboot</command> boot -loader can be installed on an HFS filesystem and can be reconfigured by -just editing a text file. Any operating system which supports the HFS -file system can be used to make changes to the configuration of the boot -loader. - -</para><para> - -The normal <command>ybin</command> tool that comes with -<command>yaboot</command> does not yet understand USB storage devices, -so you will have to install <command>yaboot</command> by hand using the -<classname>hfsutils</classname> tools. Type - -<informalexample><screen> -$ hmount /dev/sda2 -$ hcopy -r /usr/lib/yaboot/yaboot : -$ hattrib -c UNIX -t tbxi :yaboot -$ hattrib -b : -$ humount -</screen></informalexample> - -Again, take care that you use the correct device name. The partition -must not be otherwise mounted during this procedure. This procedure -writes the boot loader to the partition, and uses the HFS utilities to -mark it in such a way that Open Firmware will boot it. Having done this, -the rest of the USB stick may be prepared using the normal Unix -utilities. - -</para><para> - -Mount the partition (<userinput>mount /dev/sda2 /mnt</userinput>) and -copy the following files from the Debian archives to the stick: - -<itemizedlist> -<listitem><para> - -<filename>vmlinux</filename> (kernel binary) - -</para></listitem> -<listitem><para> - -<filename>initrd.gz</filename> (initial ramdisk image) - -</para></listitem> -<listitem><para> - -<filename>yaboot.conf</filename> (yaboot configuration file) - -</para></listitem> -<listitem><para> - -<filename>boot.msg</filename> (optional boot message) - -</para></listitem> -<listitem><para> - -Optional kernel modules - -</para></listitem> -</itemizedlist> - -</para><para> - -The <filename>yaboot.conf</filename> configuration file should -contain the following lines: - -<informalexample><screen> -default=install -root=/dev/ram - -message=/boot.msg - -image=/vmlinux - label=install - initrd=/initrd.gz - initrd-size=10000 - read-only -</screen></informalexample> - -Please note that the <userinput>initrd-size</userinput> parameter -may need to be increased, depending on the image you are booting. - -</para> - </sect3> diff --git a/fi/partitioning/device-names.xml b/fi/partitioning/device-names.xml deleted file mode 100644 index 49effd568..000000000 --- a/fi/partitioning/device-names.xml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,161 +0,0 @@ -<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> -<!-- original version: 28997 untranslated --> - - - <sect1 id="device-names"> - <title>Device Names in Linux</title> -<para> - -Linux disks and partition names may be different from other operating -systems. You need to know the names that Linux uses when you create -and mount partitions. Here's the basic naming scheme: - -</para> -<itemizedlist arch="not-s390"> -<listitem><para> - -The first floppy drive is named <filename>/dev/fd0</filename>. - -</para></listitem> -<listitem><para> - -The second floppy drive is named <filename>/dev/fd1</filename>. - -</para></listitem> -<listitem><para> - -The first SCSI disk (SCSI ID address-wise) is named -<filename>/dev/sda</filename>. - -</para></listitem> -<listitem><para> - -The second SCSI disk (address-wise) is named -<filename>/dev/sdb</filename>, and so on. - -</para></listitem> -<listitem><para> - -The first SCSI CD-ROM is named <filename>/dev/scd0</filename>, also -known as <filename>/dev/sr0</filename>. - -</para></listitem> -<listitem><para> - -The master disk on IDE primary controller is named -<filename>/dev/hda</filename>. - -</para></listitem> -<listitem><para> - -The slave disk on IDE primary controller is named -<filename>/dev/hdb</filename>. - -</para></listitem> -<listitem><para> - -The master and slave disks of the secondary controller can be called -<filename>/dev/hdc</filename> and <filename>/dev/hdd</filename>, -respectively. Newer IDE controllers can actually have two channels, -effectively acting like two controllers. - -<phrase arch="m68k"> -The letters may differ from what shows in the mac program pdisk -(i.e. what shows up as <filename>/dev/hdc</filename> on pdisk may show -up as <filename>/dev/hda</filename> in Debian). -</phrase> - -</para></listitem> - -<listitem arch="i386"><para> - -The first XT disk is named <filename>/dev/xda</filename>. - -</para></listitem> -<listitem arch="i386"><para> - -The second XT disk is named <filename>/dev/xdb</filename>. - -</para></listitem> -<listitem arch="m68k"><para> - -The first ACSI device is named <filename>/dev/ada</filename>, the -second is named <filename>/dev/adb</filename>. - -</para></listitem> -</itemizedlist> - -<itemizedlist arch="s390"> -<listitem><para> - -The first DASD device is named -<filename>/dev/dasda</filename>. - -</para></listitem> -<listitem><para> - -The second DASD device is named -<filename>/dev/dasdb</filename>, and so on. - -</para></listitem> -</itemizedlist> - -<para arch="not-s390"> - -The partitions on each disk are represented by appending a decimal -number to the disk name: <filename>sda1</filename> and -<filename>sda2</filename> represent the first and -second partitions of the first SCSI disk drive in your system. - -</para><para arch="not-s390"> - -Here is a real-life example. Let's assume you have a system with 2 -SCSI disks, one at SCSI address 2 and the other at SCSI address 4. -The first disk (at address 2) is then named <filename>sda</filename>, -and the second <filename>sdb</filename>. If the -<filename>sda</filename> drive has 3 partitions on it, these will be -named <filename>sda1</filename>, <filename>sda2</filename>, and -<filename>sda3</filename>. The same applies to the -<filename>sdb</filename> disk and its partitions. - -</para><para arch="not-s390"> - -Note that if you have two SCSI host bus adapters (i.e., controllers), -the order of the drives can get confusing. The best solution in this -case is to watch the boot messages, assuming you know the drive models -and/or capacities. - -</para><para arch="i386"> - -Linux represents the primary partitions as the drive name, plus the -numbers 1 through 4. For example, the first primary partition on the -first IDE drive is <filename>/dev/hda1</filename>. The logical partitions are -numbered starting at 5, so the first logical partition on that same -drive is <filename>/dev/hda5</filename>. Remember that the extended -partition, that is, the primary partition holding the logical -partitions, is not usable by itself. This applies to SCSI disks as -well as IDE disks. - -</para><para arch="m68k"> - -VMEbus systems using the TEAC FC-1 SCSI floppy drive will see it as normal -SCSI disk. To make identification of the drive simpler the installation -software will create a symbolic link to the appropriate device and name -it <filename>/dev/sfd0</filename>. - -</para><para arch="sparc"> - -Sun disk partitions allow for 8 separate partitions (or slices). The -third partition is usually (and is preferred to have) the <quote>Whole -Disk</quote> partition. This partition references all of the sectors of the -disk, and is used by the boot loader (either SILO, or Sun's). - -</para><para arch="s390"> - -The partitions on each disk are represented by appending a decimal -number to the disk name: <filename>dasda1</filename> and -<filename>dasda2</filename> represent the first and -second partitions of the first DASD device in your system. - -</para> - </sect1> diff --git a/fi/partitioning/partition-programs.xml b/fi/partitioning/partition-programs.xml deleted file mode 100644 index 4bd51a9bb..000000000 --- a/fi/partitioning/partition-programs.xml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,165 +0,0 @@ -<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> -<!-- original version: 36732 untranslated --> - - <sect1 id="partition-programs"> - <title>Debian Partitioning Programs</title> -<para> - -Several varieties of partitioning programs have been adapted by Debian -developers to work on various types of hard disks and computer -architectures. Following is a list of the program(s) applicable for -your architecture. - -</para> - -<variablelist> - -<varlistentry> -<term><command>partman</command></term> -<listitem><para> - -Recommended partitioning tool in Debian. This Swiss army knife can -also resize partitions, create filesystems -<phrase arch="i386"> (<quote>format</quote> in Windows speak)</phrase> -and assign them to the mountpoints. - -</para></listitem> -</varlistentry> - -<varlistentry condition="fdisk.txt"> -<term><command>fdisk</command></term> -<listitem><para> - -The original Linux disk partitioner, good for gurus. - -</para><para> - -Be careful if you have existing FreeBSD partitions on your machine. -The installation kernels include support for these partitions, but the -way that <command>fdisk</command> represents them (or not) can make the -device names differ. See the -<ulink url="&url-linux-freebsd;">Linux+FreeBSD HOWTO</ulink> - -</para></listitem> -</varlistentry> - -<varlistentry condition="cfdisk.txt"> -<term><command>cfdisk</command></term> -<listitem><para> - -A simple-to-use, full-screen disk partitioner for the rest of us. - -</para><para> - -Note that <command>cfdisk</command> doesn't understand FreeBSD -partitions at all, and, again, device names may differ as a result. - -</para></listitem> -</varlistentry> - -<varlistentry condition="atari-fdisk.txt"> -<term><command>atari-fdisk</command></term> -<listitem><para> - -Atari-aware version of <command>fdisk</command>. - -</para></listitem> -</varlistentry> - -<varlistentry condition="amiga-fdisk.txt"> -<term><command>amiga-fdisk</command></term> -<listitem><para> - -Amiga-aware version of <command>fdisk</command>. - -</para></listitem> -</varlistentry> - -<varlistentry condition="mac-fdisk.txt"> -<term><command>mac-fdisk</command></term> -<listitem><para> - -Mac-aware version of <command>fdisk</command>. - -</para></listitem> -</varlistentry> - -<varlistentry condition="pmac-fdisk.txt"> -<term><command>pmac-fdisk</command></term> -<listitem><para> - -PowerMac-aware version of <command>fdisk</command>, also used by BVM -and Motorola VMEbus systems. - -</para></listitem> -</varlistentry> - -<varlistentry condition="fdasd.txt"> -<term><command>fdasd</command></term> -<listitem><para> - -&arch-title; version of <command>fdisk</command>; Please read the -fdasd manual page or chapter 13 in -<ulink url="http://oss.software.ibm.com/developerworks/opensource/linux390/docu/l390dd08.pdf"> -Device Drivers and Installation Commands</ulink> for details. - -</para></listitem> -</varlistentry> -</variablelist> - -<para> - -One of these programs will be run by default when you select -<guimenuitem>Partition disks</guimenuitem> (or similar). It may be possible -to use a different partitioning tool from the command line on VT2, but this -is not recommended. - -</para><para> - -If you will be working with more than 20 partitions on your ide disk, -you will need to create devices for partitions 21 and beyond. The next -step of initializing the partition will fail unless a proper device is -present. As an example, here are commands you can use in -<userinput>tty2</userinput> or under <guimenuitem>Execute a shell</guimenuitem> -to add a device so the 21st partition can be initialized: - -<informalexample><screen> -# cd /dev -# mknod hda21 b 3 21 -# chgrp disk hda21 -# chmod 660 hda21 -</screen></informalexample> - -Booting into the new system will fail unless proper devices are present -on the target system. After installing the kernel and modules, execute: - -<informalexample><screen> -# cd /target/dev -# mknod hda21 b 3 21 -# chgrp disk hda21 -# chmod 660 hda21 -</screen></informalexample> - -<phrase arch="i386">Remember to mark your boot partition as -<quote>Bootable</quote>.</phrase> - -</para><para condition="mac-fdisk.txt"> - -One key point when partitioning for Mac type disks is that the -swap partition is identified by its name; it must be named <quote>swap</quote>. -All Mac linux partitions are the same partition type, -Apple_UNIX_SRV2. Please read the fine manual. We also suggest reading the -<ulink url="&url-mac-fdisk-tutorial;">mac-fdisk Tutorial</ulink>, which -includes steps you should take if you are sharing your disk with MacOS. - -</para> - -&partition-alpha.xml; -&partition-hppa.xml; -&partition-i386.xml; -&partition-ia64.xml; -&partition-mips.xml; -&partition-powerpc.xml; -&partition-sparc.xml; - - </sect1> diff --git a/fi/partitioning/partition/alpha.xml b/fi/partitioning/partition/alpha.xml deleted file mode 100644 index 240e7bd3d..000000000 --- a/fi/partitioning/partition/alpha.xml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,58 +0,0 @@ -<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> -<!-- original version: 28997 untranslated --> - - - <sect2 arch="alpha"><title>Partitioning for &arch-title;</title> -<para> - -Booting Debian from the SRM console (the only disk boot method supported -by &releasename;) requires you to have a BSD disk label, not a DOS -partition table, on your boot disk. (Remember, the SRM boot block is -incompatible with MS-DOS partition tables — see -<xref linkend="alpha-firmware"/>.) As a result, <command>partman</command> -creates BSD disk labels when running on &architecture;, but if your disk -has an existing DOS partition table the existing partitions will need to -be deleted before partman can convert it to use a disk label. - -</para><para> - -If you have chosen to use <command>fdisk</command> to partition your -disk, and the disk that you have selected for partitioning does not -already contain a BSD disk label, you must use the <quote>b</quote> -command to enter disk label mode. - -</para><para> - -Unless you wish to use the disk you are partitioning from Tru64 Unix -or one of the free 4.4BSD-Lite derived operating systems (FreeBSD, -OpenBSD, or NetBSD), it is suggested that you do -<emphasis>not</emphasis> make the third partition contain the whole -disk. This is not required by <command>aboot</command>, and in fact, -it may lead to confusion since the <command>swriteboot</command> -utility used to install <command>aboot</command> in the boot sector -will complain about a partition overlapping with the boot block. - -</para><para> - -Also, because <command>aboot</command> is written to the first few -sectors of the disk (currently it occupies about 70 kilobytes, or 150 -sectors), you <emphasis>must</emphasis> leave enough empty space at -the beginning of the disk for it. In the past, it was suggested that -you make a small partition at the beginning of the disk, to be left -unformatted. For the same reason mentioned above, we now suggest that -you do not do this on disks that will only be used by GNU/Linux. When -using <command>partman</command>, a small partition will still be -created for <command>aboot</command> for convenience reasons. - -</para><para condition="FIXME"> - -For ARC installations, you should make a small FAT partition at the -beginning of the disk to contain <command>MILO</command> and -<command>linload.exe</command> — 5 megabytes should be sufficient, see -<xref linkend="non-debian-partitioning"/>. Unfortunately, making FAT -file systems from the menu is not yet supported, so you'll have to do -it manually from the shell using <command>mkdosfs</command> before -attempting to install the boot loader. - -</para> - </sect2> diff --git a/fi/partitioning/partition/hppa.xml b/fi/partitioning/partition/hppa.xml deleted file mode 100644 index e93a8bb7f..000000000 --- a/fi/partitioning/partition/hppa.xml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,22 +0,0 @@ -<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> -<!-- original version: 35595 untranslated --> - - - <sect2 arch="hppa"><title>Partitioning for &arch-title;</title> -<para> - -PALO, the HPPA boot loader, requires a partition of type <quote>F0</quote> somewhere -in the first 2GB. This is where the boot loader and an optional kernel -and RAMdisk will be stored, so make it big enough for that — at least -4Mb (I like 8–16MB). An additional requirement of the firmware is that -the Linux kernel must reside within the first 2GB of the disk. This -is typically achieved by making the root ext2 partition fit entirely -within the first 2GB of the disk. Alternatively you can create a small -ext2 partition near the start of the disk and mount that on -<filename>/boot</filename>, since that is the directory where the Linux -kernel(s) will be stored. <filename>/boot</filename> needs to be big enough -to hold whatever kernels (and backups) you might wish to load; 25–50MB -is generally sufficient. - -</para> - </sect2> diff --git a/fi/partitioning/partition/i386.xml b/fi/partitioning/partition/i386.xml deleted file mode 100644 index c7864c635..000000000 --- a/fi/partitioning/partition/i386.xml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,94 +0,0 @@ -<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> -<!-- original version: 35590 untranslated --> - - - <sect2 arch="i386"><title>Partitioning for &arch-title;</title> -<para> - -If you have an existing other operating system such as DOS or Windows and -you want to preserve that operating system while installing Debian, you may -need to resize its partition to free up space for the Debian installation. -The installer supports resizing of both FAT and NTFS filesystems; when you -get to the installer's partitioning step, select the option to partition -manually and then simply select an existing partition and change its size. - -</para><para> - -The PC BIOS generally adds additional constraints for disk -partitioning. There is a limit to how many <quote>primary</quote> and -<quote>logical</quote> partitions a drive can contain. Additionally, with pre -1994–98 BIOSes, there are limits to where on the drive the BIOS can boot -from. More information can be found in the -<ulink url="&url-partition-howto;">Linux Partition HOWTO</ulink> and the -<ulink url="&url-phoenix-bios-faq-large-disk;">Phoenix BIOS FAQ</ulink>, but -this section will include a brief overview to help you plan most situations. - -</para><para> - -<quote>Primary</quote> partitions are the original partitioning scheme for PC -disks. However, there can only be four of them. To get past this -limitation, <quote>extended</quote> and <quote>logical</quote> partitions were invented. By -setting one of your primary partitions as an extended partition, you -can subdivide all the space allocated to that partition into logical -partitions. You can create up to 60 logical partitions per extended -partition; however, you can only have one extended partition per -drive. - -</para><para> - -Linux limits the partitions per drive to 15 partitions for SCSI disks -(3 usable primary partitions, 12 logical partitions), and 63 -partitions on an IDE drive (3 usable primary partitions, 60 logical -partitions). However the normal &debian; system provides -only 20 devices for partitions, so you may not install on partitions -higher than 20 unless you first manually create devices for those -partitions. - -</para><para> - -If you have a large IDE disk, and are using neither LBA addressing, -nor overlay drivers (sometimes provided by hard disk manufacturers), -then the boot partition (the partition containing your kernel image) -must be placed within the first 1024 cylinders of your hard drive -(usually around 524 megabytes, without BIOS translation). - -</para><para> - -This restriction doesn't apply if you have a BIOS newer than around -1995–98 (depending on the manufacturer) that supports the <quote>Enhanced -Disk Drive Support Specification</quote>. Both Lilo, the Linux loader, and -Debian's alternative <command>mbr</command> must use the BIOS to read the -kernel from the disk into RAM. If the BIOS int 0x13 large disk access -extensions are found to be present, they will be utilized. Otherwise, -the legacy disk access interface is used as a fall-back, and it cannot -be used to address any location on the disk higher than the 1023rd -cylinder. Once Linux is booted, no matter what BIOS your computer -has, these restrictions no longer apply, since Linux does not use the -BIOS for disk access. - -</para><para> - -If you have a large disk, you might have to use cylinder translation -techniques, which you can set from your BIOS setup program, such as -LBA (Logical Block Addressing) or CHS translation mode (<quote>Large</quote>). -More information about issues with large disks can be found in the -<ulink url="&url-large-disk-howto;">Large Disk HOWTO</ulink>. If you -are using a cylinder translation scheme, and the BIOS does not support -the large disk access extensions, then your boot partition has to fit -within the <emphasis>translated</emphasis> representation of the -1024th cylinder. - -</para><para> - -The recommended way of accomplishing this is to create a small (25–50MB -should suffice) partition at the beginning of the disk to be used as -the boot partition, and then create whatever other partitions you wish -to have, in the remaining area. This boot partition -<emphasis>must</emphasis> be mounted on <filename>/boot</filename>, -since that is the directory where the Linux kernel(s) will be stored. -This configuration will work on any system, regardless of whether LBA -or large disk CHS translation is used, and regardless of whether your -BIOS supports the large disk access extensions. - -</para> - </sect2> diff --git a/fi/partitioning/partition/ia64.xml b/fi/partitioning/partition/ia64.xml deleted file mode 100644 index 1dc42db62..000000000 --- a/fi/partitioning/partition/ia64.xml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,125 +0,0 @@ -<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> -<!-- original version: 28672 untranslated --> - - - <sect2 arch="ia64"><title>Partitioning for &arch-title;</title> - -<para> - -The <command>partman</command> disk partitioner is the default -partitioning tool for the installer. -It manages the set of partitions and their mount points to ensure -that the disks and filesystems is properly configured for a successful -installation. It actually uses the <command>parted</command> to -do the on-disk partitioning. - -</para> - - <note> - <title>EFI Recognized Formats</title> -<para> - -The IA64 EFI firmware supports two partition table (or disk label) -formats, GPT and MS-DOS. MS-DOS, the format typically used on i386 -PCs, is no longer recommended for IA64 systems. Although -the installer also provides the <command>cfdisk</command>, -you should only use the <ulink url="parted.txt"> -<command>parted</command></ulink> because only it can manage both GPT -and MS-DOS tables correctly. - -</para></note> - -<para> - -The automatic partitioning recipes for <command>partman</command> -allocate an EFI partition as the first partition on the disk. -You can also set up the partition under the <guimenuitem>Guided -partitioning</guimenuitem> from the main menu in a manner similar to -setting up a <emphasis>swap</emphasis> partition. - -</para><para> - -The <command>partman</command> partitioner will handle most disk -layouts. -For those rare cases where it is necessary to manually set up a disk, -you can use the shell as described above and run the -<command>parted</command> utility directly using its command line interface. -Assuming that you want to erase your whole disk and create a GPT table -and some partitions, then something similar to the following command -sequence could be used: - -<informalexample><screen> - mklabel gpt - mkpartfs primary fat 0 50 - mkpartfs primary linux-swap 51 1000 - mkpartfs primary ext2 1001 3000 - set 1 boot on - print - quit -</screen></informalexample> - -This creates a new partition table, and three partitions to be used as -an EFI boot partition, swap space, and a root file system. Finally it -sets the boot flag on the EFI partition. Partitions are specified in -Megabytes, with start and end offsets from the beginning of the disk. -So, for example, above we created a 1999MB ext2 file system starting -at offset 1001MB from the start of the disk. Note that formatting swap -space with <command>parted</command> can take a few minutes to -complete, as it scans the partition for bad blocks. - -</para> - </sect2> - - <sect2 arch="ia64"><title>Boot Loader Partition Requirements</title> - -<para> - -ELILO, the ia64 boot loader, requires a partition containing a FAT -file system with the <userinput>boot</userinput> flag set. -The partition must be big enough to hold the boot loader and any -kernels or RAMdisks you may wish to boot. A minimum size would be -about 20MB, but if you expect to run with multiple kernels, then -128MB might be a better size. - -</para><para> - -The EFI Boot Manager and the EFI Shell fully support the GPT table -so the boot partition does not necessarily have to be the first -partition or even on the same disk. -This is convenient if you should forget to allocate the partition and -only find out after you have formatted the other partitions on your disk(s). -The <command>partman</command> partitioner checks for an EFI partition -at the same time it checks for a properly set up <emphasis>root</emphasis> -partition. -This gives you an opportunity to correct the disk layout before the -package install begins. -The easiest way to correct this omission is to shrink the last partition -of the disk to make enough free space for adding an EFI partition. - -</para><para> - -It is strongly recommended that you allocate the EFI boot partition -on the same disk as the <emphasis>root</emphasis> filesystem. - -</para> - - </sect2> - - <sect2 arch="ia64"><title>EFI Diagnostic Partitions</title> - -<para> - -The EFI firmware is significantly more sophisticated than the usual -BIOS seen on most x86 PCs. -Some system vendors take advantage of the ability of the EFI to -access files and run programs from a hard disk filesystem to store diagnostics -and EFI based system management utilities on the hard disk. -This is a separate FAT format filesystem on the system disk. -Consult the system documentation and accessories that come with the -system for details. -The easiest time to set up a diagnostics partition is at the same time you -set up the EFI boot partition. - -</para> - - </sect2> diff --git a/fi/partitioning/partition/mips.xml b/fi/partitioning/partition/mips.xml deleted file mode 100644 index edd4d7176..000000000 --- a/fi/partitioning/partition/mips.xml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,16 +0,0 @@ -<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> -<!-- original version: 35613 untranslated --> - - - <sect2 arch="mips"><title>Partitioning for &arch-title;</title> -<para> - -SGI machines require an SGI disk label in order to make the system bootable -from hard disk. It can be created in the fdisk expert menu. The thereby -created volume header (partition number 9) should be at least 3MB large. -If the volume header created is too small, you can simply delete -partition number 9 and re-add it with a different size. Note that the -volume header must start at sector 0. - -</para> - </sect2> diff --git a/fi/partitioning/partition/powerpc.xml b/fi/partitioning/partition/powerpc.xml deleted file mode 100644 index 99e8324ee..000000000 --- a/fi/partitioning/partition/powerpc.xml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,57 +0,0 @@ -<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> -<!-- original version: 23146 untranslated --> - - - <sect2 arch="powerpc"><title>Partitioning Newer PowerMacs</title> -<para> - -If you are installing onto a NewWorld PowerMac you must create a -special bootstrap partition to hold the boot loader. The size of this -partition must be 800KB and its partition type must be -<emphasis>Apple_Bootstrap</emphasis>. If the bootstrap partition is -not created with the <emphasis>Apple_Bootstrap</emphasis> type your -machine cannot be made bootable from the hard disk. This partition -can easily be created by creating a new partition in -<command>partman</command> and telling it to use it as a <quote>NewWorld -boot partition</quote>, or in <command>mac-fdisk</command> using the -<userinput>b</userinput> command. - -</para><para> - -The special partition type Apple_Bootstrap is required to prevent -MacOS from mounting and damaging the bootstrap partition, as there are -special modifications made to it in order for OpenFirmware to boot it -automatically. - -</para><para> - -Note that the bootstrap partition is only meant to hold 3 very small -files: the <command>yaboot</command> binary, its configuration -<filename>yaboot.conf</filename>, and a first stage OpenFirmware -loader <command>ofboot.b</command>. It need not and must not be -mounted on your file system nor have kernels or anything else copied -to it. The <command>ybin</command> and <command>mkofboot</command> -utilities are used to manipulate this partition. - -</para><para> - -In order for OpenFirmware to automatically boot &debian; the bootstrap -partition should appear before other boot partitions on the disk, -especially MacOS boot partitions. The bootstrap partition should be -the first one you create. However, if you add a bootstrap partition -later, you can use <command>mac-fdisk</command>'s -<userinput>r</userinput> command to reorder the partition map so the -bootstrap partition comes right after the map (which is always -partition 1). It's the logical map order, not the physical address -order, that counts. - -</para><para> - -Apple disks normally have several small driver partitions. If you -intend to dual boot your machine with MacOSX, you should retain these -partitions and a small HFS partition (800k is the minimum size). That -is because MacOSX, on every boot, offers to initialize any disks which do -not have active MacOS partitions and driver partitions. - -</para> - </sect2> diff --git a/fi/partitioning/partition/sparc.xml b/fi/partitioning/partition/sparc.xml deleted file mode 100644 index f4996a519..000000000 --- a/fi/partitioning/partition/sparc.xml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,33 +0,0 @@ -<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> -<!-- original version: 11648 untranslated --> - - - <sect2 arch="sparc"><title>Partitioning for &arch-title;</title> -<para> - -Make sure you create a <quote>Sun disk label</quote> on your boot disk. This is -the only kind of partition scheme that the OpenBoot PROM understands, -and so it's the only scheme from which you can boot. The -<keycap>s</keycap> key is used in <command>fdisk</command> to -create Sun disk labels. - -</para><para> - -Furthermore, on &arch-title; disks, make sure your first partition on -your boot disk starts at cylinder 0. While this is required, it also -means that the first partition will contain the partition table and -the boot block, which are the first two sectors of the disk. You must -<emphasis>not</emphasis> put swap on the first partition of the boot -drive, since swap partitions do not preserve the first few sectors of -the partition. You can put Ext2 or UFS partitions there; these will -leave the partition table and the boot block alone. - -</para><para> - -It is also advised that the third partition should be of type <quote>Whole -disk</quote> (type 5), and contain the entire disk (from the first cylinder -to the last). This is simply a convention of Sun disk labels, and -helps the <command>SILO</command> boot loader keep its bearings. - -</para> - </sect2>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/fi/partitioning/partitioning.xml b/fi/partitioning/partitioning.xml deleted file mode 100644 index 1ac85cf9b..000000000 --- a/fi/partitioning/partitioning.xml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,13 +0,0 @@ -<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> -<!-- original version: 11648 untranslated --> - -<appendix id="partitioning"> -<title>Partitioning for Debian</title> - -&sizing.xml; -&tree.xml; -&schemes.xml; -&device-names.xml; -&partition-programs.xml; - -</appendix> diff --git a/fi/partitioning/schemes.xml b/fi/partitioning/schemes.xml deleted file mode 100644 index 64f99c2db..000000000 --- a/fi/partitioning/schemes.xml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,84 +0,0 @@ -<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> -<!-- original version: 31069 untranslated --> - - - <sect1> - <title>Recommended Partitioning Scheme</title> -<para> - -For new users, personal Debian boxes, home systems, and other -single-user setups, a single <filename>/</filename> partition (plus -swap) is probably the easiest, simplest way to go. However, if your -partition is larger than around 6GB, choose ext3 as your partition -type. Ext2 partitions need periodic file system integrity checking, -and this can cause delays during booting when the partition is large. - -</para><para> - -For multi-user systems or systems with lots of disk space, it's best -to put <filename>/usr</filename>, <filename>/var</filename>, -<filename>/tmp</filename>, and <filename>/home</filename> each on -their own partitions separate from the <filename>/</filename> -partition. - -</para><para> - -You might need a separate <filename>/usr/local</filename> partition if -you plan to install many programs that are not part of the Debian -distribution. If your machine will be a mail server, you might need -to make <filename>/var/mail</filename> a separate partition. Often, -putting <filename>/tmp</filename> on its own partition, for instance -20 to 50MB, is a good idea. If you are setting up a server with lots -of user accounts, it's generally good to have a separate, large -<filename>/home</filename> partition. In general, the partitioning -situation varies from computer to computer depending on its uses. - -</para><para> - -For very complex systems, you should see the -<ulink url="&url-multidisk-howto;"> -Multi Disk HOWTO</ulink>. This contains in-depth information, mostly -of interest to ISPs and people setting up servers. - -</para><para> - -With respect to the issue of swap partition size, there are many -views. One rule of thumb which works well is to use as much swap as -you have system memory. It also shouldn't be smaller than 16MB, in -most cases. Of course, there are exceptions to these rules. If you -are trying to solve 10000 simultaneous equations on a machine with -256MB of memory, you may need a gigabyte (or more) of swap. - -</para><para arch="m68k"> - -On the other hand, Atari Falcons and Macs feel pain when swapping, so -instead of making a large swap partition, get as much RAM as possible. - -</para><para> - -On 32-bit architectures (i386, m68k, 32-bit SPARC, and PowerPC), the -maximum size of a swap partition is 2GB. That should be enough for -nearly any installation. However, if your swap requirements are this -high, you should probably try to spread the swap across different -disks (also called <quote>spindles</quote>) and, if possible, different SCSI or -IDE channels. The kernel will balance swap usage between multiple -swap partitions, giving better performance. - -</para><para> - -As an example, an older home machine might have 32MB of RAM and a -1.7GB IDE drive on <filename>/dev/hda</filename>. There might be a -500MB partition for another operating system on -<filename>/dev/hda1</filename>, a 32MB swap partition on -<filename>/dev/hda3</filename> and about 1.2GB on -<filename>/dev/hda2</filename> as the Linux partition. - -</para><para> - -For an idea of the space taken by tasks -you might be interested in adding after your system installation is -complete, check <xref linkend="tasksel-size-list"/>. - -</para> - - </sect1> diff --git a/fi/partitioning/sizing.xml b/fi/partitioning/sizing.xml deleted file mode 100644 index 3a7441dc6..000000000 --- a/fi/partitioning/sizing.xml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,52 +0,0 @@ -<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> -<!-- original version: 11648 untranslated --> - - - <sect1 id="partition-sizing"> - <title>Deciding on Debian Partitions and Sizes</title> -<para> - -At a bare minimum, GNU/Linux needs one partition for itself. You can -have a single partition containing the entire operating system, -applications, and your personal files. Most people feel that a -separate swap partition is also a necessity, although it's not -strictly true. <quote>Swap</quote> is scratch space for an operating system, -which allows the system to use disk storage as <quote>virtual -memory</quote>. By putting swap on a separate partition, Linux can make much -more efficient use of it. It is possible to force Linux to use a -regular file as swap, but it is not recommended. - -</para><para> - -Most people choose to give GNU/Linux more than the minimum number of -partitions, however. There are two reasons you might want to break up -the file system into a number of smaller partitions. The first is for -safety. If something happens to corrupt the file system, generally -only one partition is affected. Thus, you only have to replace (from -the backups you've been carefully keeping) a portion of your -system. At a bare minimum, you should consider creating what is -commonly called a <quote>root partition</quote>. This contains the most essential -components of the system. If any other partitions get corrupted, you -can still boot into GNU/Linux to fix the system. This can save you the -trouble of having to reinstall the system from scratch. - -</para><para> - -The second reason is generally more important in a business setting, -but it really depends on your use of the machine. For example, a mail -server getting spammed with e-mail can easily fill a partition. If you -made <filename>/var/mail</filename> a separate partition on the mail -server, most of the system will remain working even if you get spammed. - -</para><para> - -The only real drawback to using more partitions is that it is often -difficult to know in advance what your needs will be. If you make a -partition too small then you will either have to reinstall the system -or you will be constantly moving things around to make room in the -undersized partition. On the other hand, if you make the partition too -big, you will be wasting space that could be used elsewhere. Disk -space is cheap nowadays, but why throw your money away? - -</para> - </sect1> diff --git a/fi/partitioning/tree.xml b/fi/partitioning/tree.xml deleted file mode 100644 index 39646f550..000000000 --- a/fi/partitioning/tree.xml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,150 +0,0 @@ -<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> -<!-- original version: 33773 untranslated --> - - - <sect1 id="directory-tree"> - <title>The Directory Tree</title> -<para> - -&debian; adheres to the -<ulink url="&url-fhs-home;">Filesystem Hierarchy Standard</ulink> -for directory and file naming. This standard allows users and software -programs to predict the location of files and directories. The root -level directory is represented simply by the slash -<filename>/</filename>. At the root level, all Debian systems include -these directories: - -<informaltable> -<tgroup cols="2"> -<thead> -<row> - <entry>Directory</entry><entry>Content</entry> -</row> -</thead> - -<tbody> -<row> - <entry><filename>bin</filename></entry> - <entry>Essential command binaries</entry> -</row><row> - <entry><filename>boot</filename></entry> - <entry>Static files of the boot loader</entry> -</row><row> - <entry><filename>dev</filename></entry> - <entry>Device files</entry> -</row><row> - <entry><filename>etc</filename></entry> - <entry>Host-specific system configuration</entry> -</row><row> - <entry><filename>home</filename></entry> - <entry>User home directories</entry> -</row><row> - <entry><filename>lib</filename></entry> - <entry>Essential shared libraries and kernel modules</entry> -</row><row> - <entry><filename>media</filename></entry> - <entry>Contains mount points for replaceable media</entry> -</row><row> - <entry><filename>mnt</filename></entry> - <entry>Mount point for mounting a file system temporarily</entry> -</row><row> - <entry><filename>proc</filename></entry> - <entry>Virtual directory for system information (2.4 and 2.6 kernels)</entry> -</row><row> - <entry><filename>root</filename></entry> - <entry>Home directory for the root user</entry> -</row><row> - <entry><filename>sbin</filename></entry> - <entry>Essential system binaries</entry> -</row><row> - <entry><filename>sys</filename></entry> - <entry>Virtual directory for system information (2.6 kernels)</entry> -</row><row> - <entry><filename>tmp</filename></entry> - <entry>Temporary files</entry> -</row><row> - <entry><filename>usr</filename></entry> - <entry>Secondary hierarchy</entry> -</row><row> - <entry><filename>var</filename></entry> - <entry>Variable data</entry> -</row><row> - <entry><filename>opt</filename></entry> - <entry>Add-on application software packages</entry> -</row> -</tbody></tgroup></informaltable> -</para> - -<para> - -The following is a list of important considerations regarding -directories and partitions. Note that disk usage varies widely given -system configuration and specific usage patterns. The recommendations -here are general guidelines and provide a starting point for -partitioning. - -</para> -<itemizedlist> -<listitem><para> - -The root partition <filename>/</filename> must always physically -contain <filename>/etc</filename>, <filename>/bin</filename>, -<filename>/sbin</filename>, <filename>/lib</filename> and -<filename>/dev</filename>, otherwise you won't be able to boot. -Typically 150–250 MB is needed for the root partition. - -</para></listitem> -<listitem><para> - -<filename>/usr</filename>: contains all user programs -(<filename>/usr/bin</filename>), libraries -(<filename>/usr/lib</filename>), documentation -(<filename>/usr/share/doc</filename>), etc. -This is the part of the file system that generally takes up most space. -You should provide at least 500 MB of disk space. This amount should -be increased depending on the number and type of packages you plan -to install. A generous workstation or server installation should allow -4-6 GB. - -</para></listitem> -<listitem><para> - -<filename>/var</filename>: variable data like news articles, e-mails, -web sites, databases, the packaging system cache, etc. will be placed -under this directory. The size of this directory depends greatly on -the usage of your system, but for most people will be dictated by -the package management tool's overhead. If you are going to do a full -installation of just about everything Debian has to offer, all in one -session, setting aside 2 or 3 gigabyte of space for -<filename>/var</filename> should be sufficient. If you are going to -install in pieces (that is to say, install services and utilities, -followed by text stuff, then X, ...), you can get away with 300–500 -MB. If hard drive space is at a premium and you don't plan on doing -major system updates, you can get by with as little as 30 or 40 MB. - -</para></listitem> -<listitem><para> - -<filename>/tmp</filename>: temporary data created by programs will -most likely go in this directory. 40–100 MB should usually -be enough. Some applications — including archive manipulators, -CD/DVD authoring tools, and multimedia software — may use -<filename>/tmp</filename> to temporarily store image files. If you -plan to use such applications, you should adjust the space available -in <filename>/tmp</filename> accordingly. - -</para></listitem> -<listitem><para> - -<filename>/home</filename>: every user will put his personal data -into a subdirectory of this directory. Its size depends on how many -users will be using the system and what files are to be stored in -their directories. Depending on your planned usage you should reserve -about 100 MB for each user, but adapt this value to your needs. Reserve -a lot more space if you plan to save a lot of multimedia files (pictures, MP3, movies) -in your home directory. - -</para></listitem> -</itemizedlist> - - </sect1> diff --git a/fi/post-install/further-reading.xml b/fi/post-install/further-reading.xml deleted file mode 100644 index 4c9ad4b8a..000000000 --- a/fi/post-install/further-reading.xml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,49 +0,0 @@ -<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> -<!-- original version: 30719 untranslated --> - - <sect1 id="further-reading"><title>Further Reading and Information</title> -<para> - -If you need information about a particular program, you should first -try <userinput>man <replaceable>program</replaceable></userinput>, or -<userinput>info <replaceable>program</replaceable></userinput>. - -</para><para> - -There is lots of useful documentation in -<filename>/usr/share/doc</filename> as well. In particular, -<filename>/usr/share/doc/HOWTO</filename> and -<filename>/usr/share/doc/FAQ</filename> contain lots of interesting -information. To submit bugs, look at -<filename>/usr/share/doc/debian/bug*</filename>. To read about -Debian-specific issues for particular programs, look at -<filename>/usr/share/doc/(package name)/README.Debian</filename>. - -</para><para> - -The -<ulink url="http://www.debian.org/">Debian web site</ulink> -contains a large quantity of documentation about Debian. In -particular, see the -<ulink url="http://www.debian.org/doc/FAQ/">Debian GNU/Linux FAQ</ulink> and the -<ulink url="http://www.debian.org/doc/user-manuals#quick-reference">Debian -Reference</ulink>. -An index of more Debian documentation is available from the -<ulink url="http://www.debian.org/doc/ddp">Debian Documentation Project</ulink>. -The Debian community is self-supporting; to subscribe to -one or more of the Debian mailing lists, see the -<ulink url="http://www.debian.org/MailingLists/subscribe"> -Mail List Subscription</ulink> page. -Last, but not least, the <ulink url="http://lists.debian.org/">Debian Mailing -List Archives</ulink> contain a wealth of information on Debian. - -</para><para> - -A general source of information on GNU/Linux is the -<ulink url="http://www.tldp.org/">Linux Documentation Project</ulink>. -There you will find the HOWTOs and pointers to other very valuable -information on parts of a GNU/Linux system. - -</para> - - </sect1> diff --git a/fi/post-install/kernel-baking.xml b/fi/post-install/kernel-baking.xml deleted file mode 100644 index 433375fd7..000000000 --- a/fi/post-install/kernel-baking.xml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,188 +0,0 @@ -<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> -<!-- original version: 36730 untranslated --> - - <sect1 id="kernel-baking"><title>Compiling a New Kernel</title> -<para> - -Why would someone want to compile a new kernel? It is often not -necessary since the default kernel shipped with Debian handles most -configurations. Also, Debian often offers several alternative kernels. -So you may want to check first if there is an alternative kernel image -package that better corresponds to your hardware. However, it can be -useful to compile a new kernel in order to: - -<itemizedlist> -<listitem><para> - -handle special hardware needs, or hardware conflicts with the -pre-supplied kernels - -</para></listitem> -<listitem><para> - -use options of the kernel which are not supported in the pre-supplied -kernels (such as high memory support) - -</para></listitem> -<listitem><para> - -optimize the kernel by removing useless drivers to speed up boot time - -</para></listitem> -<listitem><para> - -create a monolithic instead of a modularized kernel - -</para></listitem> -<listitem><para> - -run an updated or development kernel - -</para></listitem> -<listitem><para> - -learn more about linux kernels - -</para></listitem> -</itemizedlist> - -</para> - - <sect2><title>Kernel Image Management</title> -<para> - -Don't be afraid to try compiling the kernel. It's fun and profitable. - -</para><para> - -To compile a kernel the Debian way, you need some packages: -<classname>fakeroot</classname>, <classname>kernel-package</classname>, -<phrase condition="classic-kpkg"><classname>kernel-source-&kernelversion;</classname> -(the most recent version at the time of this writing)</phrase> -<phrase condition="common-kpkg"><classname>linux-source-2.6</classname></phrase> -and a few others which are probably already installed (see -<filename>/usr/share/doc/kernel-package/README.gz</filename> for the -complete list). - -</para><para> - -This method will make a .deb of your kernel source, and, if you have -non-standard modules, make a synchronized dependent .deb of those -too. It's a better way to manage kernel images; -<filename>/boot</filename> will hold the kernel, the System.map, and a -log of the active config file for the build. - -</para><para> - -Note that you don't <emphasis>have</emphasis> to compile your kernel -the <quote>Debian way</quote>; but we find that using the packaging system -to manage your kernel is actually safer and easier. In fact, you can get -your kernel sources right from Linus instead of -<phrase condition="classic-kpkg"><classname>kernel-source-&kernelversion;</classname>,</phrase> -<phrase condition="common-kpkg"><classname>linux-source-2.6</classname>,</phrase> -yet still use the <classname>kernel-package</classname> compilation method. - -</para><para> - -Note that you'll find complete documentation on using -<classname>kernel-package</classname> under -<filename>/usr/share/doc/kernel-package</filename>. This section just -contains a brief tutorial. - -</para><para> - -Hereafter, we'll assume you have free rein over your machine and will -extract your kernel source to somewhere in your home directory<footnote> - -<para> - -There are other locations where you can extract kernel sources and build -your custom kernel, but this is easiest as it does not require special -permissions. - -</para> - -</footnote>. We'll also assume that your kernel version is -&kernelversion;. Make sure you are in the directory to where you want to -unpack the kernel sources, extract them using -<phrase condition="classic-kpkg"><userinput>tar xjf -/usr/src/kernel-source-&kernelversion;.tar.bz2</userinput></phrase> -<phrase condition="common-kpkg"><userinput>tar xjf -/usr/src/linux-source-&kernelversion;.tar.bz2</userinput></phrase> -and change to the directory -<phrase condition="classic-kpkg"><filename>kernel-source-&kernelversion;</filename></phrase> -<phrase condition="common-kpkg"><filename>linux-source-&kernelversion;</filename></phrase> -that will have been created. - -</para><para> - -Now, you can configure your kernel. Run <userinput>make -xconfig</userinput> if X11 is installed, configured and being run; run -<userinput>make menuconfig</userinput> otherwise (you'll need -<classname>libncurses5-dev</classname> installed). Take the time to read -the online help and choose carefully. When in doubt, it is typically -better to include the device driver (the software which manages -hardware peripherals, such as Ethernet cards, SCSI controllers, and so -on) you are unsure about. Be careful: other options, not related to a -specific hardware, should be left at the default value if you do not -understand them. Do not forget to select <quote>Kernel module loader</quote> -in <quote>Loadable module support</quote> (it is not selected by default). -If not included, your Debian installation will experience problems. - -</para><para> - -Clean the source tree and reset the <classname>kernel-package</classname> -parameters. To do that, do <userinput>make-kpkg clean</userinput>. - -</para><para> - -Now, compile the kernel: -<userinput>fakeroot make-kpkg --initrd --revision=custom.1.0 kernel_image</userinput>. -The version number of <quote>1.0</quote> can be changed at will; this is just -a version number that you will use to track your kernel builds. -Likewise, you can put any word you like in place of <quote>custom</quote> -(e.g., a host name). Kernel compilation may take quite a while, depending on -the power of your machine. - -</para><para> - -Once the compilation is complete, you can install your custom kernel -like any package. As root, do -<phrase condition="classic-kpkg"> -<userinput>dpkg -i -../kernel-image-&kernelversion;-<replaceable>subarchitecture</replaceable>_custom.1.0_&architecture;.deb</userinput>. -</phrase> -<phrase condition="common-kpkg"> -<userinput>dpkg -i -../linux-image-&kernelversion;-<replaceable>subarchitecture</replaceable>_custom.1.0_&architecture;.deb</userinput>. -</phrase> -The <replaceable>subarchitecture</replaceable> part is an optional -sub-architecture, -<phrase arch="i386"> such as <quote>i586</quote>, </phrase> -depending on what kernel options you set. -<userinput>dpkg -i</userinput> will install the -kernel, along with some other nice supporting files. For instance, -the <filename>System.map</filename> will be properly installed -(helpful for debugging kernel problems), and -<filename>/boot/config-&kernelversion;</filename> will be installed, -containing your current configuration set. Your new -kernel package is also clever enough to automatically update your boot -loader to use the new kernel. If you have created a modules package, -<phrase condition="classic-kpkg">e.g., if you have PCMCIA,</phrase> -you'll need to install that package as well. - -</para><para> - -It is time to reboot the system: read carefully any warning that the -above step may have produced, then <userinput>shutdown -r now</userinput>. - -</para><para> - -For more information on Debian kernels and kernel compilation, see the -<ulink url="&url-kernel-handbook;">Debian Linux Kernel Handbook</ulink>. -For more information on <classname>kernel-package</classname>, read -the fine documentation in <filename>/usr/share/doc/kernel-package</filename>. - -</para> - </sect2> - </sect1> diff --git a/fi/post-install/new-to-unix.xml b/fi/post-install/new-to-unix.xml deleted file mode 100644 index c918d4d2a..000000000 --- a/fi/post-install/new-to-unix.xml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,29 +0,0 @@ -<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> -<!-- original version: 28672 untranslated --> - - - <sect1 id="unix-intro"> - <title>If You Are New to Unix</title> -<para> - -If you are new to Unix, you probably should go out and buy some books -and do some reading. A lot of valuable information can also be found -in the <ulink url="&url-debian-reference;">Debian Reference</ulink>. -This <ulink url="&url-unix-faq;">list of Unix FAQs</ulink> contains a -number of UseNet documents which provide a nice historical reference. - -</para><para> - -Linux is an implementation of Unix. The -<ulink url="&url-ldp;">Linux Documentation Project (LDP)</ulink> -collects a number of HOWTOs and online books -relating to Linux. Most of these documents can be installed locally; -just install the <classname>doc-linux-html</classname> package (HTML -versions) or the <classname>doc-linux-text</classname> package (ASCII -versions), then look in <filename>/usr/share/doc/HOWTO</filename>. -International versions of the LDP HOWTOs are also available as Debian -packages. - -</para> - - </sect1> diff --git a/fi/post-install/orientation.xml b/fi/post-install/orientation.xml deleted file mode 100644 index 7c9b75a78..000000000 --- a/fi/post-install/orientation.xml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,109 +0,0 @@ -<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> -<!-- original version: 31137 untranslated --> - - - <sect1 id="debian-orientation"><title>Orienting Yourself to Debian</title> -<para> - -Debian is a little different from other distributions. Even if you're -familiar with Linux in other distributions, there are things you -should know about Debian to help you to keep your system in a good, -clean state. This chapter contains material to help you get oriented; -it is not intended to be a tutorial for how to use Debian, but just a -very brief glimpse of the system for the very rushed. - -</para> - - <sect2><title>Debian Packaging System</title> -<para> - -The most important concept to grasp is the Debian packaging system. -In essence, large parts of your system should be considered under the -control of the packaging system. These include: - -<itemizedlist> -<listitem><para> - -<filename>/usr</filename> (excluding <filename>/usr/local</filename>) - -</para></listitem> -<listitem><para> - -<filename>/var</filename> (you could make -<filename>/var/local</filename> and be safe in there) - -</para></listitem> -<listitem><para> - -<filename>/bin</filename> - -</para></listitem> -<listitem><para> - -<filename>/sbin</filename> - -</para></listitem> -<listitem><para> - -<filename>/lib</filename> - -</para></listitem> -</itemizedlist> - -For instance, if you replace <filename>/usr/bin/perl</filename>, that -will work, but then if you upgrade your <classname>perl</classname> -package, the file you put there will be replaced. Experts can get -around this by putting packages on <quote>hold</quote> in -<command>aptitude</command>. - -</para><para> - -One of the best installation methods is apt. You can use the command -line version <command>apt-get</command> or full-screen text version -<application>aptitude</application>. Note apt will also let you merge -main, contrib, and non-free so you can have export-restricted packages -as well as standard versions. - -</para> - </sect2> - - <sect2><title>Application Version Management</title> -<para> - - -Alternative versions of applications are managed by update-alternatives. If -you are maintaining multiple versions of your applications, read the -update-alternatives man page. - -</para> - </sect2> - - <sect2><title>Cron Job Management</title> -<para> - -Any jobs under the purview of the system administrator should be in -<filename>/etc</filename>, since they are configuration files. If you -have a root cron job for daily, weekly, or monthly runs, put them in -<filename>/etc/cron.{daily,weekly,monthly}</filename>. These are -invoked from <filename>/etc/crontab</filename>, and will run in -alphabetic order, which serializes them. - -</para><para> - -On the other hand, if you have a cron job that (a) needs to run as a -special user, or (b) needs to run at a special time or frequency, you -can use either <filename>/etc/crontab</filename>, or, better yet, -<filename>/etc/cron.d/whatever</filename>. These particular files -also have an extra field that allows you to stipulate the user under -which the cron job runs. - -</para><para> - -In either case, you just edit the files and cron will notice them -automatically. There is no need to run a special command. For more -information see cron(8), crontab(5), and -<filename>/usr/share/doc/cron/README.Debian</filename>. - -</para> - </sect2> - </sect1> diff --git a/fi/post-install/post-install.xml b/fi/post-install/post-install.xml deleted file mode 100644 index 59c327813..000000000 --- a/fi/post-install/post-install.xml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,14 +0,0 @@ -<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> -<!-- original version: 28715 untranslated --> - -<chapter id="post-install"> - <title>Next Steps and Where to Go From Here</title> - -&new-to-unix.xml; -&orientation.xml; -&reactivating-win.xml; -&further-reading.xml; -&kernel-baking.xml; -&rescue.xml; - -</chapter> diff --git a/fi/post-install/reactivating-win.xml b/fi/post-install/reactivating-win.xml deleted file mode 100644 index e34f01d12..000000000 --- a/fi/post-install/reactivating-win.xml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,72 +0,0 @@ -<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> -<!-- original version: 28672 untranslated --> - - - <sect1 arch="i386" id="reactivating-win"> - <title>Reactivating DOS and Windows</title> -<para> - -After installing the base system and writing to the <emphasis>Master Boot -Record</emphasis>, you will be able to boot Linux, but probably nothing else. -This depends what you have chosen during the installation. This chapter -will describe how you can reactivate your old systems so that you can also -boot your DOS or Windows again. - -</para><para> - -<command>LILO</command> is a boot manager with which you can also boot -other operating systems than Linux, which complies to PC -conventions. The boot manager is configured via -<filename>/etc/lilo.conf</filename> file. Whenever you edited this -file you have to run <command>lilo</command> afterwards. The reason -for this is that the changes will take place only when you call the -program. - -</para><para> - -Important parts of the <filename>lilo.conf</filename> file are the -lines containing the <userinput>image</userinput> and -<userinput>other</userinput> keywords, as well as the lines following -those. They can be used to describe a system which can be booted by -<command>LILO</command>. Such a system can include a kernel -(<userinput>image</userinput>), a root partition, additional kernel -parameters, etc. as well as a configuration to boot another, non-Linux -(<userinput>other</userinput>) operating system. These keywords can -also be used more than once. The ordering of these systems within the -configuration file is important because it determines which system -will be booted automatically after, for instance, a timeout -(<userinput>delay</userinput>) presuming <command>LILO</command> -wasn't stopped by pressing the <keycap>shift</keycap> key. - -</para><para> - -After a fresh install of Debian, just the current system is configured -for booting with <command>LILO</command>. If you want to boot another -Linux kernel, you have to edit the configuration file -<filename>/etc/lilo.conf</filename> to add the following lines: - -<informalexample><screen> -&additional-lilo-image; -</screen></informalexample> - -For a basic setup just the first two lines are necessary. If you want -to know more about the other two options please have a look at the -<command>LILO</command> documentation. This can be found in -<filename>/usr/share/doc/lilo/</filename>. The file which should be -read is <filename>Manual.txt</filename>. To have a quicker start into -the world of booting a system you can also look at the -<command>LILO</command> man pages <filename>lilo.conf</filename> for -an overview of configuration keywords and <filename>lilo</filename> -for description of the installation of the new configuration into the -boot sector. - -</para><para> - -Notice that there are other boot loaders available in &debian;, such as -GRUB (in <classname>grub</classname> package), -CHOS (in <classname>chos</classname> package), -Extended-IPL (in <classname>extipl</classname> package), -loadlin (in <classname>loadlin</classname> package) etc. - -</para> - </sect1> diff --git a/fi/post-install/rescue.xml b/fi/post-install/rescue.xml deleted file mode 100644 index 1ec1fd1b6..000000000 --- a/fi/post-install/rescue.xml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,71 +0,0 @@ -<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> -<!-- original version: 33725 untranslated --> - - <sect1 id="rescue"> - <title>Recovering a Broken System</title> -<para> - -Sometimes, things go wrong, and the system you've carefully installed is no -longer bootable. Perhaps the boot loader configuration broke while trying -out a change, or perhaps a new kernel you installed won't boot, or perhaps -cosmic rays hit your disk and flipped a bit in -<filename>/sbin/init</filename>. Regardless of the cause, you'll need to -have a system to work from while you fix it, and rescue mode can be useful -for this. - -</para><para> - -<!-- TODO: describe what to do on arches where this isn't set up in the - bootloader --> - -To access rescue mode, type <userinput>rescue</userinput> at the -<prompt>boot:</prompt> prompt, or boot with the -<userinput>rescue/enable=true</userinput> boot parameter. You'll be shown -the first few screens of the installer, with a note in the corner of the -display to indicate that this is rescue mode, not a full installation. Don't -worry, your system is not about to be overwritten! Rescue mode simply takes -advantage of the hardware detection facilities available in the installer to -ensure that your disks, network devices, and so on are available to you -while repairing your system. - -</para><para> - -Instead of the partitioning tool, you should now be presented with a list of -the partitions on your system, and asked to select one of them. Normally, -you should select the partition containing the root file system that you -need to repair. You may select partitions on RAID and LVM devices as well as -those created directly on disks. - -</para><para> - -If possible, the installer will now present you with a shell prompt in the -file system you selected, which you can use to perform any necessary -repairs. - -<phrase arch="i386"> -For example, if you need to reinstall the GRUB boot loader into the master -boot record of the first hard disk, you could enter the command -<userinput>grub-install '(hd0)'</userinput> to do so. -</phrase> - -</para><para> - -If the installer cannot run a usable shell in the root file system you -selected, perhaps because the file system is corrupt, then it will issue a -warning and offer to give you a shell in the installer environment instead. -You may not have as many tools available in this environment, but they will -often be enough to repair your system anyway. The root file system you -selected will be mounted on the <filename>/target</filename> directory. - -</para><para> - -In either case, after you exit the shell, the system will reboot. - -</para><para> - -Finally, note that repairing broken systems can be difficult, and this -manual does not attempt to go into all the things that might have gone wrong -or how to fix them. If you have problems, consult an expert. - -</para> - </sect1> diff --git a/fi/post-install/shutdown.xml b/fi/post-install/shutdown.xml deleted file mode 100644 index e326be12d..000000000 --- a/fi/post-install/shutdown.xml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,25 +0,0 @@ -<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> -<!-- original version: 21690 untranslated --> - - - <sect1 id="shutdown"> - <title>Shutting Down the System</title> - -<para> - -To shut down a running Linux system, you must not reboot with the -reset switch on the front or back of your computer, or just turn off -the computer. Linux must be shut down in a controlled manner, -otherwise files may be lost and disk damage incurred. You can press -the key combination <keycombo> <keycap>Ctrl</keycap> -<keycap>Alt</keycap> <keycap>Del</keycap> </keycombo> -<phrase arch="powerpc;m68k"> or <keycombo> <keycap>Control</keycap> -<keycap>Shift</keycap> <keycap>Power</keycap> </keycombo> on Macintosh -systems</phrase>. You may also log in as -root and type <userinput>shutdown -h now</userinput>, -<userinput>reboot</userinput>, or <userinput>halt</userinput> if -either of the key combinations do not work or you prefer to type -commands. - -</para> - </sect1> diff --git a/fi/preface.xml b/fi/preface.xml deleted file mode 100644 index a2e3b0b19..000000000 --- a/fi/preface.xml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,32 +0,0 @@ -<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> -<!-- original version: 24750 untranslated --> - -<preface> - <title>Installing &debian; &release; For &architecture;</title> -<para> - -We are delighted that you have decided to try Debian, and are -sure that you will find that Debian's GNU/Linux distribution is -unique. &debian; brings together high-quality free software -from around the world, integrating it into a coherent whole. We -believe that you will find that the result is truly more than the sum -of the parts. - -</para><para> - -We understand that many of you want to install Debian without reading this -manual, and the Debian installer is designed to make this possible. If you -don't have time to read the whole Installation Guide right now, we recommend -that you read the Installation Howto, which will walk you through the basic -installation process, and links to the manual for more advanced topics or -for when things go wrong. The Installation Howto can be found in -<xref linkend="installation-howto"/>. - -</para><para> - -With that said, we hope that you have the time to read most of this manual, -and doing so will lead to a more informed and likely more successful -installation experience. - -</para> -</preface> diff --git a/fi/preparing/backup.xml b/fi/preparing/backup.xml deleted file mode 100644 index 08d0fd57d..000000000 --- a/fi/preparing/backup.xml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,41 +0,0 @@ -<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> -<!-- original version: 28997 untranslated --> - - <sect1 id="backup"> - <title>Back Up Your Existing Data!</title> -<para> - -Before you start, make sure to back up every file that is now on your -system. If this is the first time a non-native operating system has -been installed on your computer, it's quite likely you will need to -re-partition your disk to make room for &debian;. Anytime you -partition your disk, you should count on losing everything on the -disk, no matter what program you use to do it. The programs used in -installation are quite reliable and most have seen years of use; but -they are also quite powerful and a false move can cost you. Even after -backing up be careful and think about your answers and actions. Two -minutes of thinking can save hours of unnecessary work. - -</para><para> - -If you are creating a multi-boot system, make sure that you have the -distribution media of any other present operating systems on hand. -Especially if you repartition your boot drive, you might find that you -have to reinstall your operating system's boot loader, or in many -cases the whole operating system itself and all files on the affected -partitions. - -</para> - -<para arch="m68k"> - -With the exception of the BVM and Motorola VMEbus computers, the only -supported installation method for m68k systems is booting from a local -disk or floppy using an AmigaOS/TOS/MacOS-based bootstrap, for these -machines you will need the original operating system in order to boot -Linux. In order to boot Linux on the BVM and Motorola VMEbus machines -you will need the <quote>BVMBug</quote> or <quote>16xBug</quote> boot ROMs. - -</para> - - </sect1> diff --git a/fi/preparing/bios-setup/i386.xml b/fi/preparing/bios-setup/i386.xml deleted file mode 100644 index 224945c26..000000000 --- a/fi/preparing/bios-setup/i386.xml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,332 +0,0 @@ -<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> -<!-- original version: 36732 untranslated --> - - - <sect2 arch="i386" id="bios-setup"><title>Invoking the BIOS Set-Up Menu</title> - -<para> - -BIOS provides the basic functions needed to boot your machine to allow -your operating system to access your hardware. Your system probably -provides a BIOS set-up menu, which is used to configure the BIOS. -Before installing, you <emphasis>must</emphasis> ensure that your BIOS -is setup correctly; not doing so can lead to intermittent crashes or -an inability to install Debian. - -</para><para> - -The rest of this section is lifted from the -<ulink url="&url-pc-hw-faq;"></ulink>, answering the question, <quote>How do I -enter the CMOS configuration menu?</quote>. How you access the BIOS (or -<quote>CMOS</quote>) configuration menu depends on who wrote your BIOS -software: - -</para> - -<!-- From: burnesa@cat.com (Shaun Burnet) --> -<variablelist> - -<varlistentry> - <term>AMI BIOS</term> - <listitem><para> - -<keycap>Delete</keycap> key during the POST (power on self test) - -</para></listitem> -</varlistentry> - -<varlistentry> - <term>Award BIOS</term> - <listitem><para> - -<keycombo> - <keycap>Ctrl</keycap><keycap>Alt</keycap><keycap>Esc</keycap> -</keycombo>, or <keycap>Delete</keycap> key during the POST - -</para></listitem> -</varlistentry> - -<varlistentry><term>DTK BIOS</term> - <listitem><para> - -<keycap>Esc</keycap> key during the POST - -</para></listitem> -</varlistentry> - -<varlistentry><term>IBM PS/2 BIOS</term> - <listitem><para> - -<keycombo> - <keycap>Ctrl</keycap><keycap>Alt</keycap><keycap>Insert</keycap> -</keycombo> -after -<keycombo> - <keycap>Ctrl</keycap><keycap>Alt</keycap><keycap>Delete</keycap> -</keycombo> - -</para></listitem> -</varlistentry> - -<varlistentry> - <term>Phoenix BIOS</term> - <listitem><para> - -<keycombo> - <keycap>Ctrl</keycap><keycap>Alt</keycap><keycap>Esc</keycap> -</keycombo> -or -<keycombo> - <keycap>Ctrl</keycap><keycap>Alt</keycap><keycap>S</keycap> -</keycombo> -or -<keycap>F1</keycap> - -</para></listitem> -</varlistentry> -</variablelist> - -<para> - -Information on invoking other BIOS routines can be found in -<ulink url="&url-invoking-bios-info;"></ulink>. - -</para><para> - -Some &arch-title; machines don't have a CMOS configuration menu in the -BIOS. They require a software CMOS setup program. If you don't have -the Installation and/or Diagnostics diskette for your machine, you can -try using a shareware/freeware program. Try looking in -<ulink url="&url-simtel;"></ulink>. - -</para> - </sect2> - - <sect2 arch="i386" id="boot-dev-select"><title>Boot Device Selection</title> - -<para> - -Many BIOS set-up menus allow you to select the devices that will be -used to bootstrap the system. Set this to look for a bootable -operating system on <filename>A:</filename> (the first floppy disk), -then optionally the first CD-ROM device (possibly appearing as -<filename>D:</filename> or <filename>E:</filename>), and then from -<filename>C:</filename> (the first hard disk). This setting enables -you to boot from either a floppy disk or a CD-ROM, which are the two -most common boot devices used to install Debian. - -</para><para> - -If you have a newer SCSI controller and you have a CD-ROM device -attached to it, you are usually able to boot from the CD-ROM. All you -have to do is enable booting from a CD-ROM in the SCSI-BIOS of your -controller. - -</para><para> - -Another popular option is to boot from a USB storage device (also called -a USB memory stick or USB key). Some BIOSes can boot directly from a USB -storage device, but some cannot. You may need to configure your BIOS to boot -from a <quote>Removable drive</quote> or even from <quote>USB-ZIP</quote> to -get it to boot from the USB device. - -</para><para> - -Here are some details about how to set the boot order. Remember to -reset the boot order after Linux is installed, so that you restart -your machine from the hard drive. - -</para> - - <sect3 id="ctbooi"> - <title>Changing the Boot Order on IDE Computers</title> - -<orderedlist> -<listitem><para> - -As your computer starts, press the keys to enter the BIOS -utility. Often, it is the <keycap>Delete</keycap> key. However, -consult the hardware documentation for the exact keystrokes. - -</para></listitem> -<listitem><para> - -Find the boot sequence in the setup utility. Its location depends on -your BIOS, but you are looking for a field that lists drives. - -</para><para> - - -Common entries on IDE machines are C, A, cdrom or A, C, cdrom. - -</para><para> - - -C is the hard drive, and A is the floppy drive. - -</para></listitem> -<listitem><para> - -Change the boot sequence setting so that the CD-ROM or the -floppy is first. Usually, the <keycap>Page Up</keycap> or -<keycap>Page Down</keycap> keys cycle -through the possible choices. - -</para></listitem> -<listitem><para> - -Save your changes. Instructions on the screen tell you how to -save the changes on your computer. - -</para></listitem> -</orderedlist> - </sect3> - - <sect3 id="ctboos"> - <title>Changing the Boot Order on SCSI Computers</title> -<para> - -<orderedlist> -<listitem><para> - -As your computer starts, press the keys to enter the SCSI setup -utility. - -</para><para> - -You can start the SCSI setup utility after the memory check and -the message about how to start the BIOS utility displays when you -start your computer. - -</para><para> - -The keystrokes you need depend on the utility. Often, it is -<keycombo><keycap>Ctrl</keycap><keycap>F2</keycap></keycombo>. -However, consult your hardware documentation for the -exact keystrokes. - -</para></listitem> -<listitem><para> - -Find the utility for changing the boot order. - -</para></listitem> -<listitem><para> - -Set the utility so that the SCSI ID of the CD drive is first on -the list. - -</para></listitem> -<listitem><para> - -Save your changes. Instructions on the screen tell you how to -save the changes on your computer. Often, you must press -<keycap>F10</keycap>. - -</para></listitem> -</orderedlist> - -</para> - </sect3> - </sect2> - - <sect2 arch="i386"> - <title>Miscellaneous BIOS Settings</title> - - <sect3 id="cd-settings"><title>CD-ROM Settings</title> -<para> - -Some BIOS systems (such as Award BIOS) allow you to automatically set -the CD speed. You should avoid that, and instead set it to, say, the -lowest speed. If you get <userinput>seek failed</userinput> error -messages, this may be your problem. - -</para> - </sect3> - - <sect3><title>Extended vs. Expanded Memory</title> -<para> - -If your system provides both ex<emphasis>ten</emphasis>ded and -ex<emphasis>pan</emphasis>ded memory, set it so that there is as much -extended and as little expanded memory as possible. Linux requires -extended memory and cannot use expanded memory. - -</para> - </sect3> - - <sect3><title>Virus Protection</title> -<para> - -Disable any virus-warning features your BIOS may provide. If you have -a virus-protection board or other special hardware, make sure it is -disabled or physically removed while running GNU/Linux. These aren't -compatible with GNU/Linux; moreover, due to the file system -permissions and protected memory of the Linux kernel, viruses are -almost unheard of<footnote> -<para> - -After installation you can enable Boot Sector protection if you -want. This offers no additional security in Linux but if you also run -Windows it may prevent a catastrophe. There is no need to tamper with -the Master Boot Record (MBR) after the boot manager has been set up. - -</para> -</footnote>. - -</para> - </sect3> - - <sect3><title>Shadow RAM</title> -<para> - -Your motherboard may provide <emphasis>shadow RAM</emphasis> or BIOS -caching. You may see settings for <quote>Video BIOS Shadow</quote>, -<quote>C800-CBFF Shadow</quote>, etc. <emphasis>Disable</emphasis> -all shadow RAM. Shadow -RAM is used to accelerate access to the ROMs on your motherboard and -on some of the controller cards. Linux does not use these ROMs once it -has booted because it provides its own faster 32-bit software in place -of the 16-bit programs in the ROMs. Disabling the shadow RAM may make -some of it available for programs to use as normal memory. Leaving -the shadow RAM enabled may interfere with Linux access to hardware -devices. - -</para> - </sect3> - - <sect3><title>Memory Hole</title> -<para> - -If your BIOS offers something like <quote>15–16 MB Memory -Hole</quote>, please disable that. Linux expects to find memory there if -you have that much RAM. - -</para><para> - -We have a report of an Intel Endeavor motherboard on which there is an -option called <quote>LFB</quote> or <quote>Linear Frame Buffer</quote>. -This had two settings: <quote>Disabled</quote> and <quote>1 -Megabyte</quote>. Set it to <quote>1 Megabyte</quote>. -When disabled, the installation floppy was not read correctly, and the -system eventually crashed. At this writing we don't understand what's -going on with this particular device — it just worked with that -setting and not without it. - -</para> - </sect3> - -<!-- no other platforms other than x86 provide this sort of thing, AFAIK --> - - <sect3><title>Advanced Power Management</title> -<para> - -If your motherboard provides Advanced Power Management (APM), -configure it so that power management is controlled by APM. Disable -the doze, standby, suspend, nap, and sleep modes, and disable the hard -disk's power-down timer. Linux can take over control of these modes, -and can do a better job of power-management than the BIOS. - -</para> - </sect3> - </sect2> diff --git a/fi/preparing/bios-setup/m68k.xml b/fi/preparing/bios-setup/m68k.xml deleted file mode 100644 index e68cb35d7..000000000 --- a/fi/preparing/bios-setup/m68k.xml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,23 +0,0 @@ -<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> -<!-- original version: 28672 untranslated --> - - - <sect2 arch="m68k" id="firmware-revs"> - <title>Firmware Revisions and Existing OS Setup</title> - -<para> - -&arch-title; machines are generally self-configuring and do not require -firmware configuration. However, you should make sure that you have -the appropriate ROM and system patches. On the Macintosh, MacOS -version >= 7.1 is recommended because version 7.0.1 contains a bug in -the video drivers preventing the boot loader from deactivating the -video interrupts, resulting in a boot hang. On the BVM VMEbus systems -you should make sure you are using BVMBug revision G or higher boot ROMs. -The BVMBug boot ROMs do not come as standard on the BVM systems but are -available from BVM on request free of charge. - -</para> - - </sect2> - diff --git a/fi/preparing/bios-setup/powerpc.xml b/fi/preparing/bios-setup/powerpc.xml deleted file mode 100644 index f170eb172..000000000 --- a/fi/preparing/bios-setup/powerpc.xml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,53 +0,0 @@ -<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> -<!-- original version: 36732 untranslated --> - - - <sect2 arch="powerpc" id="invoking-openfirmware"> - <title>Invoking OpenFirmware</title> -<para> - -There is normally no need to set up the BIOS (called OpenFirmware) on -&arch-title; systems. PReP and CHRP are equipped with OpenFirmware, -but unfortunately, the means you use to invoke it vary from -manufacturer to manufacturer. You'll have to consult the hardware -documentation which came with your machine. - -</para><para> - -On &arch-title; Macintoshes, you invoke OpenFirmware with -<keycombo><keycap>Command</keycap> <keycap>option</keycap> -<keycap>O</keycap> <keycap>F</keycap></keycombo> while booting. Generally it -will check for these keystrokes after the chime, but the exact timing -varies from model to model. See -<ulink url="&url-netbsd-powerpc-faq;"></ulink> for more hints. - -</para><para> - -The OpenFirmware prompt looks like this: - -<informalexample><screen> -ok -0 > -</screen></informalexample> - -Note that on older model &arch-title; Macs, the default and sometimes -hardwired I/O for OpenFirmware user interaction is through the serial -(modem) port. If you invoke OpenFirmware on one of these machines, you -will just see a black screen. In that case, a terminal program running -on another computer, connected to the modem port, is needed to -interact with OpenFirmware. - -</para><para> - -The OpenFirmware on OldWorld Beige G3 machines, OF versions 2.0f1 -and 2.4, is broken. These machines will most likely not be able to -boot from the hard drive unless the firmware is patched. A firmware -patch is included in the <application>System Disk 2.3.1</application> -utility, available from Apple at -<ulink url="ftp://ftp.apple.com/developer/macosxserver/utilities/SystemDisk2.3.1.smi.bin"></ulink>. -After unpacking the utility in MacOS, and launching it, select the -<guibutton>Save button</guibutton> to have the firmware patches -installed to nvram. - -</para> - </sect2> diff --git a/fi/preparing/bios-setup/s390.xml b/fi/preparing/bios-setup/s390.xml deleted file mode 100644 index 5ac12ce19..000000000 --- a/fi/preparing/bios-setup/s390.xml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,106 +0,0 @@ -<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> -<!-- original version: 36732 untranslated --> - - - <sect2 arch="s390"><title>BIOS Setup</title> -<para> - -In order to install &debian; on a &arch-title; or zSeries -machine you have first boot a kernel into the system. The boot -mechanism of this platform is inherently different to other ones, -especially from PC-like systems: there are no floppy devices available -at all. You will notice another big difference while you work with -this platform: most (if not all) of the time you will work remote, -with the help of some client session software like telnet, or a -browser. This is due to that special system architecture where the -3215/3270 console is line-based instead of character-based. - -</para><para> - -Linux on this platform runs either natively on the bare machine, in a -so-called LPAR (Logical Partition) or in a virtual machine supplied by -the VM system. You can use a boot tape on all of those systems; you -may use some other boot media, too, but those may not be generally -available. For example, you can use the virtual card reader of a -virtual machine, or boot from the HMC (Hardware Management Console) of -an LPAR if the HMC and this option is available for you. - -</para><para> - -Before you actually perform an installation, you have to go over some -design and preparation steps. IBM has made documentation available -about the whole process, e.g. how to prepare an installation medium -and how actually boot from that medium. Duplicating that information -here is neither possible nor necessary. However, we will describe -here which kind of Debian-specific data is needed and where do you -find them. Based on both sources of information you have to prepare -your machine and the installation medium and to perform a boot from -it. When you see the welcome message in your client session join this -document again for the Debian-specific installation steps. - -</para> - </sect2> - - <sect2 arch="s390"> - <title>Native and LPAR installations</title> -<para> - -Please refer to chapter 5 of the -<ulink url="http://www.redbooks.ibm.com/pubs/pdfs/redbooks/sg244987.pdf"> -Linux for &arch-title;</ulink> -Redbook and chapter 3.2 of the -<ulink url="http://www.redbooks.ibm.com/pubs/pdfs/redbooks/sg246264.pdf"> -Linux for IBM eServer zSeries and &arch-title;: Distributions</ulink> -Redbook on how to set up an LPAR for Linux. - -</para> - </sect2> - - <sect2 arch="s390"> - <title>Installation as a VM guest</title> - -<para> - -Please refer to chapter 6 of the -<ulink url="http://www.redbooks.ibm.com/pubs/pdfs/redbooks/sg244987.pdf"> -Linux for &arch-title;</ulink> -Redbook and chapter 3.1 of the -<ulink url="http://www.redbooks.ibm.com/pubs/pdfs/redbooks/sg246264.pdf"> -Linux for IBM eServer zSeries and &arch-title;: Distributions</ulink> -Redbook on how to set up a VM guest for running Linux. - -</para><para> - -You need to copy all the files from the <filename>generic</filename> -sub-directory to your CMS disk. Be sure to transfer -<filename>kernel.debian</filename> and -<filename>initrd.debian</filename> in binary mode with a fixed record -length of 80 characters. - -</para> - </sect2> - - <sect2 arch="s390"> - <title>Setting up an installation server</title> - -<para> - -If you don't have a connection to the Internet (either directly or via -a web proxy) you need to create a local installation server that can -be accessed from your S/390. This server keeps all the packages -you want to install and must make them available using NFS, HTTP or -FTP. - -</para><para> - -The installation server needs to copy the exact directory structure -from any &debian; mirror, but only the s390 and -architecture-independent files are required. You can also copy the -contents of all installation CDs into such a directory tree. - -</para><para condition="FIXME"> - -<emphasis>FIXME: more information needed — from a Redbook?</emphasis> - -</para> - </sect2> diff --git a/fi/preparing/bios-setup/sparc.xml b/fi/preparing/bios-setup/sparc.xml deleted file mode 100644 index e10786eb6..000000000 --- a/fi/preparing/bios-setup/sparc.xml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,103 +0,0 @@ -<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> -<!-- original version: 36732 untranslated --> - - - <sect2 arch="sparc" id="invoking-openboot"><title>Invoking OpenBoot</title> - -<para> - -OpenBoot provides the basic functions needed to boot the &arch-title; -architecture. This is rather similar in function to the BIOS in the -x86 architecture, although much nicer. The Sun boot PROMs have a -built-in forth interpreter which lets you do quite a number of things -with your machine, such as diagnostics and simple scripts. - -</para><para> - -To get to the boot prompt you need to hold down the -<keycap>Stop</keycap> key (on older type 4 keyboards, use the -<keycap>L1</keycap> key, if you have a PC keyboard adapter, use -the <keycap>Break</keycap> key) and press the -<keycap>A</keycap> key. The boot PROM will give you a prompt, -either <userinput>ok</userinput> or <userinput>></userinput>. It is -preferred to have the <userinput>ok</userinput> prompt. So if you get -the old style prompt, hit the <keycap>n</keycap> key to get the new -style prompt. - -</para><para> - -If you are using a serial console, send a break to the machine. With Minicom, -use <keycap>Ctrl-A F</keycap>, with cu, hit <keycap>Enter</keycap>, then type -<userinput>%~break</userinput>. Consult the documentation of your terminal -emulator if you are using a different program. - -</para> - </sect2> - - <sect2 arch="sparc" id="boot-dev-select-sun"> - <title>Boot Device Selection</title> - -<para> - -You can use OpenBoot to boot from specific devices, and also to change -your default boot device. However, you need to know some details -about how OpenBoot names devices; it's considerably different from Linux -device naming, described in <xref linkend="device-names"/>. -Also, the command will vary a bit, depending on what version of -OpenBoot you have. More information about OpenBoot can be found in -the <ulink url="&url-openboot;">Sun OpenBoot Reference</ulink>. - -</para><para> - -Typically, with newer revisions, you can use OpenBoot devices such as -<quote>floppy</quote>, <quote>cdrom</quote>, <quote>net</quote>, -<quote>disk</quote>, or <quote>disk2</quote>. These have the obvious -meanings; the <quote>net</quote> device is for booting from the network. -Additionally, the device name can specify a particular partition of a disk, -such as <quote>disk2:a</quote> to boot disk2, first partition. Full -OpenBoot device names have the form - -<informalexample> -<screen> -<replaceable>driver-name</replaceable>@ -<replaceable>unit-address</replaceable>: -<replaceable>device-arguments</replaceable> -</screen></informalexample>. - -In older revisions of OpenBoot, device naming is a bit different: the -floppy device is called <quote>/fd</quote>, and SCSI disk devices are of -the form <quote>sd(<replaceable>controller</replaceable>, -<replaceable>disk-target-id</replaceable>, -<replaceable>disk-lun</replaceable>)</quote>. The command -<userinput>show-devs</userinput> in newer OpenBoot revisions is useful -for viewing the currently configured devices. For full information, -whatever your revision, see the -<ulink url="&url-openboot;">Sun OpenBoot Reference</ulink>. - -</para><para> - -To boot from a specific device, use the command <userinput>boot -<replaceable>device</replaceable></userinput>. You can set this -behavior as the default using the <userinput>setenv</userinput> -command. However, the name of the variable to set changed between -OpenBoot revisions. In OpenBoot 1.x, use the command -<userinput>setenv boot-from -<replaceable>device</replaceable></userinput>. In later revisions of -OpenBoot, use the command <userinput>setenv boot-device -<replaceable>device</replaceable></userinput>. Note, this is also -configurable using the <command>eeprom</command> command on Solaris, -or modifying the appropriate files in -<filename>/proc/openprom/options/</filename>, for example under Linux: - -<informalexample><screen> -# echo disk1:1 > /proc/openprom/options/boot-device -</screen></informalexample> - -and under Solaris: - -<informalexample><screen> -eeprom boot-device=disk1:1 -</screen></informalexample> - -</para> - </sect2> diff --git a/fi/preparing/install-overview.xml b/fi/preparing/install-overview.xml deleted file mode 100644 index 35702d938..000000000 --- a/fi/preparing/install-overview.xml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,167 +0,0 @@ -<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> -<!-- original version: 33719 untranslated --> - - <sect1 id="install-overview"> - <title>Overview of the Installation Process</title> -<para> - -First, just a note about re-installations. With Debian, a -circumstance that will require a complete re-installation of your -system is very rare; perhaps mechanical failure of the hard disk would -be the most common case. - -</para><para> - -Many common operating systems may require a complete installation to -be performed when critical failures take place or for upgrades to new -OS versions. Even if a completely new installation isn't required, -often the programs you use must be re-installed to operate properly in -the new OS. - -</para><para> - -Under &debian;, it is much more likely that your OS can be repaired -rather than replaced if things go wrong. Upgrades never require a -wholesale installation; you can always upgrade in-place. And the -programs are almost always compatible with successive OS releases. If -a new program version requires newer supporting software, the Debian -packaging system ensures that all the necessary software is -automatically identified and installed. The point is, much effort has -been put into avoiding the need for re-installation, so think of it as -your very last option. The installer is <emphasis>not</emphasis> -designed to re-install over an existing system. - -</para><para> - -Here's a road map for the steps you will take during the installation -process. - -</para> - -<orderedlist> -<listitem><para> - -Back up any existing data or documents on the hard disk where you -plan to install. - -</para></listitem> -<listitem><para> - -Gather information about your computer and any needed documentation, -before starting the installation. - -</para></listitem> -<listitem><para> - -Create partition-able space for Debian on your hard disk. - -</para></listitem> -<listitem><para> - -Locate and/or download the installer software and any specialized -driver files your machine requires (except Debian CD users). - -</para></listitem> -<listitem><para> - -Set up boot tapes/floppies/USB sticks, or place boot files (most Debian -CD users can boot from one of the CDs). - -</para></listitem> -<listitem><para> - -Boot the installation system. - -</para></listitem> -<listitem arch="not-s390"><para> - -Select installation language. - -</para></listitem> -<listitem arch="not-s390"><para> - -Activate the ethernet network connection, if available. - -</para></listitem> - -<listitem arch="s390"><para> - -Configure one network interface. - -</para></listitem> -<listitem arch="s390"><para> - -Open a ssh connection to the new system. - -</para></listitem> -<listitem arch="s390"><para> - -Attach one or more DASDs (Direct Access Storage Device). - -</para></listitem> - -<listitem><para> - -Create and mount the partitions on which Debian will be installed. - -</para></listitem> -<listitem><para> - -Watch the automatic download/install/setup of the -<firstterm>base system</firstterm>. - -</para></listitem> -<listitem><para> - -Install a <firstterm>boot loader</firstterm> -which can start up &debian; and/or your existing system. - -</para></listitem> -<listitem><para> - -Load the newly installed system for the first time. - -</para></listitem> -</orderedlist> - -<para> - -If you have problems during the installation, it helps to know which -packages are involved in which steps. Introducing the leading software -actors in this installation drama: - -</para><para> - -The installer software, <classname>debian-installer</classname>, is -the primary concern of this manual. It detects hardware and loads -appropriate drivers, uses <classname>dhcp-client</classname> to set up the -network connection, and runs <classname>debootstrap</classname> to install -the base system packages. Many more actors play smaller parts in this process, -but <classname>debian-installer</classname> has completed its task when -you load the new system for the first time. - -</para><para> - -To tune the system to your needs, <classname>tasksel</classname> allows you -to choose to install various predefined bundles of software like a Web -server or a Desktop environment. - -</para><para> - -When <classname>debian-installer</classname> finishes, before the -first system load, you have only a very basic command line driven -system. The graphical interface which displays windows on your monitor -will not be installed unless you select it with <classname>tasksel</classname>. -It's optional because many &debian; systems are servers which don't really -have any need for a graphical user interface to do their job. - -</para><para arch="not-s390"> - -Just be aware that the X system is completely separate from -<classname>debian-installer</classname>, and in fact is much more -complicated. Installation and trouble shooting of the X window -installation is not within the scope of this manual. - -</para> - </sect1> - diff --git a/fi/preparing/minimum-hardware-reqts.xml b/fi/preparing/minimum-hardware-reqts.xml deleted file mode 100644 index 763e92e70..000000000 --- a/fi/preparing/minimum-hardware-reqts.xml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,135 +0,0 @@ -<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> -<!-- original version: 28672 untranslated --> - - <sect1 id="minimum-hardware-reqts"> -<title>Meeting Minimum Hardware Requirements</title> -<para> - -Once you have gathered information about your computer's hardware, -check that your hardware will let you do the type of installation -that you want to do. - -</para><para arch="not-s390"> - -Depending on your needs, you might manage with less than some of the -recommended hardware listed in the table below. However, most users -risk being frustrated if they ignore these suggestions. - -</para><para arch="i386"> - -A Pentium 100 is the minimum recommended for desktop -systems, and a Pentium II-300 for a Server. - -</para><para arch="m68k"> - -A 68030 or better processor is recommended for m68k -installs. You may get by with a little less drive space than shown. - -</para><para arch="powerpc"> - -Any OldWorld or NewWorld PowerPC can serve well -as a Desktop System. For servers, a minimum 132-Mhz machine is -recommended. - -</para> - -<table> -<title>Recommended Minimum System Requirements</title> -<tgroup cols="3"> -<thead> -<row> - <entry>Install Type</entry><entry>RAM</entry><entry>Hard Drive</entry> -</row> -</thead> - -<tbody> -<row> - <entry>No desktop</entry> - <entry>24 megabytes</entry> - <entry>450 megabytes</entry> -</row><row> - <entry>With Desktop</entry> - <entry>64 megabytes</entry> - <entry>1 gigabyte</entry> -</row><row> - <entry>Server</entry> - <entry>128 megabytes</entry> - <entry>4 gigabytes</entry> -</row> - -</tbody></tgroup></table> - -<para> - -Here is a sampling of some common Debian system configurations. -You can also get an idea of the disk space used by related groups -of programs by referring to <xref linkend="tasksel-size-list"/>. - -</para> -<variablelist> - -<varlistentry> - <term>Standard Server</term> - <listitem><para> - -This is a small server profile, useful for a stripped down server -which does not have a lot of niceties for shell users. It includes an -FTP server, a web server, DNS, NIS, and POP. For these 100MB of disk -space would suffice, and then you would need to add space -for any data you serve up. - -</para></listitem> -</varlistentry> - -<varlistentry arch="not-s390"> - <term>Desktop</term> - <listitem><para> - -A standard desktop box, including the X window system, full desktop -environments, sound, editors, etc. You'll need about 2GB using the -standard desktop task, though it can be done in far less. - -</para></listitem> -</varlistentry> - -<varlistentry arch="not-s390"> - <term>Work Console</term> - <listitem><para> - -A more stripped-down user machine, without the X window system or X -applications. Possibly suitable for a laptop or mobile computer. The -size is around 140MB. - -</para></listitem> -</varlistentry> - -<varlistentry> - <term>Developer</term> - <listitem><para> - -A desktop setup with all the development packages, such as Perl, C, -C++, etc. Size is around 475MB. Assuming you are adding X11 and some -additional packages for other uses, you should plan around 800MB for -this type of machine. - -</para></listitem> -</varlistentry> - -</variablelist><para> - -Remember that these sizes don't include all the other materials which -are usually to be found, such as user files, mail, and data. It is -always best to be generous when considering the space for your own -files and data. Notably, the <filename>/var</filename> partition contains -a lot of state information specific to Debian in addition to its regular -contents like logfiles. The -<command>dpkg</command> files (with information on all installed -packages) can easily consume 20MB. Also, -<command>apt-get</command> puts downloaded packages here before they are -installed. You should -usually allocate at least 100MB for <filename>/var</filename>. - -</para> - - </sect1> - diff --git a/fi/preparing/needed-info.xml b/fi/preparing/needed-info.xml deleted file mode 100644 index 042a13c15..000000000 --- a/fi/preparing/needed-info.xml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,419 +0,0 @@ -<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> -<!-- original version: 35130 untranslated --> - - <sect1 id="needed-info"> - <title>Information You Will Need</title> - - <sect2> - <title>Documentation</title> - - <sect3> - <title>Installation Manual</title> - -<para condition="for_cd"> - -This document you are now reading, in plain ASCII, HTML or PDF format. - -</para> - -<itemizedlist condition="for_cd"> - -&list-install-manual-files; - -</itemizedlist> - -<para condition="for_wdo"> - -The document you are now reading, which is the official version of the -Installation Guide for the &releasename; release of Debian; available -in <ulink url="&url-release-area;/installmanual">various formats and -translations</ulink>. - -</para> - -<para condition="for_alioth"> - -The document you are now reading, which is a development version of the -Installation Guide for the next release of Debian; available in -<ulink url="&url-d-i-alioth-manual;">various formats and -translations</ulink>. - -</para> - -</sect3> - - - <sect3><title>Hardware documentation</title> -<para> - -Often contains useful information on configuring or using your hardware. - -</para> - - <!-- We need the arch dependence for the whole list to ensure proper xml - as long as not architectures have a paragraph --> - <itemizedlist arch="i386;m68k;alpha;sparc;mips;mipsel"> -<listitem arch="i386"><para> - -<ulink url="&url-hardware-howto;">Linux Hardware Compatibility HOWTO</ulink> - -</para></listitem> - -<listitem arch="m68k"><para> - -<ulink url="&url-m68k-faq;">Linux/m68k FAQ</ulink> - -</para></listitem> - -<listitem arch="alpha"><para> - -<ulink url="&url-alpha-faq;">Linux/Alpha FAQ</ulink> - -</para></listitem> - -<listitem arch="sparc"><para> - -<ulink url="&url-sparc-linux-faq;">Linux for SPARC Processors FAQ</ulink> - -</para></listitem> - -<listitem arch="mips;mipsel"><para> - -<ulink url="&url-linux-mips;">Linux/Mips website</ulink> - -</para></listitem> - -</itemizedlist> - </sect3> - - - <sect3 arch="s390"> - <title>&arch-title; Hardware References</title> -<para> - - -Installation instructions and device drivers (DASD, XPRAM, Console, - tape, z90 crypto, chandev, network) for Linux on &arch-title; using - kernel 2.4 - -</para> - -<itemizedlist> -<listitem><para> - -<ulink url="http://oss.software.ibm.com/developerworks/opensource/linux390/docu/l390dd08.pdf">Device Drivers and Installation Commands</ulink> - -</para></listitem> -</itemizedlist> - -<para> - -IBM Redbook describing how Linux can be combined with z/VM on -zSeries and &arch-title; hardware. - -</para> - -<itemizedlist> -<listitem><para> - -<ulink url="http://www.redbooks.ibm.com/pubs/pdfs/redbooks/sg244987.pdf"> -Linux for &arch-title;</ulink> - -</para></listitem> -</itemizedlist> - -<para> - -IBM Redbook describing the Linux distributions available for the -mainframe. It has no chapter about Debian but the basic installation -concepts are the same across all &arch-title; distributions. - -</para> - -<itemizedlist> -<listitem><para> - -<ulink url="http://www.redbooks.ibm.com/pubs/pdfs/redbooks/sg246264.pdf"> -Linux for IBM eServer zSeries and &arch-title;: Distributions</ulink> - -</para></listitem> -</itemizedlist> - </sect3> - - </sect2> - - <sect2 id="fsohi"> - <title>Finding Sources of Hardware Information</title> -<para> - -In many cases, the installer will be able to automatically detect your -hardware. But to be prepared, we do recommend familiarizing -yourself with your hardware before the install. - -</para><para> - -Hardware information can be gathered from: - -</para> - -<itemizedlist> -<listitem><para> - -The manuals that come with each piece of hardware. - -</para></listitem> -<listitem><para> - -The BIOS setup screens of your computer. You can view these screens -when you start your computer by pressing a combination of keys. Check -your manual for the combination. Often, it is the <keycap>Delete</keycap> key. - -</para></listitem> -<listitem><para> - -The cases and boxes for each piece of hardware. - -</para></listitem> - -<listitem arch="i386"><para> - -The System window in the Windows Control Panel. - - -</para></listitem> -<listitem><para> - -System commands or tools in another operating system, including file -manager displays. This source is especially useful for information -about RAM and hard drive memory. - -</para></listitem> -<listitem><para> - -Your system administrator or Internet Service Provider. These -sources can tell you the settings you need to set up your -networking and e-mail. - -</para></listitem> -</itemizedlist> - -<para> - -<table> -<title>Hardware Information Needed for an Install</title> -<tgroup cols="2"> -<thead> -<row> - <entry>Hardware</entry><entry>Information You Might Need</entry> -</row> -</thead> - -<tbody> -<row arch="not-s390"> - <entry morerows="5">Hard Drives</entry> - <entry>How many you have.</entry> -</row> -<row arch="not-s390"><entry>Their order on the system.</entry></row> -<row arch="not-s390;not-m68k"> - <entry>Whether IDE or SCSI (most computers are IDE).</entry> -</row> -<row arch="m68k"> - <entry>Whether IDE or SCSI (most m68k computers are SCSI).</entry> -</row> -<row arch="not-s390"><entry>Available free space.</entry></row> -<row arch="not-s390"><entry>Partitions.</entry></row> -<row arch="not-s390"> - <entry>Partitions where other operating systems are installed.</entry> -</row> - -<row arch="not-s390"> - <entry morerows="5">Monitor</entry> - <entry>Model and manufacturer.</entry> -</row> -<row arch="not-s390"><entry>Resolutions supported.</entry></row> -<row arch="not-s390"><entry>Horizontal refresh rate.</entry></row> -<row arch="not-s390"><entry>Vertical refresh rate.</entry></row> -<row arch="not-s390"> - <entry>Color depth (number of colors) supported.</entry> -</row> -<row arch="not-s390"><entry>Screen size.</entry></row> - -<row arch="not-s390"> - <entry morerows="3">Mouse</entry> - <entry>Type: serial, PS/2, or USB.</entry> -</row> -<row arch="not-s390"><entry>Port.</entry></row> -<row arch="not-s390"><entry>Manufacturer.</entry></row> -<row arch="not-s390"><entry>Number of buttons.</entry></row> - -<row arch="not-s390"> - <entry morerows="1">Network</entry> - <entry>Model and manufacturer.</entry> -</row> -<row arch="not-s390"><entry>Type of adapter.</entry></row> - -<row arch="not-s390"> - <entry morerows="1">Printer</entry> - <entry>Model and manufacturer.</entry> -</row> -<row arch="not-s390"><entry>Printing resolutions supported.</entry></row> - -<row arch="not-s390"> - <entry morerows="2">Video Card</entry> - <entry>Model and manufacturer.</entry> -</row> -<row arch="not-s390"><entry>Video RAM available.</entry></row> -<row arch="not-s390"> - <entry>Resolutions and color depths supported (these should be - checked against your monitor's capabilities).</entry> -</row> - -<row arch="s390"> - <entry morerows="1">DASD</entry> - <entry>Device number(s).</entry> -</row> -<row arch="s390"><entry>Available free space.</entry></row> - -<row arch="s390"> - <entry morerows="2">Network</entry> - <entry>Type of adapter.</entry> -</row> -<row arch="s390"><entry>Device numbers.</entry></row> -<row arch="s390"><entry>Relative adapter number for OSA cards.</entry></row> - -</tbody></tgroup></table> - -</para> - </sect2> - - <sect2> - <title>Hardware Compatibility</title> - -<para> - -Many brand name products work without trouble on Linux. Moreover, -hardware for Linux is improving daily. However, Linux still does not -run as many different types of hardware as some operating systems. - -</para><para arch="i386"> - -In particular, Linux usually cannot run hardware that requires a -running version of Windows to work. - -</para><para arch="i386"> - -Although some Windows-specific hardware can be made to run on Linux, -doing so usually requires extra effort. In addition, Linux drivers -for Windows-specific hardware are usually specific to one Linux -kernel. Therefore, they can quickly become obsolete. - -</para><para arch="i386"> - -So called win-modems are the most common type of this hardware. -However, printers and other equipment may also be Windows-specific. - -</para><para> - -You can check hardware compatibility by: - -<itemizedlist> -<listitem><para> - -Checking manufacturers' web sites for new drivers. - -</para></listitem> -<listitem><para> - -Looking at web sites or manuals for information about emulation. -Lesser known brands can sometimes use the drivers or settings for -better-known ones. - -</para></listitem> -<listitem><para> - -Checking hardware compatibility lists for Linux on web sites -dedicated to your architecture. - -</para></listitem> -<listitem><para> - -Searching the Internet for other users' experiences. - -</para></listitem> -</itemizedlist> - -</para> - </sect2> - - <sect2> - <title>Network Settings</title> - -<para> - -If your computer is connected to a network 24 hours a day (i.e., an -Ethernet or equivalent connection — not a PPP connection), you -should ask your network's system administrator for this information. - -<itemizedlist> -<listitem><para> - -Your host name (you may be able to decide this on your own). - -</para></listitem> -<listitem><para> - -Your domain name. - -</para></listitem> -<listitem><para> - -Your computer's IP address. - -</para></listitem> -<listitem><para> - -The netmask to use with your network. - -</para></listitem> -<listitem><para> - -The IP address of the default gateway system you should route to, if -your network <emphasis>has</emphasis> a gateway. - -</para></listitem> -<listitem><para> - -The system on your network that you should use as a DNS (Domain Name -Service) server. - -</para></listitem> -</itemizedlist> - -</para><para condition="supports-dhcp"> - -On the other hand, if your administrator tells you that a DHCP server -is available and is recommended, then you don't need this information -because the DHCP server will provide it directly to your computer -during the installation process. - -</para><para> - -If you use a wireless network, you should also find out: - -<itemizedlist> -<listitem><para> - -ESSID of your wireless network. - -</para></listitem> -<listitem><para> - -WEP security key (if applicable). - -</para></listitem> -</itemizedlist> - -</para> - </sect2> - - </sect1> diff --git a/fi/preparing/non-debian-partitioning.xml b/fi/preparing/non-debian-partitioning.xml deleted file mode 100644 index 995dda157..000000000 --- a/fi/preparing/non-debian-partitioning.xml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,198 +0,0 @@ -<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> -<!-- original version: 28997 untranslated --> - - <sect1 id="non-debian-partitioning"> - <title>Pre-Partitioning for Multi-Boot Systems</title> -<para> - -Partitioning your disk simply refers to the act of breaking up your -disk into sections. Each section is then independent of the others. -It's roughly equivalent to putting up walls inside a house; if you add -furniture to one room it doesn't affect any other room. - -</para><para arch="s390"> - -Whenever this section talks about <quote>disks</quote> you should translate -this into a DASD or VM minidisk in the &arch-title; world. Also a machine -means an LPAR or VM guest in this case. - -</para><para> - -If you already have an operating system on your system - -<phrase arch="i386"> -(Windows 9x, Windows NT/2000/XP, OS/2, MacOS, Solaris, FreeBSD, …) -</phrase> - -<phrase arch="alpha"> -(Tru64 (Digital UNIX), OpenVMS, Windows NT, FreeBSD, …) -</phrase> - -<phrase arch="s390"> -(VM, z/OS, OS/390, …) -</phrase> - -<phrase arch="m68k"> -(Amiga OS, Atari TOS, Mac OS, …) -</phrase> - -and want to stick Linux on the same disk, you will need to repartition -the disk. Debian requires its own hard disk partitions. It cannot be -installed on Windows or MacOS partitions. It may be able to share some -partitions with other Linux systems, but that's not covered here. At -the very least you will need a dedicated partition for the Debian -root. - -</para><para> - -You can find information about your current partition setup by using -a partitioning tool for your current operating system<phrase -arch="i386">, such as fdisk or PartitionMagic</phrase><phrase -arch="powerpc">, such as Drive Setup, HD Toolkit, or MacTools</phrase><phrase -arch="m68k">, such as HD SC Setup, HDToolBox, or SCSITool</phrase><phrase -arch="s390">, such as the VM diskmap</phrase>. Partitioning tools always -provide a way to show existing partitions without making changes. - -</para><para> - -In general, changing a partition with a file system already on -it will destroy any information there. Thus you should always make -backups before doing any repartitioning. Using the analogy of the -house, you would probably want to move all the furniture out of the -way before moving a wall or you risk destroying it. - -</para><para arch="hppa" condition="FIXME"> - -<emphasis>FIXME: write about HP-UX disks?</emphasis> - -</para><para> - -If your computer has more than one hard disk, you may want to dedicate -one of the hard disks completely to Debian. If so, you don't need to -partition that disk before booting the installation system; the -installer's included partitioning program can handle the job nicely. - -</para><para> - -If your machine has only one hard disk, and you would like to -completely replace the current operating system with &debian;, -you also can wait to partition as part of the installation process -(<xref linkend="partman"/>), after you have booted the -installation system. However this only works if you plan to boot the -installer system from tapes, CD-ROM or files on a connected machine. -Consider: if you boot from files placed on the hard disk, and then -partition that same hard disk within the installation system, thus -erasing the boot files, you'd better hope the installation is -successful the first time around. At the least in this case, you -should have some alternate means of reviving your machine like the -original system's installation tapes or CDs. - -</para><para> - -If your machine already has multiple partitions, and enough space can -be provided by deleting and replacing one or more of them, then you -too can wait and use the Debian installer's partitioning program. You -should still read through the material below, because there may be -special circumstances like the order of the existing partitions within -the partition map, that force you to partition before installing -anyway. - -</para><para arch="i386"> - -If your machine has a FAT or NTFS filesystem, as used by DOS and Windows, -you can wait and use Debian installer's partitioning program to -resize the filesystem. - -</para><para> - -If none of the above apply, you'll need to partition your hard disk before -starting the installation to create partition-able space for -Debian. If some of the partitions will be owned by other operating -systems, you should create those partitions using native operating -system partitioning programs. We recommend that you do -<emphasis>not</emphasis> attempt to create partitions for &debian; -using another operating system's tools. Instead, you should just -create the native operating system's partitions you will want to -retain. - -</para><para> - -If you are going to install more than one operating system on the same -machine, you should install all other system(s) before proceeding with -Linux installation. Windows and other OS installations may destroy -your ability to start Linux, or encourage you to reformat non-native -partitions. - -</para><para> - -You can recover from these actions or avoid them, but installing -the native system first saves you trouble. - -</para><para arch="powerpc"> - -In order for OpenFirmware to automatically boot &debian; the Linux -partitions should appear before all other partitions on the disk, -especially MacOS boot partitions. This should be kept in mind when -pre-partitioning; you should create a Linux placeholder partition to -come <emphasis>before</emphasis> the other bootable partitions on the -disk. (The small partitions dedicated to Apple disk drivers are not -bootable.) You can delete the placeholder with the Linux partition -tools later during the actual install, and replace it with Linux -partitions. - -</para><para> - -If you currently have one hard disk with one partition (a common setup -for desktop computers), and you want to multi-boot the native -operating system and Debian, you will need to: - - <orderedlist> -<listitem><para> - -Back up everything on the computer. - -</para></listitem> -<listitem><para> - -Boot from the native operating system installer media such as CD-ROM -or tapes. - -<phrase arch="powerpc">When booting from a MacOS CD, hold the -<keycap>c</keycap> key while -booting to force the CD to become the active MacOS system.</phrase> - -</para></listitem> -<listitem><para> - -Use the native partitioning tools to create native system -partition(s). Leave either a place holder partition or free space for -&debian;. - -</para></listitem> -<listitem><para> - -Install the native operating system on its new partition. - -</para></listitem> -<listitem><para> - -Boot back into the native system to verify everything's OK, - and to download the Debian installer boot files. - -</para></listitem> -<listitem><para> - -Boot the Debian installer to continue installing Debian. - -</para></listitem> -</orderedlist> - -</para> - -&nondeb-part-alpha.xml; -&nondeb-part-i386.xml; -&nondeb-part-m68k.xml; -&nondeb-part-sparc.xml; -&nondeb-part-powerpc.xml; - - </sect1> diff --git a/fi/preparing/nondeb-part/alpha.xml b/fi/preparing/nondeb-part/alpha.xml deleted file mode 100644 index de065da6d..000000000 --- a/fi/preparing/nondeb-part/alpha.xml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,83 +0,0 @@ -<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> -<!-- original version: 28997 untranslated --> - - - <sect2 arch="alpha"><title>Partitioning in Tru64 UNIX</title> -<para> - -Tru64 UNIX, formerly known as Digital UNIX, which is in turn formerly -known as OSF/1, uses the partitioning scheme similar to the BSD <quote>disk -label</quote>, which allows for up to eight partitions per disk drive. The -partitions are numbered <quote>1</quote> through to <quote>8</quote> in -Linux and <quote>lettered</quote> <quote>a</quote> through to -<quote>h</quote> in UNIX. Linux kernels 2.2 and higher always correspond -<quote>1</quote> to <quote>a</quote>, <quote>2</quote> to <quote>b</quote> -and so on. For example, <filename>rz0e</filename> in Tru64 UNIX would most -likely be called <filename>sda5</filename> in Linux. - -</para><para> - -Partitions in a Tru64 disk label may overlap. Moreover, if this disk -will be used from Tru64, the <quote>c</quote> partition is required to span -the entire disk (thus overlapping all other non-empty partitions). Under -Linux this makes <filename>sda3</filename> identical to -<filename>sda</filename> (<filename>sdb3</filename> to -<filename>sdb</filename>, if present, and so on). However, the partman -partitioning tool used by &d-i; cannot handle overlapping partitions at -present. As a result, it is currently not recommended to share disks -between Tru64 and Debian. Partitions on Tru64 disks can be mounted -under Debian after installation has been completed. - -</para><para> - -Another conventional requirement is for the <quote>a</quote> partition to -start from the beginning of the disk, so that it always includes the boot -block with the disk label. If you intend to boot Debian from that disk, you -need to size it at least 2MB to fit aboot and perhaps a kernel. -Note that this partition is only required for compatibility; you must -not put a file system onto it, or you'll destroy data. - -</para><para> - -It is possible, and indeed quite reasonable, to share a swap partition -between UNIX and Linux. In this case it will be needed to do a -<command>mkswap</command> on that partition every time the system is rebooted -from UNIX into Linux, as UNIX will damage the swap signature. You may -want to run <command>mkswap</command> from the Linux start-up scripts before -adding swap space with <command>swapon -a</command>. - -</para><para> - -If you want to mount UNIX partitions under Linux, note that Digital UNIX -can use two different file system types, UFS and AdvFS, of which Linux -only understands the former. - -</para> - </sect2> - - <sect2 arch="alpha"><title>Partitioning in Windows NT</title> - -<para> - -Windows NT uses the PC-style partition table. If you are manipulating -existing FAT or NTFS partitions, it is recommended that you use the -native Windows NT tools (or, more conveniently, you can also -repartition your disk from the AlphaBIOS setup menu). Otherwise, it -is not really necessary to partition from Windows; the Linux -partitioning tools will generally do a better job. Note that when you -run NT, the Disk Administrator may offer you to write a <quote>harmless -signature</quote> on non-Windows disks if you have any. -<emphasis>Never</emphasis> let it do that, as this signature will destroy -the partition information. - -</para><para> - -If you plan to boot Linux from an ARC/AlphaBIOS/ARCSBIOS console, you -will need a (small) FAT partition for MILO. 5 MB is quite -sufficient. If Windows NT is installed, its 6 MB bootstrap partition -can be employed for this purpose. Debian &releasename; does not support -installing MILO. If you already have MILO installed on your system, or -install MILO from other media, Debian can still be booted from ARC. - -</para> - </sect2> diff --git a/fi/preparing/nondeb-part/i386.xml b/fi/preparing/nondeb-part/i386.xml deleted file mode 100644 index eb0b6afb1..000000000 --- a/fi/preparing/nondeb-part/i386.xml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,121 +0,0 @@ -<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> -<!-- original version: 36732 untranslated --> - - - <sect2 arch="i386"><title>Partitioning From DOS or Windows</title> -<para> - -If you are manipulating existing FAT or NTFS partitions, it is -recommended that you either use the scheme below or native Windows or -DOS tools. Otherwise, it is not really necessary to partition from DOS -or Windows; the Linux partitioning tools will generally do a better -job. - -</para><para> - -But if you have a large IDE disk, and are using neither LBA addressing, -overlay drivers (sometimes provided by hard disk manufacturers), nor a -new (post 1998) BIOS that supports large disk access extensions, then -you must locate your Debian boot partition carefully. In this case, -you will have to put the boot partition into the first 1024 cylinders -of your hard drive (usually around 524 megabytes, without BIOS -translation). This may require that you move an existing FAT or NTFS -partition. - -</para> - - <sect3 id="lossless"> - <title>Lossless Repartitioning When Starting From DOS, Win-32 or OS/2 - </title> - -<para> - -One of the most common installations is onto a system that already -contains DOS (including Windows 3.1), Win32 (such as Windows 95, 98, Me, -NT, 2000, XP), or OS/2, and it is desired to put Debian onto the same disk -without destroying the previous system. Note that the installer supports -resizing of FAT and NTFS filesystems as used by DOS and Windows. Simply -start the installer, select the option to <menuchoice> <guimenuitem>Manually -edit partition table</guimenuitem> </menuchoice>, select the partition to -resize, and specify its new size. -So in most cases you should not need to use the method described below. - -</para><para> - -Before going any further, you should have decided how you will be -dividing up the disk. The method in this section will only split a -partition into two pieces. One will contain the original OS and the -other will be used for Debian. During the installation of Debian, you -will be given the opportunity to use the Debian portion of the disk as you -see fit, i.e., as swap or as a file system. - -</para><para> - -The idea is to move all the data on the partition to the beginning, -before changing the partition information, so that nothing will be -lost. It is important that you do as little as possible between the -data movement and repartitioning to minimize the chance of a file -being written near the end of the partition as this will decrease the -amount of space you can take from the partition. - -</para><para> - -The first thing needed is a copy of <command>fips</command> which is -available in the <filename>tools/</filename> directory on your nearest Debian -mirror. Unzip the archive and copy the files -<filename>RESTORRB.EXE</filename>, <filename>FIPS.EXE</filename> and -<filename>ERRORS.TXT</filename> to a bootable floppy. A bootable floppy can -be created using the command <filename>sys a:</filename> under DOS. -<command>fips</command> comes with very good documentation which you may -want to read. You will definitely need to read the documentation if -you use a disk compression driver or a disk manager. Create the disk -and read the documentation <emphasis>before</emphasis> you defragment the disk. - -</para><para> - -The next thing needed is to move all the data to the beginning of the -partition. <command>defrag</command>, which comes standard with DOS 6.0 and -later, can easily do the job. See the <command>fips</command> documentation -for a list of other software that may do the trick. Note that if you -have Windows 9x, you must run <command>defrag</command> from there, since -DOS doesn't understand VFAT, which is used to support for long -filenames, used in Windows 95 and higher. - -</para><para> - -After running the defragmenter (which can take a while on a large -disk), reboot with the <command>fips</command> disk you created in the -floppy drive. Simply type <filename>a:\fips</filename> and follow the directions. - -</para><para> - -Note that there are many other partition managers out there, in -case <command>fips</command> doesn't do the trick for you. - -</para> - </sect3> - - <sect3 id="partitioning-for-dos"><title>Partitioning for DOS</title> - -<para> - -If you are partitioning for DOS drives, or changing the size of DOS -partitions, using Linux tools, many people experience problems working -with the resulting FAT partitions. For instance, some have reported -slow performance, consistent problems with <command>scandisk</command>, or -other weird errors in DOS or Windows. - -</para><para> - -Apparently, whenever you create or resize a partition for DOS use, -it's a good idea to fill the first few sectors with zeros. You should do -this prior to running DOS's <command>format</command> command by executing -the following command from Linux: - -<informalexample><screen> -# dd if=/dev/zero of=/dev/hdXX bs=512 count=4 -</screen></informalexample> - -</para> - </sect3> - </sect2> diff --git a/fi/preparing/nondeb-part/m68k.xml b/fi/preparing/nondeb-part/m68k.xml deleted file mode 100644 index dbea5b44e..000000000 --- a/fi/preparing/nondeb-part/m68k.xml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,127 +0,0 @@ -<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> -<!-- original version: 28997 untranslated --> - - - <sect2 arch="m68k"><title>Partitioning in AmigaOS</title> -<para> - -If you are running AmigaOS, you can use the <command>HDToolBox</command> -program to adjust your native partitions prior to installation. - -</para> - </sect2> - - <sect2 arch="m68k"><title>Partitioning in Atari TOS</title> -<para> - -Atari partition IDs are three ASCII characters, use <quote>LNX</quote> for -data and <quote>SWP</quote> for swap partitions. If using the low memory -installation method, a small Minix partition is also needed (about 2 MB), -for which the partition ID is <quote>MNX</quote>. Failure to set the -appropriate partition IDs not only prevents the Debian installation process -from recognizing the partitions, but also results in TOS attempting to use -the Linux partitions, which confuses the hard disk driver and renders the -whole disk inaccessible. - -</para><para> - -There are a multitude of third party partitioning tools available (the -Atari <command>harddisk</command> utility doesn't permit changing the -partition ID); this manual cannot give detailed descriptions for all -of them. The following description covers <command>SCSITool</command> (from -Hard+Soft GmBH). - -<orderedlist> -<listitem><para> - -Start <command>SCSITool</command> and select the disk you want to partition -(<guimenu>Disk</guimenu> menu, item <guimenuitem>select</guimenuitem>). - -</para></listitem> -<listitem><para> - -From the <guimenu>Partition</guimenu> menu, select either -<guimenuitem>New</guimenuitem> to add new partitions or change the -existing partition sizes, or <guimenuitem>Change</guimenuitem> to -change one specific partition. Unless you have already created -partitions with the right sizes and only want to change the partition -ID, <guimenuitem>New</guimenuitem> is probably the best choice. - -</para></listitem> -<listitem><para> - -For the <guimenuitem>New</guimenuitem> choice, select -<guilabel>existing</guilabel> in the dialog box -prompting the initial settings. The next window shows a list of -existing partitions which you can adjust using the scroll buttons, or -by clicking in the bar graphs. The first column in the partition list -is the partition type; just click on the text field to edit it. When -you are finished changing partition settings, save the changes by -leaving the window with the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button. - -</para></listitem> -<listitem><para> - -For the <guimenuitem>Change</guimenuitem> option, select the partition -to change in the selection list, and select <guilabel>other -systems</guilabel> in the dialog box. The -next window lists detailed information about the location of this -partition, and lets you change the partition ID. Save changes by -leaving the window with the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button. - -</para></listitem> -<listitem><para> - -Write down the Linux names for each of the partitions you created or -changed for use with Linux — see <xref linkend="device-names"/>. - -</para></listitem> -<listitem><para> - -Quit <command>SCSITool</command> using the -<guimenuitem>Quit</guimenuitem> item from the <guimenu>File</guimenu> -menu. The computer will reboot to make sure the changed partition -table is used by TOS. If you changed any TOS/GEM partitions, they will -be invalidated and have to be reinitialized (we told you to back up -everything on the disk, didn't we?). - -</para></listitem> -</orderedlist> - -</para><para> - -There is a partitioning tool for Linux/m68k called -<command>atari-fdisk</command> in the installation system, but for now we -recommend you partition your disk using a TOS partition editor or some -disk tool. If your partition editor doesn't have an option to edit the -partition type, you can do this crucial step at a later stage (from -the booted temporary install RAMdisk). <command>SCSITool</command> is only -one of the partition editors we know of which supports selection of -arbitrary partition types. There may be others; select the tool that -suits your needs. - -</para> -</sect2> - - <sect2 arch="m68k"><title>Partitioning in MacOS</title> -<para> - -Partitioning tools for Macintosh tested include <command>pdisk</command>, -<command>HD SC Setup</command> 7.3.5 (Apple), <command>HDT</command> 1.8 (FWB), -<command>SilverLining</command> (LaCie), and <command>DiskTool</command> (Tim -Endres, GPL). Full versions are required for <command>HDT</command> and -<command>SilverLining</command>. The Apple tool requires a patch in order -to recognize third-party disks (a description on how to patch <command>HD -SC Setup</command> using <command>ResEdit</command> can be found at -<ulink url="http://www.euronet.nl/users/ernstoud/patch.html"></ulink>). - -</para><para> - -For IDE based Macs, you need to use <command>Apple Drive Setup</command> to create -empty space for the Linux partitions, and complete the partitioning under -Linux, or use the MacOS version of pdisk available from the MkLinux FTP -server. - -</para> -</sect2> - diff --git a/fi/preparing/nondeb-part/powerpc.xml b/fi/preparing/nondeb-part/powerpc.xml deleted file mode 100644 index 8b70dc6a3..000000000 --- a/fi/preparing/nondeb-part/powerpc.xml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,43 +0,0 @@ -<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> -<!-- original version: 28672 untranslated --> - - - <sect2 arch="powerpc"><title>MacOS/OSX Partitioning</title> - -<para> - -The <application>Apple Drive Setup</application> application can be found in the -<filename>Utilities</filename> folder on the MacOS CD. It will not adjust existing -partitions; it is limited to partitioning the entire disk at once. The -disk driver partitions don't show up in <application>Drive Setup</application>. - -</para><para> - -Remember to create a placeholder partition for GNU/Linux, preferably -positioned first in the disk layout. it doesn't matter what type it -is, it will be deleted and replaced later inside the &debian; installer. - -</para><para> - -If you are planning to install both MacOS 9 and OS X, it is best to -create separate partitions for OS 9 and OS X. If they are installed on -the same partition, <application>Startup Disk</application> (and reboot) must be used to select -between the two; the choice between the two systems can't be made at -boot time. With separate partitions, separate options for OS 9 and OS -X will appear when holding the <keycap>option</keycap> key at boot time, and separate -options can be installed in the <application>yaboot</application> boot menu as well. Also, -Startup Disk will de-bless all other mountable partitions, which can -affect GNU/Linux booting. Both OS 9 and OS X partitions will be -accessible from either OS 9 or OS X. - -</para><para> - -GNU/Linux is unable to access information on UFS partitions, but does -support HFS+ (aka MacOS Extended) partitions. OS X requires one of these -two types for its boot partition. MacOS 9 can be installed on either HFS -(aka MacOS Standard) or HFS+. To share information between the MacOS and -GNU/Linux systems, an exchange partition is handy. HFS, HFS+ and MS-DOS FAT -partitions are supported by both MacOS and Linux. - -</para> - </sect2> diff --git a/fi/preparing/nondeb-part/sparc.xml b/fi/preparing/nondeb-part/sparc.xml deleted file mode 100644 index 9bcc1239b..000000000 --- a/fi/preparing/nondeb-part/sparc.xml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,44 +0,0 @@ -<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> -<!-- original version: 28997 untranslated --> - - - <sect2 arch="sparc"><title>Partitioning from SunOS</title> - -<para> - -It's perfectly fine to partition from SunOS; in fact, if you intend to -run both SunOS and Debian on the same machine, it is recommended that -you partition using SunOS prior to installing Debian. The Linux -kernel understands Sun disk labels, so there are no problems there. -Just make sure you leave room for the Debian root partition within the -first 1GB area of the boot disk. You can also place the kernel image on a -UFS partition if that is easier than putting the root partition there. -SILO supports booting Linux and SunOS from either EXT2 (Linux), UFS -(SunOS), romfs and iso9660 (CDROM) partitions. - -</para> - </sect2> - - <sect2 arch="sparc"><title>Partitioning from Linux or another OS</title> - -<para> - -Whatever system you are using to partition, make sure you create a -<quote>Sun disk label</quote> on your boot disk. This is the only kind of -partition scheme that the OpenBoot PROM understands, and so it's the -only scheme from which you can boot. In <command>fdisk</command>, the -<keycap>s</keycap> key is used to create Sun disk labels. You only need to do this -on drives that do not already have a Sun disk label. If you are using a -drive that was previously formatted using a PC (or other architecture) you -must create a new disk label, or problems with the disk geometry will most -likely occur. - -</para><para> - -You will probably be using <command>SILO</command> as your boot loader (the -small program which runs the operating system kernel). -<command>SILO</command> has certain requirements for partition sizes and -location; see <xref linkend="partitioning"/>. - -</para> - </sect2> diff --git a/fi/preparing/pre-install-bios-setup.xml b/fi/preparing/pre-install-bios-setup.xml deleted file mode 100644 index 74d57db2d..000000000 --- a/fi/preparing/pre-install-bios-setup.xml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,151 +0,0 @@ -<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> -<!-- original version: 28997 untranslated --> - - <sect1 id="pre-install-bios-setup"> - <title>Pre-Installation Hardware and Operating System Setup</title> -<para> - -This section will walk you through pre-installation hardware setup, if -any, that you will need to do prior to installing Debian. Generally, -this involves checking and possibly changing firmware settings for -your system. The <quote>firmware</quote> is the core software used by the -hardware; it is most critically invoked during the bootstrap process -(after power-up). Known hardware issues affecting the reliability of -&debian; on your system are also highlighted. - -</para> - -&bios-setup-i386.xml; -&bios-setup-m68k.xml; -&bios-setup-powerpc.xml; -&bios-setup-sparc.xml; -&bios-setup-s390.xml; - - <sect2><title>Hardware Issues to Watch Out For</title> -<para arch="not-s390"> - -Many people have tried operating their 90 MHz CPU at 100 MHz, etc. It -sometimes works, but is sensitive to temperature and other factors and -can actually damage your system. One of the authors of this document -over-clocked his own system for a year, and then the system started -aborting the <command>gcc</command> program with an unexpected signal -while it was compiling the operating system kernel. Turning the CPU -speed back down to its rated value solved the problem. - -</para><para arch="not-s390"> - -The <command>gcc</command> compiler is often the first thing to die -from bad memory modules (or other hardware problems that change data -unpredictably) because it builds huge data structures that it -traverses repeatedly. An error in these data structures will cause it -to execute an illegal instruction or access a non-existent -address. The symptom of this will be <command>gcc</command> dying from -an unexpected signal. - -</para><para arch="m68k"> - -Atari TT RAM boards are notorious for RAM problems under Linux; if you -encounter any strange problems, try running at least the kernel in -ST-RAM. Amiga users may need to exclude RAM using a booter memfile. - -<phrase condition="FIXME"><emphasis> - -FIXME: more description of this needed. - -</emphasis></phrase> - -</para><para arch="i386"> - -The very best motherboards support parity RAM and will actually tell -you if your system has a single-bit error in RAM. Unfortunately, they -don't have a way to fix the error, thus they generally crash -immediately after they tell you about the bad RAM. Still, it's better -to be told you have bad memory than to have it silently insert errors -in your data. Thus, the best systems have motherboards that support -parity and true-parity memory modules; see -<xref linkend="Parity-RAM"/>. - -</para><para arch="i386"> - -If you do have true-parity RAM and your motherboard can handle it, be -sure to enable any BIOS settings that cause the motherboard to -interrupt on memory parity errors. - -</para> - - <sect3 arch="i386"><title>The Turbo Switch</title> -<para> - -Many systems have a <emphasis>turbo</emphasis> switch that controls -the speed of the CPU. Select the high-speed setting. If your BIOS -allows you to disable software control of the turbo switch (or -software control of CPU speed), do so and lock the system in -high-speed mode. We have one report that on a particular system, while -Linux is auto-probing (looking for hardware devices) it can -accidentally touch the software control for the turbo switch. - -</para> - </sect3> - - <sect3 arch="i386"><title>Cyrix CPUs and Floppy Disk Errors</title> -<para> - -Many users of Cyrix CPUs have had to disable the cache in their -systems during installation, because the floppy disk has errors if -they do not. If you have to do this, be sure to re-enable your cache -when you are finished with installation, as the system runs -<emphasis>much</emphasis> slower with the cache disabled. - -</para><para> - -We don't think this is necessarily the fault of the Cyrix CPU. It may -be something that Linux can work around. We'll continue to look into -the problem. For the technically curious, we suspect a problem with -the cache being invalid after a switch from 16-bit to 32-bit code. - -</para> - </sect3> - - <sect3 arch="i386"><title>Peripheral Hardware Settings</title> -<para> - -You may have to change some settings or jumpers on your computer's -peripheral cards. Some cards have setup menus, while others rely on -jumpers. This document cannot hope to provide complete information on -every hardware device; what it hopes to provide is useful tips. - -</para><para> - -If any cards provide <quote>mapped memory</quote>, the memory should be -mapped somewhere between 0xA0000 and 0xFFFFF (from 640K to just below 1 -megabyte) or at an address at least 1 megabyte greater than the total -amount of RAM in your system. - -</para> - </sect3> - - <sect3 arch="i386" id="usb-keyboard-config"> - <title>USB BIOS support and keyboards</title> -<para> - -If you have no AT-style keyboard and only a USB model, you may need -to enable legacy AT keyboard emulation in your BIOS setup. Only do this if -the installation system fails to use your keyboard in USB mode. Conversely, -for some systems (especially laptops) you may need to disable legacy USB -support if your keyboard does not respond. -Consult your main board manual and look in the BIOS for <quote>Legacy -keyboard emulation</quote> or <quote>USB keyboard support</quote> options. - -</para> - </sect3> - - <sect3><title>More than 64 MB RAM</title> -<para> - -The Linux Kernel cannot always detect what amount of RAM you have. If -this is the case please look at <xref linkend="boot-parms"/>. - -</para> - </sect3> - </sect2> - </sect1> diff --git a/fi/preparing/preparing.xml b/fi/preparing/preparing.xml deleted file mode 100644 index 7fb274e80..000000000 --- a/fi/preparing/preparing.xml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,21 +0,0 @@ -<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> -<!-- original version: 16467 untranslated --> - -<chapter id="preparing"> - <title>Before Installing &debian;</title> -<para> - -This chapter deals with the preparation for installing Debian before you even -boot the installer. This includes backing up your data, gathering information -about your hardware, and locating any necessary information. - -</para> - -&install-overview.xml; -&backup.xml; -&needed-info.xml; -&minimum-hardware-reqts.xml; -&non-debian-partitioning.xml; -&pre-install-bios-setup.xml; - -</chapter> diff --git a/fi/using-d-i/components.xml b/fi/using-d-i/components.xml deleted file mode 100644 index 2d3228e49..000000000 --- a/fi/using-d-i/components.xml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,186 +0,0 @@ -<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> -<!-- original version: 35395 untranslated --> - - <sect1 id="module-details"> - <title>Using Individual Components</title> -<para> - -In this section we will describe each installer component in -detail. The components have been grouped into stages that should -be recognizable for users. They are presented in the order they -appear during the install. Note that not all modules will be used -for every installation; which modules are actually used depends on -the installation method you use and on your hardware. - -</para> - - <sect2 id="di-setup"> - <title>Setting up Debian Installer and Hardware Configuration</title> -<para> - -Let's assume the Debian Installer has booted and you are facing its -first screen. At this time, the capabilities of &d-i; are still quite -limited. It doesn't know much about your hardware, preferred language, -or even the task it should perform. Don't worry. Because &d-i; is quite -clever, it can automatically probe your hardware, locate the rest -of its components and upgrade itself to a capable installation system. - -However, you still need to help &d-i; with some information it can't -determine automatically (like selecting your preferred language, keyboard -layout or desired network mirror). - -</para><para> - -You will notice that &d-i; performs <firstterm>hardware detection</firstterm> -several times during this stage. The first time is targeted specifically -at the hardware needed to load installer components (e.g. your CD-ROM or -network card). As not all drivers may be available during this first run, -hardware detection needs to be repeated later in the process. - -</para> - -&module-lowmem.xml; -&module-localechooser.xml; -&module-kbd-chooser.xml; -&module-s390-netdevice.xml; -&module-ddetect.xml; -&module-cdrom-detect.xml; -&module-iso-scan.xml; -&module-anna.xml; -&module-netcfg.xml; -&module-choose-mirror.xml; - - </sect2> - - <sect2 id="di-partition"> - <title>Partitioning and Mount Point Selection</title> -<para> - -At this time, after hardware detection has been executed a final time, -&d-i; should be at its full strength, customized for the user's needs -and ready to do some real work. - -As the title of this section indicates, the main task of the next few -components lies in partitioning your disks, creating filesystems, -assigning mountpoints and optionally configuring closely related issues -like LVM or RAID devices. - -</para> - -&module-s390-dasd.xml; -&module-partman.xml; -&module-autopartkit.xml; -&module-partitioner.xml; -&module-partconf.xml; -&module-lvmcfg.xml; -&module-mdcfg.xml; - </sect2> - - <sect2 id="di-system-setup"> - <title>Setting up the System</title> -<para> - -After partitioning the installer asks a few more questions that will be -used to set up the system it is about to install. - -</para> - -&module-tzsetup.xml; -&module-clock-setup.xml; -&module-user-setup.xml; -</sect2> - - <sect2 id="di-install-base"> - <title>Installing the Base System</title> -<para> - -Although this stage is the least problematic, it consumes a significant -fraction of the install because it downloads, verifies and unpacks the whole -base system. If you have a slow computer or network connection, this could -take some time. - -</para> - -&module-base-installer.xml; - </sect2> - - <sect2 id="di-install-software"> - <title>Installing Additional Software</title> -<para> - -After the base system is installed, you have a usable but limited system. -Most users will want to add additional software to the system to tune it to -their needs, and the installer lets you do so. This step can take even -longer than installing the base system if you have a slow computer or -network. - -</para> -&module-apt-setup.xml; -&module-pkgsel.xml; - </sect2> - - <sect2 id="di-make-bootable"> - <title>Making Your System Bootable</title> - -<para condition="supports-nfsroot"> - -If you are installing a diskless workstation, obviously, booting off -the local disk isn't a meaningful option, and this step will be -skipped. <phrase arch="sparc">You may wish to set the OpenBoot to boot -from the network by default; see <xref -linkend="boot-dev-select-sun"/>.</phrase> - -</para><para> - -Note that multiple operating systems booting on a single machine is -still something of a black art. This document does not even attempt -to document the various boot managers, which vary by architecture and -even by subarchitecture. You should see your boot manager's -documentation for more information. - -</para> - -&module-os-prober.xml; -&module-alpha-aboot-installer.xml; -&module-hppa-palo-installer.xml; -&module-i386-grub-installer.xml; -&module-i386-lilo-installer.xml; -&module-ia64-elilo-installer.xml; -&module-mips-arcboot-installer.xml; -&module-mipsel-colo-installer.xml; -&module-mipsel-delo-installer.xml; -&module-powerpc-yaboot-installer.xml; -&module-powerpc-quik-installer.xml; -&module-s390-zipl-installer.xml; -&module-sparc-silo-installer.xml; -&module-nobootloader.xml; - </sect2> - - <sect2 id="di-finish"> - <title>Finishing the Installation</title> -<para> - -These are the last bits to do before rebooting to your new system. It -mostly consists of tidying up after the &d-i;. - -</para> - -&module-prebaseconfig.xml; - </sect2> - - <sect2 id="di-miscellaneous"> - <title>Miscellaneous</title> -<para> - -The components listed in this section are usually not involved in the -installation process, but are waiting in the background to help the -user in case something goes wrong. - -</para> - -&module-save-logs.xml; -&module-cdrom-checker.xml; -&module-shell.xml; -&module-network-console.xml; - </sect2> - </sect1> diff --git a/fi/using-d-i/modules/alpha/aboot-installer.xml b/fi/using-d-i/modules/alpha/aboot-installer.xml deleted file mode 100644 index 2d58e0f74..000000000 --- a/fi/using-d-i/modules/alpha/aboot-installer.xml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,19 +0,0 @@ -<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> -<!-- original version: 25496 untranslated --> - - <sect3 arch="alpha"> - <title>Install <command>aboot</command> on a Hard Disk</title> -<para> - -If you have booted from SRM, if you select this option, the installer -will write <command>aboot</command> to the first sector of the disk on -which you installed Debian. Be <emphasis>very</emphasis> careful — it -is <emphasis>not</emphasis> possible to boot multiple operating -systems (e.g. GNU/Linux, Free/Open/NetBSD, OSF/1 a.k.a. Digital Unix -a.k.a. Tru64 Unix, or OpenVMS) from the same disk. If you also have a -different operating system installed on the disk where you have -installed Debian, you will have to boot GNU/Linux from a floppy -instead. - -</para> - </sect3> diff --git a/fi/using-d-i/modules/anna.xml b/fi/using-d-i/modules/anna.xml deleted file mode 100644 index 5c156a8fa..000000000 --- a/fi/using-d-i/modules/anna.xml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,2 +0,0 @@ -<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> -<!-- original version: 11648 untranslated --> diff --git a/fi/using-d-i/modules/apt-setup.xml b/fi/using-d-i/modules/apt-setup.xml deleted file mode 100644 index c571e15f1..000000000 --- a/fi/using-d-i/modules/apt-setup.xml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,40 +0,0 @@ -<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> -<!-- original version: 33820 untranslated --> - - <sect3 id="apt-setup"> - <title>Configuring apt</title> - -<para> - -The main means that people use to install packages on their system is -via a program called <command>apt-get</command>, from the -<classname>apt</classname> package.<footnote> - -<para> - -Note that the actual program that installs packages is called -<command>dpkg</command>. However, this program is more of a low-level -tool. <command>apt-get</command> is a higher-level tool as it will -invoke <command>dpkg</command> as appropriate and also because it knows -to install other packages which are required for the package you're -trying to install, as well as how to retrieve the package from your -CD, the network, or wherever. - -</para> -</footnote> -Other front-ends for package management, like <command>aptitude</command> -and <command>synaptic</command> are also in use and depend on -<command>apt-get</command>. These front-ends are recommended for new users, -since they integrate some additional features (package searching and status checks) -in a nice user interface. - -</para><para> - -<command>apt</command> must be configured so that it knows where to retrieve -packages from. The installer largely takes care of this automatically based on -what it knows about your installation medium. The results of this configuration -are written to the file <filename>/etc/apt/sources.list</filename>, and you can -examine and edit it to your liking after the install is complete. - -</para> - </sect3> diff --git a/fi/using-d-i/modules/autopartkit.xml b/fi/using-d-i/modules/autopartkit.xml deleted file mode 100644 index 5c156a8fa..000000000 --- a/fi/using-d-i/modules/autopartkit.xml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,2 +0,0 @@ -<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> -<!-- original version: 11648 untranslated --> diff --git a/fi/using-d-i/modules/base-installer.xml b/fi/using-d-i/modules/base-installer.xml deleted file mode 100644 index cbc6d3bca..000000000 --- a/fi/using-d-i/modules/base-installer.xml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,31 +0,0 @@ -<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> -<!-- original version: 33720 untranslated --> - - <sect3 id="base-installer"> - <title>Base System Installation</title> - -<para> - -During the Base installation, package unpacking and setup messages are -redirected to <userinput>tty4</userinput>. You can access this -terminal by pressing -<keycombo><keycap>Left Alt</keycap><keycap>F4</keycap></keycombo>; -get back to the main installer process with -<keycombo><keycap>Left Alt</keycap><keycap>F1</keycap></keycombo>. - - -</para><para> - -The unpack/setup messages generated by the base installation are saved in -<filename>/var/log/syslog</filename> when the installation is -performed over a serial console. - -</para><para> - -As part of the installation, a Linux kernel will be installed. At the default -priority, the installer will choose one for you that best matches your -hardware. In lower priority modes, you will be able to choose from a list -of available kernels. - -</para> - </sect3> diff --git a/fi/using-d-i/modules/cdrom-checker.xml b/fi/using-d-i/modules/cdrom-checker.xml deleted file mode 100644 index d4c2f588b..000000000 --- a/fi/using-d-i/modules/cdrom-checker.xml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,2 +0,0 @@ -<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> -<!-- original version: 14337 untranslated --> diff --git a/fi/using-d-i/modules/cdrom-detect.xml b/fi/using-d-i/modules/cdrom-detect.xml deleted file mode 100644 index 5c156a8fa..000000000 --- a/fi/using-d-i/modules/cdrom-detect.xml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,2 +0,0 @@ -<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> -<!-- original version: 11648 untranslated --> diff --git a/fi/using-d-i/modules/choose-mirror.xml b/fi/using-d-i/modules/choose-mirror.xml deleted file mode 100644 index 746804ecd..000000000 --- a/fi/using-d-i/modules/choose-mirror.xml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,17 +0,0 @@ -<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> -<!-- original version: 16990 untranslated --> - -<!-- -- Component is only selected and executed if the installer needs to load - installer components or the base system from the network - (either local or the internet). -- This means you first have to configure a network interface. -- A list of countries is displayed with the default based on the country you - selected earlier. -- Note that not all mirrors are equal (see http://www.nl.debian.org/mirror/list) -- Selection of a local mirror (at top of the list: manual selection). -- After selecting a country, a list of mirrors in the country will be shown. - -- The selected mirror will be tested. -- How to handle problems with mirrors. --->
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/fi/using-d-i/modules/clock-setup.xml b/fi/using-d-i/modules/clock-setup.xml deleted file mode 100644 index 9c3191536..000000000 --- a/fi/using-d-i/modules/clock-setup.xml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,34 +0,0 @@ -<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> -<!-- original version: 35518 untranslated --> - - <sect3 id="clock-setup"> - <title>Configuring the Clock</title> - -<para> - -The installer might ask you if the computer's clock is set to UTC. Normally -this question is avoided if possible and the installer tries to work out -whether the clock is set to UTC based on things like what other operating -systems are installed. - -</para><para> - -In expert mode you will always be able to choose -whether or not the clock is set to UTC. -<phrase arch="m68k;powerpc">Macintosh hardware clocks are normally -set to local time. If you want to dual-boot, select local time instead of -GMT.</phrase> -<phrase arch="i386">Systems that (also) run Dos or Windows are normally -set to local time. If you want to dual-boot, select local time -instead of GMT.</phrase> - -</para><para> - -Note that the installer does not currently allow you to actually set the -time in the computer's clock. You can set the clock to the current time -after you have installed, if it is incorrect or if it was previously not -set to UTC. - -</para> - - </sect3> diff --git a/fi/using-d-i/modules/ddetect.xml b/fi/using-d-i/modules/ddetect.xml deleted file mode 100644 index 5c156a8fa..000000000 --- a/fi/using-d-i/modules/ddetect.xml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,2 +0,0 @@ -<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> -<!-- original version: 11648 untranslated --> diff --git a/fi/using-d-i/modules/hppa/palo-installer.xml b/fi/using-d-i/modules/hppa/palo-installer.xml deleted file mode 100644 index 84a3608e8..000000000 --- a/fi/using-d-i/modules/hppa/palo-installer.xml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,20 +0,0 @@ -<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> -<!-- original version: 14602 untranslated --> - - <sect3 arch="hppa"> - <title><command>palo</command>-installer</title> -<para> - -The bootloader on PA-RISC is <quote>palo</quote>. -<command>PALO</command> is similar in configuration and usage to -<command>LILO</command>, with a few exceptions. First of all, -<command>PALO</command> allows you to boot any kernel image on your -boot partition. This is because <command>PALO</command> can actually -read Linux partitions. - -</para><para condition="FIXME"> - -hppa FIXME ( need more info ) - -</para> - </sect3> diff --git a/fi/using-d-i/modules/i386/grub-installer.xml b/fi/using-d-i/modules/i386/grub-installer.xml deleted file mode 100644 index 64e1e7ffb..000000000 --- a/fi/using-d-i/modules/i386/grub-installer.xml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,26 +0,0 @@ -<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> -<!-- original version: 18640 untranslated --> - - <sect3 arch="i386"> - <title>Install the <command>Grub</command> Boot Loader - on a Hard Disk</title> -<para> - -The main &architecture; boot loader is called <quote>grub</quote>. -Grub is a flexible and robust boot loader and a good default choice for -newbies and old hands alike. - -</para><para> - -By default, grub will be installed into the Master Boot Record (MBR), where -it will take over complete control of the boot process. If you prefer, you -can install it elsewhere. See the grub manual for complete information. - -</para><para> - -If you do not want to install grub at all, use the Back button to get to -the main menu, and from there select whatever bootloader you would like to -use. - -</para> - </sect3> diff --git a/fi/using-d-i/modules/i386/lilo-installer.xml b/fi/using-d-i/modules/i386/lilo-installer.xml deleted file mode 100644 index 30726d83a..000000000 --- a/fi/using-d-i/modules/i386/lilo-installer.xml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,70 +0,0 @@ -<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> -<!-- original version: 22935 untranslated --> - - <sect3 arch="i386"> - <title>Install the <command>LILO</command> Boot Loader - on a Hard Disk</title> -<para> - -The second &architecture; boot loader is called <quote>LILO</quote>. -It is an old complex program which offers lots of functionality, -including DOS, Windows, and OS/2 boot management. Please carefully -read the instructions in the directory -<filename>/usr/share/doc/lilo/</filename> if you have special needs; -also see the <ulink url="&url-lilo-howto;">LILO mini-HOWTO</ulink>. - -</para> -<note><para> - -Currently the LILO installation will only create menu entries for other -operating systems if these can be <firstterm>chainloaded</firstterm>. -This means you may have to manually add a menu entry for operating -systems like GNU/Linux and GNU/Hurd after the installation. - -</para></note> -<para> - -&d-i; presents you three choices where to install the -<command>LILO</command> boot loader: - -<variablelist> -<varlistentry> -<term>Master Boot Record (MBR)</term><listitem><para> - -This way the <command>LILO</command> will take complete control of the -boot process. - -</para></listitem></varlistentry> -<varlistentry> -<term>new Debian partition</term><listitem><para> - -Choose this if you want to use another boot -manager. <command>LILO</command> will install itself at the beginning -of the new Debian partition and it will serve as a secondary boot -loader. - -</para></listitem></varlistentry> -<varlistentry> -<term>Other choice</term><listitem><para> - -Useful for advanced users who want to install <command>LILO</command> -somewhere else. In this case you will be asked for desired -location. You can use devfs style names, such as those that start with -<filename>/dev/ide</filename>, <filename>/dev/scsi</filename>, and -<filename>/dev/discs</filename>, as well as traditional names, such as -<filename>/dev/hda</filename> or <filename>/dev/sda</filename>. - -</para></listitem></varlistentry> -</variablelist> - -</para><para> - -If you can no longer boot into Windows 9x (or DOS) after this step, -you'll need to use a Windows 9x (MS-DOS) boot disk and use the -<userinput>fdisk /mbr</userinput> command to reinstall the MS-DOS -master boot record — however, this means that you'll need to use -some other way to get back into Debian! For more information on this -please read <xref linkend="reactivating-win"/>. - -</para> - </sect3> diff --git a/fi/using-d-i/modules/ia64/elilo-installer.xml b/fi/using-d-i/modules/ia64/elilo-installer.xml deleted file mode 100644 index 7953befe6..000000000 --- a/fi/using-d-i/modules/ia64/elilo-installer.xml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,135 +0,0 @@ -<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> -<!-- original version: 24321 untranslated --> - - <sect3 arch="ia64"> - <title>Install the <command>ELILO</command> Boot Loader - on a Hard Disk</title> -<para> - -The &architecture; boot loader is called <quote>elilo</quote>. -It is modeled on the <quote>lilo</quote> boot loader for the -x86 architecture and uses a similar configuration file. -However, instead of writing an MBR or partition boot record to -the disk, it copies the necessary files to a separate FAT formatted -disk partition and modifies the <guimenuitem>EFI Boot Manager</guimenuitem> -menu in the firmware to point to the files in the EFI partition. -The <command>elilo</command> boot loader is really in two parts. -The <filename>/usr/sbin/elilo</filename> command manages the partition and -copies file into it. -The <filename>elilo.efi</filename> program is copied into the EFI -partition and then run by the <quote>EFI Boot Manager</quote> to actually -do the work of loading and starting the Linux kernel. - -</para><para> - -The <quote>elilo</quote> configuration and installation is done as the -last step of installing the packages of the base installation. -&d-i; will present you with a list of potential disk partitions that it -has found suitable for an EFI partition. -Select the partition you set up earlier in the installation, typically -a partition on the same disk that contains your -<emphasis>root</emphasis> filesystem. - -</para> - - <warning><title>Choose the correct partition!</title> - -<para> - -The criteria for selecting a partition is that it is FAT format -filesystem with its <emphasis>boot</emphasis> flag set. -&d-i; may show multiple choices depending on what it finds from scanning -all of the disks of the system including EFI partitions of other system -disks and EFI diagnostic partitions. -Remember, the <command>elilo</command> may format the partition during -the installation, erasing any previous contents! - -</para></warning> - - </sect3> - - <sect3 arch="ia64"> - <title>EFI Partition Contents</title> - -<para> - -The EFI partition is a FAT filesystem format partition on one of the -hard disks of the system, usually the same disk that contains the -<emphasis>root</emphasis> filesystem. -It is normally not mounted on a running system as it is only needed -by the <quote>EFI Boot Manager</quote> to load the system and the -installer part of the <command>elilo</command> writes to the filesystem -directly. -The <command>/usr/sbin/elilo</command> utility writes the following files -into the <filename>efi/debian</filename> directory of the EFI -partition during the installation. -Note that the <quote>EFI Boot Manager</quote> would find these files -using the path <filename>fs<replaceable>n</replaceable>:\efi\debian</filename>. -There may be other files in this filesystem as well over time as -the system is updated or re-configured. - -</para> - -<variablelist> - -<varlistentry> -<term><filename>elilo.conf</filename></term> -<listitem><para> - -This is the configuration file read by the boot loader when it starts. -It is a copy of the <filename>/etc/elilo.conf</filename> with -the filenames re-written to refer to files in the EFI partition. - -</para></listitem></varlistentry> - -<varlistentry> -<term><filename>elilo.efi</filename></term> -<listitem><para> - -This is the boot loader program that the <quote>EFI Boot Manager</quote> -runs to boot the system. -It is the program behind the <guimenuitem>Debian GNU/Linux</guimenuitem> -menu item of the <quote>EFI Boot Manager</quote> command menu. - -</para></listitem></varlistentry> - -<varlistentry> -<term><filename>initrd.img</filename></term> -<listitem><para> - -This is the initial root filesystem used to boot the kernel. -It is a copy of the file referenced in the -<filename>/etc/elilo.conf</filename>. -In a standard Debian installation it would be the file in -<filename>/boot</filename> pointed to by the symbolic link -<filename>/initrd.img</filename>. - -</para></listitem></varlistentry> - -<varlistentry> -<term><filename>readme.txt</filename></term> -<listitem><para> - -This is a small text file warning you that the contents of the -directory are managed by the <command>elilo</command> and that -any local changes would be lost at the next time -<filename>/usr/sbin/elilo</filename> is run. - -</para></listitem></varlistentry> - -<varlistentry> -<term><filename>vmlinuz</filename></term> -<listitem><para> - -This is the compressed kernel itself. -It is a copy of the file referenced in the -<filename>/etc/elilo.conf</filename>. -In a standard Debian installation it would be the file in -<filename>/boot</filename> pointed to by the symbolic link -<filename>/vmlinuz</filename>. - -</para></listitem></varlistentry> - -</variablelist> - - </sect3> diff --git a/fi/using-d-i/modules/iso-scan.xml b/fi/using-d-i/modules/iso-scan.xml deleted file mode 100644 index 5d5a055d4..000000000 --- a/fi/using-d-i/modules/iso-scan.xml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,47 +0,0 @@ -<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> -<!-- original version: 23058 untranslated --> - - <sect3 id="iso-scan"> - <title>Looking for the Debian Installer ISO Image</title> -<para> - -When installing via the <emphasis>hd-media</emphasis> method, there -will be a moment where you need to find and mount the Debian Installer -iso image in order to get the rest of the installation files. The -component <command>iso-scan</command> does exactly this. - -</para><para> - -At first, <command>iso-scan</command> automatically mounts all block -devices (e.g. partitions) which have some known filesystem on them and -sequentially searches for filenames ending with -<filename>.iso</filename> (or <filename>.ISO</filename> for that -matter). Beware that the first attempt scans only files in the root -directory and in the first level of subdirectories (i.e. it finds -<filename>/<replaceable>whatever</replaceable>.iso</filename>, -<filename>/data/<replaceable>whatever</replaceable>.iso</filename>, -but not -<filename>/data/tmp/<replaceable>whatever</replaceable>.iso</filename>). -After an iso image has been found, <command>iso-scan</command> checks -its content to determine if the image is a valid Debian iso image or -not. In the former case we are done, in the latter -<command>iso-scan</command> seeks for another image. - -</para><para> - -In case the previous attempt to find an installer iso image fails, -<command>iso-scan</command> will ask you whether you would like to -perform a more thorough search. This pass doesn't just look into the -topmost directories, but really traverses whole filesystem. - -</para><para> - -If <command>iso-scan</command> does not discover your installer iso -image, reboot back to your original operating system and check if the -image is named correctly (ending in <filename>.iso</filename>), if it is -placed on a filesystem recognizable by &d-i;, and if it is not -corrupted (verify the checksum). Experienced Unix users could do this -without rebooting on the second console. - -</para> - </sect3> diff --git a/fi/using-d-i/modules/kbd-chooser.xml b/fi/using-d-i/modules/kbd-chooser.xml deleted file mode 100644 index 6024762ee..000000000 --- a/fi/using-d-i/modules/kbd-chooser.xml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,73 +0,0 @@ -<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> -<!-- original version: 28672 untranslated --> - - <sect3 id="kbd-chooser"> - <title>Choosing a Keyboard</title> - -<para> - -Keyboards are often tailored to the characters used in a language. -Select a layout that conforms to the keyboard you are using, or -select something close if the keyboard layout you want -isn't represented. Once the system installation is complete, you'll be -able to select a keyboard layout from a wider range of choices (run -<command>kbdconfig</command> as root after you have completed the -installation). - -</para><para> - -Move the highlight to the keyboard selection you desire and press -&enterkey;. Use the arrow keys to move the highlight — they are -in the same place in all national language keyboard layouts, so they -are independent of the keyboard configuration. An 'extended' keyboard -is one with <keycap>F1</keycap> through <keycap>F10</keycap> keys -along the top row. - -</para><para arch="mipsel"> - -On DECstations there is currently no loadable keymap available, -so you have to skip the keyboard selection and keep the default -kernel keymap (LK201 US). This may change in the future as it -depends on further Linux/MIPS kernel development. - -</para><para arch="powerpc"> - -There are two keyboard layouts for US keyboards; the qwerty/mac-usb-us -(Apple USB) layout will place the Alt function on the -<keycap>Command/Apple</keycap> key (in the keyboard position next to -the <keycap>space</keycap> key similar to <keycap>Alt</keycap> on -PC keyboards), while the qwerty/us (Standard) layout will place the -Alt function on the <keycap>Option</keycap> key (engraved with 'alt' -on most Mac keyboards). In other respects the two layouts are similar. - -</para> - -<note arch="sparc"><para> - -If you are installing on a system that has a Sun USB keyboard and have -booted the installer with the default 2.4 kernel, the keyboard will not -be identified correctly by the installation system. The installer will show -you a list of Sun type keymaps to choose from, but selecting one of these -will result in a non-working keyboard. If you are installing with the 2.6 -kernel, there is no problem. - -</para><para> - -To get a working keyboard, you should boot the installer with parameter -<userinput>debconf/priority=medium</userinput>. When you get to keyboard -selection<footnote> - -<para> -If you are installing at default priority you should use the <userinput>Go -Back</userinput> button to return to the installer menu when you are shown -the list of Sun type keymaps. -</para> - -</footnote>, choose <quote>No keyboard to configure</quote> if you have a -keyboard with an American (US) layout, or choose <quote>USB keyboard</quote> -if you have a keyboard with a localized layout. Selecting <quote>No keyboard -to configure</quote> will leave the kernel keymap in place, which is correct -for US keyboards. - -</para></note> - </sect3> diff --git a/fi/using-d-i/modules/localechooser.xml b/fi/using-d-i/modules/localechooser.xml deleted file mode 100644 index bd4c50342..000000000 --- a/fi/using-d-i/modules/localechooser.xml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,67 +0,0 @@ -<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> -<!-- original version: 33725 untranslated --> - - - <sect3 id="localechooser"> - <title>Selecting Localization Options</title> - -<para> - -In most cases the first questions you will be asked concern the selection -of localization options to be used both for the installation and for the -installed system. The localization options consist of language, country -and locales. - -</para><para> - -The language you choose will be used for the rest of the installation -process, provided a translation of the different dialogs is available. -If no valid translation is available for the selected language, the -installer will default to English. - -</para><para> - -The selected country will be used later in the installation process to -pick the default timezone and a Debian mirror appropriate for your -geographic location. Language and country together will be used to set -the default locale for your system and to help select your keyboard. - -</para><para> - -You will first be asked to select your preferred language. The language -names are listed in both English (left side) and in the language itself -(right side); the names on the right side are also shown in the proper -script for the language. The list is sorted on the English names. -At the top of the list is an extra option that allows you to select the -<quote>C</quote> locale instead of a language. Choosing the <quote>C</quote> -locale will result in the installation proceding in English; the installed -system will have no localization support as the <classname>locales</classname> -package will not be installed. - -</para><para> - -If you selected a language that is recognized as an official language for -more than one country<footnote> - -<para> - -In technical terms: where multiple locales exist for that language with -differing country codes. - -</para> - -</footnote>, you will next be asked to select a country. -If you choose <guimenuitem>Other</guimenuitem> at the bottom of the list, -you will be presented with a list of all countries, grouped by continent. -If the language has only one country associated with it, that country -will be selected automatically. - -</para><para> - -A default locale will be selected based on the selected language and country. -If you are installing at medium or low priority, you will have the option -of selecting a different default locale and of selecting additional locales to -be generated for the installed system. - -</para> - </sect3> diff --git a/fi/using-d-i/modules/lowmem.xml b/fi/using-d-i/modules/lowmem.xml deleted file mode 100644 index 15cb78f91..000000000 --- a/fi/using-d-i/modules/lowmem.xml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,21 +0,0 @@ -<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> -<!-- original version: 16990 untranslated --> - - <sect3 id="lowmem"> - <title>Check available memory</title> - -<para> - -One of the first things &d-i; does, is to check available memory. -If the available memory is limited, this component will make some -changes in the installation process which hopefully will allow -you to install &debian; on your system. - -</para><para> - -During a low memory install, not all components will be available. -One of the limitations is that you won't be able to choose a -language for the installation. - -</para> - </sect3>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/fi/using-d-i/modules/lvmcfg.xml b/fi/using-d-i/modules/lvmcfg.xml deleted file mode 100644 index 4c680ab58..000000000 --- a/fi/using-d-i/modules/lvmcfg.xml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,58 +0,0 @@ -<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> -<!-- original version: 33725 untranslated --> - - <sect3 id="lvmcfg"> - <title>Configuring Logical Volume Manager (LVM)</title> -<para> - -If you are working with computers at the level of system administrator -or <quote>advanced</quote> user, you have surely seen the situation -where some disk partition (usually the most important one) was short on -space, while some other partition was grossly underused and you had to -manage this situation with moving stuff around, symlinking, etc. - -</para><para> - -To avoid the described situation you can use Logical Volume Manager -(LVM). Simply said, with LVM you can combine your partitions -(<firstterm>physical volumes</firstterm> in LVM lingo) to form -a virtual disc (so called <firstterm>volume group</firstterm>), which -can then be divided into virtual partitions (<firstterm>logical -volumes</firstterm>). The point is that logical volumes (and of course -underlying volume groups) can span across several physical discs. - -</para><para> - -Now when you realize you need more space for your old 160GB -<filename>/home</filename> partition, you can simply add a new 300GB -disc to the computer, join it with your existing volume group and then -resize the logical volume which holds your <filename>/home</filename> -filesystem and voila — your users have some room again on their -renewed 460GB partition. This example is of course a bit -oversimplified. If you haven't read it yet, you should consult the -<ulink url="&url-lvm-howto;">LVM HOWTO</ulink>. - -</para><para> - -LVM setup in &d-i; is quite simple. At first, you have to mark your -partitions to be used as physical volumes for LVM. (This is done in -<command>partman</command> in the <guimenu>Partition -settings</guimenu> menu where you should select <menuchoice> -<guimenu>Use as:</guimenu> <guimenuitem>physical volume for -LVM</guimenuitem> </menuchoice>.) Then start the -<command>lvmcfg</command> module (either directly from -<command>partman</command> or from the &d-i;'s main menu) and combine -physical volumes to volume group(s) under the <guimenuitem>Modify -volume groups (VG)</guimenuitem> menu. After that, you should create -logical volumes on the top of volume groups from the menu -<guimenuitem>Modify logical volumes (LV)</guimenuitem>. - -</para><para> - -After returning from <command>lvmcfg</command> back to -<command>partman</command>, you will see any created logical volumes -in the same way as ordinary partitions (and you should treat them like -that). - -</para> - </sect3> diff --git a/fi/using-d-i/modules/mdcfg.xml b/fi/using-d-i/modules/mdcfg.xml deleted file mode 100644 index 04f76a6d4..000000000 --- a/fi/using-d-i/modules/mdcfg.xml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,222 +0,0 @@ -<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> -<!-- original version: 33725 untranslated --> - - <sect3 id="mdcfg"> - <title>Configuring Multidisk Device (Software RAID)</title> -<para> - -If you have more than one harddrive<footnote><para> - -To be honest, you can construct MD device even from partitions -residing on single physical drive, but that won't bring you anything -useful. - -</para></footnote> in your computer, you can use -<command>mdcfg</command> to setup your drives for increased -performance and/or better reliability of your data. The result is -called <firstterm>Multidisk Device</firstterm> (or after its most -famous variant <firstterm>software RAID</firstterm>). - -</para><para> - -MD is basically a bunch of partitions located on different disks and -combined together to form a <emphasis>logical</emphasis> device. This -device can then be used like an ordinary partition (i.e. in -<command>partman</command> you can format it, assign a mountpoint, -etc.). - -</para><para> - -The benefit you gain depends on a type of a MD device you are -creating. Currently supported are: - -<variablelist> -<varlistentry> - -<term>RAID0</term><listitem><para> - -Is mainly aimed at performance. RAID0 splits all incoming data into -<firstterm>stripes</firstterm> and distributes them equally over each -disk in the array. This can increase the speed of read/write -operations, but when one of the disks fails, you will loose -<emphasis>everything</emphasis> (part of the information is still on -the healthy disk(s), the other part <emphasis>was</emphasis> on the -failed disk). - -</para><para> - -The typical use for RAID0 is a partition for video editing. - -</para></listitem> -</varlistentry> -<varlistentry> - -<term>RAID1</term><listitem><para> - -Is suitable for setups where reliability is the first concern. It -consists of several (usually two) equally sized partitions where every -partition contains exactly the same data. This essentially means three -things. First, if one of your disks fails, you still have the data -mirrored on the remaining disks. Second, you can use only a fraction -of the available capacity (more precisely, it is the size of the -smallest partition in the RAID). Third, file reads are load balanced among -the disks, which can improve performance on a server, such as a file -server, that tends to be loaded with more disk reads than writes. - -</para><para> - -Optionally you can have a spare disk in the array which will take the -place of the failed disk in the case of failure. - -</para></listitem> -</varlistentry> -<varlistentry> - -<term>RAID5</term><listitem><para> - -Is a good compromise between speed, reliability and data redundancy. -RAID5 splits all incomming data into stripes and distributes them -equally on all but one disks (similar to RAID0). Unlike RAID0, RAID5 -also computes <firstterm>parity</firstterm> information, which gets -written on the remaining disk. The parity disk is not static (that -would be called RAID4), but is changing periodically, so the parity -information is distributed equally on all disks. When one of the -disks fails, the missing part of information can be computed from -remaining data and its parity. RAID5 must consist of at least three -active partitions. Optionally you can have a spare disk in the array -which will take the place of the failed disk in the case of failure. - -</para><para> - -As you can see, RAID5 has similar degree of reliability like RAID1 -while achieving less redundancy. On the other hand it might be a bit -slower on write operation than RAID0 due to computation of parity -information. - -</para></listitem> -</varlistentry> -</variablelist> - -To sum it up: - -<informaltable> -<tgroup cols="5"> -<thead> -<row> - <entry>Type</entry> - <entry>Minimum Devices</entry> - <entry>Spare Device</entry> - <entry>Survives disk failure?</entry> - <entry>Available Space</entry> -</row> -</thead> - -<tbody> -<row> - <entry>RAID0</entry> - <entry>2</entry> - <entry>no</entry> - <entry>no</entry> - <entry>Size of the smallest partition multiplied by number of devices in RAID</entry> -</row> - -<row> - <entry>RAID1</entry> - <entry>2</entry> - <entry>optional</entry> - <entry>yes</entry> - <entry>Size of the smallest partition in RAID</entry> -</row> - -<row> - <entry>RAID5</entry> - <entry>3</entry> - <entry>optional</entry> - <entry>yes</entry> - <entry> - Size of the smallest partition multiplied by (number of devices in - RAID minus one) - </entry> -</row> - -</tbody></tgroup></informaltable> - -</para><para> - -If you want to know the whole truth about Software RAID, have a look -at <ulink url="&url-software-raid-howto;">Software RAID HOWTO</ulink>. - -</para><para> - -To create a MD device, you need to have the desired partitions it -should consist of marked for use in a RAID. (This is done in -<command>partman</command> in the <guimenu>Partition -settings</guimenu> menu where you should select <menuchoice> -<guimenu>Use as:</guimenu> <guimenuitem>physical volume for -RAID</guimenuitem> </menuchoice>.) - -</para><warning><para> - -Support for MD is a relatively new addition to the installer. -You may experience problems for some RAID levels and in combination -with some bootloaders if you try to use MD for the root -(<filename>/</filename>) filesystem. For experienced users, it may be -possible to work around some of these problems by executing some -configuration or installation steps manually from a shell. - -</para></warning><para> - -Next, you should choose <guimenuitem>Configure software -RAID</guimenuitem> from the main <command>partman</command> menu. -On the first screen of <command>mdcfg</command> simply select -<guimenuitem>Create MD device</guimenuitem>. You will be presented with -a list of supported types of MD devices, from which you should choose -one (e.g. RAID1). What follows depends on the type of MD you selected. -</para> - -<itemizedlist> -<listitem><para> - -RAID0 is simple — you will be issued with the list of available -RAID partitions and your only task is to select the partitions which -will form the MD. - -</para></listitem> -<listitem><para> - -RAID1 is a bit more tricky. First, you will be asked to enter the -number of active devices and the number of spare devices which will -form the MD. Next, you need to select from the list of available RAID -partitions those that will be active and then those that will be -spare. The count of selected partitions must be equal to the number -provided few seconds ago. Don't worry. If you make a mistake and -select different number of partitions, the &d-i; won't let you -continue until you correct the issue. - -</para></listitem> -<listitem><para> - -RAID5 has similar setup procedure as RAID1 with the exception that you -need to use at least <emphasis>three</emphasis> active partitions. - -</para></listitem> -</itemizedlist> - -<para> - -It is perfectly possible to have several types of MD at once. For -example if you have three 200 GB hard drives dedicated to MD, each -containing two 100 GB partitions, you can combine first partitions on -all three disk into the RAID0 (fast 300 GB video editing partition) -and use the other three partitions (2 active and 1 spare) for RAID1 -(quite reliable 100 GB partition for <filename>/home</filename>). - -</para><para> - -After you setup MD devices to your liking, you can -<guimenuitem>Finish</guimenuitem> <command>mdcfg</command> to return -back to the <command>partman</command> to create filesystems on your -new MD devices and assign them the usual attributes like mountpoints. - -</para> - </sect3> diff --git a/fi/using-d-i/modules/mips/arcboot-installer.xml b/fi/using-d-i/modules/mips/arcboot-installer.xml deleted file mode 100644 index 2e522562e..000000000 --- a/fi/using-d-i/modules/mips/arcboot-installer.xml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,69 +0,0 @@ -<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> -<!-- original version: 35613 untranslated --> - - <sect3 arch="mips"> - <title><command>arcboot</command>-installer</title> -<para> - -The boot loader on SGI machines is <command>arcboot</command>. -It has to be installed on the same hard disk as the kernel (this is done -automatically by the installer). Arcboot supports different configurations -which are set up in <filename>/etc/arcboot.conf</filename>. Each -configuration has a unique name, -the default setup as created by the installer is <quote>linux</quote>. -After arcboot has been installed, the system can be booted from hard disk -by setting some firmware environment variables entering - -<informalexample><screen> -<userinput> setenv SystemPartition scsi(<replaceable>scsi</replaceable>)disk(<replaceable>disk</replaceable>)rdisk(0)partition(0)</userinput> -<userinput> setenv OSLoadPartition scsi(<replaceable>scsi</replaceable>)disk(<replaceable>disk</replaceable>)rdisk(0)partition(<replaceable>partnr</replaceable>)</userinput> -<userinput> setenv OSLoader arcboot</userinput> -<userinput> setenv OSLoadFilename <replaceable>config</replaceable></userinput> -<userinput> setenv AutoLoad yes</userinput> -</screen></informalexample> - -on the firmware prompt, and then typing <command>boot</command>. - -</para> - -<variablelist> -<varlistentry> -<term> <replaceable>scsi</replaceable> </term> -<listitem><para> - -is the SCSI bus to be booted from, this is <userinput>0</userinput> -for the onboard controllers - -</para></listitem> -</varlistentry> -<varlistentry> -<term> <replaceable>disk</replaceable> </term> -<listitem><para> - -is the SCSI ID of the hard disk on which <command>arcboot</command> is -installed - -</para></listitem> -</varlistentry> -<varlistentry> -<term> <replaceable>partnr</replaceable> </term> -<listitem><para> - -is the number of the partition on which -<filename>/etc/arcboot.conf</filename> resides - -</para></listitem> -</varlistentry> -<varlistentry> -<term> <replaceable>config</replaceable> </term> -<listitem><para> - -is the name of the configuration entry in -<filename>/etc/arcboot.conf</filename>, which is <quote>linux</quote> by -default. - -</para></listitem> -</varlistentry> -</variablelist> - - </sect3> diff --git a/fi/using-d-i/modules/mipsel/colo-installer.xml b/fi/using-d-i/modules/mipsel/colo-installer.xml deleted file mode 100644 index d4c2f588b..000000000 --- a/fi/using-d-i/modules/mipsel/colo-installer.xml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,2 +0,0 @@ -<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> -<!-- original version: 14337 untranslated --> diff --git a/fi/using-d-i/modules/mipsel/delo-installer.xml b/fi/using-d-i/modules/mipsel/delo-installer.xml deleted file mode 100644 index 7325398ac..000000000 --- a/fi/using-d-i/modules/mipsel/delo-installer.xml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,76 +0,0 @@ -<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> -<!-- original version: 24663 untranslated --> - - <sect3 arch="mipsel"> - <title><command>delo</command>-installer</title> -<para> - -The boot loader on DECstations is <command>DELO</command>. -It has to be installed on the same hard disk as the kernel (this is done -automatically by the installer). DELO supports different configurations -which are set up in <filename>/etc/delo.conf</filename>. Each -configuration has a unique name, -the default setup as created by the installer is <quote>linux</quote>. -After DELO has been installed, the system can be booted from hard disk -by entering - -<informalexample><screen> -<userinput>boot <replaceable>#</replaceable>/rz<replaceable>id</replaceable> <replaceable>partnr</replaceable>/<replaceable>name</replaceable></userinput> -</screen></informalexample> - -on the firmware prompt. - -</para> - -<variablelist> -<varlistentry> -<term> <replaceable>#</replaceable> </term> -<listitem><para> - -is the TurboChannel device to be booted from, on most DECstations this -is <userinput>3</userinput> for the onboard controllers - -</para></listitem> -</varlistentry> -<varlistentry> -<term> <replaceable>id</replaceable> </term> -<listitem><para> - -is the SCSI ID of the hard disk on which <command>DELO</command> is -installed - -</para></listitem> -</varlistentry> -<varlistentry> -<term> <replaceable>partnr</replaceable> </term> -<listitem><para> - -is the number of the partition on which -<filename>/etc/delo.conf</filename> resides - -</para></listitem> -</varlistentry> -<varlistentry> -<term> <replaceable>name</replaceable> </term> -<listitem><para> - -is the name of the configuration entry in -<filename>/etc/delo.conf</filename>, which is <quote>linux</quote> by -default. - -</para></listitem> -</varlistentry> -</variablelist> - -<para> - -In case <filename>/etc/delo.conf</filename> is on the first partition -on the disk and the default configuration shall be booted, it is -sufficient to use - -<informalexample><screen> -<userinput>boot #/rz<replaceable>id</replaceable></userinput> -</screen></informalexample> - -</para> - </sect3> diff --git a/fi/using-d-i/modules/netcfg.xml b/fi/using-d-i/modules/netcfg.xml deleted file mode 100644 index 3584b8041..000000000 --- a/fi/using-d-i/modules/netcfg.xml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,58 +0,0 @@ -<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> -<!-- original version: 23058 untranslated --> - - <sect3 id="netcfg"> - <title>Configuring Network</title> - -<para> - -As you enter this step, if the system detects that you have more than -one network device, you'll be asked to choose which device will be -your <emphasis>primary</emphasis> network interface, i.e. the one -which you want to use for installation. The other interfaces won't be -configured at this time. You may configure additional interfaces after -installation is complete; see the <citerefentry> -<refentrytitle>interfaces</refentrytitle> <manvolnum>5</manvolnum> -</citerefentry> man page. - -</para><para> - -By default, &d-i; tries to configure your computer's network -automatically via DHCP. If the DHCP probe succeeds, you are done. If the -probe fails, it may be caused by many factors ranging from unplugged -network cable, to a misconfigured DHCP setup. Or maybe you don't have -a DHCP server in your local network at all. For further explanation -check the error messages on the third console. In any case, you will -be asked if you want to retry, or if you want to perform manual -setup. DHCP servers are sometimes really slow in their responses, so -if you are sure everything is in place, try again. - -</para><para> - -The manual network setup in turn asks you a number of questions about -your network, notably -<computeroutput>IP address</computeroutput>, -<computeroutput>Netmask</computeroutput>, -<computeroutput>Gateway</computeroutput>, -<computeroutput>Name server addresses</computeroutput>, and a -<computeroutput>Hostname</computeroutput>. -Moreover, if you have a wireless network interface, you will be asked -to provide your <computeroutput>Wireless ESSID</computeroutput> and -a <computeroutput>WEP key</computeroutput>. Fill in the answers from -<xref linkend="needed-info"/>. - -</para><note><para> - -Some technical details you might, or might not, find handy: the -program assumes the network IP address is the bitwise-AND of your -system's IP address and your netmask. It will guess the broadcast -address is the bitwise OR of your system's IP address with the bitwise -negation of the netmask. It will also guess your gateway. If you -can't find any of these answers, use the system's guesses — you -can change them once the system has been installed, if necessary, by -editing <filename>/etc/network/interfaces</filename>. Alternatively, -you can install <classname>etherconf</classname>, which will step you -through your network setup. - -</para></note> - </sect3> diff --git a/fi/using-d-i/modules/network-console.xml b/fi/using-d-i/modules/network-console.xml deleted file mode 100644 index 505280b55..000000000 --- a/fi/using-d-i/modules/network-console.xml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,107 +0,0 @@ -<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> -<!-- original version: 31173 untranslated --> - - <sect3 id="network-console"> - <title>Installation Over the Network</title> - -<para arch="not-s390"> - -One of the more interesting components is -<firstterm>network-console</firstterm>. It allows you to do a large -part of the installation over the network via SSH. The use of the -network implies you will have to perform the first steps of the -installation from the console, at least to the point of setting up -the networking. (Although you can automate that part with -<xref linkend="automatic-install"/>.) - -</para><para arch="not-s390"> - -This component is not loaded into the main installation menu by default, -so you have to explicitly ask for it. - -If you are installing from CD, you need to boot with medium priority or -otherwise invoke the main installation menu and choose <guimenuitem>Load -installer components from CD</guimenuitem> and from the list of -additional components select <guimenuitem>network-console: Continue -installation remotely using SSH</guimenuitem>. Successful load is -indicated by a new menu entry called <guimenuitem>Continue -installation remotely using SSH</guimenuitem>. - -</para><para arch="s390"> - -For installations on &arch-title;, this is the default method after -setting up the network. - -</para><para> - -<phrase arch="not-s390">After selecting this new entry, you</phrase> -<phrase arch="s390">You</phrase> will be asked for a new password -to be used for connecting to the installation system and for its -confirmation. That's all. Now you should see a screen which instructs -you to login remotely as the user <emphasis>installer</emphasis> with -the password you just provided. Another important detail to notice on -this screen is the fingerprint of this system. You need to transfer -the fingerprint securely to the <quote>person who will continue the -installation remotely</quote>. - -</para><para> - -Should you decide to continue with the installation locally, you -can always press &enterkey;, which will bring you back to -the main menu, where you can select another component. - -</para><para> - -Now let's switch to the other side of the wire. As a prerequisite, you -need to configure your terminal for UTF-8 encoding, because that is -what the installation system uses. If you do not, remote installation -will be still possible, but you may encounter strange display -artefacts like destroyed dialog borders or unreadable non-ascii -characters. Establishing a connection with the installation system -is as simple as typing: - -<informalexample><screen> -<prompt>$</prompt> <userinput>ssh -l installer <replaceable>install_host</replaceable></userinput> -</screen></informalexample> - -Where <replaceable>install_host</replaceable> is either the name -or IP address of the computer being installed. Before the actual -login the fingerprint of the remote system will be displayed and -you will have to confirm that it is correct. - -</para><note><para> - -If you install several computers in turn and they happen to have the -same IP address or hostname, <command>ssh</command> will refuse to connect -to such host. The reason is that it will have different fingerprint, which -is usually a sign of a spoofing attack. If you are sure this is not the -case, you will need to delete the relevant line from -<filename>~/.ssh/known_hosts</filename> and try again. - -</para></note><para> - -After the login you will be presented with an initial screen where you -have two possibilities called <guimenuitem>Start menu</guimenuitem> and -<guimenuitem>Start shell</guimenuitem>. The former brings you to the -main installer menu, where you can continue with the installation as -usual. The latter starts a shell from which you can examine and possibly -fix the remote system. You should only start one SSH session for the -installation menu, but may start multiple sessions for shells. - -</para><warning><para> - -After you have started the installation remotely over SSH, you should -not go back to the installation session running on the local console. -Doing so may corrupt the database that holds the configuration of -the new system. This in turn may result in a failed installation or -problems with the installed system. - -</para><para> - -Also, if you are running the SSH session from an X terminal, you should -not resize the window as that will result in the connection being -terminated. - -</para></warning> - - </sect3> diff --git a/fi/using-d-i/modules/nobootloader.xml b/fi/using-d-i/modules/nobootloader.xml deleted file mode 100644 index 439792b35..000000000 --- a/fi/using-d-i/modules/nobootloader.xml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,28 +0,0 @@ -<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> -<!-- original version: 25513 untranslated --> - - <sect3 id="nobootloader"> - <title>Continue Without Boot Loader</title> - -<para> - -This option can be used to complete the installation even when no boot -loader is to be installed, either because the arch/subarch doesn't -provide one, or because none is desired (e.g. you will use existing -boot loader). <phrase arch="m68k">This option is especially useful for -Macintosh, Atari, and Amiga systems, where the original operating system -must be maintained on the box and used to boot GNU/Linux.</phrase> - -</para><para> - -If you plan to manually configure your bootloader, you should check the -name of the installed kernel in <filename>/target/boot</filename>. -You should also check that directory for the presence of an -<firstterm>initrd</firstterm>; if one is present, you will probably have -to instruct your bootloader to use it. Other information you will need -are the disk and partition you selected for your <filename>/</filename> -filesystem and, if you chose to install <filename>/boot</filename> on a -separate partition, also your <filename>/boot</filename> filesystem. - -</para> - </sect3> diff --git a/fi/using-d-i/modules/os-prober.xml b/fi/using-d-i/modules/os-prober.xml deleted file mode 100644 index 9b248eacc..000000000 --- a/fi/using-d-i/modules/os-prober.xml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,26 +0,0 @@ -<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> -<!-- original version: 33725 untranslated --> - - <sect3 id="os-prober"> - <title>Detecting other operating systems</title> - -<para> - -Before a boot loader is installed, the installer will attempt to probe for -other operating systems which are installed on the machine. If it finds a -supported operating system, you will be informed of this during the boot -loader installation step, and the computer will be configured to boot this -other operating system in addition to Debian. - -</para><para> - -Note that multiple operating systems booting on a single machine is still -something of a black art. The automatic support for detecting and setting -up boot loaders to boot other operating systems varies by architecture and -even by subarchitecture. If it does not work you should consult your -boot manager's documentation for more information. - -<!-- TODO: Maybe include some arch-dependent tables with supported OS'es here --> - -</para> - </sect3> diff --git a/fi/using-d-i/modules/partconf.xml b/fi/using-d-i/modules/partconf.xml deleted file mode 100644 index 5c156a8fa..000000000 --- a/fi/using-d-i/modules/partconf.xml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,2 +0,0 @@ -<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> -<!-- original version: 11648 untranslated --> diff --git a/fi/using-d-i/modules/partitioner.xml b/fi/using-d-i/modules/partitioner.xml deleted file mode 100644 index 0dabd4a41..000000000 --- a/fi/using-d-i/modules/partitioner.xml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,3 +0,0 @@ -<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> -<!-- original version: 11648 untranslated --> - diff --git a/fi/using-d-i/modules/partman.xml b/fi/using-d-i/modules/partman.xml deleted file mode 100644 index 78fe131bb..000000000 --- a/fi/using-d-i/modules/partman.xml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,199 +0,0 @@ -<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> -<!-- original version: 30158 untranslated --> - - <sect3 id="partman"> - <title>Partitioning Your Disks</title> - -<para> - -Now it is time to partition your disks. If you are uncomfortable with -partitioning, or just want to know more details, see <xref -linkend="partitioning"/>. - -</para><para> - -First you will be given the opportunity to automatically partition -either an entire drive, or free space on a drive. This is also called -<quote>guided</quote> partitioning. If you do not want to -autopartition, choose <guimenuitem>Manually edit partition -table</guimenuitem> from the menu. - -</para><para> - -If you choose guided partitioning, you will be able to choose from the -schemes listed in the table below. All schemes have their pros and cons, -some of which are discussed in <xref linkend="partitioning"/>. If you are -unsure, choose the first one. Bear in mind, that guided partitioning -needs certain minimal amount of free space to operate with. If you don't -give it at least about 1GB of space (depends on chosen scheme), guided -partitioning will fail. - -</para> - -<informaltable> -<tgroup cols="3"> -<thead> -<row> - <entry>Partitioning scheme</entry> - <entry>Minimum space</entry> - <entry>Created partitions</entry> -</row> -</thead> - -<tbody> -<row> - <entry>All files in one partition</entry> - <entry>600MB</entry> - <entry><filename>/</filename>, swap</entry> -</row><row> - <entry>Desktop machine</entry> - <entry>500MB</entry> - <entry> - <filename>/</filename>, <filename>/home</filename>, swap - </entry> -</row><row> - <entry>Multi-user workstation</entry> - <entry>1GB</entry> - <entry> - <filename>/</filename>, <filename>/home</filename>, - <filename>/usr</filename>, <filename>/var</filename>, - <filename>/tmp</filename>, swap - </entry> -</row> - -</tbody></tgroup></informaltable> - -<para arch="ia64"> - -If you chose an automatic partitioning for your IA64 system, there -will be an additional partition, formatted as a FAT16 bootable filesystem, -for the EFI boot loader. -There is also an additional menu item in the formatting menu to manually -set up a partition as an EFI boot partition. - -</para><para arch="alpha"> - -If you chose an automatic partitioning for your Alpha system, an -additional, unformatted partition will be allocated at the beginning of -your disk to reserve this space for the aboot boot loader. - -</para><para> - -After selecting a scheme, the next screen will show your new partition -table, including information on whether and how partitions will be -formatted and where they will be mounted. - -</para><para> - -The list of partitions might look like this: - -<!-- TODO: show some flags here (lightning, skull, smiley) --> -<informalexample><screen> - IDE1 master (hda) - 6.4 GB WDC AC36400L - #1 primary 16.4 MB ext2 /boot - #2 primary 551.0 MB swap swap - #3 primary 5.8 GB ntfs - pri/log 8.2 MB FREE SPACE - - IDE1 slave (hdb) - 80.0 GB ST380021A - #1 primary 15.9 MB ext3 - #2 primary 996.0 MB fat16 - #3 primary 3.9 GB xfs /home - #5 logical 6.0 GB ext3 / - #6 logical 1.0 GB ext3 /var - #7 logical 498.8 MB ext3 - #8 logical 551.5 MB swap swap - #9 logical 65.8 GB ext2 -</screen></informalexample> - -This example shows two IDE harddrives divided into several partitions; -the first disk has some free space. Each partition line consists of the -partition number, its type, size, optional flags, file system, and -mountpoint (if any). - -</para><para> - -This concludes the guided partitioning. If you are satisfied with the -generated partition table, you can choose <guimenuitem>Finish -partitioning and write changes to disk</guimenuitem> from the menu to -implement the new partition table (as described at the end of this -section). If you are not happy, you can choose to <guimenuitem>Undo -changes to partitions</guimenuitem>, to run guided partitioning again -or modify the proposed changes as described below for manual partitioning. - -</para><para> - -A similar screen to the one shown just above will be displayed if you -choose manual partitioning except that your existing partition table will -be shown and without the mount points. How to manually setup your partition -table and the usage of partitions by your new Debian system will be covered -in the remainder of this section. - -</para><para> - -If you select a pristine disk which doesn't have neither partitions -nor free space on it, you will be offered to create a new partition -table (this is needed so you can create new partitions). After this -a new line entitled <quote>FREE SPACE</quote> should appear under the -selected disk. - -</para><para> - -If you select some free space, you will be offered to create new -partition. You will have to answer a quick series of questions about -its size, type (primary or logical), and location (beginning or end of -the free space). After this, you will be presented with detailed -overview of your new partition. There are options like mountpoint, -mount options, bootable flag, or way of usage. If you don't like the -preselected defaults, feel free to change them to your liking. E.g. by -selecting the option <guimenuitem>Use as:</guimenuitem>, you can -choose different filesystem for this partition including the -possibility to use the partition for swap, software RAID, LVM, or not -use it at all. Other nice feature is the possibility to copy data from -existing partition onto this one. -When you are satisfied with your new partition, select -<guimenuitem>Done setting up the partition</guimenuitem> and you will be -thrown back to the <command>partman</command>'s main screen. - -</para><para> - -If you decide you want to change something about your partition, -simply select the partition, which will bring you to the partition -configuration menu. Because this is the same screen like when creating -a new partition, you can change the same set of options. One thing -which might not be very obvious at a first glance is that you can -resize the partition by selecting the item displaying the size of the -partition. Filesystems known to work are at least fat16, fat32, ext2, -ext3 and swap. This menu also allows you to delete a partition. - -</para><para> - -Be sure to create at least two partitions: one for the -<emphasis>root</emphasis> filesystem (which must be mounted as -<filename>/</filename>) and one for <emphasis>swap</emphasis>. If you -forget to mount the root filesystem, <command>partman</command> won't -let you continue until you correct this issue. - -</para><para arch="ia64"> - -If you forget to select and format an EFI boot partition -<command>partman</command> will detect this and will not let you continue -until you allocate one. - -</para><para> - -Capabilities of <command>partman</command> can be extended with installer -modules, but are dependent on your system's architecture. So if you can't -see all promised goodies, check if you have loaded all required modules -(e.g. <filename>partman-ext3</filename>, <filename>partman-xfs</filename>, -or <filename>partman-lvm</filename>). - -</para><para> - -After you are satisfied with partitioning, select <guimenuitem>Finish -partitioning and write changes to disk</guimenuitem> from the partitioning -menu. You will be presented with a summary of changes made to the disks -and asked to confirm that the filesystems should be created as requested. - -</para> - </sect3> diff --git a/fi/using-d-i/modules/pkgsel.xml b/fi/using-d-i/modules/pkgsel.xml deleted file mode 100644 index f8bee53c0..000000000 --- a/fi/using-d-i/modules/pkgsel.xml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,161 +0,0 @@ -<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> -<!-- original version: 35518 untranslated --> - - <sect3 id="pkgsel"> - <title>Selecting and Installing Software</title> - -<para> - -During the installation process, you are given the opportunity to select -additional software to install. Rather than picking individual software -packages from the &num-of-distrib-pkgs; available packages, this stage of -the installation process focuses on selecting and installing predefined -collections of software to quickly set up your computer to perform various -tasks. - -</para><para> - -So, you have the ability to choose <emphasis>tasks</emphasis> first, -and then add on more individual packages later. These tasks loosely -represent a number of different jobs or things you want to do with -your computer, such as <quote>Desktop environment</quote>, -<quote>Web server</quote>, or <quote>Print server</quote><footnote> - -<para> - -You should know that to present this list, the installer is merely -invoking the <command>tasksel</command> program. It can be -run at any time after installation to install (or remove) more -packages, or you can use a more fine-grained tool such as <command>aptitude</command>. -If you are looking for a specific single package, after -installation is complete, simply run <userinput>aptitude install -<replaceable>package</replaceable></userinput>, where -<replaceable>package</replaceable> is the name of the package you are -looking for. - -</para> - -</footnote>. <xref linkend="tasksel-size-list"/> lists the space -requirements for the available tasks. - -</para><para> - -Once you've selected your tasks, select -<guibutton>Ok</guibutton>. At this point, -<command>aptitude</command> will install the packages you've -selected. - -<note><para> - -In the standard user interface of the installer, you can use the space bar -to toggle selection of a task. - -</para></note> - -<note><para> - -Note that some tasks may be pre-selected based on the characteristics of the -computer you are installing. If you disagree with these selections you can -un-select the tasks. You can even opt to install no tasks at all at this point. - -</para></note> - -</para><para> - -Each package you selected with <command>tasksel</command> is downloaded, -unpacked and then installed in turn by the <command>apt-get</command> and -<command>dpkg</command> programs. If a particular program needs more -information from the user, it will prompt you during this process. - -</para> - <sect4 id="config-mta"> - <title>Configuring Your Mail Transport Agent</title> - -<para> - -Today, email is a very important part of many people's life, so it's -no surprise Debian lets you configure your mail system right as a part -of the installation process. The standard mail transport agent in -Debian is <command>exim4</command>, which is relatively small, -flexible, and easy to learn. - -</para><para> - -You may ask if this is needed even if your computer is not connected -to any network. The short answer is: Yes. The longer explanation: Some -system utilities (like <command>cron</command>, -<command>quota</command>, <command>aide</command>, …) may send -you important notices via email. - -</para><para> - -So on the first screen you will be presented with several common mail -scenarios. Choose the one that most closely resembles your needs: - -</para> - -<variablelist> -<varlistentry> -<term>internet site</term> -<listitem><para> - -Your system is connected to a network and your mail is sent and -received directly using SMTP. On the following screens you will be -asked a few basic questions, like your machine's mail name, or a list of -domains for which you accept or relay mail. - -</para></listitem> -</varlistentry> - -<varlistentry> -<term>mail sent by smarthost</term> -<listitem><para> - -In this scenario is your outgoing mail forwarded to another machine, -called a <quote>smarthost</quote>, which does the actual job for -you. Smarthost also usually stores incoming mail addressed to your -computer, so you don't need to be permanently online. That also means -you have to download your mail from the smarthost via programs like -fetchmail. This option is suitable for dial-up users. - -</para></listitem> -</varlistentry> - -<varlistentry> -<term>local delivery only</term> -<listitem><para> - -Your system is not on a network and mail is sent or received only -between local users. Even if you don't plan to send any messages, this -option is highly recommended, because some system utilities may send -you various alerts from time to time (e.g. beloved <quote>Disk quota -exceeded</quote>). This option is also convenient for new users, -because it doesn't ask any further questions. - -</para></listitem> -</varlistentry> - -<varlistentry> -<term>no configuration at this time</term> -<listitem><para> - -Choose this if you are absolutely convinced you know what you are -doing. This will leave you with an unconfigured mail system — -until you configure it, you won't be able to send or receive any mail -and you may miss some important messages from your system utilities. - -</para></listitem> -</varlistentry> -</variablelist> - -<para> - -If none of these scenarios suits your needs, or if you need a finer -setup, you will need to edit configuration files under the -<filename>/etc/exim4</filename> directory after the installation is -complete. More information about <command>exim4</command> may be found -under <filename>/usr/share/doc/exim4</filename>. - -</para> - </sect4> - </sect3> diff --git a/fi/using-d-i/modules/powerpc/quik-installer.xml b/fi/using-d-i/modules/powerpc/quik-installer.xml deleted file mode 100644 index ed6aa6a60..000000000 --- a/fi/using-d-i/modules/powerpc/quik-installer.xml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,15 +0,0 @@ -<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> -<!-- original version: 14975 untranslated --> - - <sect3 arch="powerpc"> - <title>Install <command>Quik</command> on a Hard Disk</title> -<para> - -The boot loader for OldWorld Power Macintosh machines is -<command>quik</command>. You can also use it on CHRP. The installer -will attempt to set up <command>quik</command> automatically. The -setup has been known to work on 7200, 7300, and 7600 Powermacs, and on -some Power Computing clones. - -</para> - </sect3> diff --git a/fi/using-d-i/modules/powerpc/yaboot-installer.xml b/fi/using-d-i/modules/powerpc/yaboot-installer.xml deleted file mode 100644 index 4bba348fb..000000000 --- a/fi/using-d-i/modules/powerpc/yaboot-installer.xml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,17 +0,0 @@ -<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> -<!-- original version: 14975 untranslated --> - - <sect3 arch="powerpc"> - <title>Install <command>Yaboot</command> on a Hard Disk</title> -<para> - -Newer (mid 1998 and on) PowerMacs use <command>yaboot</command> as -their boot loader. The installer will set up <command>yaboot</command> -automatically, so all you need is a small 820k partition named -<quote>bootstrap</quote> with type -<emphasis>Apple_Bootstrap</emphasis> created back in the partitioning -component. If this step completes successfully then your disk should -now be bootable and OpenFirmware will be set to boot &debian;. - -</para> - </sect3> diff --git a/fi/using-d-i/modules/prebaseconfig.xml b/fi/using-d-i/modules/prebaseconfig.xml deleted file mode 100644 index 8ddd0905f..000000000 --- a/fi/using-d-i/modules/prebaseconfig.xml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,23 +0,0 @@ -<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> -<!-- original version: 21672 untranslated --> - - <sect3 id="prebaseconfig"> - <title>Finish the Installation and Reboot</title> - -<para> - -This is the last step in the initial Debian installation process. You will -be prompted to remove the boot media (CD, floppy, etc) that you used to -boot the installer. The installer will do any last minute tasks, and then -reboot into your new Debian system. - -</para><para arch="s390"> - -Select the <guimenuitem>Finish the installation</guimenuitem> -menu item which will halt the system -because rebooting is not supported on &arch-title; in this case. You -then need to IPL GNU/Linux from the DASD which you selected for the -root filesystem during the first steps of the installation. - -</para> - </sect3> diff --git a/fi/using-d-i/modules/s390/dasd.xml b/fi/using-d-i/modules/s390/dasd.xml deleted file mode 100644 index 5c156a8fa..000000000 --- a/fi/using-d-i/modules/s390/dasd.xml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,2 +0,0 @@ -<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> -<!-- original version: 11648 untranslated --> diff --git a/fi/using-d-i/modules/s390/netdevice.xml b/fi/using-d-i/modules/s390/netdevice.xml deleted file mode 100644 index 5c156a8fa..000000000 --- a/fi/using-d-i/modules/s390/netdevice.xml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,2 +0,0 @@ -<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> -<!-- original version: 11648 untranslated --> diff --git a/fi/using-d-i/modules/s390/zipl-installer.xml b/fi/using-d-i/modules/s390/zipl-installer.xml deleted file mode 100644 index 61aa6465c..000000000 --- a/fi/using-d-i/modules/s390/zipl-installer.xml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,16 +0,0 @@ -<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> -<!-- original version: 14602 untranslated --> - - <sect3 arch="s390"> - <title><command>zipl</command>-installer</title> -<para> - -The boot loader on &arch-title; is <quote>zipl</quote>. -<command>ZIPL</command> is similar in configuration and usage to -<command>LILO</command>, with a few exceptions. Please take a look at -<quote>LINUX for &arch-title; Device Drivers and Installation -Commands</quote> from IBM's developerWorks web site if you want to -know more about <command>ZIPL</command>. - -</para> - </sect3> diff --git a/fi/using-d-i/modules/save-logs.xml b/fi/using-d-i/modules/save-logs.xml deleted file mode 100644 index 361a23579..000000000 --- a/fi/using-d-i/modules/save-logs.xml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,23 +0,0 @@ -<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> -<!-- original version: 33725 untranslated --> - - <sect3 id="save-logs"> - <title>Saving the installation logs</title> - -<para> - -If the installation is successful, the logfiles created during -the installation process will be automatically saved to -<filename>/var/log/installer/</filename> on your new -Debian system. - -</para><para> - -Choosing <guimenuitem>Save debug logs</guimenuitem> from the main -menu allows you to save the log files to a floppy disk, network, hard -disk, or other media. This can be useful if you encounter fatal problems -during the installation and wish to study the logs on another system -or attach them to an installation report. - -</para> - </sect3> diff --git a/fi/using-d-i/modules/shell.xml b/fi/using-d-i/modules/shell.xml deleted file mode 100644 index 0e26048a0..000000000 --- a/fi/using-d-i/modules/shell.xml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,41 +0,0 @@ -<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> -<!-- original version: 21579 untranslated --> - - <sect3 id="shell"> - <title>Using the Shell and Viewing the Logs</title> - <!-- TODO: There is nothing about logs in this section! --> - -<para> - -There is an <guimenuitem>Execute a Shell</guimenuitem> item on the -menu. If the menu is not available when you need to use the shell, -press <keycombo><keycap>Left Alt</keycap> <keycap>F2</keycap></keycombo> -(on a Mac keyboard, <keycombo><keycap>Option</keycap> <keycap>F2</keycap> -</keycombo>) to switch to the second <emphasis>virtual -console</emphasis>. That's the <keycap>Alt</keycap> key on the -left-hand side of the <keycap>space bar</keycap>, and the -<keycap>F2</keycap> function key, at the same time. This is a separate -window running a Bourne shell clone called <command>ash</command>. - -</para><para> - -At this point you are booted from the RAM disk, and there is a limited -set of Unix utilities available for your use. You can see what -programs are available with the command <command>ls /bin /sbin /usr/bin -/usr/sbin</command> and by typing <command>help</command>. The -text editor is <command>nano</command>. The shell has some nice features -like autocompletion and history. - -</para><para> - -Use the menus to perform any task that they are able to do — the -shell and commands are only there in case something goes wrong. In -particular, you should always use the menus, not the shell, to -activate your swap partition, because the menu software can't detect -that you've done this from the shell. Press <keycombo><keycap>Left -Alt</keycap> <keycap>F1</keycap></keycombo> to get back to menus, or -type <command>exit</command> if you used a menu item to open the -shell. - -</para> - </sect3> diff --git a/fi/using-d-i/modules/sparc/silo-installer.xml b/fi/using-d-i/modules/sparc/silo-installer.xml deleted file mode 100644 index 3ce2b6ac6..000000000 --- a/fi/using-d-i/modules/sparc/silo-installer.xml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,25 +0,0 @@ -<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> -<!-- original version: 24582 untranslated --> - - <sect3 arch="sparc"> - <title>Install the <command>SILO</command> Boot Loader - on a Hard Disk</title> -<para> - -The standard &architecture; boot loader is called <quote>silo</quote>. -It is documented in -<filename>/usr/share/doc/silo/</filename>. <command>SILO</command> is -similar in configuration and usage to <command>LILO</command>, with -a few exceptions. First of all, <command>SILO</command> allows you to -boot any kernel image on your drive, even if it is not listed in -<filename>/etc/silo.conf</filename>. This is because -<command>SILO</command> can actually read Linux partitions. Also, -<filename>/etc/silo.conf</filename> is read at boot time, so there is -no need to rerun <command>silo</command> after installing a new kernel -like you would with <command>LILO</command>. <command>SILO</command> -can also read UFS partitions, which means it can boot SunOS/Solaris -partitions as well. This is useful if you want to install GNU/Linux -alongside an existing SunOS/Solaris install. - -</para> - </sect3> diff --git a/fi/using-d-i/modules/tzsetup.xml b/fi/using-d-i/modules/tzsetup.xml deleted file mode 100644 index 16cd7cdd2..000000000 --- a/fi/using-d-i/modules/tzsetup.xml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,16 +0,0 @@ -<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> -<!-- original version: 35518 untranslated --> - - <sect3 id="tzsetup"> - <title>Configuring Your Time Zone</title> - -<para> - -Depending on the location selected at the beginning of the installation -process, you might be shown a list of timezones relevant for that location. -If your location has only one time zone, you will not be asked anything and -the system will assume that time zone. - -</para> - - </sect3> diff --git a/fi/using-d-i/modules/user-setup.xml b/fi/using-d-i/modules/user-setup.xml deleted file mode 100644 index 2f1667001..000000000 --- a/fi/using-d-i/modules/user-setup.xml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,69 +0,0 @@ -<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> -<!-- original version: 35518 untranslated --> - - <sect3 id="user-setup"> - <title>Setting Up Users And Passwords</title> - - <sect4 id="user-setup-root"> - <title>Set the Root Password</title> - -<para> - -The <emphasis>root</emphasis> account is also called the -<emphasis>super-user</emphasis>; it is a login that bypasses all -security protection on your system. The root account should only be -used to perform system administration, and only used for as short -a time as possible. - -</para><para> - -Any password you create should contain at least 6 characters, and -should contain both upper- and lower-case characters, as well as -punctuation characters. Take extra care when setting your root -password, since it is such a powerful account. Avoid dictionary -words or use of any personal information which could be guessed. - -</para><para> - -If anyone ever tells you they need your root password, be extremely -wary. You should normally never give your root password out, unless you -are administering a machine with more than one system administrator. - -</para> - </sect4> - - <sect4 id="make-normal-user"> - <title>Create an Ordinary User</title> - -<para> - -The system will ask you whether you wish to create an ordinary user -account at this point. This account should be your main personal -log-in. You should <emphasis>not</emphasis> use the root account for -daily use or as your personal login. - -</para><para> - -Why not? Well, one reason to avoid using root's privileges is that it -is very easy to do irreparable damage as root. Another reason is that -you might be tricked into running a <emphasis>Trojan-horse</emphasis> -program — that is a program that takes advantage of your -super-user powers to compromise the security of your system behind -your back. Any good book on Unix system administration will cover this -topic in more detail — consider reading one if it is new to you. - -</para><para> - -You will first be prompted for the user's full name. Then you'll be asked -for a name for the user account; generally your first name or something -similar will suffice and indeed will be the default. Finally, you will be -prompted for a password for this account. - -</para><para> - -If at any point after installation you would like to create another -account, use the <command>adduser</command> command. - -</para> - </sect4> - </sect3> diff --git a/fi/using-d-i/using-d-i.xml b/fi/using-d-i/using-d-i.xml deleted file mode 100644 index fbd556ab2..000000000 --- a/fi/using-d-i/using-d-i.xml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,388 +0,0 @@ -<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> -<!-- original version: 36647 untranslated --> - - - <chapter id="d-i-intro"><title>Using the Debian Installer</title> - - <sect1><title>How the Installer Works</title> -<para> - -The Debian Installer consists of a number of special-purpose -components to perform each installation task. Each component performs -its task, asking the user questions as necessary to do its job. -The questions themselves are given priorities, and the priority -of questions to be asked is set when the installer is started. - -</para><para> - -When a default installation is performed, only essential (high priority) -questions will be asked. This results in a highly automated installation -process with little user interaction. Components are automatically run -in sequence; which components are run depends mainly on the installation -method you use and on your hardware. The installer will use default values -for questions that are not asked. - -</para><para> - -If there is a problem, the user will see an error screen, and the -installer menu may be shown in order to select some alternative -action. If there are no problems, the user will never see the -installer menu, but will simply answer questions for each component -in turn. Serious error notifications are set to priority -<quote>critical</quote> so the user will always be notified. - -</para><para> - -Some of the defaults that the installer uses can be influenced by passing -boot arguments when &d-i; is started. If, for example, you wish to -force static network configuration (DHCP is used by default if available), -you could add the boot parameter <userinput>netcfg/disable_dhcp=true</userinput>. -See <xref linkend="installer-args"/> for available options. - -</para><para> - -Power users may be more comfortable with a menu-driven interface, -where each step is controlled by the user rather than the installer -performing each step automatically in sequence. To use the installer -in a manual, menu-driven way, add the boot argument -<userinput>debconf/priority=medium</userinput>. - -</para><para> - -If your hardware requires you to pass options to kernel modules as -they are installed, you will need to start the installer in -<quote>expert</quote> mode. This can be done by either using the -<command>expert</command> command to start the installer or by adding -the boot argument <userinput>debconf/priority=low</userinput>. -Expert mode gives you full control over &d-i;. - -</para><para> - -The normal installer display is character-based (as opposed to the now -more familiar graphical interface). The mouse is not operational in -this environment. Here are the keys you can use to navigate within the -various dialogs. The <keycap>Tab</keycap> or <keycap>right</keycap> -arrow keys move <quote>forward</quote>, and the <keycombo> <keycap>Shift</keycap> -<keycap>Tab</keycap> </keycombo> or <keycap>left</keycap> arrow keys -move <quote>backward</quote> between displayed buttons and selections. -The <keycap>up</keycap> and <keycap>down</keycap> arrow select -different items within a scrollable list, and also scroll the list -itself. In addition, in long lists, you can type a letter to cause the -list to scroll directly to the section with items starting with the -letter you typed and use <keycap>Pg-Up</keycap> and -<keycap>Pg-Down</keycap> to scroll the list in sections. The -<keycap>space bar</keycap> selects an item such as a checkbox. Use -&enterkey; to activate choices. - -</para><para arch="s390"> - -S/390 does not support virtual consoles. You may open a second and third -ssh session to view the logs described below. - -</para><para> - -Error messages and logs are redirected to the fourth console. -You can access this console by -pressing <keycombo><keycap>Left Alt</keycap><keycap>F4</keycap></keycombo> -(hold the left <keycap>Alt</keycap> key while pressing the -<keycap>F4</keycap> function key); get back to -the main installer process with -<keycombo><keycap>Left Alt</keycap><keycap>F1</keycap></keycombo>. - -</para><para> - -These messages can also be found in -<filename>/var/log/syslog</filename>. After installation, this log -is copied to <filename>/var/log/installer/syslog</filename> on your -new system. Other installation messages may be found in -<filename>/var/log/</filename> during the -installation, and <filename>/var/log/installer/</filename> -after the computer has been booted into the installed system. - -</para> - </sect1> - - - <sect1 id="modules-list"><title>Components Introduction</title> -<para> - -Here is a list of installer components with a brief description -of each component's purpose. Details you might need to know about -using a particular component are in <xref linkend="module-details"/>. - -</para> - -<variablelist> -<varlistentry> - -<term>main-menu</term><listitem><para> - -Shows the list of components to the user during installer operation, -and starts a component when it is selected. Main-menu's -questions are set to priority medium, so if your priority is set to -high or critical (high is the default), you will not see the menu. On -the other hand, if there is an error which requires your intervention, -the question priority may be downgraded temporarily to allow you -to resolve the problem, and in that case the menu may appear. - -</para><para> - -You can get to the main menu by selecting the <quote>Back</quote> button -repeatedly to back all the way out of the currently running component. - -</para></listitem> -</varlistentry> -<varlistentry> - -<term>localechooser</term><listitem><para> - -Allows the user to select localization options for the installation and -the installed system: language, country and locales. The installer will -display messages in the selected language, unless the translation for -that language is not complete in which case some messages may be shown -in English. - -</para></listitem> -</varlistentry> -<varlistentry> - -<term>kbd-chooser</term><listitem><para> - -Shows a list of keyboards, from which the user chooses the model which -matches his own. - -</para></listitem> -</varlistentry> -<varlistentry> - -<term>hw-detect</term><listitem><para> - -Automatically detects most of the system's hardware, including network -cards, disk drives, and PCMCIA. - -</para></listitem> -</varlistentry> -<varlistentry> - -<term>cdrom-detect</term><listitem><para> - -Looks for and mounts a Debian installation CD. - -</para></listitem> -</varlistentry> -<varlistentry> - -<term>netcfg</term><listitem><para> - -Configures the computer's network connections so it can communicate -over the internet. - -</para></listitem> -</varlistentry> -<varlistentry> - -<term>iso-scan</term><listitem><para> - -Looks for ISO file systems, which may be on a CD-ROM or on the -hard drive. - -</para></listitem> -</varlistentry> -<varlistentry> - -<term>choose-mirror</term><listitem><para> - -Presents a list of Debian archive mirrors. The user may choose -the source of his installation packages. - -</para></listitem> -</varlistentry> -<varlistentry> - -<term>cdrom-checker</term><listitem><para> - -Checks integrity of a CD-ROM. This way the user may assure him/herself -that the installation CD-ROM was not corrupted. - -</para></listitem> -</varlistentry> -<varlistentry> - -<term>lowmem</term><listitem><para> - -Lowmem tries to detect systems with low memory and then does various -tricks to remove unnecessary parts of &d-i; from the memory (at the -cost of some features). - -</para></listitem> -</varlistentry> -<varlistentry> - -<term>anna</term><listitem><para> - -Anna's Not Nearly APT. Installs packages which have been retrieved -from the chosen mirror or CD. - -</para></listitem> -</varlistentry> -<varlistentry> - -<term>partman</term><listitem><para> - -Allows the user to partition disks attached to the system, create file -systems on the selected partitions, and attach them to the -mountpoints. Included are also interesting features like a fully -automatic mode or LVM support. This is the preferred partitioning tool -in Debian. - -</para></listitem> -</varlistentry> -<varlistentry> - -<term>autopartkit</term><listitem><para> - -Automatically partitions an entire disk according to preset -user preferences. - -</para></listitem> -</varlistentry> -<varlistentry> - -<term>partitioner</term><listitem><para> - -Allows the user to partition disks attached to the system. A -partitioning program appropriate to your computer's architecture -is chosen. - -</para></listitem> -</varlistentry> -<varlistentry> - -<term>partconf</term><listitem><para> - -Displays a list of partitions, and creates file systems on -the selected partitions according to user instructions. - -</para></listitem> -</varlistentry> -<varlistentry> - -<term>lvmcfg</term><listitem><para> - -Helps the user with the configuration of the -<firstterm>LVM</firstterm> (Logical Volume Manager). - -</para></listitem> -</varlistentry> -<varlistentry> - -<term>mdcfg</term><listitem><para> - -Allows the user to setup Software <firstterm>RAID</firstterm> -(Redundant Array of Inexpensive Disks). This Software RAID is usually -superior to the cheap IDE (pseudo hardware) RAID controllers found on -newer motherboards. - -</para></listitem> -</varlistentry> -<varlistentry> - -<term>tzsetup</term><listitem><para> - -Selects the time zone, based on the location selected earlier. - -</para></listitem> -</varlistentry> -<varlistentry> - -<term>clock-setup</term><listitem><para> - -Determines whether the clock is set to UTC or not. - -</para></listitem> -</varlistentry> -<varlistentry> - -<term>user-setup</term><listitem><para> - -Sets up the root password, and adds a non-root user. - -</para></listitem> -</varlistentry> -<varlistentry> - -<term>base-installer</term><listitem><para> - -Installs the most basic set of packages which would allow -the computer to operate under Linux when rebooted. - -</para></listitem> -</varlistentry> -<varlistentry> - -<term>apt-setup</term><listitem><para> - -Configures apt, mostly automatically, based on what media the installer is -running from. - -</para></listitem> -</varlistentry> -<varlistentry> - -<term>pkgsel</term><listitem><para> - -Uses <classname>tasksel</classname> to select and install additional software. - -</para></listitem> -</varlistentry> -<varlistentry> - -<term>os-prober</term><listitem><para> - -Detects currently installed operating systems on the computer and -passes this information to the bootloader-installer, which may offer -you an ability to add discovered operating systems to the bootloader's -start menu. This way the user could easily choose at the boot time -which operating system to start. - -</para></listitem> -</varlistentry> -<varlistentry> - -<term>bootloader-installer</term><listitem><para> - -The various bootloader installers each install a boot loader program on the -hard disk, which is necessary for the computer to start up using Linux -without using a floppy or CD-ROM. Many boot loaders allow the user to -choose an alternate operating system each time the computer boots. - -</para></listitem> -</varlistentry> -<varlistentry> - -<term>shell</term><listitem><para> - -Allows the user to execute a shell from the menu, or in the second -console. - -</para></listitem> -</varlistentry> -<varlistentry> - -<term>save-logs</term><listitem><para> - -Provides a way for the user to record information on a floppy disk, network, -hard disk, or other media when trouble is encountered, in order to accurately -report installer software problems to Debian developers later. - -</para></listitem> -</varlistentry> - -</variablelist> - - </sect1> - -&using-d-i-components.xml; - -</chapter> - diff --git a/fi/welcome/about-copyright.xml b/fi/welcome/about-copyright.xml deleted file mode 100644 index 65d03f92f..000000000 --- a/fi/welcome/about-copyright.xml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,92 +0,0 @@ -<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> -<!-- original version: 29000 untranslated --> - - <sect1> -<title>About Copyrights and Software Licenses - </title> - -<para> - -We're sure that you've read some of the licenses that come with most -commercial software — they usually say that you can only use one -copy of the software on a single computer. This system's license -isn't like that at all. We encourage you to put a copy of on every -computer in your school or place of business. Lend your installation -media to your friends and help them install it on their computers! -You can even make thousands of copies and <emphasis>sell</emphasis> -them — albeit with a few restrictions. Your freedom to install -and use the system comes directly from Debian being based on -<emphasis>free software</emphasis>. - -</para><para> - -Calling software <emphasis>free</emphasis> doesn't mean that the software isn't -copyrighted, and it doesn't mean that CDs containing that software -must be distributed at no charge. Free software, in part, means that -the licenses of individual programs do not require you to pay for the -privilege of distributing or using those programs. Free software also -means that not only may anyone extend, adapt, and modify the software, -but that they may distribute the results of their work as -well. - -<note><para> - -The Debian project, as a pragmatic concession to its users, -does make some packages available that do not meet our criteria for -being free. These packages are not part of the official distribution, -however, and are only available from the -<userinput>contrib</userinput> or <userinput>non-free</userinput> -areas of Debian mirrors or on third-party CD-ROMs; see the -<ulink url="&url-debian-faq;">Debian FAQ</ulink>, under -<quote>The Debian FTP archives</quote>, for more information about the -layout and contents of the archives. - -</para></note> - -</para><para> - -Many of the programs in the system are licensed under the -<emphasis>GNU</emphasis> <emphasis>General Public License</emphasis>, -often simply referred to as <quote>the GPL</quote>. The GPL requires you to make -the <emphasis>source code</emphasis> of the programs available -whenever you distribute a binary copy of the program; that provision -of the license ensures that any user will be able to modify the -software. Because of this provision, the source code<footnote> -<para> - -For information on how to locate, unpack, and build -binaries from Debian source packages, see the -<ulink url="&url-debian-faq;">Debian FAQ</ulink>, -under <quote>Basics of the Debian Package Management System</quote>. - -</para> -</footnote> for all such programs is available in the Debian system. - -</para><para> - -There are several other forms of copyright statements and software -licenses used on the programs in Debian. You can find the copyrights -and licenses for every package installed on your system by looking in -the file -<filename>/usr/share/doc/<replaceable>package-name</replaceable>/copyright -</filename> -once you've installed a package on your system. - -</para><para> - -For more information about licenses and how Debian determines whether -software is free enough to be included in the main distribution, see the -<ulink url="&url-dfsg;">Debian Free Software Guidelines</ulink>. - -</para><para> - -The most important legal notice is that this software comes with -<emphasis>no warranties</emphasis>. The programmers who have created this -software have done so for the benefit of the community. No guarantee -is made as to the suitability of the software for any given purpose. -However, since the software is free, you are empowered to modify that -software to suit your needs — and to enjoy the benefits of the -changes made by others who have extended the software in this way. - -</para> - </sect1> diff --git a/fi/welcome/doc-organization.xml b/fi/welcome/doc-organization.xml deleted file mode 100644 index 326a33669..000000000 --- a/fi/welcome/doc-organization.xml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,115 +0,0 @@ -<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> -<!-- original version: 33772 untranslated --> - - <sect1 id="doc-organization"> - <title>Organization of This Document</title> - -<para> - -This document is meant to serve as a manual for first-time Debian -users. It tries to make as few assumptions as possible about your -level of expertise. However, we do assume that you have a general -understanding of how the hardware in your computer works. - -</para><para> - -Expert users may also find interesting reference information in this -document, including minimum installation sizes, details about the -hardware supported by the Debian installation system, and so on. We -encourage expert users to jump around in the document. - -</para><para> - -In general, this manual is arranged in a linear fashion, walking you -through the installation process from start to finish. Here are the -steps in installing &debian;, and the sections of this document which -correlate with each step: - -<orderedlist> -<listitem><para> - -Determine whether your hardware meets the requirements for using the -installation system, in <xref linkend="hardware-req"/>. - -</para></listitem> -<listitem><para> - -Backup your system, perform any necessary planning and hardware -configuration prior to installing Debian, in <xref linkend="preparing"/>. If -you are preparing a multi-boot system, you may need to create -partition-able space on your hard disk for Debian to use. - -</para></listitem> -<listitem><para> - -In <xref linkend="install-methods"/>, you will obtain the necessary -installation files for your method of installation. - -</para></listitem> -<listitem><para> - -<xref linkend="boot-installer"/> describes booting into the -installation system. This chapter also discusses troubleshooting -procedures in case you have problems with this step. - -</para></listitem> -<listitem><para> - -Perform the actual installation according to -<xref linkend="d-i-intro"/>. This involves choosing your language, -configuring peripheral driver modules, configuring your network -connection, so that remaining installation files can be obtained -directly from a Debian server (if you are not installing from a CD), -partitioning your hard drives and installation of a base system, then -selection and installation of tasks. -(Some background about setting up the partitions for your Debian -system is explained in <xref linkend="partitioning"/>.) - -</para></listitem> -<listitem><para> - -Boot into your newly installed base system, from <xref linkend="boot-new"/>. - -</para> -</listitem> -</orderedlist> - -</para><para> - -Once you've got your system installed, you can read -<xref linkend="post-install"/>. That chapter explains where to -look to find more information about Unix and Debian, and how to -replace your kernel. - -<!-- XXX FIXME: If you want to build your own install system -from source, be sure to read <xref linkend="boot-floppy-techinfo"/>. --> - -</para><para> - -Finally, information about this document and how to contribute to it -may be found in <xref linkend="administrivia"/>. - -</para> - - </sect1> - - <sect1 condition="FIXME"> - <title>Your Documentation Help is Welcome</title> - -<para> - -Any help, suggestions, and especially, patches, are greatly -appreciated. Working versions of this document can be found at -<ulink url="&url-d-i-alioth-manual;" />. There you will find a list of all the different -architectures and languages for which this document is available. - -</para><para> - -Source is also available publicly; look in <xref linkend="administrivia"/> -for more information concerning how to contribute. -We welcome suggestions, comments, patches, and bug reports (use the -package <classname>installation-guide</classname> for bugs, but check first to see if the problem is -already reported). - -</para> - </sect1> diff --git a/fi/welcome/getting-newest-doc.xml b/fi/welcome/getting-newest-doc.xml deleted file mode 100644 index 2bf995450..000000000 --- a/fi/welcome/getting-newest-doc.xml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,18 +0,0 @@ -<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> -<!-- original version: 28672 untranslated --> - - <sect1 id="getting-newest-doc"> - <title>Getting the Newest Version of This Document</title> - -<para> - -This document is constantly being revised. Be sure to check the -<ulink url="&url-release-area;"> -Debian &release; pages</ulink> for any last-minute information about -the &release; release of the &debian; system. Updated versions of -this installation manual are also available from the -<ulink url="&url-install-manual;">official Install Manual pages</ulink>. - -</para> - - </sect1> diff --git a/fi/welcome/getting-newest-inst.xml b/fi/welcome/getting-newest-inst.xml deleted file mode 100644 index f2fb291f9..000000000 --- a/fi/welcome/getting-newest-inst.xml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,24 +0,0 @@ -<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> -<!-- original version: 28672 untranslated --> - - <sect1 id="getting-newest-inst"> - <title>Getting Debian</title> - -<para> - -For information on how to download &debian; from the Internet -or from whom official Debian CDs can be purchased, see the -<ulink url="&url-debian-distrib;">distribution web page</ulink>. -The <ulink url="&url-debian-mirrors;">list of Debian mirrors</ulink> -contains a full set of official Debian -mirrors, so you can easily find the nearest one. - -</para><para> - -Debian can be upgraded after installation very easily. The -installation procedure will help set up the system so that you can -make those upgrades once installation is complete, if need be. - -</para> - - </sect1> diff --git a/fi/welcome/welcome.xml b/fi/welcome/welcome.xml deleted file mode 100644 index 68014de16..000000000 --- a/fi/welcome/welcome.xml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,23 +0,0 @@ -<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> -<!-- original version: 28672 untranslated --> - -<chapter id="welcome"><title>Welcome to Debian</title> -<para> - -This chapter provides an overview of the Debian Project and -&debian;. If you already know about the Debian Project's -history and the &debian; distribution, feel free to skip to -the next chapter. - -</para> - -&what-is-debian.xml; -&what-is-linux.xml; -&what-is-debian-linux.xml; -&what-is-debian-hurd.xml; -&getting-newest-inst.xml; -&getting-newest-doc.xml; -&doc-organization.xml; -&about-copyright.xml; - -</chapter> diff --git a/fi/welcome/what-is-debian-hurd.xml b/fi/welcome/what-is-debian-hurd.xml deleted file mode 100644 index 38358d1bc..000000000 --- a/fi/welcome/what-is-debian-hurd.xml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,29 +0,0 @@ -<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> -<!-- original version: 28672 untranslated --> - -<!-- conditionalised because the hurd port is not yet an official debian -release --> - <sect1 id="what-is-debian-hurd" condition="unofficial-build"> - <title>What is Debian GNU/Hurd?</title> - -<para> - -Debian GNU/Hurd is a Debian GNU system that replaces the Linux -monolithic kernel with the GNU Hurd — a set of servers running on -top of the GNU Mach microkernel. The Hurd is still unfinished, and is -unsuitable for day-to-day use, but work is continuing. The Hurd is -currently only being developed for the i386 architecture, although -ports to other architectures will be made once the system becomes more -stable. - -</para><para> - -For more information, see the -<ulink url="http://www.debian.org/ports/hurd/"> -Debian GNU/Hurd ports page</ulink> -and the <email>debian-hurd@lists.debian.org</email> -mailing list. - -</para> - - </sect1> diff --git a/fi/welcome/what-is-debian-linux.xml b/fi/welcome/what-is-debian-linux.xml deleted file mode 100644 index 398618019..000000000 --- a/fi/welcome/what-is-debian-linux.xml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,82 +0,0 @@ -<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> -<!-- original version: 25496 untranslated --> - - <sect1 id="what-is-debian-linux"> - <title>What is &debian;?</title> -<para> - -The combination of Debian's philosophy and methodology and the GNU -tools, the Linux kernel, and other important free software, form a -unique software distribution called &debian;. This -distribution is made up of a large number of software -<emphasis>packages</emphasis>. Each package in the distribution -contains executables, scripts, documentation, and configuration -information, and has a <emphasis>maintainer</emphasis> who is -primarily responsible for keeping the package up-to-date, tracking bug -reports, and communicating with the upstream author(s) of the packaged -software. Our extremely large user base, combined with our bug -tracking system ensures that problems are found and fixed quickly. - -</para><para> - -Debian's attention to detail allows us to produce a high-quality, -stable, and scalable distribution. Installations can be easily -configured to serve many roles, from stripped-down firewalls to -desktop scientific workstations to high-end network servers. - -</para><para> - -Debian is especially popular among advanced users because of its -technical excellence and its deep commitment to the needs and -expectations of the Linux community. Debian also introduced many -features to Linux that are now commonplace. - -</para><para> - -For example, Debian was the first Linux distribution to include a -package management system for easy installation and removal of -software. It was also the first Linux distribution that could be -upgraded without requiring reinstallation. - -</para><para> - -Debian continues to be a leader in Linux development. Its development -process is an example of just how well the Open Source development -model can work — even for very complex tasks such as building and -maintaining a complete operating system. - -</para><para> - -The feature that most distinguishes Debian from other Linux -distributions is its package management system. These tools give the -administrator of a Debian system complete control over the packages -installed on that system, including the ability to install a single -package or automatically update the entire operating system. -Individual packages can also be protected from being updated. You can -even tell the package management system about software you have -compiled yourself and what dependencies it fulfills. - -</para><para> - -To protect your system against <quote>Trojan horses</quote> and other malevolent -software, Debian's servers verify that uploaded packages come from -their registered Debian maintainers. Debian packagers also take great -care to configure their packages in a secure manner. When security -problems in shipped packages do appear, fixes are usually available -very quickly. With Debian's simple update options, security fixes can -be downloaded and installed automatically across the Internet. - -</para><para> - -The primary, and best, method of getting support for your &debian; -system and communicating with Debian Developers is through -the many mailing lists maintained by the Debian Project (there are -more than &num-of-debian-maillists; at this writing). The easiest -way to subscribe to one or more of these lists is visit -<ulink url="&url-debian-lists-subscribe;"> -Debian's mailing list subscription page</ulink> and fill out the form -you'll find there. - -</para> - - </sect1> diff --git a/fi/welcome/what-is-debian.xml b/fi/welcome/what-is-debian.xml deleted file mode 100644 index f056452c3..000000000 --- a/fi/welcome/what-is-debian.xml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,112 +0,0 @@ -<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> -<!-- original version: 28672 untranslated --> - - <sect1 id="what-is-debian"> - <title>What is Debian?</title> -<para> - -Debian is an all-volunteer organization dedicated to developing free -software and promoting the ideals of the Free Software Foundation. -The Debian Project began in 1993, when Ian Murdock issued an open -invitation to software developers to contribute to a complete and -coherent software distribution based on the relatively new Linux -kernel. That relatively small band of dedicated enthusiasts, -originally funded by the -<ulink url="&url-fsf-intro;">Free Software Foundation</ulink> -and influenced by the -<ulink url="&url-gnu-intro;">GNU</ulink> -philosophy, has grown over the years into an organization of around -&num-of-debian-developers; <firstterm>Debian Developers</firstterm>. - -</para><para> - -Debian Developers are involved in a variety of activities, including -<ulink url="&url-debian-home;">Web</ulink> -and <ulink url="&url-debian-ftp;">FTP</ulink> -site administration, graphic design, legal analysis of -software licenses, writing documentation, and, of course, maintaining -software packages. - -</para><para> - -In the interest of communicating our philosophy and attracting -developers who believe in the principles that Debian stands for, the -Debian Project has published a number of documents that outline our -values and serve as guides to what it means to be a Debian Developer: - -<itemizedlist> -<listitem><para> - -The -<ulink url="&url-social-contract;">Debian Social Contract</ulink> is -a statement of Debian's commitments to the Free Software Community. -Anyone who agrees to abide to the Social Contract may become a -<ulink url="&url-new-maintainer;">maintainer</ulink>. -Any maintainer can introduce new software into Debian — provided -that the software meets our criteria for being free, and the package -follows our quality standards. - -</para></listitem> -<listitem><para> - -The -<ulink url="&url-dfsg;">Debian Free Software Guidelines</ulink> are a -clear and concise statement of Debian's criteria for free software. -The DFSG is a very influential document in the Free Software Movement, -and was the foundation of the -<ulink url="&url-osd;">The Open Source Definition</ulink>. - -</para></listitem> -<listitem><para> - -The -<ulink url="&url-debian-policy;">Debian Policy Manual</ulink> is an -extensive specification of the Debian Project's standards of quality. - -</para></listitem> -</itemizedlist> -</para><para> - -Debian developers are also involved in a number of other projects; -some specific to Debian, others involving some or all of the Linux -community. Some examples include: - -<itemizedlist> -<listitem><para> - -The -<ulink url="&url-lsb-org;">Linux Standard Base</ulink> -(LSB) is a project aimed at standardizing the basic GNU/Linux system, -which will enable third-party software and hardware developers to -easily design programs and device drivers for Linux-in-general, rather -than for a specific GNU/Linux distribution. - -</para></listitem> -<listitem><para> - -The -<ulink url="&url-fhs-home;">Filesystem Hierarchy Standard</ulink> -(FHS) is an effort to standardize the layout of the Linux -file system. The FHS will allow software developers to concentrate -their efforts on designing programs, without having to worry about how -the package will be installed in different GNU/Linux distributions. - -</para></listitem> -<listitem><para> - -<ulink url="&url-debian-jr;">Debian Jr.</ulink> -is an internal project, aimed at making sure Debian has something to -offer to our youngest users. - -</para></listitem> -</itemizedlist> - -</para><para> - -For more general information about Debian, see the -<ulink url="&url-debian-faq;">Debian FAQ</ulink>. - -</para> - - </sect1> - diff --git a/fi/welcome/what-is-linux.xml b/fi/welcome/what-is-linux.xml deleted file mode 100644 index 723367a7c..000000000 --- a/fi/welcome/what-is-linux.xml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,96 +0,0 @@ -<!-- retain these comments for translator revision tracking --> -<!-- original version: 28672 untranslated --> - - <sect1 id="what-is-linux"> - <title>What is GNU/Linux?</title> -<para> - -Linux is an operating system: a series of programs that let you -interact with your computer and run other programs. - -</para><para> - -An operating system consists of various fundamental programs which are -needed by your computer so that it can communicate and receive -instructions from users; read and write data to hard disks, tapes, and -printers; control the use of memory; and run other software. The most -important part of an operating system is the kernel. In a GNU/Linux -system, Linux is the kernel component. The rest of the system -consists of other programs, many of which were written by or for the -GNU Project. Because the Linux kernel alone does not form a working -operating system, we prefer to use the term <quote>GNU/Linux</quote> -to refer to systems that many people casually refer to as -<quote>Linux</quote>. - -</para><para> - -Linux is modelled on the Unix operating system. From the start, Linux -was designed to be a multi-tasking, multi-user system. These facts are -enough to make Linux different from other well-known operating -systems. However, Linux is even more different than you might -imagine. In contrast to other operating systems, nobody owns -Linux. Much of its development is done by unpaid volunteers. - -</para><para> - -Development of what later became GNU/Linux began in 1984, when the -<ulink url="http://www.gnu.org/">Free Software Foundation</ulink> -began development of a free Unix-like operating system called GNU. - -</para><para> - -The GNU Project has developed a comprehensive set of free software -tools for use with Unix™ and Unix-like operating systems such as -Linux. These tools enable users to perform tasks ranging from the -mundane (such as copying or removing files from the system) to the -arcane (such as writing and compiling programs or doing sophisticated -editing in a variety of document formats). - -</para><para> - -While many groups and individuals have contributed to Linux, the -largest single contributor is still the Free Software Foundation, -which created not only most of the tools used in Linux, but also the -philosophy and the community that made Linux possible. - -</para><para> - -The <ulink url="&url-kernel-org;">Linux kernel</ulink> first -appeared in 1991, when a Finnish computing science student named Linus -Torvalds announced an early version of a replacement kernel for Minix -to the Usenet newsgroup <userinput>comp.os.minix</userinput>. See -Linux International's -<ulink url="&url-linux-history;">Linux History Page</ulink>. - -</para><para> - -Linus Torvalds continues to coordinate the work of several hundred -developers with the help of a few trusty deputies. An excellent -weekly summary of discussions on the -<userinput>linux-kernel</userinput> mailing list is -<ulink url="&url-kernel-traffic;">Kernel Traffic</ulink>. -More information about the <userinput>linux-kernel</userinput> mailing -list can be found on the -<ulink url="&url-linux-kernel-list-faq;">linux-kernel mailing list FAQ</ulink>. - -</para><para> - -Linux users have immense freedom of choice in their software. For -example, Linux users can choose from a dozen different command line -shells and several graphical desktops. This selection is often -bewildering to users of other operating systems, who are not used to -thinking of the command line or desktop as something that they can -change. - -</para><para> - -Linux is also less likely to crash, better able to run more than one -program at the same time, and more secure than many operating -systems. With these advantages, Linux is the fastest growing operating -system in the server market. More recently, Linux has begun to be -popular among home and business users as well. - -</para> - - </sect1> - |